B2P

Volume 1
Community Development
Bridge Builder Manual | 5th Edition

PROJECT DEVELOPMENT VOLUME 1
Contents
Section 1 – Introduction
Section 2 – Prospecting
2.1 Overview 4
2.2 Cross-Cultural Competence 6
2.3 Key Stakeholders 9
2.4 Site Identification 11
2.5 Stakeholder Interest Study 13
2.6 Project Study 15
2.7 Outcomes and Next Steps 18
Section 3 – Social Assessment
3.1 Introduction 19
3.2 Sources 20
3.3 Quality of Information 20
3.4 Documentation 22
3.5 Form Considerations 24
3.6 Social Assessment Packet 28
Section 4 – Technical Assessment
4.1 Introduction 30
4.2 Site Access 31
4.3 Bridge Alignment 31
4.4 Soil and Rock Classifications 34
4.5 Topographic Survey 36
4.6 Additional Structures 44
Section 5 – Project Evaluation and Selection
5.1 Introduction 46
5.2 Social Evaluation 46
5.3 Technical Evaluation 46
5.4 Project Selection 47
Tables
Table 2.1 – Key Stakeholder Roles, Responsibilities, and Contributions 10
Section 4 – Technical Assessment
Table 4.1 – Soil Classification and Foundation Types 35
Table 4.2 – Rock Classification and Foundation Type 35
Figures
Figure 1.1 – Project Development Flowchart 3
Figure 2.1 – Project Prospecting Phases and Tasks 5
Figure 3.1 – Social Assessment Process 19
Figure 3.2 – Population Count Diagram 25
Figure 3.3 – Social Assessment Diagram 28
Figure 3.4 – Social Assessment Form 29
Section 4 - Technical Assessment
Figure 4.1 – Suspended Bridge Elevation View 32
Figure 4.2 – Suspension Bridge Elevation View 32
Figure 4.3 – Hydrologic Considerations: (Left) Meander River, (Right) Confluence of Two Rivers 33
Figure 4.4 – Survey Extents 37
Figure 4.5 – Plan and Profile Sketches 39
Figure 4.6 – Line of Maximum Slope Method and Perpendicular Offset Method 40
Figure 4.7 – Three Parallel Profiles 40
Figure 4.8 – Sample Data 41
Figure 4.9 – Media Log 43
Figure 4.10 – Diagram of Media 43
Figure 4.11 – Section of French Drain System 45
Volume 1: Project Development
Bridges to Prosperity (B2P) works with isolated communities to create access to essential health care, education and economic
opportunities by building footbridges over impassable rivers. This manual exemplifies one of Bridges to Prosperity’s principal strate-
gies: Build to Educate. The Bridge Builder Manual, which is available for free download on the Bridges to Prosperity website, is one
component of a series of materials that B2P has produced. The vision behind the education strategy is that anyone, anywhere in
the world can build a bridge for a community in need using these resources. The Bridge Builder Manual is intended to be sufficiently
detailed, however it is highly recommended to contact B2P staff before endeavoring to build a pedestrian bridge.
Before ground can be broken on a bridge, there is an essential

pre-construction phase of the project that will be referred to as
project development. This stage of the project constitutes every-
thing from identifying partners and a community need to deter-
mining a project’s feasibility and signing agreements with stake-
holders. It is important to understand that customary practices
and best methods may differ from region to region. The informa-
tion provided in Volume 1 – Project Development is a compilation
of best practices gleaned from years of experience of Bridges
to Prosperity staff. It is always recommended to research local
practices before getting started with the development of a project.
There are five sections in Volume 1 – Project Development La Belle Mere, Haiti
▫ Section 1: Introduction
▫ Section 2: Prospecting
▫ Section 3: Social Survey
▫ Section 4: Technical Assessment
▫ Section 5: Evaluation and Selection
Paso Real, Nicaragua
Pignon, Haiti Chaqui Cocha, Bolivia
2 — Bridges to Prosperity —
Bridge Request /
Identification
Needs Assessment
Site
Introduction to Local Government

Stakeholder Interest
Local Government
Project Prospecting
Planning and Commitment

Survey
Initial Contact
with Landowners
Initial Contact
with Community
Initial Site Visit Leaders
Project Study
Section 4
Community Logistics and Social and

Section 3
Meeting of Technical Survey Financial

Stakeholders Survey
Section 2
Technical
Feasibility Study
Section 5 Project Evaluation and Selection

Finalization
Project
Finalize Finalize and Final Design

Landowner Sign Project and Production
Agreement Agreement of Construction
Drawings
Ready to Begin Construction Phase

Figure 1.1 – Project Development Flowchart
2.1 Overview
The major objectives of prospecting are to locate sites; to

initiate positive, cooperative relationships among stake-
holders; and to gather information for project evaluation.
This phase of project development centers on the project
stakeholders—any person with an interest or concern in the
project. Descriptions and roles of major stakeholders are
outlined in Section 2.3 Key Stakeholders. Engaging stake-
holders often results in an intersection of cultures that brings
with it both challenges and opportunities. Mitigating cross-
cultural challenges and realizing the full benefits of work
that is truly collaborative requires significant preparation and
consideration throughout a project. Guidelines for navigating
these cross-cultural experiences are provided in Section 2.2
Cross-Cultural Competence.
The first steps of prospecting are to identify local govern-

ments that administer communities that have an expressed
need for a safe river crossing, and determine the govern-
ment’s interest in pedestrian bridge projects. Common and
effective methods for locating in-need communities, engag-
ing local government, and determining government’s interest
and need for assistance are detailed in 2.4 Site Identification.
Once interested local governments have been identified, an-
other meeting should be held to identify all prospective sites
within a local government’s administration, to prioritize those
sites, and to confirm the government’s commitment to a proj-
ect. After possible sites have been identified, they should be
visited to determine basic feasibility. Potential obstacles that Bolivia
should be investigated are the community’s interest in com-
pleting a project, the landowners’ reception to having a bridge on their property, and the topography of the proposed site.
The time of year that the site is accessible and community members are available to work should be noted for scheduling
purposes. Additional details regarding how to determine the fundamental viability of a proposed build and what information
to gather while doing so are included in 2.5 Stakeholder Interest Study.
Following positive results from a stakeholder interest study, a community meeting involving all key stakeholders should be
organized. The goals for this meeting are to explain the bridge building process, set accurate expectations for the prospective
build, outline the required community contributions, and gauge the community’s capacity to complete the project. Both the
Social and Financial Survey and the Logistics and Technical Survey must also be completed as part of the project study.
The Logistics and Technical Survey makes it possible to determine if a site is feasible or not, and develop a preliminary
design with a preliminary materials budget. Guidelines for successfully engaging stakeholders and completing both surveys
are detailed in 2.6 Project Study. After a completing the project study, a proposed build enters the project evaluation and
selection phase, where all prospective projects are compared to determine which projects should be prioritized, based on
feasibility and potential for social impact.
Bridge Request /
Identification
Needs Assessment
2.4 Site
Local Government
2.2 Key Stakeholders

Project Prospecting
Planning and Commitment

Interest Survey
2.5 Stakeholder
2.3 Cultural Competence

Initial Contact
with Landowners
Initial Contact
with Community
Initial Site Visit Leaders
2.6 Project Study
Section 4
Community Logistics and Social and

Section 3
Meeting of Technical Survey Financial

Stakeholders Survey
Section 2
Technical
Feasibility Study
Section 5 Project Evaluation and Selection
Figure 2.1 – Project Prospecting Phases and Tasks
Within this section, the project prospecting process is presented as three discreet phases. Each of those phases includes
several activities. The relationships among between activities are shown in the flowchart presented in Figure V1-1.1. The
three phases are presented to provide structure to the many steps that go into developing a project. They do not have to
be followed exactly; with experience or in the case of unique challenges you may choose to deviate from the presented
order. However, when deviating from the presented order, it is important to understand the intent of each step, and carefully
consider how shifting the order may affect the success of a proposed project.
2.2 Cross-Cultural Competence
In the context of a construction project, it is not uncommon

for the timely completion of the structure to be central to proj-
ect strategy. However, the ultimate goal of each new bridge
project is to improve social outcomes related to community
health, education, and economies, in addition to building ca-
pacity for the local government and community. It is impor-
tant not to be so focused on the structure that this broader
purpose—supporting a community in their efforts to improve
their infrastructure—is lost. In other words, a key element of
each bridge project is facilitating experiences that prepare
both local entities to successfully complete projects in the
future. Maintaining positive and constructive experiences,
relationships, and interactions when engaging local com- Gasura, Rwanda
munity members, from passers-by to volunteer laborers to
government officials, significantly contributes to local capac-
ity building and will likely result in practical benefits through-
out the construction process. Cross-cultural competence is
critical to facilitating positive experiences because cultural
differences will be nearly always be a factor in collaborative
projects. Cultural differences can be fun, exciting, and moti-
vating for all parties. However, at times they can be inhibitive,
dangerous, or frustrating if not properly understood. Cultural
competence is the skill set that helps to maximize the posi-
tive effects of cultural differences and lessen the negative
effects. Guidance on how to develop cultural competence
and B2P specific insight is provided in the following sections.
Cross-Cultural Competence Defined Jocote Arriba, Nicaragua

Cross-cultural competence is the ability to effectively work
with individuals from a variety of cultures to efficiently
achieve a project’s outcomes. It takes a combination of sev-
eral knowledge areas to develop cross-cultural competence.
First, an individual must acquire knowledge about both their
own cultural assumptions and the background of the culture
with which they are interacting. As cultural knowledge is ac-
quired, awareness of when cultural differences are at play
must be developed. Once these moments can be identified,
one should strive to objectively interpret intentions of all par-
ties and determine what effect the differences are having on
an interaction. The final step to cross-cultural competence
is being able to navigate, manage, and reconcile cultural
differences to maximize efficiency and outcomes of a proj- Rwamawha, Rwanda
ect. Cross-cultural competence relies on the combination of
background knowledge, awareness of cultural differences, a thoughtful and neutral attitude toward those differences, and a
proactive approach to reducing negative effects of cultural differences.
Foundation of Culture
Culture is built upon a society’s shared values and shared experiences. As a result of differing values and customs,
behaviors that are considered virtuous or kind in one culture may not be in another. For this reason it is important to be
perceptive of how one’s behavior is received, and come to the project with at least a basic knowledge of local culture,
language, sociopolitical history, and economics. Understanding community, regional, and national histories will improve
one’s understanding cultural norms and values. Awareness of one’s own cultural assumptions is equally important. As this is
a challenging skill to develop, seeking outside resources that focus on this specific type of self-awareness is recommended.
Recognizing that differences exist and making an effort to understand the underlying drivers of each culture will help to ease
differences and increase cross-cultural team success.
Cultural Resources for Participants

Because B2P operates in many vastly different cultures, no culture-specific guidance is provided in this manual. However,
there are a variety of resources that one can consult in advance of travel. Many organizations produce both general and
country specific cross-cultural training manuals and guides that are free to access. Examples include Peace Corps’s Culture
Matters publication and the Peace Corps Welcome series. Once at location, local B2P staff, local government officials, or
partnering organization staff typically will be happy to provide education on local customs. When approaching any of these
individuals, one should be forthright regarding one’s level of cultural understanding and desire for growth. Finally, it is
important be conscious of how others respond to one’s actions. When mistakes are made, it can be helpful to recognize and
apologize for the mistake, and turn it into a learning experience by enquiring about the correct behavior. As with all aspects
of cross-cultural experiences, putting forth effort and demonstrating genuine interest in the community will go a long way
toward developing strong relationships.
Business Etiquette
Aspects of business etiquette such as punctuality, the commitment level of different types of agreements, and approach to
schedules varies widely culture to culture. It is important to develop a strong partnership with stakeholders, and set expecta-
tions for the type, quantity, and length of interactions required to build a strong working rapport. Research business etiquette
before traveling and use the previously noted resources to determine proper behavior and expectations.
On the Project Site

Be mindful of the project site’s social dynamics. In each country, roles and relationships between those roles may differ.
For instance, in a country where unskilled laborers earn wages, laborers may be less welcoming to an outside volunteer,
as volunteer labor could be perceived as a threat to potential income. Meanwhile, in countries where unskilled labor is
volunteered, jumping in with workers carrying materials or mixing concrete would be both amiable and uplifting to the project
site’s atmosphere. Appropriate project site action is situation- and culture-specific. As such it is beyond the scope of this
manual to set out prescriptive guidelines. It is good practice to speak with a local builder or the construction site foreman
regarding project site dynamics before arriving on site. A good practice once on site is to observe project site interactions
and dynamics before taking action. To learn about socially acceptable behavior prior to travel, consult one of the resources
listed above in Cultural Resources for Foreign Participants.
Making the Most of Cultural Experiences

Whenever possible, take advantage of opportunities to embrace local culture. These opportunities can be enriching for
all project participants, and help to build strong relationships. One such example is learning the local language. As little
as a few days of lessons in country or a couple of weeks of studying before arrival will make it possible to connect with
community members on a basic level through greetings, expressing gratitude, and complimenting a fellow participant’s
work. Even basic verbal expressions demonstrate interest a community’s culture and sincere efforts to close the cultural
gap.
Cultural versus Personal

Just as personality differences can prove to be challenging when working on a culturally homogenous team, personality
differences present challenges in multicultural teams. Correctly attributing characteristics and values to either personality or
culture is a key component of cross-cultural competence, particularly when determining which means of resolving a conflict
between team members will be most successful. Cultural knowledge, awareness, and sensitivity all contribute to awareness
of this distinction, and one’s ability to act accordingly.
Conclusion
Both project efficiency and local capacity building depend on fostering a positive and constructive team of stakeholders
and workers. All aspects of cross-cultural competence, from education to awareness to a neutral stance toward cultural
differences, are important to building solid relationships with stakeholders and developing a strong project team. Another
important part of cross-cultural competence is using the available resources to continuously become more familiar with a
community’s culture. Following these general guidelines for developing cultural competence, and proactively addressing
cultural differences within the project team, will increase the likelihood that each new bridge project is successful.
2.3 Key Stakeholders
Engaging all stakeholders and building constructive rela-

tionships between them is a key objective of the prospect-
ing process—and project development on the whole. Each
stakeholder’s role in the project is briefly described below as
a precursor to the detailed explanation of prospecting that
follows.
Community and Bridge Committee

The local community members are the principal benefi-
ciaries of a bridge project. They are also key participants
throughout the project and after completion. The community
builds the bridge, owns the bridge, and ultimately maintains
the bridge. To ensure a successful project, the community Pignon, Haiti
should be supported by the local government and guided
by B2P’s experience and expertise. A group of community
leaders should form a Bridge Committee to represent and
organize the community’s efforts throughout the project. For
a detailed Bridge Committee description see Section 2.6
Community Meeting.
Bridges to Prosperity
B2P’s primary activities in a project are facilitation, engineer-
ing services, construction management, quality control, and
provision of materials otherwise not available (e.g. cables).
Whenever possible, B2P partners with local government
staff in these activities, to help build local government ca-
pacity. Chaqui Cocha, Bolivia
Government
Local government is often the primary partner for projects. It is B2P’s view that government is ultimately responsible for
providing needed infrastructure to its people. To support that relationship, B2P requires strong government support for
each project, and works with governments to determine which communities have the greatest need. While government
involvement often occurs at the local level, projects may also garner support of regional or national governments. At a
minimum, local government must approve the project, support the community in obtaining the right to build on the land, and
support the community in completing the project legally with the appropriate paperwork for project/construction approval
and land rights. Local government often provides considerably more support, which may include: materials, material
transport, heavy machinery, skilled labor, and community engagement. As local government almost always provides partial
funding, it is critical to understand the government’s funding and budgeting cycles and how those cycles affect project
planning, scheduling, and finances. Typically, the mayor or a municipal council is responsible for approving the project and
any additional support. Local government officials who may be directly involved in a project include municipal engineers,
community outreach staff, and finance officials. These officials generally are experienced with community-centered
development work and can be valuable resources in a variety of areas including: local community knowledge, community
organizing, and construction resources.
Partner Organization/S
When a non-governmental organization (NGO) is established in a community, it is often advantageous to partner with that
organization to leverage their expertise and experience with the community to the project’s benefit. It is important to investigate
and understand the relationship between local government and any potential partnering organization before engaging the
organization to ensure a positive, cooperative project team. Partner organizations can take on any combination of roles
and responsibilities. Typical roles for partner organizations including confirming community need, mobilizing the community
and organizing community workdays, stocking materials, contributing or raising project funds, and project monitoring and
evaluation. Partner organizations may be involved from a project’s inception or may be brought in at any point afterward.
Due to the varied nature of partner organization roles, no specific process for engaging them is outlined herein. In the case
that an organization partners to fund a project, it is critical to understand the organization’s funding and budgeting cycles,
and how those cycles may affect project planning, scheduling, and finances. When a specific role and set of responsibilities
is agreed upon, that understanding should be formalized in a written agreement. When an organization partners for multiple
projects, consider establishing a programmatic partnership established through a separate agreement outside of the project
agreement. As a rule of thumb, keep every partner organization well informed and engaged throughout each phase of the
project development process.
Table 2.1 – Key Stakeholder Roles, Responsibilities, and Contributions

Local Government
Role Responsibilities Contribution
Lead project and support • Purchase of materials not available for collection • Skilled labor
community • Transportation of materials • Purchased sand
• Heavy machinery work • Purchased gravel
• Legal support • Purchased stone
• Purchased timber
• Cement
• Reinforcing steel
• Fencing
Community and Bridge Committee
Build and maintain bridge • Organization of work groups • Unskilled labor
• Resolution of communiy related issues • Collected sand
• Organize community contributions • Collected gravel
• Collection of local materials • Collected stone
• Site Prep • Collected timber
• Material Storage
• Accomodation & food for any B2P staff on site
B2P or Other Qualified Partner
Facilitate and supervise project • Engineering services/bridge design • Construction drawings
• Construction supervision • Experienced construction supervisors
• Acquisition of materials not available in country • Cables and clamps
• Steel towers (if applicable)
• Steel crossbeams (if applicable)
Partner Organization
Support community in Any of the responsibilities of the other three Any of the contributions from other three
implementation of bridge key stakeholders as agreed upon by all key key stakeholders dependent upon the
project stakeholders and based on organization’s agreed responsibilities
experience and strengths
2.4 Site Identification
Every project begins with the identification of potential sites. There are two primary methods for identifying in-need commu-
nities: (1) direct requests and (2) needs assessments. Both methods have strengths and weaknesses. Recommendations
and requests from NGOs and communities can counter power inequalities perpetuated by politics and are more likely to
reach marginalized communities. Needs assessments work within larger plans to create widespread impact and improve
connectedness as part of regional and national transportation networks. Once potential sites have been identified, local
government should be contacted to determine their interest, capacity, and priorities
Requests
Three entities that commonly provide knowledge of specific communities and sites are in-country NGOs, local government,
and community members. After receiving a request, the next step is to meet with the local government to learn more about
local government plans, to gather information about the community in need, and to start building a partnership.
Needs Assessments
Needs assessments are conducted to identify a number of potential bridge sites within a country or region, with input from
all levels of government. It is best to start by meeting with national government entities to learn about plans for rural feeder
roads and any national initiatives for rural pedestrian infrastructure. Following that, work with regional government entities
to learn of regional road plans and priorities. Finally, meet with local governments to discuss local needs and priorities.
Local governments are a good resource for locating in-need communities, and will likely know of communities that have
requested a bridge within their region of governance as well as the degree of need in particular communities. A successful
needs assessment will produce a list of many possible bridge sites, and will initiate relationships with local governments.

Objectives
A relationship with local government and an understanding of local government’s vision for improving its walking infrastruc-
ture should be developed after receiving a request or completing national and regional levels of a needs assessment. A
meeting should be arranged with the primary purpose of introducing local government officials to B2P, learning about the
government’s current needs and plans, and proposing the idea of an ongoing partnership. A brief outline of topics to be
covered and information to be gathered has been provided. If concerned about how to best approach local government
officials for the first time, seek out advice from local staff or partnering organizations that are more familiar with regional
customs. When introducing B2P’s projects and services it is helpful to have letters of endorsement, photos, and evidence of
impact from past projects. A brochure may be a convenient way to present past project information and contact information
in a form that’s easily left with government officials. Explain that if there is interest in pursuing a project, another meeting will
be held to outline the potential partnership and projects. Additionally, explain that a formal commitment to the project will be
required, because project development consumes significant resources. Often this commitment is in the form of a signed
letter of intent. If using a letter of intent, consider leaving a blank copy with officials so that they can familiarize themselves
with the document before the next meeting. It is important to focus on the possibility of an ongoing partnership rather than
focusing on individual projects. Before a government commitment is made, be certain to maintain a hypothetical tone of
discourse that conveys that nothing is being promised or committed to by B2P.
Outline for Local Government Engagement

• Briefly introduce organization
▫ organization mission, general approach, and impact
▫ past projects
▫ current projects and services
• Gather information about local government’s existing vision
▫ What is the area’s overall need for pedestrian bridges?
▫ What is current plan for addressing these needs?
▫ What are the government’s priorities and capacity to complete projects?
▫ In what capacity would the local government be interested in working with B2P?
▫ What do government officials foresee for an ongoing partnership?
• Set expectations for future involvement and next contact
▫ outline ongoing partnership
▫ prioritize projects
▫ detailed discussion of project approach
▫ a formal commitment to the project
Benefits of Engaging Government Early

Generally, local governments are more receptive to partnering when they are involved from the beginning, rather than being
contacted late in project planning or construction, when financial support is needed. Moreover, early engagement provides
the opportunity for governments to be involved in planning of the project and ultimately take ownership of the project. It
also provides an opportunity to plan more than one project within the fiscal year or in future years. An additional benefit of
speaking with local government first is avoiding wasting resources if the government is not going to support the project.
Concerns Regarding Political Motivations

Some development organizations are wary of working closely with elected officials due to the possible influence of political
motives. B2P operates as a facilitator within existing social and governmental structures. Thus, the local government is a
critical part of the collaborative team that makes projects successful. It is important to set a clear understanding from the
beginning that resources must be allocated to areas of greatest need. The best course of action for avoiding the effects
of less than altruistic motives is to independently perform social assessments for proposed bridge sites and to take time
during those assessments to hear from multiple individuals about the community’s need. Community engagement in initial
meetings and site visits is often a good indicator of a community’s relative need and capacity.
Conclusion
At this point, local governments have been identified, whether through direct requests or needs assessments. Conversations
in introductory meetings have demonstrated which local governments have interest in ongoing partnerships to build bridges.
This completes the site identification phase and leads to the stakeholder interest phase, during which basic stakeholder
interest is measured.
2.5 Stakeholder Interest Study
The stakeholder interest study is designed to take an initial measure of key stakeholders’ interest in the project, check on
basic feasibility, and identify potential obstacles. During this phase, projects will be prioritized for study, landowners will be
contacted, community leaders will be contacted, and the site will be visited.
Government Planning, Prioritizing, and Commitment

Preparation
Be aware when planning meetings that the budgeting cycle of local governments can significantly affect officials’ ability to
commit to a project. It is best practice to meet with local governments before submission of their budgets for the next fiscal
year. Government services often function differently from one country to another, and it is important to involve all parties
that may have an interest in the project. There may be interested government organizations and officials that do not work
directly together. Ensure that communication is flowing to each and that all have been invited to attend relevant meetings. It
is especially important to know of any government organizations that do similar work in the area to avoid conflicting plans.
Objectives
After providing government officials time to consider the opportunity of partnering with B2P, all topics from the introduction
discussion should be covered in greater detail, and a formal commitment to the partnership must be obtained. Expectations
for an ongoing partnership should be discussed in detail and agreed upon by both parties. It is important to not overpromise
while setting expectations for the partnership as sites have not been visited and may not be feasible. After a partnership
has been agreed upon, create a prioritized list of all potential projects in the area. When prioritizing this list it is important to
emphasize that priority should be based on greatest need. It may be helpful to pay a quick visit to each site after the meet-
ing for a quick visual check of relative need. Additionally, at least two of the top proposed sites should be carried through
to the end of the stakeholder interest survey as a check against potential political motivations. Next, the stakeholder re-
sponsibilities and standard project development process should be discussed in detail so that government officials are fully
informed before committing to support a project. Following that, request a formal commitment of support (whether verbal or
as a letter of intent) as a demonstration of good faith to follow through with support for a project if B2P invests resources in
studying the project. Explain that further resources will not be allocated to prospective projects until a commitment has been
received. Moreover, it is important to maintain a tone of discourse that conveys the preliminary nature of the meeting. B2P
is not committing to building a bridge project at this point. Rather, the commitment is to study the project if all stakeholders
are interested. A basic outline of meeting topics has been provided below.
Outline for Stakeholder Interest Survey

• Introduction and review of discussion from introductory meeting
• Discuss and plan terms of ongoing partnership
• Prioritize potential sites in the area
• Discuss project approach and stakeholder contributions in detail
▫ Stakeholders and responsibilities
▫ Project process
• Ask for commitment of support should site be selected
Preliminary Site Visit

If the local government is interested in and supportive of a project, a site visit should be conducted to check on the basic
viability of the site. It is best practice to invite government officials to come along for the site visit. This helps to communicate
that the bridge will be a shared project, and encourages a sense of ownership. In the case that the original crossing is not
suitable, the officials may know of alternative crossings locations. If a government social worker may be involved in the
project, it is recommended to invite them along as well. They likely will bring knowledge of and relationships with community
members, community leaders, and landowners. The purpose of the preliminary site visit is to verify that the site is generally
feasible, so as to avoid completing a significant portion of the project development process for a location where a bridge
cannot be built. This site visit also provides an opportunity to assess access to the site and determine time of the year
that construction could take place. The site visit is important both for efficient use of resources and for maintaining good
community relations.
Initial Contact with Landowners

Before going to the proposed site, speak with all landowners to verify that they are receptive to having a bridge on their
property, and to ask for permission to enter their property. To avoid a conflict, only accept permission from the landowner
directly even if others insist that the landowner will not mind if you enter their property. It is helpful to have photos of past
projects, so that you can clearly show the landowner the type of structure that would be on their property and the amount of
their land that would be affected. You do not need to go into detail about the land ownership agreement. Simply ensure that
the landowner is not opposed to the general idea. The land ownership agreement must be sorted out between the property
owner, the community, and the municipality and can happen after a site has been determined to be feasible. If a landowner
is adamantly opposed to having a bridge on their property, the site visit party should look along the river for alternative cross-
ings points. If the community and government are set on that location, the government, community, and landowner must
legally resolve the dispute amongst themselves. B2P does not purchase land or participate in negotiations for land. In the
case that the property owner is receptive and grants permission to access, the site should be visited.
Basic Feasibility Assessment

It is important to receive permission to enter any property directly from the landowner. The primary objective of the visit is to
make sure that the topography is reasonably suitable for a bridge. Additionally, note the condition of the road to the project
and any potential access challenges. Can materials be transported to the site? Determine what time of the year the site
is accessible. Will the road material (dirt/clay/gravel) allow access and material transport during the rainy season? If the
proposed site is clearly not suitable for a bridge, the site visit party can look along the river for alternative crossings. If the
topography appears generally feasible and the landowners are receptive, the preliminary site visit has been completed and
initial contact with community leaders can be made.
Initial Contact with Community Leaders

Community leaders should be contacted to roughly gauge the community’s interest, willingness, ability, and availability to
complete a project. At this preliminary stage of the project contact should be limited to a small group community leaders.
Additionally, it is of utmost importance to make clear that the project is only being studied, and to make no promises of a
bridge.
Conclusion
If all key stakeholders have been contacted, positive results have been received, and the local government has formally
committed support, the project is ready to transition from the stakeholder interest study to the more detailed project study.
2.6 Project Study
The project study is designed to gather in depth information about the project that will allow for an informed evaluation and
selection process. The project study phase does not begin until positive results have been received from the stakeholder
interest study so that projects that enter the project study phase have a greater likelihood of being actualized, which is
beneficial both to community relations and to project development efficiency. The project study gathers a multitude of in-
formation ranging from expected impact, community interest, the community’s contribution, technical characteristics of the
site, and logistics characteristics of the project. After the logistics and technical survey is completed, a technical feasibility
study must be completed. After the initial community meeting, the social and financial survey, the logistics and technical
survey, and technical feasibility study have all been completed the project study is complete and a project is ready to enter
evaluation and selection.
Initial Community Meeting of Key Stakeholders

The initial community meeting is the first time that an en-
tire community is directly engaged by the project organizer
and that all stakeholders officially meet together. During this
meeting, the community’s need for the bridge should be rec-
ognized, the general project procedure should be explained,
the responsibility of the community should be discussed
in detail, and the bridge committee should be formed. The
initial community meeting is also typically the best time to
complete the social and financial assessment. Timing may
allow for completion of the logistics and technical survey on
the same day, but it is not uncommon to need another day.
Be sure to allow enough time to properly conduct the topo- Butare, Rwanda
graphic survey and gather high-quality accurate information.
A full community meeting should be held only if the stakeholder interest study yielded favorable results. In the case that the
site’s feasibility is uncertain or that the site has been visited in the past without a project being pursued, consider consulting
only a few community leaders rather than the entire community. The entire community can be engaged once the prospect
of a project is more certain.
Preparation
Before holding a community meeting, the project organizer should have a commitment of support from the local government
and know that the site is generally feasible. Generally, local government officials will assist or lead in setting up the meeting.
Having the support of the local government often will increase the project organizer’s credibility. Be sure that the meeting
will occur at a time that provides for maximum community attendance. That is to say, avoid scheduling the meeting during
market or during the most common time for community members to be away at work. In cases where multiple communities
will benefit from the bridge, include members from each community. This will establish participation by both communities
and help to avoid a situation where one community benefits from another’s work to build a bridge.
The following parties should be invited to attend the meeting:

• Community members including all community leaders from any effected communities
• Landowners
• Local government officials
• Partnering organizations
Topics to cover
The following is an outline of material that should be covered during the initial Condensed Outline
community meeting. The outline is not exhaustive, but should be used as a • Introduction
basic checklist that can be expanded and modified as a project organizer gains • Scope
experience and insight. Additionally, since the project organizer often does not • B2P Background and Approach
lead the meeting, this outline covers topics that the project organizer should ▫ Approach to Projects
address and is not an outline for the entire meeting. ▫ Project Details
▫ Stakeholder Roles and
Introduction Responsibilities
Typically local government officials will lead the meeting and cover introduc- • Community Responsibilities
tions. When given the floor to speak, acknowledge and thank government ▫ Labor
officials and community leaders who have helped in developing the project, ▫ Materials
recognize the hazards that the current crossing presents, and the community’s ▫ Staff Support
need for a safe crossing. Addressing the community’s need is important for ▫ Guest Participants
connecting with the community and highlighting the underlying purpose of the ▫ Bridge Maintenance
meeting before diving into business matters. • Bridge Committee
▫ Composition
Scope ▫ Responsibilities
It is important to establish a clear understanding among all community mem- • Community Discussion
bers and local government officials that the bridge project is in a study phase. • Conclusion
The purpose of the meeting is to familiarize the community with B2P’s ap-
proach, to gauge the community’s interest, and to gather information about the community. Ensuring this understanding is
important for maintaining positive community relations in the case that a project cannot be completed. It is of the utmost
importance to use a vocabulary and tone that keep questions hypothetical throughout the meeting.
B2P Background
Provide meeting attendees a brief introduction to B2P by explaining what B2P does and how it approaches its projects. Also
include a brief history of B2P and previous work in the region to establish credibility. If projects have been completed with
other communities in the region, consider bringing endorsement letters from those communities’ leaders to build credibility.
Introduce the community to the preliminary plan for the project including crossing location, the approximate size of the
structure, and how community members will access the bridge. Photos of past projects can be quite helpful in communicating
the essence of the project to community members.
Provide a brief description of each stakeholder and their role in completing a successful project. For example, the community
builds and maintains the bridge; the local government helps to supply materials and other services; and B2P provides
materials not available in country, as well as construction oversight and quality control. If the prospective superintendent
is available, introduce them and highlight their experience. This helps develop a rapport between the community and the
superintendent. An important message to emphasize here is that the community will be building their own bridge.
Community Responsibilities
When speaking with communities about their contribution,
it is very importance to ask specific questions regarding
timelines, quantities, and individual responsibility. As a
community, it is easy to say yes to a series of questions
without thinking through individual responsibility. To help the
community start planning and to get a more accurate picture
of the community’s capacity ask detailed questions about
the community’s contribution.
Bolivia
Set the clear expectation that to complete a bridge, the community will need to be able to supply X number of workers for
X days a week for X months. Have approximate numbers prepared.
Inform the community that as much of the material as possible will be sourced locally and that they will be responsible for
gathering and transporting that material. Then enquire about local availability of specific materials—rock, gravel, sand, and
hardwood. For any materials not locally available, ask where they can be obtained. Prepare and bring an order of magnitude
estimated for the summary of quantities to give community members a general idea of scale. Since unit volumes may be
difficult to understand, describe quantities visually. For instance, one could say, “We will need to collect enough stone to
fill that house four times.” Explain that the estimate is very rough and will be narrowed down once a technical assessment
has been conducted.
Notify the community that B2P staff on site will need the community’s support. Enquire about the availability of provisions
(e.g. housing, meals, potable water, electricity, cell service, etc.). Describe all non-community members who may be on site
during the project and any community support that will be required.
Explain that the communities are responsible for funding and conducting all maintenance on the bridge after construction
is completed. See Section 5 for maintenance details in the agreement with the community and Volume 2/3 Chapter 4 for
more specifics on maintenance practices.
Bridge Committee
Inform the community that they will need to form a bridge committee in order to proceed with a project, and describe the
roles and responsibilities as well as the general make up of a bridge committee. In many cultures, the bridge committee is a
foreign idea. For this reason and to increase the chance of strong project leadership, consider consulting outside resources
on forming and facilitating grassroots community leadership.
The bridge committee is typically composed of four to seven community leaders. It is important to have a diverse group of
leaders, such as elders and members of different social groups, because the committee must organize community labor. If
multiple communities will benefit from a project, split the committee seats proportionately between all involved communities.
Often it is convenient to have the same number of committee members as days of the week that the community will be
workings so that each committee member has the responsibility of finding a work group once per week. Include women on
the committee when possible. The combination of both male and female cultural roles often increases the efficacy of the
committee. Be cognizant of the fact that including women on the committee in a patriarchal society may cause conflict as
it opposes social norms.
The bridge committee is responsible for organizing the community’s contribution and resolving any community related
matters that arise during a project. Specifically, they are charged with organizing labor during construction, must address any
land ownership issues, and have the ongoing responsibility of monitoring the bridge and organizing community members to
implement appropriate maintenance practices.
Community Discussion
It is not uncommon for opinions and feelings toward the prospective project to vary amongst community members. Both
supportive and oppositional opinions can contain valuable information about the project. A few key questions that can help
to build an understanding of the overall community’s attitude toward a prospective project are: Why do individuals want or
not want the bridge? Where do individuals want or not want the bridge? Why may individuals want or not want to work on
the bridge? Gathering this information early in the project development process may allow for adjustments that improve how
the bridge will serve the entire community and that increase overall community engagement and buy-in.
Conclusion
Inform the community members and local government officials what actions will be taken next if their site is selected for a
project, provide a rough time line, and explain that timing can be highly variable. Additionally, notify all stakeholders that an
agreement will need to be signed if the site is selected. To conclude the meeting, it is best to circle back to the community’s
need for the crossing to bring the focus away from business and back to the needs of the community. Also, reinforce the
understanding that the project is only being studied at this point.
Social and Financial Survey

It is convenient to use the initial community meeting as an opportunity to learn more about the community and gather
information for the social survey. Community members, government officials, and partnering organizations all may have a
unique perspective on social assessment questions. Thus, it is advantageous to gather information at the meeting when
all perspectives are represented. See Section 3 - Social Survey for more details on how to properly conduct a Social and
Financial Assessment.
Logistics and Technical Survey

The day of the initial community meeting and/or an adjacent day can be an opportune time to perform the full Logistics and
Technical Survey since staff already will be out on site. It is critical that the topographic survey capture accurate and detail
information. Thus, when allocating time for a technical assessment account for physical challenges (e.g. clearing heavily
forested areas or surveying multiple centerlines) to avoid rushing the survey. Also, be sure to have permission from any
landowners to be on their property before starting to survey. See Section 4 - Technical Assessment for more details on
how to conduct a proper Logistics and Technical Survey.
Technical Feasibility
After completion of the Logistics and Technical Survey, technical feasibility must be determined for a proposed project in
accordance with either suspended or suspension bridge design guidelines, respectively Volume 2 Chapter 1 and Volume
3 Chapter 1. Typically, a preliminary design is produced in conjunction with the technical feasibility study. The preliminary
design provides sufficient detail to produce accurate material estimates, project budgets, and plans to show stakeholders.
Conclusion
Accurate and detailed collection of information from the initial community meeting, the Social and Financial Survey, the
Logistics and Technical Survey, and technical feasibility study is critically important. Once all of those steps have been
completed the project study is finished. The project then enters the evaluation and selection phase. Information from each
of the project study activities is critical to making an informed selection between similar proposed projects.
2.7 Outcomes and Next Steps
After the community meeting, one should have a basic understanding of the community and local government’s interest
in a bridge, all stakeholders’ capacity to contribute to the project, a complete Social and Financial Survey, and a complete
Logistics and Technical Survey. This completes all of the pieces that are needed to evaluate the suitability of a bridge site.
See section 3 or section 4 for detailed procedures for social and technical assessments respectively. Otherwise see section
5 for procedures for evaluating project sites.
Section 3 – Social Survey
3.1 Introduction
The social survey collects both qualitative and quantitative in-

formation regarding the community, access blockage, and lo-
cal investment. The qualitative information is used to capture
a community’s story, which is critical to spreading knowledge of
Surveyor - the need and impact of rural infrastructure. The quantitative data
facilitates discussion provides a uniform metric for comparing and selecting projects.
and provides questions Accurate, descriptive data is critical to all purposes of the social
survey. Reliable sources that represent multiple perspectives
from within the community improve the accuracy of information
collected (see 3.2 Sources). For this reason, the initial commu-
nity meeting is often an ideal time to collect social survey data.
Community Community To gather high quality information, one must prepare to ask fol-
Leaders Members low up questions and to prevent response influence (see 3.3
Quality of Information). Gathering descriptive data that cap-
tures the scale and details of access impediments enables B2P
Discussion / Story Telling staff to make informed choices between sites with similar lack
of access and to produce more detailed and compelling stories
and recording
Local Local Health

Note taking
about the communities that it serves (see 3.4 Documentation).

Government and Education B2P uses a multifaceted approach for gathering social informa-
Officials Professionals tion about prospective projects. Each social survey contains a
social narrative, a questionnaire the provides a uniform baseline
for selection between projects, and an access diagram illustrat-
ing important elements of the community narrative. It is sug-
gested that the survey start with a facilitated discussion to cap-
Social Survey ture the community’s narrative after which any yet uncollected
information can be gathered for the questionnaire (see 3.5 Form
Figure 3.1 – Social Survey Process Considerations and 3.6 Example Survey). In order to get the
greatest value out of the social survey it must be completed with
close attention to the details outlined herein.
3.2 Sources
Diverse Sources
The first step toward collecting accurate, representative information is choosing knowledgeable sources with varied
perspectives. Six valuable sources are community leaders, local government officials, community members, local health
professionals, local education professionals, and local builders. Each source has a deep familiarity with the community but
from different points of view. Community leaders often have the most intimate knowledge of the community. However, it
may be difficult for them to produce quantitative data. On the other hand, local government officials may be able to produce
census data for the community. They also may understand how the community is connected to the rest of the municipality
and how a bridge would impact surrounding communities. Community members will have a large volume of input, and
health and education professionals can provide an informed voice on two major access outcomes of most bridge projects.
Local builders may be able to provide information about local materials and building practices. Due to the attendance of key
stakeholders with varied perspectives and the accessibility of general community input, the initial community meeting is an
ideal time to complete the social survey.
Communication
Advanced communication with all desired sources before the survey can greatly increase the likelihood of receiving input
from all desired sources. This is especially true for health professionals, who may only come to the community once a week,
and education professionals, who may not be in the community for months at a time. Communicating with each key source
before performing the survey is another important step toward ensuring broad input on the survey.
Survey Approach
Since varied opinions surely will exist among this wide group of stakeholders, the community meeting provides an opportunity
to debate and build consensus around responses. An additional benefit of completing the social survey at the community
meeting is efficiency resulting from all key stakeholders being interviewed simultaneously. Contacting stakeholders
separately is an acceptable alternative. This will likely require more resources, but may provide benefits that a group survey
does not, such as providing stakeholders response privacy, which may lead to more truthful responses. Any approach that
effectively engages all stakeholders to capture representative social information is acceptable. Engaging a broad range of
sources does not ensure accurate or representative information about a community. However, it is an important first step
toward developing a true understanding of the community’s need, interest, and capacity. See 3.3 Quality of Information
for more considerations about avoiding error in gathering information.
3.3 Quality of Information
Interviewing a broad group of stakeholders for the social assessment is an important step toward gathering representative
and accurate information. There are many complex dynamics that can influence the quality of information being received
from sources. Four common dynamics that influence source responses are (1) the surveyor’s linguistic skills can affect
understanding of questions and responses, (2) the surveyor’s knowledge of a community and its culture can influence how
responses are interpreted, (3) social dynamics between sources and stakeholders can influence what information is being
shared with interviewers, and (4) stakeholder’s desire to complete a bridge project may influence the response they pro-
vide the surveyor. A key step toward obtaining accurate information is being aware of influence from the above-mentioned
dynamics and actively taking measures to reduce their influence on responses. Another important step is to check the infor-
mation gathered during the survey against the surveyor’s own experiences and knowledge of the community. Below each
of the common sources of error are touched on in greater detail with some suggestions about mitigating the opportunity for
error.
Surveyor Preparation
The surveyor can reduce the impact of unfamiliarity with the community through preparation. To procure the most detailed
and accurate information, each topic on the social survey form should be researched beforehand. This will increase the
surveyor’s ability to ask follow-up questions, which provides two major benefits. First, deeper exploration will produce more
nuanced information, which helps to create a clearer picture of a community’s need. Secondly, follow-up questions will help
to reveal misunderstandings that could lead to erroneous information. If the surveyor interviews sources in a language
they don’t speak fluently, language related misunderstandings might affect the social survey results. Prepare to ask each
question in multiple ways to avoid error due to misunderstandings and to avoid over-explanation of questions, which may
affect source responses. Gaining knowledge of local services, economies, agricultural schedules, and day-to-day life and
preparing language skills for the discussion will help you to complete a thorough and reliable social survey.
Social Dynamics
The method of speaking with sources, whether publicly in a group or individually in private, may influence the responses
received. A major benefit of conducting the social survey at the community meeting is the presence of many opinions and
perspectives. However, social dynamics may cause some opinions and viewpoints not to be expressed. As the surveyor, it
is important to be aware of the dialogue’s atmosphere. Is the dialogue open and being widely participated in or is it largely
being held between a few individuals? If discussion does not seem to be open, be aware the information gathered may not
be completely representative or accurate. Consider speaking in an individual setting with stakeholders who did not voice
their opinions to verify the information gathered in the meeting. A few areas of particular concern are the community’s
interest, willingness, and capacity to work on a bridge project. Interviews conducted privately may lead to responses that
are more self-interested than what would be expressed in public. These responses may be truthful for the individual but not
accurate for the community on the whole. In these cases, varied responses among sources may need to be resolved in a
group setting. As a result, it is important to be aware of how the interview method may influence responses and be prepared
to take measures to ensure that information on the social survey is representative of all stakeholders.
Response Sway
Social survey interviews may contain complex dynamics created by the community’s strong desire for a safe crossing and
the interviewer’s position as an outsider who the community views as in control of whether or not the community is selected
for a project. Awareness of these dynamics is the first step toward mitigating the effect on information collection. Out of
need for a safe crossing, community members may feel pressure to produce responses that are more likely to result in
selection for a project. To achieve this, they may attempt to read interviewer reactions and adjust their answers accordingly.
Keep in mind that it is most likely not intended to be deceitful. To minimize this type of error, maintain a neutral expression
throughout the survey and avoid strong reactions to responses. For critical statistics such as deaths and injuries, consider
independently verifying numbers. Also consider that sources may be inclined to agree with any sample answers that the
interviewer supplies. To reduce this type of error, avoid providing example responses and when necessary give a wide
range, which clearly exceeds the plausible minimum and maximum response. An alert and proactive approach by the
interview is critical to avoiding interviewer response sway.
Surveyor’s Experience as a Check

One tactic for checking information is developing a familiarity with the community and checking information against one’s
understanding of the community. It is important to keep in mind that first impressions often are not accurate. For instance,
some communities have seasonal fluctuations in population. If the first few visits are during harvest when family members
that live in nearby towns and cities come back to help, the interviewer may not realize that the population available to
work on the bridge is actually lower most of the year. A check against the interviewer’s experience is only as useful as the
quality of their knowledge of the community. It takes time and experience with a community to develop a full and accurate
understanding.
3.4 Documentation
Social survey information must be meticulously documented as it is critical to site selection and recording and sharing the
impact of projects. The goal for documentation is to successfully gather and convey a detailed and accurate understanding
of the proposed bridge project’s social impacts. B2P uses a suite of three tools for documenting social surveys: a social
narrative, a social survey form, and an access diagram. An effective method for gathering social survey information is to
facilitate a conversation amongst stakeholders, in order to create an open space to hear the community’s story before in-
terviewer influence. This method often produces a more accurate and complete picture than asking social survey questions
line-by-line. The line-by-line method can create a false framework and distort the narrative. Minimizing the interviewer’s
role outside of facilitating and guiding the conversation increases the chance of hearing the community’s true priorities and
need for a bridge. When facilitating the conversation, start with broad questions about the community and ask more specific
questions related to the social survey as opportunities arise in the conversation. After completing the narrative discussion,
check that all questions on the survey form have been addressed. If not, ask any holdovers directly. It is recommended that
the entire conversation be recorded to reduce the need for note taking so that the interviewer can be actively engaged in
the conversation. Guidelines specific to each of tool are provided in their respective sections below.
Social Narrative
The social narrative serves the primary purpose of representing the subtleties of a community’s need for a bridge that would
not be adequately captured in the data collected on the form. The narrative should include information that fills in the gaps
between the data collected on the form and should create a unified, complete story of the community’s need. It does not
need to include all data on the form but should highlight the most important aspects of the community’s need. It should
include social intricacies that exist—both positive and negative. For instance, why people may or may not want the bridge.
The narrative need not be composed on site at the meeting. Rather it is recommended that the interviewer record the
conversation and only outline the story during the initial community meeting so that they can focus on the conversation. In
addition to the community wide narrative, the interviewer may want to collect specific stories of how the lack of safe access
has affected individuals or families in the past and how a bridge will impact their lives moving forward. This narrative is very
valuable for considering the entirety of a community’s condition during site selection and helps to create compelling stories
used to increase awareness of the change created by rural infrastructure projects.
Access Diagram
The diagram is a vehicle for visually organizing the data collected on the social survey form. A few key elements to include
on the diagram are what portion of the community lives on each side of the proposed crossing and the location of all
facilities to which access is impacted by flood events. For access categories that are not tied to the entire community, such
as farming and specific employment facilities, record the portion of the population that regularly needs access to each
facility. The diagram connects the individual pieces of data into a structured and comprehensive image that more effectively
communicates the total impact of a proposed project.
Social Survey Form

Descriptive data is critical to capturing and communicating a thorough and accurate understanding of a site’s potential
impact. The potential impact should be documented by recording what essential services and facilities are blocked during
a flooding event and how many community members are affected. On the form, services and facilities are broken into
access categories. Within each access category there exists a broad range of services and facilities with varying levels of
importance to community members. As a result, it is crucial that the specific services and facilities that are blocked within
an access category be described in detail. For instance, providing a community access to a hospital that provides obstetric
services will likely have a greater health impact than providing access to a general wellness clinic—both of which fall
within the Hospitals or Clinics access category. A list of questions to assist in describing services and facilities is provided
in Section 3.5. Additionally, the combination of where the community’s population is concentrated, where facilities are
located, and what portion of the population relies on the service can significantly change the impact of a crossing. For
example, consider a community where 70% of its population lives on the east side of the river and the rest live on the west
side of the river. If half of all households earn their income from a large farm in the area, the impact is significantly different
depending on whether the large farm is on the east or west side of the river. Thus it must be noted on the form what portion
of the population loses access to each service or facility during a flooding event. Recording descriptive information and the
corresponding number of effected community members facilitates an informed selection process between communities with
similar types of need.
3.5 Form Considerations
This section is intended to directly supplement the Social and Financial Survey Form and facilitate the thorough data col-
lection that is described in the previous section. It provides context, explanations, and instructions for specific questions
on the survey. The provided follow-up questions will function as a solid base for gathering detailed information, but are far
from exhaustive. With experience, the surveyor should build upon these guidelines to create a system of data collection that
captures a dynamic picture of a prospective project’s impact potential.
Population
Units of families are often the easiest way to count a community’s population and may be the only means available. An
average family size must be provided so that the family units can be expanded to a total population. Average size of families
will vary based on location.
Direct Beneficiaries
Any community member that will cross the bridge, regardless of frequency, is a direct beneficiary.
Children to be served
The number of direct beneficiaries that are children should be totaled and recorded. That includes all children that will cross
the bridge whether to attend school or for other reasons.
Total Direct and Indirect Beneficiaries

All community members who would benefit from the bridge, whether by crossing it or from the benefits of others crossing
it (such as new products at market), should be counted toward the population of adjacent communities. For projects that
will connect a network of communities, census numbers are a good tool for compiling direct and indirect beneficiary totals.
Example Population Count

Reference Figure 3.2. The 100 families that live on the far side of the river are all direct beneficiaries because they need
the services in the larger community on a daily basis. 200 families from the community north of the river are also direct
beneficiaries because they will use the bridge to gain access to their subsistence farms. The 300 family community that will
use the crossing once a week for market are direct beneficiearies. Thus, the total number of direct beneficiaries is 600. The
total population of surrounding communities must account for the entire 400 family community, the 100 family community,
and 300 family community. Consequently, the total population of adjacent communities is 800 families.
Employment Environment
Describe the nature of employment in the community. Do community members typically have a single occupation or mul-
tiple? How frequently do they work each? Is availability of employment steady or varying? What portion of their income do
community members lose access to during a flooding event? What are the biggest effects on individuals and on families of
losing access to employment during a flooding event?
Primary crops grown

Name the primary crops and describe the nature of cultivating them. How frequently must crops be tended? Is there a single
harvest of the crop or is it harvested regularly for a period of time? How regularly is the crop harvested? What time of the
year is the crop harvest? Does the community have the capacity to contribute labor during harvest periods?
Primary products sold

Name the primary products sold and describe how product inventories are affected by loss of access.
Primary products purchased

Name the primary products purchased and describe the impact of loss of access to those products.
Figure 3.2 – Population Count Diagram
Access
Each facility category can include a wide range of varied services. The impact of a proposed bridge will vary drastically
depending on the type and availability of service. Qualitative information describing the services and effects of losing access
must be documented to differentiate between sites with similar needs. While several specific questions are provided below
for each access category, starting with general questions as to how community members will be affected in each access
category may allow for relevant input that is beyond what is included below.
Access Blockage
The frequency, duration, and timing of high water events all affect the potential impact of a project. 15 floods a year that only
last one day have a significantly different impact than one flood that lasts 15 days. Record how often, the average duration,
and what times of the year crossing is difficult or impossible.
Schools
The education level, schedule of classes, and whom the
school serves affect the impact of providing access to a
school. Is the school an elementary school or secondary
school? Does it offer classes in evenings or on weekends for
adults? Do all students in the area attend this school or are
there multiple schools that serve the community? Is school
in session year round? What do students typically do when
crossing the river is difficult? If available, consider request-
ing attendance records from the school.
Pignon, Haiti
Hospitals or clinics
Hospitals and clinics vary widely in the services they provided. Record details that will define the impact of providing guar-
anteed safe access. How often are any facilities in the area open and staffed with a medical professional? Who works there,
doctors or nurses? What services do they provide? Are there alternatives that can be accessed during periods of difficult
crossing? How widely used are medical facilities within the culture? What prevalent public health risks exist in the area? Are
there dedicated clinics to these risks?
Markets
The operating schedule and availability of alternative markets affect impact. Are there specific market days or does the mar-
ket operate daily? Will market day affect the community’s ability to provide labor on those days? Are there multiple markets
in the area? Will the crossing create access to any new markets? Will the crossing discourage use of any current markets?
Farms/livestock
Impact is affected by the type of farms in an area and the cultivation techniques used. Are the farms/livestock the primary
source of food for families (subsistence farming)? Are the products of the farm/livestock traded for income (surplus farm-
ing)? What are the effects of losing that income? How often are products harvested? How often should the farm be visited
to maintain crops that produce a quality yield? How often must livestock tended to keep them from perishing? Is the farm a
large-scale production farm that employs many workers?
Other employment
Describe the nature of employment. How many people are employed? Is it primary employment or supplemental? What is
the frequency of work? How does of loss access affect families?
Potable water
Describe what the community does when access to potable water is lost due to flooding events.
Government Services
What are the services, how often do community members need these services, and what are the effects of losing access to
the services? A few examples are access to voting, meetings, and offices that issue permits.
Other
There may be many other resources, services, or facilities to which access is critical to a community’s ability to prosper (e.g.
spiritual or religious centers, social gatherings, and family). List any of those here with descriptions of usage frequency,
consequences of blocked access, and effects of gaining access.
Negative Consequences
Negative consequences are equally important to selecting between prospective projects as positive impacts. Ask if there
will be any adverse effects of the project. Will the bridge hurt anyone’s business? Will the bridge cause increased security
concerns for any community members? Will the bridge have any negative social effects?
Local Investment
In-kind
In the case of in-kind donations, it is best to provide a description of needed materials and services (labor, sand, gravel,
stone, water, timber, housing for B2P staff, a cook for B2P staff, etc.) before asking what the community can contribute.
Otherwise, they likely will not know for what you are looking or what would be most useful. Additionally, the quality of materi-
als should be investigated and documented to ensure they are of sufficient quality (e.g. timber) and to note any additional
work that may be required to use them (e.g. washing silty river sand). For specific material quality guidelines see Chapter 3
Section 4 – Materials and Tools in Volume 2 for suspended bridges and Volume 3 for suspension bridges. Take care not
to offend anyone when accepting or denying offers from communities. A good way to do this for materials is stressing the
importance of material quality before asking for contributions. Then if offered materials are not of sufficient quality, you can
thank the community members but explain that you will need a different material to ensure the integrity of the bridge. When
seeking a community commitment to provide a specific amount of material locally, community members may not understand
unit volumes. To avoid a misunderstanding, use approximate units such as truckloads or a building in the community that
is of similar volume.
Times of year when community may be unavailable to volunteer

The most common cause for communities to be unavailable to volunteer is related to agricultural schedules. Many com-
munity members also may leave the community to work in the city or another region for long periods of time.
3.6 Example Social Survey Packet

Narrative:
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 3.3 – Social Assessment Diagram
Social and Financial Survey

Project Name:
Country:
Region/Department:
District/Municipality:
Communities:
Surveyors: Date:
POPULATION
Estimated number of people to be served:
Estimated number of children to be served:
Total population of adjacent community or communities:
Employment environment:
Primary crops grown:
Primary products sold:
Primary products purchased:
ACCESS
Number of days / weeks / months (circle one) that river is difficult or impossible to cross each year:
Injuries and/or deaths: due to attempted crossings in the last year (optional)
Describe:
Access blocked during flood events or high water (describe)
Schools:
Hospitals / clinics (circle applicable):
Markets:
Farms:
Other employment:
Potable water:
Government Services:
Other:
Does the community foresee any negative consequences resulting from the bridge:
Has the community made an attempt to have a bridge implemented before? Yes / No
If yes, why did the project not succeed?
LOCAL INVESTMENT
Proposed financial or in-kind contributions from municipality or district:
From community:
From other sources:
Times of year when community may be unavailable to volunteer:
Local contact(s):
Source information:
1 of 1
Figure 3.4 – Social Assessment Form
Section 4 - Technical Assessment
4.1 Introduction
A footbridge may serve pedestrian traffic, pack animals, bicycles, motorcycles and for certain bridge designs, carts. There
are several designs for a pedestrian bridge, each applicable for different terrain types and usage needs. Bridges to Prosper-
ity primarily works with cable bridges, of which there are suspended and suspension design types. The cable suspended
bridge is the most economical of the cable bridge designs, but has limited application in flat terrain. This section should be
used to evaluate a bridge site for technical feasibility of designing and constructing either a suspended or suspension cable
bridge. A Technical Assessment form provided in Appendix A4.2 will assist with data collection and decision making.
Suspended Cable Bridge

The suspended cable pedestrian bridge is based on tradi-
tional designs found in Nepal and Peru. The cables support-
ing the walkway surface hang from masonry abutments on
each bank of the river. The bridge is suitable for short to mid
spans in gentle sloping valleys and short to long spans in
gorges. The suspended pedestrian bridge is relatively easy
to design and build, allowing minimum engineering super-
vision and maximum community participation. Achieving
the proper freeboard is the most challenging aspect of this
bridge type and they may require substantial amounts of ma-
Cyumba, Rwanda terials in cases with tall abutments. For further information
on this design, please refer to Volume 2 of this manual.
Suspension Bridge
The suspension bridge is a cable bridge which utilizes load
bearing cables above the deck that are strung across high
towers with an arching walkway. This design is most suitable
for use in flat river terrain or in flood plains where achieving
freeboard could be difficult. Steel towers may be construct-
ed, but due to the complexity of design, an engineer must
lead the project from design to implementation. For further
information on this design, please refer to Volume 3 of this
manual.
Rio Abajo, Nicaragua
4.2 Site Access
Bridge construction requires heavy materials and equipment to be transported to each side of the river crossing. Consider-
ations for site access should always be made when determining the feasibility of a potential project. If vehicular access for
material deliveries such as cement and cables is not available, everything must be transported by foot or burro. Transporting
materials by foot over long distances can extend the duration of construction and increase costs. In cases where access is
limited to only one side of the river, the construction materials must be transported across the river. Temporary crossings
may be required if an existing crossing is not already in place. Where transportation of materials, equipment, and personnel
across a river is not practical, cable cars or other overhead systems may have to be designed and constructed.
Seasonal weather patterns and water levels should be understood for project site access. In most locations, water levels
fluctuate throughout the year with increased rainfall or snow melt. Constructing bridges in dryer conditions is preferred for
not only technical reasons such as submerged excavations, but also for safety reasons involving working near high water
levels. In some cases, water levels are controlled by an upstream dam and operating schedules should be investigated.
Considerations for site access also include availability of local materials and travel distances from communities. In many
cases, sand, gravel, and stones used for masonry and concrete may be extracted from the river to be crossed and timber
used for decking may be sourced from local forests with the proper permitting. The remainder of construction materials and
tools must be transported from available suppliers. The required transport distance may affect construction schedules and
cost.
One additional consideration for site access is the availability of cellular and data service and which carriers provide them.
Communication from a project site to an office or manager may help progress on a project and also assist in the event of
an emergency.
4.3 Bridge Alignment
The following considerations should be taken while visiting a possible site. Most of this information should be documented
in the Technical Survey forms, including the Site Description section.
Traditional Crossing Point

The bridge centerline should be selected at or near an existing crossing point in order to minimize detours from conventional
walking paths and respect neighboring landowners’ property. In many cases, the existing crossing is located at narrow
points of the river and may not be optimal from a hydrologic or geologic standpoint. For smaller rivers, the bridge site should
be placed as close as possible to this existing crossing point whereas larger rivers may accommodate a more substantial
detour.
Estimated Bridge Span

The bridge span for the types of bridges described in this manual is limited to 120 meters for suspended bridges and 84
meters1 for suspension bridges. Measure the anticipated span and ensure that it is within the limits of the standard designs
in this manual. Longer spans require additional engineering that is not covered as part of this manual.
Height Differential
It is important to gain a relative understanding of the elevation difference between the two proposed tower locations. A
large height differential from one side of the river to the other not only has adverse structural effects, but also decreases
serviceability by creating steep walkways. For suspended bridges, the height difference between the cable supports shall
not exceed 4% of the span length (Span/25). For suspension bridges, the maximum permissible height difference is 2%
of the span length (Span/50). For example, an 80 meter suspended bridge would have a maximum elevation difference
between supports of 3.2 meters. In both cases, up to 2 meters may be added to foundation elements to reduce differential.
For the preliminary survey, note if the height differential is significant.
Sufficient Area Available for Foundations

Both suspended and suspension bridges require sufficient room to properly support and anchor the cables. On each side of
the river, sufficient area should be available in front of and behind the anticipated tower locations. For both bridge types, the
tower foundations should be at least 3 meters from the edge of riverbank for soil conditions and 1.5 meters for rock. Behind
the tower, suspended bridge anchors in soil require approximately 10 to 15 meters and suspension bridge anchors are
located approximately 15 to 25 meters back. Rock conditions may require significantly less excavation area, but may pres-
ent further excavation challenges. Additionally, to maintain stability of the banks, the foundations should be placed behind
inclination angles from the riverbed equal to 35 degrees for soil conditions and 60 degrees for rock conditions.
Freeboard
Freeboard is the clear distance from the bottom of the bridge walkway to the high water level. The high water level is the
absolute highest point the river level has reached as noted by the community, including such cases as a hurricane or other
large flood events. Maintaining a proper freeboard is important to prevent the bridge from damage during high water events
from logs or other debris floating down the river. The topography of the area will dictate the magnitude of required freeboard.
For flatter areas with substantial floodplains, a freeboard value of two meters may be acceptable because increased
volume of water flow results in nominal increases in water level. In locations with steeper slopes, a minimum freeboard of
three meters is required because channelized water flow can rise rapidly with increased flow. Foundation heights may be
increased to achieve proper freeboard, but there is a structural limitation to how high they may be constructed.
GRAVITY ANCHOR SPAN (L) DRUM ANCHOR

GRAVITY ANCHOR SPAN (L) DRUM(~5m)
ANCHOR
(10-15m)
(10-15m) (~5m)
ΔHΔH
1.5m
3m 1.5m
(MIN.)
3m
(MIN.) (MIN.)
FREEBOARD
(MIN.)
FREEBOARD
ROCK CONDITIONS
ROCK CONDITIONS
HIGH WATER LINE
HIGH WATER LINE
SOIL CONDITIONS
SOIL CONDITIONS
60.60.
° °
350.00
00°00°
35.0
SUSPENDED BRIDGE - ELEVATION

Figure 4.1 – Suspended Bridge Elevation View SUSPENDED BRIDGE - ELEVATION
SLOPED TERRAIN SPAN (L) FLAT TERRAIN

SLOPED TERRAIN SPAN (L) FLAT TERRAIN
(~15-20m) (~20-25m)
(~15-20m) (~20-25m)
ΔHΔH
3m HIGH WATER LINE

3m
(MIN.) HIGH WATER LINE
(MIN.)
FREEBOARD
3m
FREEBOARD
3m
(MIN.)
SOIL CONDITIONS SOIL CONDITIONS
SOIL CONDITIONS (MIN.) SOIL CONDITIONS
Figure 4.2 – Suspension Bridge Elevation View

SUSPENSION BRIDGE - ELEVATION
SUSPENSION BRIDGE - ELEVATION
Utilities
Take note of any utilities such as power lines, light poles, or water pipes that may interfere with bridge construction.
Sufficient distance from power lines is required to prevent electrical arcs to the metallic components of the bridge. In
some cases, relocation of the utilities is possible when a bridge centerline cannot be shifted.
Verify Land Ownership Requirements

Land ownership is an extremely important aspect of site selection. The land owner must understand clearly what portion
of their land will be used either for the bridge or for the access to the bridge. The owner must be willing to donate the land
or be paid a fair price by the local government or the community. The land ownership title must be in writing, approving the
construction of the bridge on the land before proceeding. In many areas, land owners will greatly benefit from a bridge being
located on or near their property, relative to market and access opportunities.
Hydrologic Considerations
When identifying potential bridge crossing points, avoid placing the bridge close to river bends or downstream of confluences
with tributaries. Bridge foundations should be placed on well-established banks on straight portions of the river. Often,
gravel-filled valleys are the residual of rivers meandering back and forth and caution should be used. Utilizing satellite
imagery if available is a great way to gain a broader view of a rivers path and determine the potential for change.
CORRECT
CORRECTPLACEMENT
PLACEMENT
CORRECT
CORRECTPLACEMENT
PLACEMENTON
ON AWAY
AWAYFROM
FROMCONFLUENCE
CONFLUENCE
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHTSEGMENT
SEGMENT
INCORRECT
INCORRECTPLACEMENT
PLACEMENT INCORRECT
INCORRECTPLACEMENT
PLACEMENT
WITHIN
WITHINRIVER
RIVERMEANDER
MEANDER DOWNSTREAMOF
DOWNSTREAM OFCONFLUENCE
CONFLUENCE
Figure 4.3 – Hydrologic Considerations: (Left) Meander River, (Right) Confluence of Two Rivers
Water Table
Make note if any substructure elements may be permanently submerged or submerged during high water seasons or events.
The water table may effect construction excavations or long-term performance of steel components due to corrosion.
Geotechnical Considerations
Identify any locations along the bank that show signs of erosion or slope stability failures. Indications of erosion might be
a soil scar along the riverbank. Inclined trees are indicative of soil slides and instability of the riverbank. Landslides are
clear indications of unstable soil conditions and bridges should not be located in these areas. In rock conditions, look for
plane or wedge failures, indications of toppling, or rotational slides.
Geotechnical Considerations (Clockwise from top left): Landslide, Inclined Trees, Erosion, Rockfall
4.4 Soil and Rock Classifications
The determination of ground conditions where foundations will be placed is one of the most important aspects of the
technical feasibility process and ultimately the bridge design. For both abutment locations, one must determine the type of
anchorage best suited for the geological conditions of the site. First, it is critical to classify the geological composition as
either predominantly soil or rock. Check for visible signs of rock first, but note that even if there is soil on top, there could
still be rock at a shallow depth. An easy way to make a determination is to assess whether or not a two meter deep hole can
be dug with a shovel in the proposed area of the anchors and/or foundations. If it is possible to manually dig a two meter
hole, you have soil, otherwise, it is likely you have rock. During a first visit to the site, a more extensive soil investigation is
not necessary, but further determination of soil and rock characteristics may be valuable information if the site is selected
for design and foundation, pedestal and anchor designs deviate from B2P’s Standard Drawings. The main purpose of soil
or rock identification at this stage is to determine what type of bridge foundation will be required for the project.
Soil Classification
When identifying soil type, begin by determining whether the soil is coarse-grained or fine-grained. The easiest way to do
this is using a standard window screen with a dry and broken soil sample. If more than half of the soil can pass through
the screen, the soil can be classified as fine-grained. If less than half of the soil can pass through, then the soil can be
classified as coarse-grained. Fine-grained soils can be further classified as either a silt or clay and coarse-grained soils
can be further classified as gravelly or sandy. In all cases, a gravity anchor system is used for a suspended bridge and a
deadman anchor is used for a suspension bridge, but the soil classification may be important for certain foundation design
criteria. Both of these anchor types and design criteria are discussed more in depth in Volumes 2 and 3.
The following table should be used to determine the anchor type corresponding to the soil classification.
Table 4.1 – Soil Classification and Foundation Types

Anchor Type
Soil Type How to Identify
Suspended Suspension
More than half of the soil particles are
Gravelly
larger than 6mm
Coarse Grained
More than half of the soil particles are
Sandy
smaller than 6mm
Gravity Anchor Deadman Anchor
When a moist soil ball is cut with a knife,
Silt
cut surface is rough, scratched, or dull
Fine Grained
When a moist soil ball is cut with a knife,
Clay
cut surface is smooth and shiny
Rock Classification
If the bank is rock or highly consolidated soil, it can be classified by striking the surface of the rock with a metal object such
as a hammer. If a high-pitched, metallic noise is heard, the rock can be classified as a hard rock. If either a thudding noise is
heard or the rock is fractured into layered sheets, the rock can be considered a soft and/or fractured rock. The anchor type
used for hard rocks is a drum anchor, while the anchor type used for soft rocks is a gravity anchor. However, for hard rocks,
if excavation through rock is at all possible (by means of a pickaxe, jackhammer, or other), a gravity anchor is preferred.
The following table should be used to determine the anchor type corresponding to the rock classification.
Table 4.2 – Rock Classification and Foundation Type

Anchor Type
Rock Type How to Identify
Suspended Suspension
Rock shows no signs of weathering Drum Anchor in Drum Anchor in Hard
Sound
or minimal weathering Hard Rock Rock
Hard Rock
Rock shows open cracks and
Fractured Drum anchor in
fractures Drum Anchor in
Fractured Rock or
Rock shows no signs of weathering Fractured Rock
Fresh Gravity Anchor
Soft Rock or minimal weathering
Weathered Rock can be broken by hand Gravity Anchor Gravity Anchor
4.5 Topographic Survey
Introduction
A complete topographic survey package should provide all information needed to design a bridge. Quantitative information
detailing the profile as well as qualitative information broadly capturing the entire site are needed for design.
The Survey’s Role

• The survey’s primary role is to provide an accurate and detailed picture of the site along a selected centerline. A
survey that achieves this will include a profile along the bridge’s proposed centerline that extends well beyond the
proposed location, transverse topography when deemed necessary, and any and all obstructions or challenges on
site. In some cases, multiple surveys may be conducted along different centerlines to allow the designer to select
which one is most suitable.
• The bridge will be designed based on the survey.
• After design is complete, the bridge elements will be laid out relative to the initial survey points.
Importance of Survey Quality
• It is crucial that the survey be accurate since it is the basis for design. Any error in the survey will be propagated
throughout the entire design and may not be discovered until the bridge is under construction.
• Typically, proposed bridge sites are in remote areas that require considerable resources (time and fuel) to access.
As such, it is prudent to ensure that the detail and accuracy of survey information are sufficient for design. Any
aspect of the site that may be relevant to design should be detailed. Doing so will prevent a costly return to site for
nominal amounts of work.
• Benchmarks must be located/installed in a permanent manner to ensure they will be present on return. They will be
used to located the bridges centerline and to layout the bridge element locations
Survey Products
• A proposed centerline laid out on site
• Two permanent benchmarks to establish centerline
• GPS coordinates
• Profile sketch of site
• Plan sketch of site
• Legible and viable survey data
• Media (photos and videos)
A Look Ahead
This section details the information that must be gathered during the topographical survey in order to complete a bridge
design. Additionally, it will touch on a few guidelines for setting permanent benchmarks and quality control measures. If
you are seeking instruction on how to perform a survey, please reference a surveying textbook or the Surveying Technical
Bulletin available at www.bridgestoprosperity.org.
Survey Equipment and Materials

The following items will be necessary when performing either a theodolite or auto level survey:
• Technical Survey Form
• Theodolite/Auto Level
• Tripod
• Plumb bob
• Level rod
• Measuring tape (5m and 100m)
• Extra batteries
• Camera
• Pen and clipboard
• Calculator
• Range finder
• GPS instrument
• Pins (rebar or collect wooden stakes on site)
• Nails/hammer for marking benchmark on a tree/stump
• Spray paint for marking benchmark (optional)
Survey Extents
Length of Survey
Data should be taken well beyond the proposed locations for the tower and anchor of a bridge. It is common to consider
locations further up the banks during design to achieve freeboard.
At a minimum, collect survey data beyond the proposed tower locations for the distances specified below:
• Suspended Bridge: 35 meters
• Suspension Bridge: 50 meters
If there are multiple proposed bridge locations, extents minimums should apply to the location furthest from the river
on either side. The survey does not have to satisfy the above minimums if there exists a geological feature on which
construction is impossible. If this is the case, be sure to describe the geological feature in the survey data and to capture it
in the survey media.
Width of Survey
While a single section profile is used for placing the bridge elements, the designers must consider obstacles near the pro-
posed centerline that may not fall directly on the centerline. Any environmental feature, either geologic or man-made, within
five meters of the proposed centerline should be recorded in the survey.
Figure 4.4 – Survey Extents
Benchmarks7
Purpose of benchmarks
A benchmark is a point of reference identified during a survey so that the bridge centerline can be located when returning to
the site to construct the bridge. The benchmark is also used as a datum point for the horizontal and vertical measurements
when laying out the bridge.
Guidelines for setting benchmarks

Benchmarks should be permanent features located in such a way as to be easily identified by anyone with the survey infor-
mation. Benchmarks should not be something that can be removed by a local community member unknowing of its purpose.
Ideal benchmarks include large exposed rocks, nails driven into tree trunks, or lengths of reinforcing bars driven into the
ground. In locations without existing foot traffic, a wooden stake may be sufficient, but is not recommended.
High Water Line

The high water line (HWL) is one of the most critical pieces of information to gather during the survey process. It can also
be one of the more difficult items to obtain. The HWL is the absolute highest point the river has risen to during extreme flood
events or hurricanes. The best source of information for determining the HWL are the eldest members of the community or
the ones living closest to the site. Be sure to explain that the information desired is not the routine annual peak flow, but the
rare events that may occur with a return period of 20 years or more. When determining the HWL take note of any evidence
of high water near the site, including lack of vegetation and/or erosion, and compare that with what the community indicates
as the HWL. Discuss any discrepancies with the community and be careful about exaggerations from individuals who may
believe that higher water may increase the chance of the community being selected for a project.
Profile and Plan Sketches

After benchmarks are set, the surveyor should sketch the bridge profile. The sketching process is a great time to start taking
note of what locations need to be surveyed to create a detailed and accurate profile. The plan sketch can be produced
concurrently. The two function together as a pair.
Purpose of sketches
• Medium for surveyor to visually record and check their observations
• Sketches aggregate the smaller survey elements (survey points and media) into a comprehensive illustration of the
site
• Provides the designers a quick check for the profile created by processing the data. If it does not match the
surveyor’s sketch, it’s indicative that an error may have occurred.
Features to label on the profile sketch
After the profile is sketched and as the survey is being taken, the following points should be labeled:
• All survey points taken along centerline
• All instrument station locations
• High water line (HWL)
Features to label on the plan sketch
As the survey is being taken, the following items should be detailed and labeled:
• Benchmark locations
• All survey points taken along centerline8
• All obstruction and corresponding offsets from the centerline
• Nearby landmarks
• Streamflow arrow
If available:
• Nearest town to each side of the river
• North arrow
Figure 4.5 – Plan and Profile Sketches
Selecting Survey Points

Survey points are the sole source of quantitative data. As such, every environmental feature, which needs to be accounted
for in a quantitative manner during design, must be surveyed.
Selecting survey points

Profile Information
To accurately capture a detailed elevation profile, contour should drive the selection of survey points. Every location where
the slope of the ground changes significantly should be surveyed.
Points that must be surveyed:

• High water line (historical maximum water level as identified by community members)
• Bottom of riverbank
• Top of riverbank
• Proposed tower location
Plan Information
The primary purpose of gathering plan information is to account for any and all obstacles on site. To record each obstacle,
take a survey point on the proposed centerline and measure the perpendicular offset distance from the centerline (note
whether upstream or downstream)*. See Figure 4.5. Below is a list of objects that need to be recorded if they occur within
5 meters of the proposed bridge centerline. The list is not exhaustive. Please include any environmental features that may
influence the bridge placement.
*If surveying with a theodolite, you may choose to survey off of centerline and record horizontal angles.
Objects that must be surveyed:

• Boulders • Roads • Power lines
• Large trees • Existing structures • Drainage ditches or tributaries
• Fences • Pipelines
Survey Stakes
B2P suggests using at least one rebar (approx. 50 centimeters long, driven until 5 centimeters remain above ground) as
a survey stake on each side of the river because wooden survey stakes are easily removed. It is also suggested to take
photographs of survey stakes such that the location can still be identified in the even they are removed.
Transverse slopes
Significant transverse slopes should be recorded quantitatively. This allows the designer to include in the bridge design and
plan set any provisions necessitated by a cross slope. Accounting for transverse slope helps to ensure proper embedment
and place the foundation at the correct elevation. Additionally, soil retention measures will be required on the uphill side of
the abutment if the ramp or tower will fall below the ground line.
Local transverse slope

If the transverse slope occurs within a limited range of the profile, the slope should be measured using three survey points—
one on centerline, one upstream of centerline, and one downstream of centerline. There are two approaches for selecting
the location of the upstream and downstream survey points: (1) along the line of maximum slope and (2) perpendicularly off-
set from the centerline. For the line of maximum slope method, place survey points uphill and downhill of the centerline point
along the line of maximum slope. The points off of centerline should be placed so that they are approximate 3 meters away
from the centerline perpendicularly. Survey and record data for each point. Also, measure and record the distance between
the centerline point and each of the offset points. Offset distance should be measured with a tape measure aligned with
the ground. For the perpendicular offset method, place survey points 3 meters (distance measured aligned with ground)
upstream and downstream of the centerline point so that the 3 points form a line perpendicular to the centerline. Survey and
record data for each point. See Figure 4.6 for an illustration of both three point methods.
Figure 4.6 – Line of Maximum Slope Method and Perpendicular Offset Method
Complex transverse slopes

If a complex transverse slope exists throughout the majority of the proposed profile, three parallel survey strings should be
taken. The three profiles can be used to extrapolate contours and transverse slopes. Survey the proposed centerline per
usual, survey another line offset 3 meters upstream of the centerline, and survey a third line offset 3 meters downstream
of the centerline. The three end points on either side of the survey should be placed so that they form a line perpendicular
to the proposed centerline. Survey the offset strings’ end points from an instrument location on the centerline. This practice
ties the three survey strings together. Once the end points are established, the instrument may be set up on either offset
line and survey points should be chosen based off of that line’s topography. See Figure 4.7 for an illustration of this method.
Figure 4.7 – Three Parallel Profiles
Survey Data
Uses
Original survey data is important for quality control purposes. On occasion, errors are committed while processing a survey
and detected afterward. Without the original data, it is impossible to determine the root cause of the error. It is also good
practice to retain the original data for record keeping purposes.
Presentation of data
It is of utmost importance that the original data be presented in a comprehensible and legible manner and it is recom-
mended that survey data always be recorded in pen. To properly serve its purpose in the design process and for record
keeping, questions of data interpretation are not permissible. Due to the possibility of rain, dirt, poor writing surfaces, and
other challenges in the field, it is recommended that poor legibility forms be rewritten before submitting to a designer or
storing as record. Also, it is likely that the surveyor may not be present when returning to the project site for laying out the
bridge, so accurate descriptions of survey points for locating purposes are imperative.
Descriptions
Descriptions should include the following:
• Reason survey point was taken (e.g. proposed tower, change in slope, boulder, etc.)
• Perpendicular offset distance for any obstacles not on centerline
Common Omissions
• Height of instrument for each station
• Which station each point was shot from
• A reference for each instrument station
The surveyor should check the data’s viability leaving site. A rudimentary check is to compare the difference between the
lower and middle sight readings to the difference between the middle and upper sight readings. The differences should be
nearly equal for each data point.
Figure 4.8 – Sample Data
Survey Media
Purpose
Survey media, including photos and videos, provides broad, qualitative information about a bridge site. This information
functions as visual references for designers and is especially useful for remote designers, who rely on it to familiarize them-
selves with a site. Quality media should develop a full understanding of the site. When done so, remote designers can apply
their expertise to assessing the site and identifying any potential challenges. Another key function of media is to illustrate
any concerns that a surveyor may have about the site. Generally, it is much easier to communicate a concern or challenge
through a few photos or a video than through a verbal description. (Save yourself the proverbial 1000 words.) Finally, survey
media functions as a visual record of the site. A well organized and comprehensive set of media is very helpful when any
detail about a site is in doubt (this may occur when many sites are visited at once or if a project is shelved for an extended
period of time).
Techniques for collecting effective media

All media:
• Provide a visual representation of the proposed centerline in all media. The centerline can be marked by a person,
tripod, graduated survey rod, or any other high visibility object. If possible, position the centerline marker in the
background of the media (across the river, if far side of river is in view).
• Give all media a descriptive name upon downloading the file to a computer.
Photos:
• Be sure that a survey stake is visible in each photo and record on the survey form which stake appears in the
photo.
Videos:
• When taking videos, provide commentary about the site.
• Each video should provide a full 360° perspective
• Sufficient information should be able to be recorded in approximately 30 seconds.
• Because the terrain along the centerline is most important, slow down and pause rotation during these portions of
the video.
*The photos and videos noted in the following logs are mandatory. If the site contains elements that are not captured in
those photos but should be shown, take additional photos. Keep in mind that for photos to be highly useful, they need to
include a visual reference (e.g. a survey stake or landmark).
Sandy Soil Clayey Soil Soft Rock ( Fractured Y / N )
Left Side:
Right Side: Course Grained
Course Grained Fine
FineGrained
Grained Rock
Rock
Gravelly Soil
Gravelly Soil Silty
SiltySoil
Soil Hard
HardRock
Rock 1:( Fractured
(Project
FracturedY Y/ N/ N
) )
Sandy Soil Clayey Volume Development
Sandy Soil ClayeySoil
Soil Soft
Soft Rock ( Fractured Y / N) )
Rock ( Fractured Y / N
Right Side: Course Grained Fine Grained Rock
PHOTO LOG Gravelly Soil Silty Soil Hard Rock ( Fractured Y / N )
(1) Left Survey Limit (Away)
Sandy Soil (5) Left bank
Clayey(from
Soil left bank) (9) Right Top( Fractured
Soft Rock of Bank (Toward)
Y/N)
(2) Left Survey Limit (Toward) (6) Upstream (10) Right Top of Bank (Away)
PHOTO LOG
(3) Left Top of Bank (Away) (7) Downstream (11) Right Survey Limit (Toward)
(1) Left Survey Limit (Away) (5) Left bank (from left bank) (9) Right Top of Bank (Toward)
(4) Left Top of Bank (Toward) (8) Right bank (from right bank) (12) Right Survey Limit (Away)
(2) Left Survey Limit (Toward) (6) Upstream (10) Right Top of Bank (Away)
VIDEO LOG
(3) Left Top(Allofvideos
Bank should
(Away)capture a 360°(7) Downstream
perspective) (11) Right Survey Limit (Toward)
(13) LeftTop
(4) Left Anchor
of Bank (Suspension)
(Toward) (15) Right
(8) Riverbed
bank (from right bank) (16) Right
(12) RightSurvey
Top ofLimit
Bank(Away)
(14)
VIDEOLeft
LOGTop of Bank
(All videos should capture a 360° perspective)
(17) Right Anchor (Suspension)
MEDIA
Figure DIAGRAM
(13) 4.9Left Anchor
– Media Log(Suspension) (15) Riverbed (16) Right Top of Bank
(14) Left Top of Bank (17) Right Anchor (Suspension)
MEDIA DIAGRAM
Figure 4.10 – Diagram of media
Quality Assurance
Surveying Instruments
To attain survey data that is sufficiently precise for design, B2P recommends using either a theodolite or an auto level.
Abney levels or range finders are acceptably precise for individual points on a survey where bridge components will not be
placed (e.g. the bottom of a steep and tall river bank). Prior to using a theodolite or auto level, consult the user’s manual or
other resources available for checking the proper function and accuracy of the instrument. If the instrument is misreading
data, the bridge designed for the inaccurate survey data will not be valid for the project.
Conclusion
A well done, thorough survey complete with appropriate quantitative and qualitative information is the first step in a smooth
bridge design and construction process. Clear presentation of information will permit ease of use by the designer and
accelerate the time needed to evaluate the site and produce a bridge design. Any missing or incomplete information
requiring a return trip to the site may lead to project delays and increased expenses. The goal of each proposed bridge site
survey package should be one that requires no clarifications or explanations.
4.6 Additional Structures
The following are brief explanations of additional structures that should be considered during design. Note that this section
is not intended to be all encompassing, and is only an introduction.
Retaining Structures
Retaining walls are necessary when soil or highly weath-
ered rock rise above the anchorage at slopes exceeding 1:1.
There are many types of retaining structures, including rip-
rap, gabion walls, dry stone, and traditional masonry walls.
When the slope is too steep for rip-rap, dry stone retaining
walls typically are preferable as they require only local mate-
rials and are constructed with the least amount of additional
cost. Timber wall designs are also readily available, but re-
quire subsurface drainage.
El Pueblito, Nicaragua
Wind Guys
Wind guys are required for any span exceeding 120 meters
and at bridge sites with extreme wind conditions as deemed
necessary by the design engineer. The suspended and sus-
pension bridges herein are designed to withstand a 160 ki-
lometer per hour (100 miles per hour) wind load without any
additional lateral support. Wind guys significantly increase
the cost of the bridge as two additional cables, considerable
additional cable clamps and four additional anchorages are
required.
The following additional information is required when

Chameau, Haiti wind guys are determined to be necessary:
• Additional topographic information is needed up and
downstream from the bridge center axis, typically a
distance equal to 10% of the span.
• Additional geotechnical site-investigation is also
required for each anchor location.
Drainage
MASONRY WALL Slope protection and drainage systems are required at sites
when excess run-off may influence the slope stability. We
recommended avoiding sites where instability is prevalent.
MEDIUM GRAVEL If unavoidable, it is necessary to drain out the runoff and
seepage to ensure the stability of the slope and to avoid the
scouring of these structures. Water should be collected as
PERFORATED closely as possible to its origin and navigated away from the
DRAIN PIPE bridge structures. This may require a surface catch drain on
a slope, drainage around the structure, or both.
FABRIC
BARRIER In the areas directly affected by seepage, sub-surface
Figure 4.11 – Section of French Drain System drainage may be required around the anchorage and/or
foundation areas. If excavation finds sitting water, subsurface
drainage is a must.
River Bank Protection
River training structures should be avoided, as they are only a temporary solution and require frequent maintenance. Normal
bridge abutment placement should be well back from river channels thereby eliminating the need for protection. River bank
protection should be used when a river meanders and at locations where the bridge foundation would be susceptible to
river scour. One such scenario would be if the bridge was placed at a river bend. As river bends are not recommended for
crossing sites, river training structures should not be considered.
Gabion walls are the most common type of river bank protection and are commonly used with simple span bridges to create
a flush abutment surface. Filling the gabion walls requires considerable time and effort by the community and must be
accounted for during planning stages of bridge construction
Tubungo, Rwanda: Constructing gabion wall river protection
Bolivia: Construction completed Tubungo, Rwanda
5.1 Introduction
Once social and technical information has been gathered and the site is deemed feasible, it must be determined if a project
should be undertaken. The evaluation process should weigh the required resources with potential impact, and will help
determine which project to pursue when choosing between multiple communities.
5.2 Social Evaluation
When determining the social efficacy of a project, it is important to analyze the potential for impact. This involves two parts:
the magnitude of the need of the community and deciding if a footbridge is the most appropriate means to address this
need.
The information collected in Volume 1 Section 3 is essential in evaluating the potential social impact of bridge project.
Consider questions such as “To what is the community gaining access?”, “Where is the nearest alternative crossing?”, and
“For how long is the river impassible?”. It is important to weigh these questions that focus on isolation with more obvious
considerations such as the number of potential beneficiaries. For example, which bridge will have more impact: a bridge
that would serve 2,000 people that have an alternative crossing 1 kilometer from the proposed bridge site, or a bridge that
serves 300 people that have no alternative crossing?
It is also important to determine if a footbridge is the correct infrastructure choice. Some communities may prefer a vehicular
bridge over a footbridge. Evaluate if the need for a vehicular bridge is warranted and if the community has the means to
pursue that option. A footbridge may not be an appropriate option for a crossing if after only a couple of years of use, the
footbridge is made obsolete by a vehicular bridge.
5.3 Technical Evaluation
Using the information gathered during the technical assessment, a complete evaluation of the project site can be made.
The goal of the technical evaluation is to determine the overall feasibility of constructing a bridge at the proposed location,
whether or not the site meets the characteristics of a standard Bridges to Prosperity suspended or suspension bridge, and
the relative cost of the project. The evaluation also includes the expected bridge type, either suspended or suspension, as
well as foundation types.
Considerations that should be made for the feasibility and logistics of bridge construction should include site access,
availability of materials, land ownership, river hydrology, geologic conditions, and seasonal weather patterns. These factors
can often lead to the immediate rejection of a project site.
When determining if a standard suspended or suspension bridge as defined by the limits of this Bridge Builder Manual, the
technical characteristics of the site such as span length, height difference from one side of the river to the other, the potential
to satisfy freeboard, and the physical space available for foundations should be considered. If the site does not meet the
requirements for a standard bridge, that does not mean the project cannot be completed, but the bridge would fall outside
the limits of this manual and additional engineering assistance would be required.
At this stage of the project, a full project budget is not expected to be completed. However, a general idea of the project
scope should be understood. The longer the bridge, the more materials and labor are required. Suspension bridges require
additional costs such as steel fabrication and scaffolding. Lastly, any additional structures such as retaining walls or wind
guys may substantially increase the project budget.
5.4 Project Selection
If evaluating multiple potential projects, it may be difficult to determine which project should be undertaken. The impact of
the bridge must be weighed against the financial and technical capability of the project team. In an ideal situation, the project
with the greatest potential for impact is the project selected. It is important that the team work within its limitations or seek
additional resources. For example, often the most impactful bridges are over large rivers or rough terrain that may require
longer spans or nonstandard designs. It may be possible to move the centerline of the bridge to create a more favorable
design. However, this must be balanced with the community’s willingness to use a bridge that is built farther away from
their traditional crossing. A community may be willing to walk 50 meters out of their way to access a bridge that is easier to
design and construct, but if this distance is 1000 meters, it is unlikely that bridge will get the same use as if it were built at
the traditional crossing.
Once a project has been selected, it is recommended that an agreement be signed between all key project stakeholders.
The agreement should outline the roles, responsibilities, and expectations of each party involved in the project and should
include project funding, planning, design, construction, and maintenance. Once the agreement has been signed by all
parties the construction can begin!
Volume 2
Suspended Cable Bridges

SUSPENDED BRIDGE VOLUME 2
Contents
Chapter 1 - Bridge Design

Introduction
Section 1 – Design Philosophy
1.1 Scope and Limitations 2
1.2 Allowable Stress Design Methodology 3
1.3 Standard Designs 3
Section 2 – General Design and Location Features
2.1 Design Objectives 4
2.2 Bridge Layout 5
2.3 Geometric Requirements 6
2.4 Geotechnical Investigation 7
2.5 Hydrology and Hydraulics 8
Section 3 – Loads and Materials
3.1 Loads 9
3.2 Load Combinations 11
3.3 Material Properties 11
Section 4 – Structural Analysis and Evaluation
4.1 Cable Analysis 12
4.2 Walkway Analysis 15
4.3 Suspender Analysis 15
4.4 Tower and Foundation Analysis 16
4.5 Anchor Analysis 18
Section 5 – Suspended Bridge Design
5.1 Standard Bridge Design Procedure 24
5.2 Draw Topographic Profile 24
5.3 Determine Tower Foundation Locations and Sizes 25
5.4 Select Abutment Drawings 26
5.5 Select Cable Size and Quantity 27
5.6 Select Bridge Detail Drawings 28
5.7 Compile Final Set of Drawings 28
Section 6 – Other Structures
6.1 Retaining Walls 29
6.2 Wind Guys 30
6.3 Drainage 30
6.4 Bank Protection 31
Contents
Section 7 – Material Estimate
7.1 Cable and Clamps 32
7.2 Steel Reinforcement Bar 32
7.3 Decking 32
7.4 Concrete and Masonry 33
7.5 Other Materials 33
7.6 Contingency 33
Section 8 – Design Example
8.2 Determine Tower Foundation Locations and Sizes 34
8.3 Select Abutment Drawings 36
8.5 Select Bridge Detail Drawings 39
Chapter 2 - Construction Drawings

Introduction
Chapter 3 - Suspended Bridge Construction

Introduction
Section 1 – Construction Overview
Section 2 – Culture of Safety
2.1 Overview 92
2.2 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 95
2.3 Hand and Power Tool Safety 97
2.4 Fall Protection 98
Section 3 – Quality Control
3.1 Overview 101
3.2 Quality Control Activities 101
Section 4 – Materials and Tools
4.1 Materials 103
4.2 Tools 108
Section 5 – Concrete and Masonry
5.1 Concrete, Grout, and Mortar 109
5.2 Masonry 112
Contents
Section 6 – Construction
6.1 Construction Layout 114
6.2 Excavation 117
6.3 Foundation and Tiers 120
6.4 Towers 124
6.5 Anchors 128
6.6 Begin Ramp Walls 134
6.7 Cable Hoisting 136
6.8 Build Backwall and Continue Ramp Construction 144
6.9 Construct Walkway, Grout Tubes, and Construct Ramp Topping Slab 146
6.10 Completion 151
Appendix 3.1
Chapter 4 - Inspection and Maintenance

Introduction
Section 1 – Bridge Committee Annual Inspection
1.1 Annual Inspection Checklist 164
Section 2 – Technical Inspection
2.1 Materials Required 165
2.2 Technical Inspection Considerations 165
2.3 Technical Inspection Form 166
Section 3 – Maintenance
3.1 Overall Site Condition 167
3.2 Cables and Clamps 167
3.3 Decking 168
3.4 Approach Walls and Ramp 168
3.5 Anchors 168
3.6 Foundation Tiers and Towers 168
Tables

Introduction
Table 3.1 – Assumed Material Unit Weights 11
Section 5 – Suspended Bridge Design
Table 5.1 – Clamp Number, Spacing, and Torque Requirements 27
Table 6.1 – Retaining Wall Design Parameters 29
Table 7.1 – Number of Clamps Required per Cable Size 32
Table 7.2 – Other Material Quantities 33
Section 8 - Design Example

Introduction

Introduction
Table 5.1 – Summary of Mix Design Ratios 110
Section 6 - Construction
Appendix 3.1
Tables

Introduction
Figures

Introduction
Figure 2.1 – Typical Elevation View 5
Figure 2.2 – Typical Plan View 5
Figure 2.3 – Geometric Constraints 6
Figure 4.1 – Cable Sag 12
Figure 4.2 – Cable Geometry and Forces for a Cable Subjected to a Uniform Distributed Load 13
Figure 4.3 – Backstay Cable Geometry and Forces 14
Figure 4.4 – Cable Forces at Tower 16
Figure 4.5 – Tower Self-weight Forces 17
Figure 4.6 – Bearing Pressure Equivalent Width Method 17
Figure 4.7 – Abutment Sliding Free Body Diagram 19
Figure 4.8 – Lateral Earth Pressure Distribution 20
Figure 4.9 – Anchor Uplift 21
Figure 4.10 – Hard Rock Drum Anchor 22
Figure 4.11 – Fractured or Soft Rock Drum Anchor 23
Section 5 - Suspended Bridge Design
Figure 5.1 – Suspended Bridge Terminology 24
Figure 5.2 – Example Layout Drawing 28
Figure 6.1 – Retaining Wall Design Parameters 29
Figure 6.2 – Typical Wind Guy Layout 30
Figure 6.3 – Example Section of Drainage System 30
Section 8 – Design Example
Figure 8.1 – Groundline Profile 34
Figure 8.2 – Survey profile with setback requirements shown 34
Figure 8.3 – Survey profile with tiers selected to satisfy setback and ΔH 35
Figure 8.4 – Preliminary foundation alternative with 3 tiers on the left and 1 on the right that satisfies 3 meter freeboard
35
35
Figure 8.6 – Final design with standard abutments 39
Figures

Introduction

Introduction
Figure 1.1 – Bridge Terminology 90
Figure 6.1 – Excavation Layout Step 2 115
Figure 6.2 – Excavation Layout Step 4 116
Figure 6.3 – Winch Safety Zones 137
Figure 6.5 – Raising Loop 140
Figure 6.6 – Sag Adjustment Method 141
Appendix 3.1

Introduction
Chapter 1
Bridge Design
Section 1 - Design Philosophy | Page 2

Section 2 - General Design and Location Features | Page 4
Section 3 - Loads and Materials | Page 9
Section 4 - Structural Analysis and Evaluation | Page 12
Section 5 - Suspended Bridge Design | Page 24
Section 6 - Other Structures | Page 29
Section 7 - Material Estimate | Page 32
Section 8 - Design Example | Page 34
Volume 2: Suspended Cable Bridges
Introduction
The designs included in the Volume 2 Suspended Pedestrian Bridge Manual originated with Helvetas Nepal’s Short Span Trail
Bridge Handbook that reflects the experience of Helvetas in assisting with construction of more than 5,000 bridges over the past 30
years. By taking the suspended bridge design around the world, Bridges to Prosperity (B2P) hopes to honor Helvetas’ leadership in
addressing the global challenge of rural isolation.
In 2003, B2P staff traveled to Nepal to train with Helvetas to learn about their cable-suspended bridge technology. In addition to
learning about design and construction of the suspended bridge, Helvetas also taught B2P their approach to participatory bridge
building at the community level. B2P has introduced this highly efficient and economical suspended footbridge design to countries in
need of this technology all around the world.
B2P has encountered new technical and cultural challenges as we have taken the technology from Asia to Africa, and then to Latin
America. The designs have been modified and adapted to better suit local conditions in each given area of work. B2P has modified
construction practices and expanded flexibility in design alternatives and design process materials to ensure that the suspended
pedestrian bridge remains a locally sustainable option for communities in varying topographic and geographic regions of the world.
There are four chapters in Volume 2 - Suspended Pedestrian Bridge Manual, structured as follows:
• Chapter 1: Suspended Bridge Design
• Chapter 2: Suspended Bridge Drawings (Not included in public release. Please contact B2P to access these drawings.)
• Chapter 3: Suspended Bridge Construction
• Chapter 4: Suspended Bridge Operations and Maintenance
As with any modulated design, usage assumptions must be made by the bridge designer. The following manual will attempt to
provide both modulated drawings for standard bridge designs and a design guide for those interested in bridge uses not covered
within this manual. For further design guidelines, please reference the Helvetas Nepal Short Span Trail-Bridge Technical Handbook
as well as internationally accepted design standards and locally pertinent design codes and standards.
TERMS OF USE AND DISCLAIMER

No representations or warranties are implied or expressed herein. In consideration of this manual being provided gratis to others,
all users agree to allow a listing and brief description of footbridges built with this manual on the B2P website, so that others in the
same geographic region can visit such bridges for observation and training. Furthermore, all users agree to hold B2P, its employees,
partners, sponsors, contractors and agents harmless from any and all liability arising from the use or application of the information
provided herein.
Butare, Rwanda
Section 1 - Design Philosophy
Structural engineering involves ensuring the capacity of a structure (its ability to carry load) will exceed the demand on that structure.
The purpose of this bridge design manual is to ensure bridge safety by providing background information regarding the structural
engineering utilized to generate standard designs and offering guidance to design a standard suspended cable bridge. In order
to account for uncertainties with both determining the capacity and demand of a structural element or system, this design manual
utilizes the Allowable Stress Design (ASD) methodology with safety factors determined from reliability of loading and structural
performance.
The first Bridges to Prosperity publication, Pedestrian Bridge Manuals First Edition, was published in 2009 with a design section
predominately focused on producing a standard bridge design. Ensuing publications up to the Bridge Builder Manual Fourth Edition,
2014 have sought to increase the information provided regarding the design background and more clearly convey and simplify bridge
design procedures. Furthermore, design theory and practice have continued to evolve due to increased understanding of structural
behavior and construction best practices gained through experience and research.
This section will briefly discuss the scope and limitations of this manual, the ASD methodology and the philosophy of standardized
bridge design.
1.1 Scope and Limitations
The guidelines in this manual are intended for the design of suspended cable bridges with the stated assumptions. As
with any modulated design, usage assumptions must be made by the bridge designer and engineering judgement must be
implemented. For situations falling outside of the modulated design parameters, the design philosophies of this manual may
be applied with additional design criteria accounted for where required.
The suspended cable bridge is intended for pedestrians, livestock and narrow transportation aids (bicycles, wheelbarrows,
motorbikes, etc.). For this reason, a one meter wide walkway width was selected for all standard bridge designs. Widening
the walkway up to one and a half meters is possible with further engineering of the anchor, tower and decking, but any
additional width in excess of one and a half meters risks the inadvisable use by small cars. It is recommended that any
bicycles, animals or motorbikes be walked across, but all are considered acceptable for crossing.
The modulated designs in this manual utilize dead loads associated with timber decking. If a steel deck is chosen, the
corresponding dead load must be accounted for.
The maximum span length for the modulated suspended cable bridge designs in this manual is 120 meters. Due to
dynamic effects of lateral wind loadings for spans exceeding 120 meters, lateral stabilizing measures (wind guys) must be
implemented. For locations with exceptionally high wind speeds, a qualified engineer should be consulted to determine the
necessity of lateral stabilization.
1.2 Allowable Stress Design Methodology
Bridges to Prosperity has adopted the use of Allowable Stress Design (ASD), also known as “working stress design” or
“service load design,” for designing suspended cable bridges. ASD methodology is based on a principle that stresses
developed in a structural component under normal service loading conditions do not exceed a predetermined limit. The
general ASD equation is as follows:
/Q # Rn ((1.(
i
FS
The left side of the equation, Qi, is the stress in a component from a given load effect and is determined by elastic structural
analysis. The right side of the equation represents a nominal stress limit (Rn) such as yielding or fracture, divided by a
factor of safety (FS). The value of the factor of safety depends on the importance of the structural element and the level of
uncertainty involved with calculating demand and capacity of that component.
An alternative design methodology is Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD). LRFD is a probability-based design
philosophy in which reduction factors are applied to materials and magnification factors are applied to loads to account for
differing variability of each component. Both reduction factors and magnification factors are catered to specific materials
and loading conditions. Conversely, ASD treats all loads in a given load combination with the same variability and does not
consider the concurrent situation with higher than expected loads with lower than expected strengths. The factor of safety
takes care of that dual situation. The ASD approach has served very well with suspended cable bridge design and produced
safe structures around the world.
1.3 Standard Designs
The primary purpose of this bridge design manual is to provide users with a basic engineering background as well as a
safe and practical way to design suspended cable bridges. In order to accomplish this goal, B2P has engineered a series
of modulated design drawings and details that accommodate different geometric conditions. These modulated design
drawings used in conjunction with the design guide presented in this chapter are what is referred to as a standard design.
Each standard design captures a range of span lengths and earth slope conditions and eliminates the need for detailed
engineering calculations for every bridge project. As such, the standard designs not only promote design efficiencies by
reducing engineering and drafting time requirements, but also permit use by those without advanced engineering education.
However, because each standard is designed for a worst case situation for a given set of conditions, they may not be the
most economical design from a material and labor standpoint. Sometimes a more site-specific solution may be a better
alternative and the principles outlined in Section 4: Structural Analysis and Evaluation must be employed. For bridge
designs that do not fit the design assumptions, a site-specific solution must also be generated. These site-specific bridge
designs are deemed “non-standard” and an engineer with proper education must be involved in the design process.
Section 2 - General Design and Location Features
This general bridge design guide provides minimum requirements for bridge layout, geometric clearances and constraints,
geotechnical investigation, and hydrology and hydraulics. Additional design objectives such as safety, durability, serviceability,
maintainability, constructability, economics and aesthetics are also addressed.
In addition to technical bridge design, selection of a bridge site should also take into consideration the local economics, social and
environmental concerns, land ownership impacts, and long term maintenance and inspection responsibilities. Refer to Volume 1:
Project Development for more information on these topics.
2.1 Design Objectives
The design engineer’s primary objective is public safety. Other aspects of design including durability, serviceability,
maintainability, constructability, economics, and aesthetics are secondary.
SAFETY
Safety is of utmost importance not only from a structural integrity standpoint but also from the aspect of users. Considerations
should be made for user safety such as adequate railings, walkway materials that will accommodate bare feet, and safety
fencing with a mesh sufficient to prevent passage of objects or small children. Minimum requirements to ensure structural
safety are presented in the Section 4: Structural Analysis and Evaluation.
DURABILITY
Quality materials should be selected in conjunction with proper detailing to maximize resistance to usage and weather
thereby extending the structures’ lifespan. Detailing examples that enhance durability are sufficient concrete cover for
reinforcing bar, galvanized fasteners, treated wood, and corrosion protection measures for buried cables and components
in direct contact with soil and/or water.
SERVICEABILITY
Suspended cable bridges without lateral stabilization are inherently flexible structures that can sway in the wind and bounce
with pedestrian traffic. Nonetheless, bridges should be designed to limit the typical deformations experienced during use
such that negative psychological effects such as feeling queasy can be avoided. Additional considerations should be made
for limiting the walkway slope on approach ramps and at the ends of the bridge span near abutments.
MAINTAINABILITY
Considerations should be made for economical maintenance of the bridge to extend the overall lifespan of the major
structural components. Safety fencing, suspenders, decking, and crossbeams should be detailed in a way that permits ease
of replacement. Untreated timber, such as pine, may only last a year or two in high moisture environments whereas treated
tropical hardwoods may last more than ten years.
CONSTRUCTABILITY
The standard designs presented in this manual and the construction methods discussed in Volume 2, Chapter 3: Suspended
Bridge Construction have evolved through experience to ensure fabrication and erection can be completed in a safe,
economical, and efficient manner. Bridge sites present a wide array of challenges for construction and specific requirements
designated by the engineer should be incorporated into construction drawings.
ECONOMY
Bridges to Prosperity optimizes the economic efficiency of its bridges by utilizing locally available materials. For instance,
construction of the anchorage systems typically sources locally gathered stones from nearby rivers. Additionally, sand can
be sifted from the river so long as the quality can be maintained. Availability of materials, fabricators, labor, and shipping
should be considered.
AESTHETICS
Bridge aesthetics are not considered by B2P. Decorating bridges is allowed so long as the structural integrity is maintained.
2.2 Bridge Layout
A bridge site should be selected with adequate room for foundation placement in a location that satisfies all clearance
requirements. Considerations should also be made for proximity to existing roadways and potential impact damage from
both road and waterway vehicles. Typical Elevation and Plan diagrams for suspended cable bridges are shown in Figures
2.1 and 2.2.
LEFT SPAN RIGHT

ABUTMENT ABUTMENT
℄ SPAN
LEFT SPAN RIGHT
HANDRAIL CABLE
ABUTMENT
SAG
ABUTMENT
℄ SPAN
HANDRAIL CABLE RIGHT TOWER DRUM
SAG
FREEBOARD
WALKWAY CABLE AND FOUNDATION ANCHOR
RIGHT TOWER DRUM

FREEBOARD
LEFT GRAVITY LEFT TOWER WALKWAY CABLE AND FOUNDATION ANCHOR

HIGH WATER LINE
ANCHOR BEAM AND FOUNDATION
ROCK CONDITIONS
LEFT GRAVITY LEFT TOWER HIGH WATER LINE
ANCHOR BEAM AND FOUNDATION
SOIL CONDITIONS ROCK CONDITIONS
SOIL CONDITIONS
Figure 2.1 – Typical Elevation View
EXISTING PATH
EXISTING PATH
EXISTING PATH
EXISTING PATH
EXISTING TREE
RIGHT ABUTMENT
(TYP)
EXISTING TREE
RIGHT ABUTMENT
(TYP)
LEFT ABUTMENT
LEFT ABUTMENT
RIVER FLOW DIRECTION

BOULDER FIELD

BOULDER FIELD
Figure 2.2 – Typical Plan View
2.3 Geometric Requirements
The following geometric requirements are implemented to reduce the engineering needed for each project, limit the exposure
to certain environmental effects such as wind and floods, maintain serviceability with maximum walkway slopes, and avoid
other hazards such as powerlines and overhead tree branches.
GRAVITY ANCHOR SPAN (L) DRUM ANCHOR
ΔH
1.5m
(MIN.)
FREEBOARD
3.0m
(MIN.) HIGH WATER LINE ROCK CONDITIONS
60°
35°
SOIL CONDITIONS
Figure 2.3 – Geometric Constraints
SPAN LENGTH
The maximum span length for the modulated suspended cable bridge designs in this manual is 120 meters. Due to
Maximum Span 120

SPAN (L)meters
ΔH
FOUNDATION SETBACK
The tower foundations should be at least 3.0 meters from the top edge of each riverbank for soil conditions and 1.5 meters
for rock. This setback helps avoid situations where erosion or rock fall may encroach upon the foundations. To avoid slope
stability concerns the tower foundations should also be placed behind the line of the angle of internal friction of the bank
from any point along the slope. For a foundation placed in soil, a 35° angle should be used, and for foundations placed in
rock, a 60° 3.0m
angle should be used. When drawing lines with theLINE
HIGH WATER appropriate angle, the entire tower foundation should be
located on (MIN.)
the opposite side of the line as the river. Where top and bottom of bank locations are not very well defined, the
35°
3.0m
FREEBOARD
slope stability and potential erosion may be less of a concern and these provisions should be applied as best possible.
(MIN.)
Minimum Setback 3.0 meters and 35° from bank (for soil)
1.5 meters and 60° from bank (for rock)
DIFFERENCE IN ELEVATION
A large height differential from one side of the river to the other not only has adverse structural effects, such as excessive
eccentricity on the abutment tower, but also decreases serviceability by producing steep walkways. The final design dictates
the height difference between the cable saddles shall not exceed 4% of the span length (L/25) in order to limit these effects.
The maximum height difference (DH) equation is as follows:
Maximum Height Difference DH # L ((2.(

25
where:
L = bridge span length
FREEBOARD
Freeboard is the clear distance from the lowest point of the bridge walkway to the high water level. The high water level
is the absolute highest point the river level has reached including such cases as a hurricane or other large flood events.
Maintaining a proper freeboard is important to prevent the bridge from being damaged by logs or other debris drifting down
the river during high water events. Such an event may lead to a catastrophic failure of the structure.
The topography of the area will dictate the magnitude of required freeboard. For flatter areas with substantial floodplains,
a freeboard value of two meters may be acceptable because increased volume of water flow results in nominal increases
in water level. In locations with steeper slopes, a minimum freeboard of three meters is required because channelized
waterways can rise rapidly with increased flow. Foundation heights may be increased to achieve proper freeboard, but there
is a structural limitation to how high they may be constructed. A key factor for determining the appropriate freeboard value
to use is whether or not the lowest point of the walkway cables is sufficiently above the lower bank where flood waters may
disperse. Reference Section 2.5 for more information on determining high water levels and freeboard horizontally rather
than rise vertically.
Minimum Freeboard 2.0 meters (floodplains)
3.0 meters (gorges and valleys)
CABLE DESIGN SAG

The Cable Design Sag for the permanent at-rest position of the completed bridge is assumed to be 5% of the span length
(L/20). While suspended cable forces decrease with increased sag percentages (i.e. when cables are lower), this restriction
is imposed to limit the inclination of the walkway surface for serviceability. Conversely, because cable forces increase with
decreased sag percentages (i.e. when cables are more straight across the river), the resulting forces from cables with less
sag requires larger foundations and the eccentricity of the cable forces on the abutment towers increases.
ENVIRONMENT AND UTILITIES

Bridge sites are often located near existing low water vehicular crossings that also may have power lines running alongside
the roadway. Projects may also be located in heavily vegetated areas where large trees are obstructive or pose threats to
damage the bridge. Bridges to Prosperity suggests the following clearance requirements:
Minimum overhead power line clearance 10.0 meters in any direction
Minimum horizontal roadway clearance 3.0 meters from any roadway to bridge component
Minimum vertical roadway clearance 5.0 meters beneath suspended bridge cables
Trees that threaten falling on the structure Shall be removed
Trees that do not pose falling risk Shall be at least 2.0 meters clear from bridge components
Tree branches All branches should be removed from above the bridge structure
2.4 Geotechnical Investigation
For both abutment locations, one must determine the type of anchorage best suited for the geological conditions of the site.
A geotechnical investigation should be conducted to determine the type of foundations and estimate the expected costs of
labor and materials.
Reference Volume 1, Section 4: Technical Assessment for more detailed information on geotechnical investigation and soil
and rock classifications.
2.5 Hydrology and Hydraulics
Two of the biggest threats to the lifespan of a bridge are the potential for erosion that may compromise the bridge abutments
and high water carrying large debris.
Hydrologic investigations should be conducted as best possible by using historical flood information and talking to local
community members about flood events. In addition to maximum flood levels, the flood frequency, water velocities, and
distribution of flow should also be determined. In the event a bridge is located in an area where there are not many houses
or a high water mark cannot be sufficiently determined, a detailed hydrologic study may be warranted.
Hydraulic studies should investigate the channel migration (i.e. whether or not the river channel has meandered from its
current location), bank stability, potential for large debris, and high water marks. The study should include a larger portion of
the watershed upstream and not be restricted to the immediate bridge vicinity. Furthermore, any effect the proposed bridge
structure may have on flood flow patterns or potential for scour should be investigated.
Section 3 - Loads and Materials
This section describes loads and load combinations that should be used for bridge designs along with their appropriate application.
This section also discusses material property assumptions used for the standard designs presented in this manual.
3.1 Loads
During the analysis and design process, various loads affecting the bridge need to be considered. There are two primary
types of loads that must be considered: Permanent Loads and Transient Loads. Each type of load has various contributors
that together define the magnitude of the Permanent Loads and Transient Loads.
PERMANENT LOADS
Permanent Loads are ones that remain relatively constant over time including the weight of the structure itself and earth
pressures constantly in contact with the bridge structure.
Dead Load (DL)

The Dead Load includes the weight of all permanent components of the bridge structure. The actual dead load of the bridge
is to be based on material takeoff and will vary according to crossbeam and decking materials used, cable sizes, fencing
weight, stone and concrete volumes and densities, etc. For suspended cable bridges, 1.0 kilonewtons per meter (68 lb/ft)
is a conservative assumption for the dead load of the cables and walkway surface including the suspenders and fencing
for a bridge with a one meter wide walkway. The dead load of each abutment shall be calculated based on actual volumes
and materials used.
Lateral Earth Pressure (EH)

Lateral Earth Pressure is the pressure a soil exerts in the horizontal direction and should be included with abutment, wall,
and retaining structure designs. Two types of lateral earth pressures to be considered are at-rest and active. At-rest pressure
is the in-situ lateral pressure and should be used when the resisting structural component can tolerate little or no movement.
An active soil pressure occurs when a soil mass is allowed to relax or deform laterally to the point of mobilizing its available
shear resistance in trying to resist lateral deformation. Active soil pressure should only be used on structural components
such as retaining walls that will move or rotate away from the soil until the soil active state is reached. Determination of
lateral earth pressures is covered in Section 4: Structural Analysis and Evaluation.
TRANSIENT LOADS
Transient Loads include any temporary or brief forces that act on the bridge structure. Transient Loads include people,
vehicles, wind, seismic, and anything that can be moved along the walkway.
Wind Load (WL)

Reference Helvetas Short Span Trail Bridge Manual (2003), SSTB-D Type.
The design Wind Load is taken as a uniformly distributed load based on a wind speed of 160 kilometers per hour acting
horizontally on the walkway. This corresponds to a wind pressure of 1.3 kN/m2 acting on the lateral bridge area of 0.3 m2 per
meter span. Using a wind drag coefficient of 1.30, the lateral design wind load is 0.50 kN/m span. In the case of a standard
suspended bridge, the foundation structures are sufficient to resist this design wind load.
Wind Load also affects the dynamic behavior of the bridge. However, practical experience has proven that bridges of up
to 120 meter spans show no significant dynamic effects due to wind load. Therefore, no lateral stabilizing measures are
considered in this standard suspended design guide. For special cases with spans more than 120 meters or extremely
windy areas exceeding wind speeds of 160 kilometers per hour, a qualified engineer should be contacted to design a wind
guy system for lateral stabilization.
While not required for structural reasons, lateral stabilization may be desired for spans larger than 80 meters to reduce
the amount of movement the bridge undergoes at mid-span during a wind event and increase user comfort while crossing.
Distributed Live Loads (LL)

Reference AASHTO Guide Specification for Design of Pedestrian Bridges, 1997.
A Distributed Live Load is a uniform force applied to the full length of the walkway surface representing people, animals,
or motorbikes. Primary load carrying structural components, including cables and foundations, shall be designed for a
distributed live load of 4.07 kilonewtons per square meter (kN/m2) (85 lb/ft2) of bridge walkway area.
If the bridge walkway area exceeds 37 square meters (400 ft2), the distributed live load may be reduced by the following
equation:
$ 3.14 kN m2 (65 lb/ft 2)

me w * 4
4 . 57
w= 4.07 kN m 2 $ c 0.25 + ((3.(
A1 # 4.07 kN m2 (85 lb/ft 2)
where:
w = the design live load (kN/m2)
A1 = the walkway area (m2).
This reduction accounts for the reduced probability of the entire bridge being fully loaded simultaneously. The minimum live
load that should be applied regardless of span length is 3.14 kN/m2 (65 lb/ft2).
Secondary members, including bridge deck, crossbeams, and suspenders, shall be designed for a live load of 4.07 kN/m2
(85 lb/ft2), with no reduction allowed.
A more recent version of the AASHTO Guide Specification for Design of Pedestrian Bridges has been published with an
increased Distributed Live Load value of 4.22 kN/m2 (90 lb/ft2) with no reduction for increased loading area. B2P believes
the likelihood of a rural footbridge being fully loaded to this level at any span length is unrealistic and has decided not to
adopt this revision.
Point Live Loads (PL)

A Point Live Load is a singular force acting on any structural component. For the cases of rural pedestrian bridges, loads
such as livestock, horses, and motorbikes may be larger in magnitude than the calculated Distributed Live Load and
may act on a smaller area. The walkway system, including decking and crossbeams, shall support a point load of 2.22
kilonewtons (500 lb) anywhere between suspenders.
Ice and Snow Load (SL)

Ice and snow loads are considered to be covered by the Design Live Load and are not utilized independently in this bridge
manual.
Seismic Load (EQ)

Suspended cable bridges are inherently flexible structures and an independent load case for seismic forces is not considered
due to the low probability of an earthquake occurring simultaneously with a full live load.
Temperature Load (TU)

Additional forces resulting from thermal effects on cables is negligible and are not included in the standard design process.
3.2 Load Combinations
It is not probable for all of the potential load effects on a bridge to occur simultaneously. As a result, it is necessary for an
engineer to consider different combinations of loads that may occur at the same time to ensure the bridge can withstand
various loading scenarios that it may experience throughout its lifespan. The following load combinations account for the
practical combinations of loads that may be applied:
For standard suspended cable bridges:

DL + EH + LL ((3.(
For high wind or long span suspended cable bridges requiring lateral stabilization:
DL + EH + LL + 0.3*WL ( (3.(
DL + EH + WL ((3.(
3.3 Material Properties
Actual strength values should be determined via certification and or testing. B2P otherwise assumes the following strengths
for standard suspended cable bridges:
Concrete f 'c = 15 MPa (2200 lb/in.2) mixed by drum mixer

f 'c = 10 MPa (1500 lb/in.2) mixed by hand
Structural Steel fy = 240 MPa (35,000 lb/in.2)
Steel Reinforcing fy = 275 MPa (40,000 lb/in. 2)
Soil q u = 286 kPa (6000 lb/ft2)

z = 33c
Cable/Wire Rope Per certification: If using re-purposed wire rope, a certified breaking strength can be attained
through load testing the cable at the section showing its greatest wear.
Table 3.1 – Assumed Material Unit Weights

Material SI Units Imperial Units
Steel 7850 kg/m 3
490 lb/ft3
Concrete 2400 kg/m3 150 lb/ft3
Timber 900 kg/m3 56 lb/ft3
General Soil 1800 kg/m 3
112 lb/ft3
Stone Masonry 2100 kg/m3 131 lb/ft3
Broken Rock 1900 kg/m3 120 lb/ft3
Water 1000 kg/m3 62.4 lb/ft3
Section 4 - Structural Analysis and Evaluation
The following section details basic design criteria and assumptions used by Bridges to Prosperity when designing cable suspended
bridges. This section is intended for use in design verification and need not be referenced for non-engineer designers, as all standard
designs account for the following codes and assumptions. For standard bridge projects, skip to Section 5: Suspended Bridge Design.
Design of all structural elements shall be per recognized design codes using Safety Factors consistent with Allowable Strength
Design methodology.
Referenced design codes include:

• AASHTO Guide Specification for Design of Pedestrian Bridges, 1997
• AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, 7th Edition, 2014
• ACI 318-14 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
• AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) Steel Construction Manual, 14th Edition
• NDS (National Design Specification for Wood Construction), 2015 Edition
4.1 Cable Analysis
OVERVIEW
A cable hanging between two supports and carrying a uniformly distributed load along its length (as opposed to the true
horizontal dimension) forms a catenary. However, the cable can be analyzed as a parabolic curve for simplicity since
the difference between catenary and parabolic profiles is negligible in the range of sag values used for suspended cable
bridges. There are three sag values to consider when designing the main cables for a bridge: Hoisting Sag, Dead Load
Sag, and Live Load Sag.
Hoisting Sag (hHoist) is the resting position of the cable when only supporting its own weight.
Dead Load Sag (hDL) is the cable’s position under full dead load.
Live Load Sag (hLL) is the cable’s position under full dead load plus full live load.
SPAN (L)
L/2 L/2
ΔH
hHoist
LOW POINT
hDL
hLL
f
Figure 4.1 – Cable Sag
The change in sag values from one loading condition to the next reflects the elastic elongation in the cables as more load is
applied. Bridges to Prosperity bases designs upon the geometric profile created using the Dead Load Sag value. The Dead
Load Sag value is 5% of the span length (Span/20). The initial position of the cables prior to adding the walkway (Hoisting
Sag) and the final position of the cable under full dead and live load (Live Load Sag) can be determined iteratively with
known loadings and cable properties (area and modulus of elasticity). In the absence of this refined analysis, the Hoisting
Sag and Live Load Sag values can be approximated with the following values:
h Hoist = 4.6% $ L ( (4.(

h LL = 6.1% $ L ((4.(
where:
Note: The Hoisting Sag is used during construction to calculate the distance to the lowest point of the cable (f).
SPAN (L)
12 L/2 — Bridges to Prosperity — L/2
℄ SADDLE
GEOMETRY AND FORCES

The following diagram and equations describe the theory governing the geometry of the main span cables and the resulting
forces.
SPAN (L)
PvHigh PtHigh
L/2
Ph
ΔH
PvLow
PtLow
hsag
Ph
Ph Ph
Low High
Figure 4.2 – Cable Geometry and Forces for a Cable Subjected to a Uniform Distributed Load
Horizontal Tension:
= w c $ L (ANCHOR)
2
PhBACKSTAY Ph Ph MAIN SPAN (RIVER) ((4.(
8 $ h sag
 PtBack PtMain 
where:
Ph = horizontal cable tension, kN PvBack + PvMain
wc = distributed load, kN/m
L = bridge span length, m
PvBack
hsag = cable sag, m PtBack
Ph
Angle to Horizontal (High Side):

℄ TOWER
4 $ h sag + DH
i High = tan -1 b l ((4.(
L
Vertical Tension (High Side):
Pv High = Ph $ tan (i High)

((4.(
Total Tension (High Side):
Pt High = Ph ((4.(
cos (i High)
Angle to Horizontal (Low Side):
4 $ h sag - DH
i Low = tan -1 b l ((4.(
L
Vertical Tension (Low Side):
Pv Low = Ph $ tan (i Low)

((4.(
Total Tension (Low Side):
Pt Low = Ph ((4.(
cos (i Low)
BACKSTAY (ANCHOR) PvBack + PvMain MAIN SPAN (RIVER)
Ph Ph

 PtMai
n
Pt Back
PvBack
PtBack
Ph
℄ SADDLE
Figure 4.3 – Backstay Cable Geometry and Forces
Total Backstay Tension:
Pt Back = Ph ((4.1(
cos (a)
SPAN (L)
PvHigh PtHigh
Vertical Backstay Tension: L/2
Ph
Pv Back = Pt Back $ sin ^ a h ((4.1(
ΔH
PvLow
PtLow
Total Main Span Tension:
hsag
Ph
Ph Ph
Pt Main = Pt High or Pt Low ((4.1(
Low High
Vertical Main Span Tension:
Pv Main = Pt Main $ sin ^ i h ((4.1(
Total Vertical Reaction at Tower:

BACKSTAY (ANCHOR) Ph Ph MAIN SPAN (RIVER)
R Tower = Pv Back + Pv Main  ((4.1(
PtBack PtMain 
CABLE DESIGN PvBack + PvMain

Available cable diameters and associated certified breaking strengths should be researched for each project. Bridges to
Prosperity program staffPvwill
Back provide certified breaking strengths of available inventory in B2P Program Countries. For a list
of active B2P Program Countries, PtBack

please visit the B2P website.
Ph
In lieu of using applied and ultimate cable stresses for cable design, the applied force and ultimate breaking strength can
be used since the cable area remains constant. ℄ TOWER
Cable design shall satisfy:
Ps # Pu ((4.1(
FS
where:
Ps = maximum axial tension in cable, kN
Pu = ultimate breaking strength of cable, kN
FS = factor of safety = 3.0
4.2 Walkway Analysis
OVERVIEW
The B2P standard timber crossbeams and decking boards have been designed according to NDS 2015. Each crossbeam
and decking board shall be designed to carry the applied loads without exceeding the adjusted design values. Adjusted
design values take into consideration the conditions under which the timber will be used, including moisture content, load
duration, and shape. It is the responsibility of the engineer to apply the appropriate design values along with adjustment
factors when conducting crossbeam and decking design.
TIMBER ANALYSIS
Decking boards and crossbeams are considered to be secondary members and shall carry un-reduced distributed live load
values and point loads in accordance with Section 3: Loads and Materials. Each timber element shall be checked for both
flexure and shear. Typically, the point load case will govern the decking design. B2P suggests minimum dimensions for
decking boards of 5cm x 20cm (2” x 8”).
For all B2P standard designs, a minimum of three equally spaced walkway cables must be used with timber crossbeams.
As such, the crossbeam design loads are determined using basic statics equations assuming a continuous beam. Decking
boards are a minimum of two meters long spanning between three crossbeams (with the exception of end planks), but are
conservatively analyzed as a simply supported member with a one meter span.
4.3 Suspender Analysis
OVERVIEW
The suspenders function to transfer load from the walkway cables into the handrail cables. The suspenders are subjected
to environmental factors and cyclical bending within the flexible structure. As a result, Bridges to Prosperity uses a factor
of safety of 5.0 to account for the likelihood of potential fatigue failure and corrosion of the steel over time. Even though
smaller bars or wires may be used, B2P recommends using no less than a 10 millimeter deformed reinforcing bar (#3
bar), with a minimum yield strength of 274 megapascals (40,000 lb/in2). The increased factor of safety also reduces the
risk of progressive failure if a single suspender breaks and neighboring suspenders must transfer additional load. Smooth
reinforcing bar often is of inferior quality and strength, and thus should be avoided.
SUSPENDER DESIGN CHECK

For the axial design check of suspenders, the calculated stress in the member due to the maximum axial load must be less
than or equal to the yield stress divided by a factor of safety.
Axial stress shall satisfy:
fy
fs # ((4.1(
FS
in which:
fs = P ((4.1(
A
where:
fy = yield stress, MPa
P = axial load, kN
A = steel reinforcing bar area, mm2
4.4 Tower and Foundation Analysis
OVERVIEW
All of the vertical forces generated in the cables are transferred through the towers and tiers into the foundation. Additional
vertical load is also generated from the self-weight of the towers and tiers. Because the backstay cable angle is typically
steeper than the main span cable angle, an eccentric load is generated that can cause overturning and increases bearing
pressures on the front edge of the foundation. To perform satisfactorily, the maximum bearing pressure generated must not
exceed the bearing capacity of the soil. Furthermore, the resultant cable force, considering the backstay and main span
components of the cable’s influence on the tower saddle, must not cause overturning.
TOWER OVERTURNING CHECK

Tower overturning occurs when horizontal loads from the cables exceed the restorative force generated by the vertical
component of the cables along with the self-weight of the tower and foundation. Tower overturning would result in
catastrophic bridge failure.
Tower overturning shall satisfy:
Mo # Mr ((4.1(
FS
where:
Mo = total overturning moment, kN-m
Mr = total restorative moment, kN-m
The total overturning and restorative moments can be calculated using static analysis. A free body diagram of associated
loads acting on the tower is shown in the following diagram. A friction coefficient between the cable and saddle of 0.10 is
included to account for additional horizontal load that may occur at the top of the tower. Note that eccentricity is measured
from a line that goes from directly below the saddle all the way straight down to where the foundation tier rests on the soil
below, as shown in the figure as the saddle centerline (this does not correspond to the center of the towers nor to the center
of the foundation tier).
BACKSTAY (ANCHOR) PvSaddle MAIN SPAN (RIVER)
PhSaddle (1 - n $ sin ^ i h)
PBack = PMain $ ((4.1(
 PtMain

(1 + n $ sin ^ a h)
Pt Back
where:
n ≈ 0.10
θ = Main Span Cable Angle, Deg
α = Backstay Cable Angle, Deg
Ph Saddle = PMain $ cos ^ i h - PBack $ cos ^ a h ((4.2(
Pv Saddle =
/P Main - / PBack
((4.2(
n
℄ SADDLE
Figure 4.4 – Cable Forces at Tower
PvSaddle
BACKSTAY (ANCHOR) MAIN SPAN (RIVER)
XSaddle
Tower Offset XTower
PhHand
PTower
PhWalk
M o = Ph Hand $ YHand + Ph Walk $ YWalk ((4.2(
YHand
n
PTier
M r = Pv Saddle $ X Saddle + / PTier n $ X Tier n + PFoundation $ X Foundation ((4.2(
i=1
YWalk
PFoundation
O
Tier Offset XFoundation
Foundation Offset XTier
℄ SADDLE
Figure 4.5 – Tower Self-weight Forces
BEARING PRESSURE CHECK

The load per unit area at which shear failure in soil occurs is called the ultimate bearing capacity. The allowable soil bearing
capacity is the ultimate bearing capacity divided by a factor of safety. Specific values for the ultimate bearing capacity
should be determined for the soil found at the bridge site. The designs in this manual assume ultimate soil bearing capacity
of 286 kilopascals (kPa) (6000 lb/ft2).
Bearing pressure shall satisfy:
qu
qs # ((4.2(
FS
where:
qs = maximum bearing pressure, kPa
qu = ultimate bearing capacity, kPa
Due to the eccentricity of the load on the tower, the bearing pressure beneath the foundation is not uniform. The maximum
bearing pressure can be calculated using the equivalent width method as shown in the following diagram:
℄ FOOTING B * = 2 $ b Mo - Mr l ((4.2(
PTotal
((4.2(
q s = P*Total
PTotal B $l
e B*/2
in which:
n
PTotal = Pv Saddle + PTower + PFoundation + / PTier n ((4.2(
where: i=1
B* l = length of foundation, m
B* = effective width, m
Figure 4.6 – Bearing Pressure Equivalent Width Method
4.5 Anchor Analysis
OVERVIEW
The bridge abutments are primary structural elements that support the vertical load of the bridge and resist the horizontal
load from the cables. The abutments consist of a stone masonry foundation and tiers along with a concrete tower that
supports the cables and transfers vertical load into the ground and an anchor that resists the horizontal forces from the
cables. Three typical ground conditions for which B2P has standard anchor designs are soil, hard rock, and fractured or
soft rock. Gravity anchors are used in soil conditions and rely on large masses and friction for resistance. In hard rock
conditions, a reinforced concrete drum and rock anchors are used. For anchorage in fractured or soft rock, a reinforced
concrete drum is socketed into the rock.
All foundation types shall satisfy the following design criteria:

• Sliding
• Uplift
SOIL ANCHOR DESIGN

Gravity anchors are used in soil conditions. In a gravity anchor, the predominant sliding resistance is provided by a normal
force from the weight of the abutment and a coefficient friction from stone and concrete against a soil surface. The abutment
mass is activated by a reinforced concrete beam at the rear of the ramp where the cables are anchored. The uplift resistance
is provided by the weight of the concrete beam itself as well as weight placed above the concrete beam.
For standard B2P design, the concrete anchor is connected to the tower foundation and tiers via a rock masonry wall
continuously supported against lateral movement on either side by soil or stone fill. Note that these walls are imperative to
the standard design and cannot be omitted without a thorough design check of the anchor acting by itself. The following
assumptions are made in the standard design:
• Friction acts on the base of the foundation and approach

• Soil is cohesionless (i.e. c = 0)
• No consideration of earthquake design has been taken into account
• Design has been completed assuming non-saturated soil conditions
• Assume there are no surcharge loads acting on the anchor
SLIDING CHECK
An abutment containing a gravity anchor resists sliding through friction with the soil along each interface. The entire
abutment, including concrete beam, stone masonry approach walls and fill, foundation, tiers, and tower, all contribute to the
total vertical load. In addition to a horizontal driving force from the cables, an active earth pressure behind the abutment
contributes to the driving force.
Gravity anchor sliding shall satisfy:
Rs # Rn ((4.2(
FS
where:
Rs = horizontal driving force, kN
Rn = horizontal resisting force, kN
The total driving and resisting forces can be calculated using static analysis. A free body diagram of associated loads acting
on the gravity anchor are shown in the following diagram.
PvBack + PvMain
PTower
PvBack
PTier
PRamp
PActive PAnchor PFoundation

Ph
Figure 4.7 – Abutment Sliding Free Body Diagram

℄ SADDLE
Horizontal Forces:
PActive = active earth pressure, kN
Ph = cable force on concrete anchor beam, kN
Vertical Forces:
PvBack = vertical component of backstay cable force, kN
PvMain = vertical component of main span cable force, kN
PTower = self-weight of tower, kN
PTier = self-weight of tiers, kN
PFoundation = self-weight of foundation, kN
PAnchor = self-weight of anchor beam, kN
PRamp = self-weight of approach walls and fill material, kN
The total horizontal driving force is found by summing the horizontal forces:
R S = PActive + Ph ((4.2(
The total horizontal resisting force is found by summing the vertical forces and multiplying by a coefficient of sliding friction:
R n = n $ (Pv Main + PTower + PTiers + PFoundation + PRamp + PAnchor ) ((4.3(
in which the coefficient of sliding friction can be taken as:
n = tan ( 3 z) ((4.3(
4
where:
z = internal angle of friction, degrees
n = coefficient of sliding friction, unitless
The active earth pressure (Pa) can be calculated according to Rankine theory. The coefficient of earth pressure (Ka) is the
term used to express the ratio of the lateral earth pressure to the vertical earth pressure (weight of the soil above). The
general equation for the coefficients according to Rankine’s theory are given by the following expressions:
cos b - cos 2 b - cos 2 z

K a = cos b $ e o ((4.3(
cos b + cos 2 b - cos 2 z
where:
z = internal angle of friction, degrees
b = soil angle at ground surface behind anchor, degrees
If the soil behind the anchor is level, the above equation can be reduced to a simplified form:
1 - sin z ((4.3(
Ka =
1 + sin z
The lateral earth pressures acting on the anchor are GROUND LINE
equal to the area of the triangle along the height:
β
The resultant force on the anchor due to the pressures RAMP
act at one third of the height from the base of the
anchor, and is given as the following:
PActive = 1 $ K a $ c s $ H 2 $ w
H
((4.3(
2 PActive CONCRETE ANCHOR
BEAM
where:
PActive = force due to active earth pressure, kN
Ka = active earth pressure coefficient, unitless
c = soil density, kN/m3 Figure 4.8 – Lateral Earth Pressure Distribution
H = soil height, m
w = width of the anchor beam, m
UPLIFT CHECK
An abutment containing a gravity anchor resists uplift through self-weight of concrete anchor beam and material activated
above the beam.
Gravity anchor uplift shall satisfy:
Vs # Vn ((4.3(
FS
where:
Vs = vertical uplift force, kN
Vn = vertical resisting force, kN
The total vertical uplift and resisting forces can be calculated using static analysis. A free body diagram of associated loads
acting on the gravity anchor are shown in the following diagram.
PvBack = vertical backstay cable force, kN

B
PAnchor = self-weight of concrete anchor beam, kN
POverburden = self-weight of overburden material, kN
The volume of overburden resisting uplift can be found

by: POverburden
POverburden = b b + B $ H - A Anchor l $ w $ c $ g ((4.3(

2 30°
H
in which:
PvBack
B = b + H $ tan (30c) ((4.3(
PAnchor
where:
b = concrete anchor beam base width, m
b
H = depth of anchor beam and overburden, m
AAnchor = area of anchor, m2 Figure 4.9 – Anchor Uplift
w = width of anchor beam, m
c = density of overburden, kg/m3
g = gravity = 9.81 N/kg
WATER TABLE AND BUOYANT FORCES

If the water table rises above the base of the concrete anchor beam, the unit weights of the soil and concrete must be taken
as buoyant unit weights, i.e. typical unit weight of the material minus the buoyant force acting on the material. The buoyant
force is equal to the amount of water displaced. In the case of concrete, it can be assumed that it will displace 100% of
its volume that is submerged whereas soil will displace approximately 60% of its volume that is submerged. As such, the
submerged situation will significantly decrease the resisting forces.
Depending on the duration of the submerged case, the factor of safety may be reduced. For a Temporary Case (referring
to a single event in a season), FS = 1.25. For a Long Term Case (referring to the entire rainy season), FS must remain 1.5.
Seek support from a qualified engineer for all saturated cases.
HARD ROCK ANCHOR DESIGN

Hard rock anchors consist of a reinforced concrete drum with reinforcing bars doweled into the rock. The dowel bars must
be designed to resist both the horizontal and vertical components of the cable force.
SLIDING (SHEAR) CHECK D

The reinforcing bars doweled into the rock PvBack
CABLE
shall have sufficient shear capacity to resist
the horizontal cable force. 
DRUM Ph
Dowel bars shall satisfy:
fy
fs # ((4.3(
FS
in which:
L
DOWEL BAR (TYP)
fs = Ph ((4.3(
As
where: Figure 4.10 – Hard Rock Drum Anchor
fs = shear stress in rebar
fy = yield stress
Ph = horizontal cable force
As = total area of reinforcing
UPLIFT CHECK
The reinforcing bars doweled into the rock shall have sufficient axial capacity to resist the vertical cable force. Additionally,
the bond strength of the grout or epoxy material used to embed the reinforcing bars shall have sufficient capacity to develop
the required tensile strength. D
CABLE
PvBack
Dowel bars shall satisfy:

Ts # Tn DRUM Ph ((4.4(
in which:
Tn = A b $ N $ fa ((4.4(
where:
L
REINFORCING BAR (TYP)

Ts = vertical cable force, kN
Tn = axial capacity of dowel bars
Ab = area of reinforcing bar, mm2
N = number of reinforcing bars
fa = allowable axial tensile stress of dowel bar, MPa
FRACTURED OR SOFT ROCK ANCHOR DESIGN

Drum anchors socketed into the rock are used in fractured or soft rock anchor designs. The drum is designed to withstand
the shear failure from horizontal loads and uplift from vertical loads.
SLIDING (SHEAR) CHECK D

Standard reinforced concrete design PvBack
CABLE
methodology shall be used to determine
the shear capacity of the drum. The 
bearing capacity of the rock shall also be DRUM Ph
investigated.
Drum shall satisfy:
Vr = Vn ((4.4(
FS
L
REINFORCING BAR (TYP)
in which:
Vn = 2 $ fc' $ A c + A v $ fy ((4.4(
where: Figure 4.11 – Fractured or Soft Rock Drum Anchor

f’c = compressive strength of concrete
Ac = horizontal cross sectional area of concrete
Av = total area of reinforcing
fy = yield strength of steel
Vr = maximum shear force (Ph)
UPLIFT CHECK
The concrete drum anchor shall have sufficient axial pullout capacity to resist the vertical cable force. Pullout capacity is
generated by friction along the perimeter of the drum.
Drum uplift shall satisfy:
Rs # Rn ((4.4(
FS
in which:
Rn = r $ D $ qs ((4.4(
where:
D = diameter
qs = nominal unit side resistance
Rs = maximum uplift force (PvBack)
Section 5 - Suspended Bridge Design
This section outlines the steps in order to select appropriate drawings from Bridges to Prosperity’s standard suspended bridge design
drawings, found in Chapter 2: Suspended Bridge Drawings. This process does not require a technical background and requires
few design calculations related to geometry to be performed. All pertinent design assumptions and bridge geometries have been
taken into account in the standard B2P suspended bridge drawings. For background information and design assumptions, refer to
Section 4: Structural Analysis and Evaluation.
5.1 Standard Bridge Design Procedure
Designing a standard suspended cable bridge requires minimal technical background. The general procedure for completing
a set of bridge drawings after completion of a topographic survey is as follows:
• Draw the topographic profile from the survey data

• Determine bridge foundation locations and sizes
• Select abutment drawings
• Determine cable size and quantity
• Select detail drawings
• Compile final set of drawings
• Calculate material quantities
TOWER HANDRAIL SUSPENDER

CABLE FENCING
BACKSTAY
CONCRETE RAMP TOPPING
TIERS DECKING
CROSSBEAM
BACKWALL WALKWAY CABLE
FOUNDATION
APPROACH RAMP
ANCHOR BEAM
Figure 5.1 – Suspended Bridge Terminology
5.2 Draw Topographic Profile
If not done so already, complete a bridge profile survey using an Abney level, automatic level, digital theodolite, or other
means, as available. Reference Volume 1, Section 4: Technical Assessment for complete details.
Using the survey information, generate a topographic profile for the proposed centerline. This can be done with ordinary
graph paper and engineers scale or using computer automated design (CAD) software. When producing the profile line,
verify that the left abutment shown in the bridge profile is referring to the left bank, when facing downstream
RESTRAINT CABLE
MAIN CABLE
SUSPENDER
TOWER
BACKSTAY
HANDRAIL CABLE
PEDESTAL
FENCING
ANCHOR BLOCK
DECKING
5.3 Determine Tower Foundation Locations and Sizes
The tower foundation locations determine the span of the bridge in the bridge profile. When determining the foundation
locations and sizes, the following criteria must be met:
• The maximum span length of 120 meters

• Foundations must be placed at least 3.0 meters back from the edge of bank in a soil slope and 1.5 meters from
edge of bank in a rock slope
• Foundations must be placed behind an angle of internal friction of the soil (35°) or rock (60°) as measured from the
toe of slope
• The ground profile slope in soil conditions does not exceed 10 degrees
• The difference in height between cable saddles on either side of the span shall not be more than 4% of the span
(L/25)
• The minimum walkway cable saddle elevation above ground is 1.4 meters and the maximum elevation is 3.4
meters
• The minimum freeboard between the lowest point of the cable under dead load and the high water level shall be
3.0 meters in gorges and valleys and 2.0 meters in floodplains
• Keep foundation out of floodplain or consult an engineer
These geometric design criteria and background information are discussed further in depth in Section 2: General Design
and Location Features.
In order to arrive at a final foundation location along with the quantity of tiers required, follow these steps:
Step 1 - Place each preliminary foundation such that the front of foundation fulfills the required minimum setback. Verify the
foundation is located behind the appropriate slope line. If the foundation does not satisfy the slope line setback, shift the
location away from the river until the requirements are met. Verify the span length is less than 120 meters and the ground
slope is less than 10 degrees if bearing on soil.
Step 2 - Determine the number of tiers required by checking the difference in elevation. Starting with the minimum walkway
saddle elevation of 1.4 meters by using a single tier, check that the elevation difference does not exceed the Span/25 limit.
If the level difference exceeds this amount, add one or two one-meter-tall tiers to the lower tower until the requirement
is met. Alternatively, the foundations may be shifted further away from the river to gain elevation if located on a slope. In
some cases, a combination of adding tiers and shifting the foundation back generates the most efficient design. When the
difference in elevation parameter is fulfilled, once again verify the span does not exceed 120 meters and the ground slope
does not exceed 10 degrees if bearing on soil.
Step 3 - Verify the freeboard between the lowest point of cable and high water elevation. Freeboard is verified by taking
the low side walkway saddle elevation, subtracting the sag value ‘f’ and subtracting the elevation of the High Water Level.
If the value of freeboard is less than required, the designer must increase the walkway saddle height on either one or both
foundations by either increasing the number of tiers or shifting the foundations back on a hill slope.
The vertical distance, f, between the lowest point of the cable and the lower walkway saddle is calculated by:
^ 4 $ h DL - DH h2
f= ((5.(
16 $ h DL
in which:
h DL = 0.05 $ L ((5.(
where:
DH = elevation difference between walkway saddles, m
L = span length, m
Step 4 - Finalize the bridge profile and calculate the cable hoisting sag. If all the geometric requirements have been met
after following Steps 1 through 3, the final foundation locations along with tier quantities and cable profile can be drawn. In
order to construct the bridge such that the final cable profile is located at the design level, the cables must be initially set
at a higher elevation to allow for deflections associated with cable elongation once the crossbeams and walkway decking
are applied.
In lieu of a more rigorous analysis, the cable hoisting sag may be approximated as 92% of the Dead Load Sag (equal to
4.6% of span length). The vertical distance, ‘f’, between the lowest point of the cable in the hoisted position and the lower
walkway saddle is calculated by:
^ 4 $ h Hoist - DH h2
f= ((5.(
16 $ h Hoist
in which:
h Hoist = 0.046 $ L ((5.(
where:
L = span length, m
5.4 Select Abutment Drawings
Based on a given span length, geologic conditions and the number of tiers, two (2) Abutment drawings must be selected,
one for each side of the river. The standard suspended cable bridge designs in this manual utilize two types of cable
anchorages: Gravity Anchors and Drum Anchors. Gravity Anchors may be used in either soil or rock conditions and rely on
self-weight for horizontal and vertical resistance. Drum Anchors are used in rock conditions and either use doweled bars
or shear capacity of the rock along with interface friction to develop resistance. Hard or fractured rock conditions must
be present for drum anchors to be used. See Volume 1, Section 4: Technical Assessment for more information on rock
classification.
Gravity Anchor abutment design drawings are broken down into 20 meter increments of span length from 40 meters up to
120 meters. For each span increment, designs are provided for one (1), two (2), and three (3) tier alternatives as well as
ground slope conditions of either (0-5°) or (5-10°). A summary of Gravity Anchor drawings found in Volume 2, Chapter 2:
Suspended Bridge Drawings is as follows:
1G-40A ONE TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR, 20-40 METER SPAN (0°-5°)

1G-120AONE TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR, 100-120 METER SPAN (0°-5°)
1G-40B ONE TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR, 20-40 METER SPAN (5°-10°)

2G-40A TWO TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR, 20-40 METER SPAN (0°-5°)

2G-40B TWO TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR, 20-40 METER SPAN (5°-10°)

3G-40A THREE TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR, 20-40 METER SPAN (0°- 5°)
3G-60A THREE TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR, 40-60 METER SPAN (0°-5°)
3G-40B THREE TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR, 20-40 METER SPAN (5°-10°)

Drum Anchor drawings are only available up to 60 meter spans. No further classification is needed as rock anchors do
not lend themselves to more than one tier due to the short distance between the anchor and the saddles as a result of
sloped rock conditions. There are two sizes of drum anchors: small (up to 40 meter spans) and large (40 - 60 meter spans).
Projects in rock with spans larger than 60 meters require design support from a qualified engineer. A summary of Drum
Anchor drawings found in Volume 2, Chapter 2: Suspended Bridge Drawings is as follows:
D1 HARD ROCK DRUM ANCHOR, 20-40 METER SPAN

D2 HARD ROCK DRUM ANCHOR, 40-60 METER SPAN
D3 SOFT ROCK DRUM ANCHOR, 20-40 METER SPAN
D4 SOFT ROCK DRUM ANCHOR, 40-60 METER SPAN
5.5 Select Cable Size and Quantity
Once span length is determined, the size and quantity of cables can be selected. Research available cable breaking strength
from the supplier or from B2P. Using the cable analysis procedures discussed in Section 4.1, calculate the maximum cable
tension. With a known cable breaking strength, the total number and size of cables can be determined utilizing a factor of
safety of 3.0 as shown in equation 4.10 in Section 4: Structural Analysis and Evaluation.
Note that for standard suspended bridges using timber crossbeams, the minimum number of walkway cables is three.
Therefore, the minimum total number of cables for any standard suspended bridge is five. The quantity and spacing of
clamps can be determined using the following table:
Table 5.1 – Clamp Number, Spacing, and Torque Requirements

Cable Diameter Number of Clamps Spacing Torque
(in.) (mm) (in.) (cm) ft-lb
3/4 19 4 5 12 130
7/8 22 4 5 13 225
1 25 5 6 14 225
1 1/8 29 6 6 15 225
1 1/4 32 7 6 16 360
1 3/8 35 7 6 16 360
1 1/2 38 8 7 18 360
5.6 Select Bridge Detail Drawings
Once the span length has been set, the abutment drawings selected, and cable size and quantity determined, the final
drawings to select are the Tower, Anchor, and Walkway Details. The Tower Details drawing details the top of abutment
tower along with cable saddles. The Anchor Details drawing provide dimensions and reinforcing details for the concrete
anchor beam. The Walkway Details drawing shows crossbeam, decking, cable spacing, suspender and fencing details for
constructing the bridge deck. One of each drawing type should be selected for the complete drawing set. A summary of
Tower Details, Anchor Details, and Walkway Details drawings found in Volume 2, Chapter 2: Suspended Bridge Drawings
are as follows:
Tower Details Anchor Details Walkway Details

T1 THREE WALKWAY CABLES A1 20-60 METER SPAN W1 TIMBER CROSSBEAM WITH NAILER
T2 FOUR WALKWAY CABLES A2 60-100 METER SPAN W2 TIMBER CROSSBEAM WITHOUT NAILER
T3 FIVE WALKWAY CABLES A3 100-120 METER SPAN
5.7 Compile Final Set of Drawings
A complete set of bridge drawings should include a Layout sheet with Plan and Elevation views along with appropriate
selected Abutment, Tower, Anchor, and Walkway drawings.
Include the following critical information on the Layout drawing.
Critical Dimensions
• Span length
• Reference to survey data
• Foundation elevations
• Depth to anchors
• Distance to back of anchor
• Freeboard from High Water Line
• Sag (design and hoisting)
• Height differential between abutments
• Cable size and quantity
1000cm 4700cm 1100cm

161cm
(2) 1"Ø HANDRAIL CABLES

PT B
PT K (3) 1"Ø HANDRAIL CABLES 155cm

HIGH WATER LINE = 100.00m
240cm
277cm
231cm
309cm
LEFT ANCHOR LEFT FOUNDATION RIGHT FOUNDATION RIGHT ANCHOR

ELEV. 101.80m ELEV. 101.30m ELEV. 102.91m ELEV. 102.41m
NOTES:
1. HOISTING SAG: 2.16m (4.60%)
f = 1.43m FROM LEFT ABUTMENT
2. DESIGN SAG = 2.35m (5.00%)
Figure 5.2 – Example Layout Drawing
Section 6 - Other Structures
In addition to the bridge itself, other structures may be required as a greater part of the entire project. Some of these other structures
may include:
• Retaining walls
• Wind guys
• Drainage
• Bank protection
This section outlines some general design criteria for each of these structures.
6.1 Retaining Walls
Retaining walls may be necessary in locations where excessive excavation into soils or fractured rock is required behind
abutments or anchorages and would become unstable if left alone. Retaining walls may be comprised of gabion baskets,
timber, dry stone, traditional masonry walls and cast-in-place concrete. Dry stone retaining walls typically are preferable as
they require only local materials and are constructed with the least amount of additional cost. Timber wall designs are also
readily available, but require subsurface drainage.
In lieu of a more rigorous analysis along with a soil study, the guidelines in Figure 6.1 can be used for dry stone retaining
wall design. Depending on the topography of the site, the slope of the walls may vary greatly. A maximum height of dry stone
wall is suggested to be no greater than three meters and used when hill slopes are no greater than 35 degrees above the
wall. Sites with greater slope angles should not be considered, as stability issues are likely.
Wt
 TOP WIDTH, Wt 0.6 - 1.0 m
BASETable
WIDTH,6.1
Wb– Retaining Wall
0.5 Design
- 0.7 m Parameters
Top Width, Wt 0.6 - 1.0 m
FRONT BATTER
Base Width, Wb varies (0.5 - 0.7) - H
REAR BATTER Front Batter varies varies
H
Rear Batter varies

Foundation Depth 0.5 m
FOUNDATION DEPTH ≥ 0.5 m
 α  35° < 35°
H <3m
1 H  3m
3
Wb
Figure 6.1 – Retaining Wall Design Parameters
6.2 Wind Guys
Wind guys are required for any span exceeding 120 meters and at bridge sites with extreme wind conditions as deemed
necessary by the design engineer. The suspended bridges herein are designed to withstand a 160 kilometer per hour (100
miles per hour) wind load without any additional lateral support. Wind guys significantly increase the cost of the bridge as
two additional cables, considerable additional cable clamps and four additional anchorages are required.
The following additional information is required when wind guys are determined to be necessary:
• Additional topographic information is needed up and downstream from the bridge center axis, typically a distance
equal to 20% of the span
• Additional geotechnical site-investigation is also required for each anchor location
A basic plan view of a wind guy system is shown in Figure 6.2. For design material on wind guy structures, see Helvetas
Trail Bridge Design Manual, and other engineering references.
WIND GUY ANCHOR
WIND TIES (TYP)
WIND GUY CABLE
Figure 6.2 – Typical Wind Guy Layout
6.3 Drainage
Slope protection and drainage systems are required

at sites when excess run-off may influence the slope
stability. We recommended avoiding sites where MASONRY WALL
instability is prevalent. If unavoidable, it is necessary to
drain out the runoff and seepage to ensure the stability of
the slope and to avoid the scouring of these structures. MEDIUM GRAVEL
Water should be collected as closely as possible to its
origin and navigated away from the bridge structures.
This may require a surface catch drain on a slope, PERFORATED
drainage around the structure, or both. DRAIN PIPE
In the areas directly affected by seepage, sub-surface FABRIC

drainage may be required around the anchorage and/ BARRIER
or foundation areas. A recommended sub-surface drain
system is shown below. If excavation finds sitting water, Figure 6.3 – Example Section of Drainage System
subsurface drainage is a must.
Additional surface drainage channels assist in redirecting unwanted surface water. To avoid scouring to the drainage
channel, additional protection in the form of protection walls and or sheeting should be considered.
6.4 Bank Protection
bridge abutment placement should be well back from river channels thereby eliminating the need for the same. River bank
accounted for during planning stages of bridge construction.
Gabion walls are generally designed as gravity structures, which use their own weight to resist earth and water pressures.
Horizontal layers of wire mesh cages may be stepped either on the front or back side depending on the required application.
An engineer is required to design the structure and specify the fill material. The fill material must have both strength and
durability to resist the effects of water and weathering. Typically, 8-25 centimeter diameter stone is specified, and if well-
graded stone-fill is specified, the volume of stone required to fill the casing is nearly the volume of the empty containers.
Section 7 - Material Estimate
The following section details material quantity take-offs. This section is intended for use only for B2P standard suspended bridges.
Additional materials may be required for modified structures.
7.1 Cable & Clamps
Select steel cable based on cable breaking strengths as outlined in Section 5: Suspended Bridge Design. Cables should be
chosen based on availability and efficiency of design. The length of each cable required can be found using the following
equation.
L cable = 1.04 $ ^ L + 14 + d left + d right h ((7.(
where:
Lcable = total length of each cable to cut, m
L = span length, m
dleft = distance from centerline of left tower saddle to back of left anchor, m
dright = distance from centerline of right tower saddle to back or right anchor, m
This is an empirical formula developed through experience in Table 7.1 – Number of Clamps Required per Cable Size
the field. 14 meters provides excess horizontal length that is Cable Diameter Number of Clamps
helpful while laying out cables (particularly with longer spans) (in.) (mm)
and provides length to account for cable sag and wrap-
3/4 19 4
back around the anchors. The distance between anchors
and towers dleft and dright are per the standard construction 7/8 22 4
drawings. An additional 4% is used as contingency. 1 25 5
1 1/8 29 6
The quantity of clamps per cable is dependent on the size 1 1/4 32 7
of the cable. Refer to the manufacture’s specifications to 1 3/8 35 7
choose the appropriate number of clamps.
1 1/2 38 8
7.2 Steel Reinforcement Bar
Rebar quantities are specified in the standard construction drawings with the exception of the bar needed for the suspenders.
When estimating the number of reinforcing bars required on a project, it is important to consider the available length of bars
in the region in which materials are being purchased. Reinforcing bars should be Grade 280 (40 ksi). Sourcing reinforcing
and verifying strength and durability is important as there are bars available made from materials other than steel that are
very brittle.
7.3 Decking
Bridges to Prosperity’s standard designs use wood crossbeams, nailers and decking. The quantity of crossbeams (and
nailers if applicable) will be one more than the nominal bridge span. The quantity of decking boards can be estimated
based on the nominal bridge span. The increased length of the deck due to sag does not need to be considered as it will
be covered by the contingency.
7.4 Concrete and Masonry
Concrete quantities for tier and tower construction are specified in the standard construction drawings. The concrete
required for the ramp cap is variable and must be calculated per the final design. Refer to the Chapter 3, Section 5: Concrete
and Masonry for concrete mixing ratios to determine the quantities of sand, gravel, and cement.
The amount of cement used in masonry construction can be highly variable as it depends on several factors including the
masonry techniques used, the size and shape of rocks available, and whether or not formwork is used. The size of the ramp
walls and cap will depend not only on the design of the bridge, but the topographical features of the sites. When calculating
the amount of cement to be used in masonry construction it is best to consult with the local builder that will be working on
the project.
A general estimate of the cement required for stone masonry wall construction in tiers and ramp walls can be made by
assuming (4) 42.5 kilogram bags per cubic meter of wall to be constructed. Additional cement will be required for slurry
within the tiers and ramps. An estimate of the amount of cement to be used for slurry can be estimated as 20% of the
cement to be used in the stone masonry wall construction. The amount of sand to be used in the mortar and slurry should
be calculated using the proportions specified in Chapter 3, Section 5: Concrete and Masonry.
7.5 Other Materials
Quantities for additional miscellaneous materials must be calculated. An example of this can be found in Table 7.2.
Table 7.2 – Other Material Quantities

Material Quantity
Sand Varies based on design
Gravel Varies based on design
Masonry block / bricks / stone Varies based on design
Wheel cable saddle 4 pieces
Roofing tar 1 gallon
75mm ø Flexible plastic tubing* 250cm per cable
50mm ø Flexible plastic tubing* 110cm per cable
Tie wire 10kg
Lag screw: 10mm x 7.5cm long 5-6 per deck panel + 4 per crossbeam if using nailer
Lag screw: 10mm x 5cm long 12 if center cable is used
20cm x 5cm x 10cm wood cable guide 6 if center cable used
Fencing: 1.20m (4’) tall Bridge span x 2
Galvanized tie wire 5kg
U-nails/Staples 1kg per 10 linear meters
*Reinforced tubing, often found at plumbing stores, is best suited for cable conduits.
7.6 Contingency
As with any material estimation, it is best practice to include a contingency to prevent a shortage of materials on site and
subsequent delay in construction. B2P recommends a 10% contingency for all materials. A larger contingency should be
applied to steel reinforcing bar estimates if the length of available bar is not accounted for in the initial estimates.
The following is a design example for a suspended bridge using AutoCAD and the Bridges to Prosperity standard construction
drawings. The provided information in the technical survey shows a gorge or valley type terrain with soils at foundation locations on
both sides of the river.
Using the survey information, draw the ground profile in AutoCAD. Verify the soil slopes do not exceed 10 degrees where
foundations may be placed and expected span length is not greater than 120 meters.
4500cm
°
8.96
BM1
PT M PT A
PT L PT B
PT C
PT K
PT J
5.00°
HWL PT D
PT H PT E
PT G PT F
Figure 8.1 – Groundline Profile
8.2 Determine Tower Foundation Locations and Sizes
SETBACK
Sketch the setback requirements for soil conditions.
• 3.0 meters from the top of bank

• 35° from the bottom of bank or any point along bank
In Figure 8.2, the left foundation is governed by the three meter setback and the right foundation is governed by the 35°
setback.
300cm
300cm
HIGH WATER LINE

35°
35°
Figure 8.2 – Survey profile with setback requirements shown
DIFFERENCE IN HEIGHT
Place foundations on both sides behind the setback requirement and select the number of tiers based on the difference in
height (ΔH) limit of Span/25. With a single tier on the higher, right foundation, two tiers are required on the left as shown in
Figure 8.3. Note that foundation size increases with additional tiers, and remember to place the entire foundation behind
the setback requirement.
25
1
Figure 8.3 – Survey profile with tiers selected to satisfy setback and ΔH
FREEBOARD
For the given profile, a freeboard of three meters is required. Using trial and error, add tiers and shift the foundations up the
slopes until the appropriate freeboard is obtained. The dead load cable sag value shall be 5% of span length. During this
process, make sure that neither the ΔH requirement nor the maximum span length are violated. Figure 8.4 and Figure 8.5
show different foundation alternatives that both satisfy freeboard requirements.
29cm
4200cm
307cm
291cm
62cm
161cm
4700cm 340cm
6°
8.9
2.6

9°
340cm
309cm
291cm
130cm
Use the option shown in Figure 8.5 for design as it has a slightly lower total volume of abutments, and the lower number of
tiers is safer to construct.
To calculate the freeboard mathematically:
 Bridge Layout
Span, L = 47.00 m ( 154.2 ft )
Deck Width = 1.00 m ( 3.28 ft )
Terrain Type = Valley
Left Foundation Elevation = 101.30 m ( 332.3 ft )
Right Foundation Elevation = 102.91 m ( 337.6 ft )
High Water Elevation, HWL = 100.00 m
No. of Tiers on Left = 2
No. of Tiers on Right = 2
 Check Height Difference

Max Height Difference = L 25 = 47/25 = 1.88 m
Height Difference (ΔH ) = 1.61 m (measured via CAD)
= 1.61 m ≤ 1.88 m OKAY
 Check Freeboard
Sag %, B d = 5%
Height Difference (ΔH ) = 1.61 m
Dead Load Sag (h Sag ) = Bd * L = 5%*47 = 2.35 m
(4 * h )
2
Distance to Lowest Point of Cable (f ) = sag
- DH = 1.61 m
16* hsag
Actual Freeboard (F b ) = Elev WalkwayCable (at lower tower's saddle CL) - f - HWL
Actual Freeboard (F b ) = 104.7 - 1.61 - 100
= 3.09 m ≥ 2.00 m OKAY
8.3 Select Abutment Drawings
Abutment drawings selected for this bridge design:
Left Abutment - 2G-60B TWO TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR 40-60 METER SPAN (5-10°)
Right Abutment - 2G-60A TWO TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR 40-60 METER SPAN (0-5°)
To select the size and quantity of cables, first calculate the load demand on the cables. Using a one meter wide walkway
width, the distributed load can be determined:
 Dead Load (DL ) DL = 100.0 kg/m ( 67.2 lb/ft )

æ 4.57 ö
 Live Load (LL ) LL = 415 * ç 0.25 + ÷ = 380.4 kg/m ( 255.6 lb/ft )
è Lø
 Total Distributed Load wc = DL + LL = 480.4 kg/m ( 322.8 lb/ft )
 Cable Sag Values

Dead
= Load Sag (h DL ) = 5% * 47 2.35 m ( 7.71 ft )
Live Load Sag (h LL )
= =
6.12% * 47 2.88 m ( 9.44 ft )
 Main Span Cable Geometry (Fully Loaded)

æ 4 * h - DH ö
Left Tower
= to low point, X Left =
L *ç sag
÷ 20.21 m ( 66.31 ft )
ç 8*h ÷
è sag ø
( )
2
4 * hsag - DH
Left Tower
= to low point, Y Left = 2.13 m ( 6.98 ft )
16 * hsag
æ 4 * h - DH ö
Left Tower=
Cable Angle, θ Left tan -1 çç
=
sag
÷÷ 11.89 deg ( 0.208 rad )
è L ø
æ 4 * h + DH ö
Right Tower=
to low point, X Right L * çç
= sag
÷
÷ 26.79 m ( 87.89 ft )
è 8 * hsag ø
( 4 * h + DH )
2
Right Tower=
to low point, Y Right = sag
3.74 m ( 12.26 ft )
16 * hsag
æ 4 * h + DH ö
Right Tower =
Cable Angle, θ Right =
tan -1 çç sag
÷÷ 15.59 deg ( 0.272 rad )
è L ø
 Cable Force Analysis

w c * L2
Horizontal Tension, Ph MTotal = = 452.4 kN ( 101,703 lb )
8 * hsag
Left Vertical Tension, Pv MTotal = Ph MTotal * tan q Left = 95.2 kN ( 21,413 lb )

Ph MTotal
Left Axial Tension, Pt MTotal = = 462.3 kN ( 103,933 lb )
cosq Left
Right Vertical Tension, Pv MTotal = Ph MTotal * tan q Right = 126.2 kN ( 28,381 lb )

Ph MTotal
Right Axial Tension, Pt MTotal = = 469.7 kN ( 105,589 lb )
cosq Right
Maximum Cable Tension, P r = 470 kN ( 105,589 lb )
For this project, 1” diameter and 1 ¼” diameter cables are available with breaking strengths of 386 kN and 585 kN,
respectively. The required cable safety factor is 3.0. The minimum total number of cables for this bridge is 5 (2 handrail and
3 walkway).
 Cable Selection
Currently available cable: Diameter Breaking Strength

1" 386 kN
1 1/4" 585 kN
Determine the number of cables required for each cable diameter:
Pr * FS
Number of Cables Required, C r =
BreakingStrength
470 *3.0
=1" = 3.65
386.0
470 *3.0
=
1 1/4" = 2.41
585.0
The minimum number of cables (5) controls for both 1” and 1 ¼” diameter cable. Since both cables have sufficient strength,
select the 1” diameter cable.
 Cable Safety Factor

# Cables Size Strength Capacity
Handrail = 2 1 in. 386 kN 772 kN ( 173,553 lb )
Walkway = 3 1 in. 386 kN 1158 kN ( 260,329 lb )
Maximum Cable Capacity, P n = 1930 kN ( 433,881 lb )
Pn (Maximum Cable Capacity) 1930

Factor of Safety
= = = 4.11
Pr (Maximum Cable Tension) 470
= 4.11 > 3.00 OKAY
8.5 Select Bridge Detail Drawings
With the foundation locations set, number of tiers chosen, and size and quantity of cables selected, standard construction
drawings can be compiled and a Bridge Layout drawing can be completed.
Drawings selected for this bridge design:
A1 ANCHOR DETAILS, 20-60 METER SPAN

T1 TOWER DETAILS, THREE WALKWAY CABLES
W2 WALKWAY DETAILS, TIMBER CROSSBEAM WITHOUT NAILER
1000cm 4700cm 1100cm
161cm (2) 1"Ø HANDRAIL CABLES

PT B
PT K (3) 1"Ø HANDRAIL CABLES 155cm

240cm
277cm
231cm
309cm
LEFT ANCHOR LEFT FOUNDATION RIGHT FOUNDATION RIGHT ANCHOR

ELEV. 101.80m ELEV. 101.30m ELEV. 102.91m ELEV. 102.41m
Figure 8.6 – Final design with standard abutments NOTES:
2. DESIGN SAG = 2.35m (5.00%)
Chapter 2
Construction Drawings
Introduction
Please note: Standard drawings are not included in the public version of this text in order to make it necessary for bridge builders
to reach out to Bridges to Prosperity, or other qualified partners, for training and additional support prior to beginning a bridge
project. Bridges to Prosperity is eager to provide technical assistance and training to help ensure the successful and safe
completion of bridge projects throughout the world. For more information, please send an email to info@bridgestoprosperity.org.
-
A
900cm ℄ SADDLE
40cm 60cm
10cm 280cm
(TYP) ℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
50cm
CONCRETE CAP
100cm
30cm (TYP)
350cm
25cm 40cm STONE MASONRY
0°-5°
(TYP)
100cm
(TYP) WALLS
SLOPE
GL GL
100cm
30cm
BACKWALL
ROCK/GROUT FILL
200cm
100cm
100cm
90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm
230cm 320cm
SEE ANCHOR BOTTOM OF STONE ROCK/GROUT FILL
DETAILS SHEET MASONRY WALL
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B ℄ SADDLE 300cm
150cm ℄ BRIDGE
10cm
CONCRETE CAP
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
STONE MASONRY WALL WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES.
2. PROVIDE DRAINAGE BEHIND ANCHOR WITH SIDE OUTLET IN CASE OF SEEPAGE.
COPYRIGHT: MATERIAL FROM THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE FREELY QUOTED, TRANSLATED OR OTHERWISE USED. WHEN USED BY
Produced by: THOSE NOT EMPLOYED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, NOTICE OF SUCH USE MUST BE MADE BY EMAIL TO CONTACT FOUND AT: ABUTMENT DETAILS
WWW.BRDIGESTOPROSPERITY.ORG/CONTACT
Bridges to Prosperity ONE TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR
1031 33rd Street, Suite 170 DISCLAIMER: THE CALCULATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS IN THE PLAN ARE NOT ATTRIBUTABLE TO BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY AND 20-40 METER SPAN (0-5°)
ANYONE USING THIS PLAN SHOULD VERIFY THE CALCULATIONS ACCORDING TO SITE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS AND LOCAL
Denver, CO 80205 STANDARDS. ALL USING THE MANUAL AGREE TO HOLD BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY HARMLESS TO ANY AND ALL LIABILITY. DRAWING NUMBER
Revision : September 2016 EDITED AND PUBLISHED BY: BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, INC., 2016 1G-40A
-
A
1000cm ℄ SADDLE
40cm 60cm 10cm 280cm

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
CONCRETE CAP DETAILS SHEET
30cm (TYP)
100cm
25cm 40cm
350cm
STONE MASONRY
0°-5°
(TYP) (TYP)
SLOPE
GL GL WALLS
30cm
150cm
BACKWALL
100cm 100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
250cm
90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm
100cm
230cm 320cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B 300cm
℄ SADDLE
150cm ℄ BRIDGE CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1100cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
30cm (TYP)
100cm
25cm 40cm
350cm
0°-5°
(TYP) (TYP) STONE MASONRY
SLOPE
GL GL WALLS
170cm
30cm
100cm 100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
BACKWALL
300cm
90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm
230cm 320cm
130cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
BOTTOM OF STONE
SEE ANCHOR MASONRY WALL
DETAILS SHEET
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B 300cm
℄ SADDLE ℄ BRIDGE
150cm CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1200cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
30cm (TYP)
100cm
25cm 40cm
0°-5°
350cm
SLOPE
GL GL WALLS
100cm 100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
220cm
30cm
BACKWALL 90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm
350cm
230cm 320cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
130cm
BOTTOM OF STONE
MASONRY WALL
SEE ANCHOR
DETAILS SHEET
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B 300cm
150cm CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1400cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
50cm
30cm (TYP)
25cm 40cm
0°-5°
350cm
STONE MASONRY
SLOPE
(TYP) (TYP)
GL GL WALLS
250cm
30cm
100cm 100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
BACKWALL
400cm
90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm
230cm 320cm
150cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
BOTTOM OF STONE
DETAILS SHEET
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B 300cm
150cm CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1000cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
CONCRETE CAP, SEE TOWER
CROWN FOR DRAINAGE
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
5°-10°
SLOPE
30cm (TYP)
25cm 40cm
30cm
350cm
150cm
BACKWALL GL GL WALLS
250cm
100cm
100cm 100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm

DETAILS SHEET MASONRY WALL 230cm 320cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B 300cm
150cm CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
Revision : September 2016 EDITED AND PUBLISHED BY: BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, INC., 2016 1G-40B
-
A
1100cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
CONCRETE CAP,
CROWN FOR DRAINAGE SEE TOWER
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
5°-10°
SLOPE
30cm (TYP)
25cm 40cm
350cm
30cm (TYP) (TYP) STONE MASONRY
200cm
300cm
100cm 100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
100cm
90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm
SEE ANCHOR BOTTOM OF STONE ROCK/GROUT FILL 230cm 320cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B 300cm
150cm CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1200cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
CONCRETE CAP, ℄ BRIDGE
CROWN FOR DRAINAGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
5°-10°
SLOPE
30cm (TYP)
25cm 40cm
350cm
30cm (TYP) (TYP) STONE MASONRY
220cm
350cm
100cm 100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm
130cm
230cm 320cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B 300cm
150cm CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1300cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
CROWN FOR DRAINAGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
5°-10°
SLOPE
DETAILS SHEET
30cm (TYP)
25cm 40cm
350cm
GL GL WALLS
270cm
30cm
BACKWALL
400cm
100cm 100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm

230cm 320cm
130cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
BOTTOM OF STONE
DETAILS SHEET
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B 300cm
150cm CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1400cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
CROWN FOR DRAINAGE
SEE TOWER
5°-10°
SLOPE
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
30cm (TYP)
25cm 40cm
350cm
GL GL WALLS
300cm
30cm
100cm 100cm
BACKWALL ROCK/GROUT FILL
450cm
90cm 140cm 160cm 160cm
230cm 320cm
150cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
BOTTOM OF STONE
DETAILS SHEET
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B 300cm
150cm CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
GL
300cm
VARIES
STONE MASONRY
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1000cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
25cm 40cm 30cm (TYP)
150cm
450cm
WALLS
30cm
0°-5°
SLOPE
BACKWALL
GL GL
200cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
100cm 100cm
100cm 100cm 100cm
115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B
℄ SADDLE 150cm ℄ BRIDGE CONCRETE CAP
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
100cm
50cm
(TYP)
300cm
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL STONE MASONRY

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
Bridges to Prosperity TWO TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR
-
A
1100cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
150cm
450cm
WALLS
30cm
0°-5°
SLOPE
BACKWALL GL GL
150cm
250cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
100cm 100cm 100cm
100cm
115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
100cm
50cm
(TYP)
300cm
GL
VARIES

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1100cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
150cm
450cm
WALLS
30cm
0°-5°
SLOPE
BACKWALL
120cm
GL GL
250cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
100cm 100cm 100cm
130cm
115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
100cm
50cm
(TYP)
300cm
GL
VARIES

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1200cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
150cm
450cm
WALLS
30cm
0°-5°
SLOPE
BACKWALL GL GL
170cm
300cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
100cm 100cm 100cm
115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm
130cm
295cm 340cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
100cm
50cm
(TYP)
300cm
GL
VARIES

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1300cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
150cm
450cm
WALLS
0°-5°
SLOPE
GL GL
200cm
30cm
BACKWALL 100cm 100cm 100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
350cm
115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm
150cm
295cm 340cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
BOTTOM OF STONE
DETAILS SHEET -
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
100cm
50cm
(TYP)
300cm
GL
VARIES

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
900cm ℄ SADDLE
40cm 60cm
10cm 280cm
(TYP) ℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
50cm
100cm
5°-10°
SLOPE
(TYP)
100cm
30cm (TYP) STONE MASONRY
WALLS
450cm
BACKWALL
100cm
200cm
100cm
GL GL
100cm
100cm
SEE ANCHOR BOTTOM OF STONE ROCK/GROUT FILL ROCK/GROUT FILL

115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm
50cm
295cm 340cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
-
B ℄ SADDLE 300cm
150cm ℄ BRIDGE
10cm
CONCRETE CAP
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
100cm
(TYP)
300cm
50cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1000cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
50cm
5°-10°
30cm
SLOPE
BACKWALL (TYP) (TYP) STONE MASONRY
450cm
150cm
WALLS
250cm
GL GL
100cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
100cm 100cm 100cm
DETAILS SHEET MASONRY WALL 115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm
50cm
295cm 340cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
100cm
50cm
(TYP)
300cm
GL
VARIES

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1100cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
50cm
5°-10°
SLOPE
30cm 25cm 40cm 30cm (TYP)
BACKWALL (TYP) (TYP) STONE MASONRY
450cm
170cm
WALLS
300cm
GL GL
130cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
100cm 100cm 100cm
115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
100cm
50cm
(TYP)
300cm
GL
VARIES

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1200cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
50cm
5°-10°
SLOPE
450cm
WALLS
30cm
220cm
BACKWALL
GL GL
350cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
100cm 100cm 100cm
130cm
115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
100cm
50cm
(TYP)
300cm
GL
VARIES

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1300cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
SEE TOWER
50cm
50cm
5°-10°
SLOPE
450cm
WALLS
30cm
250cm
BACKWALL GL GL
400cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
100cm 100cm 100cm
115cm 180cm 170cm 170cm
150cm
295cm 340cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B
10cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
100cm
50cm
(TYP)
300cm
GL
VARIES

WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1200cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
30cm (TYP)
CONCRETE CAP
STONE MASONRY
250cm
WALLS
25cm 40cm
550cm
(TYP) (TYP) ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
0°-5°
SLOPE
BACKWALL
GL GL
200cm
100cm 100cm
100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm
140cm 220cm 180cm 180cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
B 150cm ℄ BRIDGE CONCRETE CAP
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
Bridges to Prosperity THREE TIER GRAVITY ANCHOR
-
A
1300cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
30cm (TYP)
CONCRETE CAP STONE MASONRY
250cm
WALLS
25cm 40cm
550cm
0°-5°
30cm
SLOPE
BACKWALL
GL GL
150cm
250cm
100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm
100cm
140cm 220cm 180cm 180cm
360cm 360cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1300cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP 30cm (TYP)

STONE MASONRY
250cm
WALLS
25cm 40cm
550cm
0°-5°
30cm
SLOPE
BACKWALL
120cm
GL GL
250cm
100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm
130cm
140cm 220cm 180cm 180cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1400cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
30cm (TYP)
CONCRETE CAP STONE MASONRY
250cm
WALLS
25cm 40cm
550cm
0°-5°
30cm
SLOPE
BACKWALL
GL GL
170cm
300cm
100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm
140cm 220cm 180cm 180cm
130cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL 360cm 360cm
SEE ANCHOR BOTTOM OF STONE
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1500cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
30cm (TYP)
CONCRETE CAP
STONE MASONRY
250cm
WALLS
25cm 40cm
550cm
0°-5°
30cm
SLOPE
BACKWALL
GL GL
200cm
100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm
350cm
140cm 220cm 180cm 180cm
150cm
360cm 360cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL
SEE ANCHOR BOTTOM OF STONE
DETAILS SHEET MASONRY WALL -
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1000cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
30cm (TYP)
150cm
STONE MASONRY
WALLS
5°-10°
SLOPE
30cm 25cm 40cm
550cm
BACKWALL (TYP) (TYP) ROCK/GROUT FILL
200cm
100cm 100cm
GL GL

100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm

140cm 220cm 180cm 180cm
360cm 360cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1100cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
30cm (TYP)
150cm
STONE MASONRY
WALLS
5°-10°
SLOPE
30cm 25cm 40cm
550cm
150cm
250cm
GL GL
100cm
100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm

50cm
360cm 360cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1100cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
30cm (TYP)
150cm
STONE MASONRY
WALLS
5°-10°
30cm
SLOPE
25cm 40cm
550cm
BACKWALL ROCK/GROUT FILL
(TYP) (TYP)
120cm
250cm
GL GL
130cm
100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm

50cm
360cm 360cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1200cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
30cm (TYP)
150cm
STONE MASONRY
5°-10°
SLOPE
WALLS
30cm 25cm 40cm
550cm
170cm
300cm
GL GL
130cm
100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm
140cm 220cm 180cm 180cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A
1300cm ℄ SADDLE

(TYP)
℄ BRIDGE
50cm
SEE TOWER
DETAILS SHEET
CONCRETE CAP
30cm (TYP)
150cm
STONE MASONRY
5°-10°
SLOPE
WALLS
25cm 40cm
550cm
30cm
200cm
BACKWALL
GL GL
350cm
100cm 100cm 100cm 100cm
150cm
140cm 220cm 180cm 180cm

-
ELEVATION SECTION A
- 300cm
10cm
℄ SADDLE
ROCK/GROUT FILL
30cm
(TYP)
50cm
(TYP)
100cm 100cm
300cm
70cm
(TYP)
GL
VARIES
STONE MASONRY WALL

STONE MASONRY
WALL (TYP)
-
PLAN SECTION B
NOTES:
-
A BILL OF MATERIALS
REINFORCING BARS (PER ANCHOR)
℄ INNER DRUM ℄ SADDLE ℄ BRIDGE BAR SIZE LENGTH LENGTH
320cm (MIN.) NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
40cm 60cm 10cm 280cm A01 25 (#8) 165 16 26.4
(TYP) A02 16 (#5) 280 1 2.8
150cm
(RAMP SLOPE) A03 10 (#3) 525 3 15.8
ROCK/GROUT FILL SEE TOWER A04 10 (#3) 337 3 10.1
10cm CONCRETE CAP DETAILS SHEET
25cm
40cm ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 1.21m3
50cm
250cm
80cm
60cm
30cm (TYP)
STONE MASONRY
60cm
WALL
100cm
15cm
BOTTOM OF
20cm
EXCAVATION ROCK/GROUT FILL
110cm
150cm 150cm
65cm 100cm 135cm
300cm
SEE DETAIL 1 165cm
OR A02
AL F A.
- M ANU ND SP
ELEVATION SECTION A SEE NO. A
MP )
CLA (TYP
160cm
60c
mL
100cm
14
AP
8c
m
50cm ℄ INNER DRUM 20cm OUTER DRUM

(SECOND STAGE)
A02 ERECTION HOOK
OUTER DRUM MIDDLE CABLE WOUND
ONCE AROUND INNER DRUM ℄ SADDLE
INNER DRUM AND CLAMPED TO ITSELF (3) A04 SPA. WITH A03 A03
DROP-FORGED CABLE
50mm Ø PLASTIC TUBE CLAMP (TYP)
(TYP)
60
cm
INNER DRUM 88
LA
cm
(3) A03
(FIRST STAGE)
P
SPA. @ 20cm
300cm
25mm Ø ANCHOR RODS
TO BE GROUTED IN
CEMENT MORTAR 1:1 A04
INNER DRUM RODS 85cmØ

(8 TOTAL)
A02 ERECTION HOOK EACH CABLE END TO BE WOUND
ONCE AROUND THE OUTER DRUM AND OUTER DRUM RODS 145cmØ
CLAMPED WITH SECOND CABLE (7 TOTAL)
WALL
PLAN DETAIL 1
30cm (TYP)
NOTES:
STONE MASONRY
3. 50mm CLEAR COVER SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL REINFORCING.
4. ERECTION HOOK AND TUBING OPTIONAL FOR NON-ADJUSTABLE SIDE.
Produced by: THOSE NOT EMPLOYED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, NOTICE OF SUCH USE MUST BE MADE BY EMAIL TO CONTACT FOUND AT: ANCHOR DETAILS
Bridges to Prosperity HARD ROCK DRUM ANCHOR
1031 33rd Street, Suite 170 DISCLAIMER: THE CALCULATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS IN THE PLAN ARE NOT ATTRIBUTABLE TO BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY AND 20-40 METER SPAN
Revision : September 2016 EDITED AND PUBLISHED BY: BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, INC., 2016 D1
-
A BILL OF MATERIALS
(mm) (cm) (m)
40cm 60cm 10cm 280cm A01 25 (#8) 165 20 33.0
(TYP) A02 16 (#5) 320 1 3.2
150cm
(RAMP SLOPE) A03 10 (#3) 588 3 17.6
25cm
40cm ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 1.53m3
50cm
250cm
80cm
60cm
30cm (TYP)
STONE MASONRY
60cm
WALL
100cm
15cm
BOTTOM OF
20cm
110cm
150cm 150cm
65cm 100cm 155cm
300cm
SEE DETAIL 1 165cm
OR A02
- AL F A.
ELEVATION SECTION E M ANU ND SP
A
A SE N O.
MP (TYP)
180cm CLA
60c
mL
125cm
16
AP
8c
m
62.5cm ℄ INNER DRUM 20cm OUTER DRUM

(SECOND STAGE)
A02 ERECTION HOOK
INNER DRUM AND CLAMPED TO ITSELF (3) A04 SPA. WITH A03 A03
DROP-FORGED CABLE
(TYP)
60
cm
INNER DRUM 11
LA
3c
(3) A03
(FIRST STAGE) m
P
SPA. @ 20cm
300cm
25mm Ø ANCHOR RODS
TO BE GROUTED IN
CEMENT MORTAR 1:1 A04
INTERIOR RODS 50cmØ

(4 TOTAL)
A02 ERECTION HOOK EACH CABLE END TO BE WOUND (8 TOTAL)
WALL
PLAN DETAIL 1
30cm (TYP)
NOTES:
STONE MASONRY
Bridges to Prosperity HARD ROCK DRUM ANCHOR
-
A BILL OF MATERIALS
(mm) (cm) (m)
40cm 60cm 10cm 280cm A01 25 (#8) 165 16 26.4
(TYP) A02 16 (#5) 280 1 2.8
150cm
(RAMP SLOPE) A03 10 (#3) 525 8 42.0
25cm
40cm ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 3.42m3
50cm
250cm
80cm
60cm
30cm (TYP)
STONE MASONRY
60cm
WALL
100cm
15cm
BOTTOM OF
20cm
110cm
150cm 150cm
65cm 100cm 135cm
300cm
SEE DETAIL 1 165cm
OR A02
AL F A.
- M ANU ND SP
ELEVATION SECTION A SEE NO. A
MP )
CLA (TYP
160cm
60c
mL
100cm
14
AP
8c
m
50cm ℄ INNER DRUM 20cm OUTER DRUM

(SECOND STAGE)
A02 ERECTION HOOK
INNER DRUM AND CLAMPED TO ITSELF A03
DROP-FORGED CABLE
(TYP)
60
cm
INNER DRUM 88
LA
(FIRST STAGE) cm
P
(8) A03 SPA. @ 20cm
300cm
A04 SPA.
WITH A03
25mm Ø ANCHOR RODS
A04
85cm
20cm
INNER DRUM RODS

(8 TOTAL)
A02 ERECTION HOOK EACH CABLE END TO BE WOUND
ONCE AROUND THE OUTER DRUM AND OUTER DRUM RODS 145cm
WALL
PLAN DETAIL 1
30cm (TYP)
NOTES:
STONE MASONRY
Bridges to Prosperity SOFT ROCK DRUM ANCHOR
-
A BILL OF MATERIALS
(mm) (cm) (m)
40cm 60cm 10cm 280cm A01 25 (#8) 165 20 33.0
(TYP) A02 16 (#5) 320 1 3.2
150cm
(RAMP SLOPE) A03 10 (#3) 588 8 47.0
25cm
40cm ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 4.33m3
50cm
250cm
80cm
60cm
30cm (TYP)
STONE MASONRY
60cm
WALL
100cm
15cm
BOTTOM OF
20cm
110cm
150cm 150cm
65cm 100cm 155cm
300cm
SEE DETAIL 1 165cm
OR A02
- AL F A.
ELEVATION SECTION E M ANU ND SP
A
A SE N O.
MP (TYP)
180cm CLA
60c
mL
125cm
16
AP
8c
m
62.5cm ℄ INNER DRUM 20cm OUTER DRUM

(SECOND STAGE)
A02 ERECTION HOOK
INNER DRUM AND CLAMPED TO ITSELF A03
DROP-FORGED CABLE
(TYP)
60
cm
INNER DRUM 11
LA
3c
(FIRST STAGE) m
P
(8) A03 SPA. @ 20cm
300cm
A04 SPA.
WITH A03
25mm Ø ANCHOR RODS
A04
INTERIOR RODS 50cmØ

(4 TOTAL)
20cm

A02 ERECTION HOOK EACH CABLE END TO BE WOUND (8 TOTAL)
WALL
PLAN DETAIL 1
30cm (TYP)
NOTES:
STONE MASONRY
Bridges to Prosperity SOFT ROCK DRUM ANCHOR
NOTES: BILL OF MATERIALS
1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR REINFORCING BARS (PER TOWER)
CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES.
BAR SIZE LENGTH LENGTH
2. 7.5cm CLEAR COVER SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL REINFORCING. NAME QUANTITY
3. CONSTRUCTION STAGES: (mm) (cm) (m)
℄ BRIDGE 16 (#5)
STAGE 1 - BASE LEVEL MASONRY PERIMETER FILLED WITH CONCRETE. T01 413 4 16.5
& SYMMETRY
STAGE 2 - CONSTRUCT TOWERS IN LIFTS OF 20-40cm. 10 (#3)
T02 170 8 13.6
STAGE 3 - CAST WALKWAY HUMP AND STAB T03 CABLE GUIDE BARS.
STAGE 4 - CAST WALKWAY TOPPING SLAB OVER SLEEVED CABLES. T03 10 (#3) 15 6 0.9
RIVER
40cm 42cm 58cm 58cm 42cm 40cm
ITEM QUANTITY
CABLE SADDLE (TYP) CONCRETE 1.08m3
PLASTIC HOSE x 110cm 3
60cm
15cm
100cm
℄ SADDLE
40cm
50cm
15cm
15cm
105cm
ANCHOR
210cm 25cm
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
HANDRAIL
WALKWAY
WALKWAY
WALKWAY
HANDRAIL
T01 T02 T03
PLAN
70cm (MIN.)
T02
℄ BRIDGE
& SYMMETRY - ℄ SADDLE MASONRY
B PERIMETER
T01 (TYP)
40cm
(MIN.)
280cm 100cm
40cm 30cm 70cm 70cm 30cm 40cm ANCHOR 40cm 60cm RIVER
WHEEL CABLE -
SADDLE (TYP) SECTION D
5cm
- ANCHOR ℄ SADDLE RIVER
C T01
8cm 40cm 60cm
- 50mm Ø PLASTIC HOSE,
4cm 50cm
10cm
T02 (TYP) D 110cm LONG (TYP. EA. CABLE)
150cm
STAGE 4 T03
120cm
STAGE 4
20cm
(4) T02, EQ. SPA.
STAGE 2
STAGE 2 STAGE 3
STAGE 1 STAGE 1
5cm
STAGE 2 STAGE 1 STAGE 3 T03 CABLE GUIDES (TYP) T01 T01 (TYP)
20cm
CLR.
MASONRY PERIMETER
7.5cm
- - -
SECTION A SECTION B SECTION C
Produced by: THOSE NOT EMPLOYED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, NOTICE OF SUCH USE MUST BE MADE BY EMAIL TO CONTACT FOUND AT:
WWW.BRDIGESTOPROSPERITY.ORG/CONTACT TOWER DETAILS
1031 33rd Street, Suite 170 DISCLAIMER: THE CALCULATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS IN THE PLAN ARE NOT ATTRIBUTABLE TO BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY AND
THREE WALKWAY CABLES
Revision : September 2016 EDITED AND PUBLISHED BY: BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, INC., 2016 T1
℄ BRIDGE 16 (#5)
& SYMMETRY
2.5cm 2.5cm T02 170 8 13.6
RIVER
40cm 42cm 55.5cm 55.5cm 42cm 40cm
ITEM QUANTITY
60cm
15cm
100cm
℄ SADDLE
40cm
50cm
15cm
15cm
105cm
ANCHOR
210cm 25cm
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLES
HANDRAIL
WALKWAY
WALKWAY
WALKWAY
HANDRAIL
T01 T02 T03
PLAN
70cm (MIN.)
T02
℄ BRIDGE
B PERIMETER
T01 (TYP)
40cm
(MIN.)
280cm 100cm
WHEEL CABLE -
5cm
C T01
8cm 40cm 60cm
6.5cm 47.5cm
10cm
150cm
STAGE 4 T03
120cm
STAGE 4
20cm
(4) T02, EQ. SPA.
STAGE 2
STAGE 2 STAGE 3
STAGE 1 STAGE 1
5cm
20cm
CLR.
MASONRY PERIMETER
7.5cm
- - -
FOUR WALKWAY CABLES
℄ BRIDGE 16 (#5)
& SYMMETRY
5cm 5cm T02 170 8 13.6
RIVER
40cm 37cm 58cm 58cm 37cm 40cm
ITEM QUANTITY
60cm
15cm
100cm
℄ SADDLE
40cm
50cm
15cm
15cm
105cm
ANCHOR
210cm 25cm
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLES
CABLES
HANDRAIL
WALKWAY
WALKWAY
WALKWAY
HANDRAIL
T01 T02 T03
PLAN
70cm (MIN.)
T02
℄ BRIDGE
B PERIMETER
T01 (TYP)
40cm
(MIN.)
280cm 100cm
WHEEL CABLE -
5cm
C T01
13cm 40cm 60cm
4cm 50cm
10cm
150cm
STAGE 4 T03
120cm
STAGE 4
20cm
(4) T02, EQ. SPA.
STAGE 2
STAGE 2 STAGE 3
STAGE 1 STAGE 1
5cm
20cm
CLR.
MASONRY PERIMETER
7.5cm
- - -
FIVE WALKWAY CABLES
BILL OF MATERIALS
A01 (TYP) REINFORCING BARS (PER ANCHOR)
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
SEE MANUAL FOR A01 19 (#6) 285 4 11.4
50cm
CLAMP NO. AND SPA.
A02 16 (#5) 220 3 6.6
A03 13 (#4) 225 10 22.5
ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 2.85m3
FLEXIBLE PLASTIC TUBING x 250cm VARIES
-
A
℄ BRIDGE
300cm
& SYMMETRY
(30cm MINIMUM)
15cm
(10) A03 SPA. @ 30cm

SPACE CABLES EVENLY ALONG BEAM
90cm
A02 (ERECTION HOOK) REFER TO LAYOUT SHEET FOR
50cm
SPA. AS SHOWN WITH A03 CABLE SIZE AND QUANTITY
20cm 20cm
15cm
(TYP)
PLAN A02
m
100c IL
TA 20cm
MIN.
80cm
50cm
50cm
DROP-FORGED CABLE CLAMP (TYP)

20cm
A02 (ERECTION HOOK) 50cm
100cm
23cm
75mm Ø FLEXIBLE PLASTIC TUBING,
250cm LONG (TYP. EA. CABLE)
A03
A01 (TYP)
33cm A03
NOTES:
110cm 1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR
2. 7.5cm CLEAR COVER SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL REINFORCING AND
- PLASTIC TUBING.
SECTION A 3. ERECTION HOOK AND TUBING OPTIONAL FOR ANCHOR DETERMINED
TO BE NON-ADJUSTABLE OR FIXED.
WWW.BRDIGESTOPROSPERITY.ORG/CONTACT ANCHOR DETAILS
20-60 METER SPAN
Revision : September 2016 EDITED AND PUBLISHED BY: BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, INC., 2016 A1
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
SEE MANUAL FOR 19 (#6)
A01 285 10 28.5
50cm
CLAMP NO. AND SPA.
A02 16 (#5) 300 3 9.0
A03 13 (#4) 325 10 32.5
ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 4.88m3
-
A
℄ BRIDGE 15cm
300cm
& SYMMETRY
(30cm MINIMUM)
(10) A03 SPA. @ 30cm

SPACE CABLES EVENLY ALONG ANCHOR
120cm
50cm
30cm 30cm
15cm
(TYP)
PLAN A02
m 20cm
110cm 100c IL
TA
MIN.
50cm
75cm
20cm

A02 (ERECTION HOOK)
130cm
75cm
340cm LONG (TYP. EA. CABLE) A03
A01 (TYP)
25cm
37cm
A03
NOTES:
- PLASTIC TUBING.
60-100 METER SPAN
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
SEE MANUAL FOR 19 (#6)
A01 285 10 28.5
50cm
CLAMP NO. AND SPA.
A02 16 (#5) 326 3 9.8
A03 13 (#4) 365 10 36.5
ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 6.53m3
-
A
15cm
℄ BRIDGE
300cm
& SYMMETRY
(30cm MINIMUM)
(10) A03 SPA. @ 30cm

SPACE CABLES EVENLY ALONG ANCHOR
135cm
50cm
30cm 30cm
15cm
(TYP)
PLAN A02
130cm m 20cm
100c IL
TA
MIN.
50cm
20cm
85cm
150cm
A02 (ERECTION HOOK)
85cm
400cm LONG (TYP. EA. CABLE)
A03
29cm
A01 (TYP)
42cm
A03
NOTES:
- PLASTIC TUBING.
100-120 METER SPAN
℄ SADDLE ℄ BRIDGE & SYM.
60cm
START OF DECKING WRAP SUSPENDER AROUND HANDRAIL CABLE (TYP)
AND CROSSBEAMS HANDRAIL CABLES TWO TIMES
SUSPENDER AND BEND TAIL DOWNWARD
-
HANDRAIL CABLE
A
MESH FENCING
ATTACH MESH FENCING 10mm (3 8") Ø DEFORMED
TO SUSPENDERS REINFORCING BAR
SEE NOTE 2
110cm
90cm (5) 20cm x 5cm DECK PLANKS = 100cm
10
TYP. CR 0cm LAG SCREW (TYP)
OSSBEA
M SPA. -
C
TIMBER DECKING
WALKWAY CABLE
TIMBER CROSSBEAM
ELEVATION
WALKWAY CABLE (TYP) (2) 20cm x 5cm x 10cm CENTER CABLE
℄ SADDLE TIMBER CROSSBEAM - GUIDES PLACED AT QUARTER POINTS
SECTION A ALONG BRIDGE SPAN (3 TOTAL);
ATTACH WITH LAG SCREWS
136cm
LAG SCREW 10mm ( 3 8") Ø x 75mm (3") LONG (TYP)
(2) AT EACH END AND (1) AT CENTER OF PLANK, 10cm 54cm 50cm
SEE NOTE 3 20cm
-
5cm
30cm 15cm
B
8cm
LAG
SCREW
10cm
10cm
5cm
MINIMUM 13mm (1 2") Ø ℄ CROSSBEAM LAG SCREW 10mm ( 3 8") Ø
PREDRILLED HOLE (TYP) & SYM. 75mm (3") LONG (TYP),
SEE NOTE 4
-
CROSSBEAM DETAIL SECTION B
TIMBER DECKING
TIMBER NAILER
THREAD SUSPENDER THROUGH
CROSSBEAM VIA UNDERSIDE;
EXCESS SUSPENDER BENT AROUND TIMBER CROSSBEAM
(2) 100cm TIMBER PLANKS 200cm TIMBER DECKING, CROSSBEAM TO SECURE IN PLACE
STAGGERED 100cm (TYP) WALKWAY CABLE
AT START OF DECKING -
VIEW C
NOTES:
PLAN 2. CUT REINFORCING BAR TO MINIMUM 200cm. BEND BAR AT 40cm IN "U" TO FIT CROSSBEAM.
3. USE 8mm ( 5 16") PILOT HOLE IN NAILER AND 10mm ( 3 8") PILOT HOLE IN DECKING.
4. USE 8mm ( 5 16") PILOT HOLE IN CROSSBEAM AND 10mm ( 3 8") PILOT HOLE IN NAILER.
Produced by: THOSE NOT EMPLOYED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, NOTICE OF SUCH USE MUST BE MADE BY EMAIL TO CONTACT FOUND AT: WALKWAY DETAILS
Bridges to Prosperity TIMBER CROSSBEAM
1031 33rd Street, Suite 170 DISCLAIMER: THE CALCULATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS IN THE PLAN ARE NOT ATTRIBUTABLE TO BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY AND WITH NAILER
Revision : September 2016 EDITED AND PUBLISHED BY: BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, INC., 2016 W1
℄ SADDLE ℄ BRIDGE & SYM.
60cm
START OF DECKING WRAP SUSPENDER AROUND HANDRAIL CABLE (TYP)
AND CROSSBEAMS HANDRAIL CABLES TWO TIMES
SUSPENDER AND BEND TAIL DOWNWARD
-
HANDRAIL CABLE
A
MESH FENCING
ATTACH MESH FENCING 10mm (3 8") Ø DEFORMED
TO SUSPENDERS REINFORCING BAR
SEE NOTE 2
110cm
90cm (5) 20cm x 5cm DECK PLANKS = 100cm
100cm
TYP. CR LAG SCREW (TYP)
OSSBEA
M -
SPA.
C
TIMBER DECKING
WALKWAY CABLE
TIMBER CROSSBEAM
ELEVATION
WALKWAY CABLE (TYP) (2) 20cm x 5cm x 10cm CENTER CABLE
℄ SADDLE TIMBER CROSSBEAM - GUIDES PLACED AT QUARTER POINTS
SECTION A ALONG BRIDGE SPAN (3 TOTAL);
ATTACH WITH LAG SCREWS
LAG SCREW 10mm ( 3 8") Ø x 75mm (3") LONG (TYP) 136cm
(2) AT EACH END AND (1) AT CENTER OF PLANK,
SEE NOTE 3 10cm 54cm - 15cm
B
15cm
10cm
MINIMUM 13mm (1 2") Ø ℄ CROSSBEAM

PREDRILLED HOLE (TYP) & SYM.
7.5cm -
CROSSBEAM DETAIL SECTION B
TIMBER DECKING
THREAD SUSPENDER THROUGH

CROSSBEAM VIA UNDERSIDE;
EXCESS SUSPENDER BENT AROUND
CROSSBEAM TO SECURE IN PLACE TIMBER CROSSBEAM
WALKWAY CABLE
(2) 100cm TIMBER PLANKS 200cm TIMBER DECKING,
STAGGERED 100cm (TYP) -
AT START OF DECKING VIEW C
NOTES:
PLAN 2. CUT REINFORCING BAR TO MINIMUM 200cm. BEND BAR AT 40cm IN "U" TO FIT CROSSBEAM.
3. USE 8mm ( 5 16") PILOT HOLE IN CROSSBEAM AND 10mm ( 3 8") PILOT HOLE IN DECKING.
Produced by: THOSE NOT EMPLOYED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, NOTICE OF SUCH USE MUST BE MADE BY EMAIL TO CONTACT FOUND AT: WALKWAY DETAILS
Bridges to Prosperity TIMBER CROSSBEAM
1031 33rd Street, Suite 170 DISCLAIMER: THE CALCULATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS IN THE PLAN ARE NOT ATTRIBUTABLE TO BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY AND WITHOUT NAILER
Revision : September 2016 EDITED AND PUBLISHED BY: BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, INC., 2016 W2
Chapter 3
Suspended Bridge Construction
Section 1 - Construction Overview | Page 90

Section 2 - Culture of Safety | Page 92
Section 3 - Quality Control | Page 101
Section 4 - Materials and Tools | Page 103
Section 5 - Concrete and Masonry | Page 109
Section 6 - Construction | Page 114
Introduction
Bridges to Prosperity’s goal is to support a construction process that results in safe, high-quality suspended cable bridges. Health
and safety both during construction and after completion of the bridge is the top priority for each bridge project.
There are six sections in Chapter 3: Construction Guide, structured as follows:
• Section 1: Construction Overview

• Section 2: Culture of Safety
• Section 3: Quality Control
• Section 4: Materials and Tools
• Section 5: Concrete and Masonry
• Section 6: Construction
Refer to the following areas, as necessary:

• Volume 1: Project Development
• Volume 2: Chapter 1: Suspended Bridge Design
• Volume 2: Chapter 2: Suspended Bridge Drawings

No representations or warranties are implied or expressed herein. In consideration of this manual being provided free to others,
provided herein.
Butare, Rwanda
SCOPE
The guidelines of this chapter are intended for the construction of standard suspended cable bridges, from the initial layout to
completion. The primary goal during bridge construction is the health and safety of not only those building the structure, but also
those who will use the bridge for years to come. Section 2: Culture of Safety presents the B2P Safety System and discusses the
important aspects of a Health and Safety Plan.
Inherent in the goal of safety is to produce the highest quality bridge through careful material selection and construction processes
proven to yield long-lasting structures. Quality Control activities such as materials testing and storage, dimension verification, and
photo inventories are a few of the Quality Control activities presented in Section 3: Quality Control. Following these guidelines will
help to maximize the lifespan of the bridge, assure the structure meets the design requirements, and minimize construction delays
and additional costs that may arise from errors.
Section 4: Materials and Tools walks through each of the construction materials expected to be used on a suspended bridge project
along with where they may be sourced. Section 4 also provides a list of construction tools to aid in project planning. Section 5:
Concrete, Grout, and Mortar provides instructions for mixing, placing, and curing each of these materials along with safety and
quality control guidelines.
The actual construction sequence and processes are presented in Section 6: Construction. This section is to be used with the
standard drawings from Chapter 2: Suspended Bridge Drawings as selected by using the design process in Chapter 1: Suspended
Bridge Design. Take note that every bridge construction site is different and limitations may arise. For situations falling outside of the
standard parameters and conditions, the construction process of this manual may be applied with additional action where required.
Figure 1.1 shows a typical suspended bridge section and terminology found throughout this Chapter.
TOWER HANDRAIL SUSPENDER
CABLE FENCING
BACKSTAY
TIERS DECKING
CROSSBEAM
BACKWALL WALKWAY CABLE
FOUNDATION
APPROACH RAMP
ANCHOR BEAM
Figure 9.1 – Bridge Terminology
CONSTRUCTION OVERVIEW
The following is an overview of the construction sequence along with anticipated durations for each activity:
Material Collection
Time required: two weeks to several
months
Butare, Rwanda Butare, Rwanda
Construction Layout
Time required: one to two days
Excavation
Time required: one to three weeks
Cerca la Source, Haiti
Foundation and Tiers

Time required: one to four weeks
Towers
Time required: one week
Churo Alto, Bolivia
Anchors
Time required: three to five days
Butare, Rwanda
Begin Ramp Walls

Time required: one to three days
Terera Sur, Nicaragua
Cable Hoisting
Gelin, Haiti
Approach Ramp Construction

Time required: four days to two weeks
Taba, Rwanda
Walkway
Butare, Rwanda
Completion
Time required: one day
Butare, Rwanda
Churo Alto, Bolivia
2.1 Overview
The safety of workers in the site vicinity is the primary focus during the planning and construction phases. A strong safety
culture is a product of shared safety values, attitudes, goals and practices where commitment, communication, and planning
occurs on a daily basis. It is important that all personnel support one another in safe work practices on the bridge site.
The safety system presented below was developed by Bridges to Prosperity to help bridge project implementers understand
the principles of safety. The following safety practices are guidelines taken from the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) to aid in safe builds. Because these suggested practices are by no means exhaustive, please
reference OSHA and other safety references to further develop site specific practices to execute a safe bridge build.
The B2P Safety System is comprised of the following six elements:
Leadership
Safety is a function of leadership. As a result, safety must start
with leadership and be consistent throughout. Expectations need
to be set and met by all people on the team without exception. It
is recommended that a safety leadership role, such as a Safety
Manager, be established to monitor and enforce safety policies
established for the bridge construction.
Education
On most projects, each person brings a different level of safety
training and experience, and it is essential that each individual
on the work site can effectively identify hazards and know
the best measures to protect themselves. A bridge project
is an opportunity for safety-educated workers to teach less
knowledgeable workers how to be safe on a work site. This
includes both local community members and visiting volunteers.
Project managers, safety managers, or foreman should organize training sessions to ensure all personnel thoroughly
understand the hazards associated with all tasks, as well as how those hazards can be mitigated.
Each worker’s health has equal importance. Because it is possible that language barriers and cultural differences will
require more time to be spent on training, be sensitive to those working on the bridge site and execute training in a manner
that is culturally appropriate.
Communication
Communication is paramount to a good culture of safety as a lack of communication or miscommunication between workers
can result in a high potential for injury. A project manager, safety manager, or foreman should ensure that all workers know
and accept the safety requirements. Safety briefings and discussions specific to the task at hand must be thoroughly
communicated in the local language to any participating community members. A language barrier should never be grounds
for exclusion of community members in a construction task.
Planning
Thorough planning is critical to achieving two goals of a robust safety plan:
• Eliminate incidents and problems that can create disruptions in work.

• Increase efficiency by creating a Health and Safety Plan and safe work environment.
Evaluation and Modification

It is important to continually evaluate both conditions and actions on a work site since they are both always changing. If any
of the following situations occur, it is important that those involved stop to address them as a team:
• New volunteers on site who were not present for the daily safety meeting
• Construction steps that seem to appear unsafe
• Near hit: an incident that did not result in injury, but could have given a slight shift in position or time
• Changes or modifications from the daily construction or safety plan
Reinforcement
Individuals frequently choose safe behavior as a result of either positive activators or consequences. It is important that all
workers receive proper feedback from everyone on site.
Near Hits
A near hit is an incident that was narrowly avoided and can provide on-site lessons without consequences.
Many people do not report near hits for a fear of punishment or lack of understanding of its importance.
Reporting near hits is a positive procedure that enables changes to prevent future injury or even a fatality.
The information gathered from near hits can be used to modify bridge building procedures in order to avoid
similar dangerous situations in the future. Bridges to Prosperity’s goal is to have a system where reporting
near hits can be done effectively and efficiently. If these are not reported, someone else could be injured
unnecessarily.
HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN

Though site precautionary measures, such as the use of personal protective equipment or fall protection, are critical to
safety on any work site, developing a robust and comprehensive site-specific safety plan is the most important aspect of
ensuring a culture of safety on a bridge site.
Safety Planning
Planning for project safety should take place before breaking ground and should encompass a broad perspective of a
culture of safety throughout the duration of the project. Considerations should include the location of water, latrines and
other sanitation needs for workers, the location of the nearest emergency medical facility, modes of transportation to
emergency medical facilities, relations with the local community, resources that may be available for safety training for
workers, etc. Proper preparation and planning includes ensuring that there is a full inventory of safety equipment on site
before the project begins and allotting for an adequate schedule to complete construction in a safe manner.
Butare, Rwanda San Albino, Nicaragua Butare, Rwanda
Work Zone Safety

A good way to provide a safe work site is to establish a work zone perimeter. Personnel entering the work zone should be
educated in the safety requirements and PPE needed for the activities being performed. This perimeter is in place to protect
members of the construction team as well as members of the public. It is important to keep the work area clean and clear of
hazards to avoid unnecessary incidents. To minimize the risk of injury to observers and the general public, individuals who
are not involved in the construction process should be kept clear of the work zone perimeter.
It can be helpful to discuss when potential hazards, such as harmful plants or animals, are identified on or near a site. On
site, construction safety is more effective if the work crew is educated on possible hazards, how to avoid injury, and the
first-aid procedures to be used if an injury does occur.
Daily Safety Plan

Work objectives and how a team can minimize risks and hazards while completing those work objectives are important to
daily on-site safety. This type of planning should be done every day with the workers who will be on site. The plan should
consider the specific tasks planned for the day, recognize any potential hazards, and determine what safety measures need
to be taken. Frequent and regular inspections of the equipment used, the materials, and the job site should be included.
At the end of the day, conducting another safety review to discuss the results of the daily safety plan and what could be
done to make the site safer is a great way to promote a culture of safety. This includes completing and compiling near hit
and incident reports.
Activity Level Safety Plan

Individual activity level planning should be performed on a constant basis by considering how each worker is going to
execute an activity in a safe manner and how that activity relates to the daily work plan that was devised at the beginning
of the day. Every worker should be encouraged to recognize potential hazards and to voice their concerns directly with
other members on site, as well as feel empowered to stop work to regroup and discuss a potential dangerous situation
if encountered. Workers should never work alone on site and people and procedures need to be in place to locate and
recover an individual should one become incapacitated.
Documentation:
Recording and reviewing plans, inspections, and reviews can aid in the development of any project or organization’s culture
of safety. The following are examples of standardized forms that can be utilized to aid in safe construction throughout the
project as well as future projects:
• Daily Work Plan

• Daily Site Inspection
• Daily Excavation Inspection
• Fall Protection Inspection
• Work Area Hazards
• End of Day Review
• Incident Report
Examples of these forms can be found in Appendix 3.1.
2.2 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
The goal of a safety program is to eliminate construction hazards through engineering and safe work practices. However,
because not all hazards can be eliminated, personal protective equipment is necessary and worn to act as the last line of
defense against injury or illness. There are many different kinds of PPE depending on the work and the equipment involved.
It is important that all PPE be kept clean and properly maintained and all equipment should be inventoried and discarded
if not functioning properly. Cleaning is particularly important for eye and face protection where dirty or fogged lenses could
impair vision. Ensure multiple types of PPE are compatible if worn together and that defective or damaged PPE is not
used, but rather immediately discarded and replaced. Periodically, as well as when changing activates, reevaluate the
appropriateness of previously selected PPE.
Hard Hats
Hard hats are most important when there are possibilities of striking low hanging
objects, being struck by an object being carried or transported, or falling
objects. Even if these hazards are not present, it is still strongly recommended
to wear a hard hat while within the marked work zone perimeter.
Safety Glasses
Safety glasses must be worn when any of the following are present:
• Dust and other flying particles

• Corrosive gases, vapors, and liquids
• Sparks from cutting metal
• Intense light from welding
• Possible means of impact or impalement to the eyes
Face Shield
Face shields provide more complete protection of the entire face than safety
glasses and are to be worn when there is exposure to dusts, splashes or
sprays of hazardous liquids or materials. The face shield does not provide
a great amount of protection from impacts and as a result, should be worn in
conjunction with safety glasses. It is a requirement to wear a face shield when
cutting reinforcing bars or cables and during other activities involving a grinder.
Hearing Protection
Hearing protection should be worn when power tools, generators, chainsaws,
jackhammers, or loud equipment are used as it can mitigate loud noises and
prevent hearing damage or loss. There are many different types of hearing
protection, including ear plugs, canal caps and ear muffs. If ear plugs are used,
take care that they remain clean and are replaced regularly.
Foot Protection
Work boots or closed toe shoes should be worn at all times while on bridge
sites, but are most important when heavy falling objects, sharp objects, hot
surfaces and/or wet surfaces are present as well as when mixing or placing
concrete. Steel-toed boots are highly recommended as they provide additional
protection and can prevent broken bones or bruises.
Hand Protection
Gloves can protect hands from cuts, crushing, abrasions, hot and cold temperatures, and chemicals. They can also provide
additional grip and prevent blisters. Gloves should fit snugly and be chosen based on activity as there are different types
of gloves for various types of applications. Leather, fabric, coated fabric, and rubber are some of the more common types.
Leather gloves are best for protecting against cuts, burns and heat while fabric and coated fabric gloves are best for
protecting against dirt and abrasion and rubber gloves for protecting against chemical burns. It may be safer to remove hand
protection when operating circulating power tools as gloves or loose clothing may become caught in the rotating equipment.
2.3 Hand and Power Tool Safety
The likelihood of injury increases when tools are used improperly. This section will discuss the hazards associated with tool
use, and ways to prevent possible hazards.
Best Practices:
• Inspect tools before use and operate according to manufacturer instructions
• Materials being cut or drilled can be secured via clamps or vice grips to free both hands to operate the tool
• Assure that tools are kept clean and sharp as this allows the tool to operate properly and can prevent malfunctions
• Operate within the intended use of the tool
• Ensure that the correct PPE is used with each tool and use guards if possible
• Consider what clothing is worn; gloves, loose fitting clothing, jewelry, or hair can get caught in moving parts
• Store tools in a dry place
• Don’t use in wet locations unless the tool is approved for use in wet conditions
• Keep work areas well-lit
• Tools should be safely tied off to prevent them from falling when working at heights
• Unsafe, broken, or damaged tools shall be marked as such and removed from site
HAND TOOL SAFETY

Basic hand tools are most likely used on a daily basis on all work sites. When working side by side with local community
members, a vast array of tools in various states of repair may surface. It is imperative that the tools being used by visiting
volunteers and local community members are inspected to ensure that they are in proper working condition and will not
create unnecessary hazards on site.
Winch Safety
A winch, also known as come along, cable puller, or cable hoist, is used for
hoisting cables on suspended bridge projects. This is one of the most critical
steps in the construction process and potentially one of the more dangerous.
Special care needs to be taken in the selection and use of a winch as any
failure can lead to a cable slip, which is extremely dangerous. A cable that slips
free of a winch can whip out of control and cause significant injury. A winch
should never be used for anything other than its intended purpose.
Gelin, Haiti
POWER TOOL SAFETY

The use of electricity adds additional safety risks when using power tools. Power tools necessitate that extra care is taken in
not only using those power tools, but in making sure that all personnel using those tools are sufficiently trained and aware of
the safety requirements of each device. For some workers, it may be their first exposure to using power tools, and naturally,
they may be eager to help and learn new construction methods even though they may be unfamiliar with the hazards of
such tools. For first time users of power tools, clear instruction and close supervision should be provided.
General Rules for Power Tool Safety:

• Disconnect tools when not in use, before servicing, and before
cleaning or changing accessories or guards
• Consider attire when operating power tools: gloves, loose clothing,
and jewelry can get caught in moving parts
• Remove damaged tools and mark them “DO NOT USE” in both
English and the local language, and communicate the meaning of this
to all workers
Butare, Rwanda
• Dispose of damaged tools that are not able to be repaired
• Do not hold the switch button while carrying a power tool
General Rules for Corded Power Tool Usage:

• Keep cords and hoses away from heat, oil, water, and sharp edges
• When possible, use tools that are properly grounded and that are
double insulated
• Portable tools should not be carried by the cord
• Do not hoist or lower power tools by their electrical cords
• Do not yank a cord or hose to disconnect it
• Ensure that cords do not present a tripping hazard
San Albino, Nicaragua
• Keep all cords away from work being performed
General Rules for Using a Power Generator:

• Ensure that the generator is rated for the amount of power required by the tools it is powering
• Generators must be stored in a dry location at all times
• Do not operate a generator indoors, and always allow for proper ventilation to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning
• Do not operate the generator near combustible material
• Ensure that all extension cords are properly rated and grounded
• Make sure that the generator is regularly maintained as improper maintenance can lead to a malfunction
2.4 Fall Protection
OVERVIEW
Fall prevention is a series of steps taken to mitigate the risk of an unintentional fall while accessing or working at heights.
This is applicable when working near cliffs, constructing the bridge walkway and when working on the towers and tall
abutments of a suspended bridge project. All team members should be made aware of site activities which involve fall
hazards. Before working in a harness, workers should be trained in their use to ensure that the fall protection system is
implemented effectively. It is important that a method of recovery is established in the case that a worker has fallen and is
caught suspended from his or her fall protection.
Controlling Fall Exposures:

• Always try to eliminate the fall hazard
• Select appropriate fall protection systems
• Properly construct and install the fall protection systems
• Train workers in the proper selection, inspection, use, and maintenance of fall protection systems
• Supervise everyone wearing fall protection
TYPES OF FALL PROTECTION

Fall protection is necessary for anyone that is working 1.8 meters (6 feet) above the ground or higher. There are many types
and methods of fall protection that can be executed. Used together, these are the different types of fall protection elements
that are typically used when working on a suspended bridge project: harnesses, lanyards or self-retracting lifelines, and
anchorage points.
Another type of fall protection is fencing or guardrails. Installing these safety measures can mitigate the risk of a fall and
may allow workers greater mobility when working at heights.
Harnesses
Harnesses are devices that are worn over one’s clothing and are designed to catch and provide support when a fall occurs.
There is a main ring or “D-ring” on the harness that when worn properly, is located on the back between the shoulder blades.
The D-ring is connected to the lanyard or self-retracting lifeline and is what catches if a fall should occur. Harnesses must
be inspected before each use and if found to be deficient, must be labeled as such and taken out of service immediately.
Reference fall protection experts and the harness manufacturer’s specifications for procedures and inspection information.
General Fitting Rules:

• The D-ring must rest between the shoulder blades
• Straps should be snug while allowing full range of motion
• The chest strap should be across the breast bone
• Have someone else check the harness for twists in the straps
Churo Alto, Bolivia San Albino, Nicaragua Butare, Rwanda
Lanyards
The simplest of connections from a harness to an anchorage point, lanyards
come in many different styles and lengths. It is important that the appropriate
type of fall protection is selected for a given activity. For example, if an individual
is working two meters above the ground falls and is using a two meter lanyard,
he or she would contact the ground before engaging the lanyard, deeming it
ineffective. In this scenario, a shorter lanyard or self-retracting lifeline is more
appropriate.
Butare, Rwanda
Self-Retracting Lifeline
A self-retracting lifeline, also known as a retractable, inertia wheel or yo-yo,
can be used to connect a harness to an anchorage point. The added benefit of
these is that they function similarly to a seat belt. Pulled slowly, it will release
slack, but if pulled quickly the lifeline locks up, minimizing free-fall distance
to less than a meter. These lifelines work best in vertical applications. Do not
connect two retractable lifelines in a series as they are not designed to be
connected in this way and may not function properly if used as such. If used
in a more horizontal application, although the retractable will engage, it is
Butare, Rwanda
likely that the individual will swing. This is called a “swing fall” and can be very
dangerous if there are nearby obstacles that the individual might swing into.
Keep possible fall paths in mind when locating or designing an anchorage point.
Anchorage Points
Equally as important as the harness and the lanyard or self-retracting lifeline is
the anchorage point, or the point from which securing occurs. It is always best
to anchor to a point that is at or above the height of the D-ring of the harness so
that it is conveniently and easily accessible for the individual. Reference OSHA
for more information on designing anchorage points.
Butare, Rwanda
RESCUE PLAN
Proper fall protection not only works to mitigate falling risks, but also includes
a plan to safely rescue an individual after a fall. It is likely that an individual that
has fallen will not be able to pull himself/herself back to a safe position. Also,
when the individual is suspended in the harness, it does not take long before
the straps begin cutting off the circulation to the individual’s legs. Though some
harnesses have straps that the individual can put their feet into to help take
pressure off the leg straps, this only buys a little more time. Having a rescue
plan ahead of time greatly increases the chance of recovering the person
before they go into shock. It may take more than one person to lift the fallen
individual, so it is important to plan accordingly.

Section 3 - Quality Control
3.1 Overview
Bridges to Prosperity is committed to produce quality work with every project. The objective is to provide work that is correct
the first time. If the work is performed incorrectly, it is necessary rectify the situation in a timely manner. In order to maximize
the lifespan of the bridges, assure the structure meets the design requirements and minimize construction delays and
additional costs that may arise from errors, there should be effective measures of quality control.
Quality Control (QC) are those activities performed by the designer, construction team, or manufacturer to ensure and
document that a product meets the requirements of the design drawings and construction procedures set forth in this
manual. Activities may include dimension checking, construction procedures, materials handling, calibrations and
maintenance of equipment, document control, and any sampling, testing, and inspection done for these purposes. Quality
control procedures should ensure that the work is performed to the highest standards the first time.
3.2 Quality Control Activities
The following are general descriptions of quality control activities that may be used on a bridge project. Specific quality
control procedures for specific construction stages can be found in their respective descriptions in Section 6: Construction.
MATERIALS TESTING
When performing a bridge design, an engineer must designate values to strengths and densities of construction materials
as well as soil properties. Verifying that materials associated with the bridge design meet or exceed the values specified on
the design drawings is imperative to the safety of the structure. If a material does not meet the specified value, the capacity
and safety of the bridge may be reduced.
Materials testing may also be utilized to increase the efficiency of bridge designs by providing values to the design engineer
prior to completing the design. In lieu of specific values for a given project, the design engineer must make conservative
assumptions that may lead to increased quantities, costs, and construction time. In many cases, the material supplier may
be able to provide documents with materials specifications such as the yield strength of a reinforcing bar.
The following are material properties that should be verified with those stated on the drawings or in the calculations. If
testing is not possible, ensure that the assumed values are conservative and that the engineer is aware of the assumptions.
• Soil internal angle of friction

• Soil bearing capacity
• Concrete compressive strength
• Reinforcing bar yield strength
• Cable ultimate breaking strength
• Timber flexural capacity and shear capacity
• Density of foundation, tier, and ramp infill
MATERIALS STORAGE
Once materials have been delivered to a project site, care must be taken to ensure the quality does not degrade. Proper
storage such as keeping cement in a clean, dry location or covering reinforcing bars to prevent rust will help each material
retain the desired properties. Careful placement of sand and gravel stock piles can reduce the amount of waste throughout
the project.

CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS
Generating a construction checklist to be used for each stage of construction is good practice. This helps reduce oversight
of critical steps and allows work to progress smoothly and efficiently.
SURVEY EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION

Surveying equipment is used to layout the bridge and measure the overall span length and difference in elevation. Accurately
knowing these values is critical to the performance of the bridge design. As such, the surveying equipment should be
calibrated using manufacturer recommendations to ensure levelness and accuracy. Reference the equipment user’s guide
for instructions on equipment calibration.
VERIFYING DIMENSIONS
Throughout the construction process, from initial layout to walkway installation, verifying the dimensions of what has been
marked or constructed can provide an intermediate level of quality as the project progresses. During each stage, dimensions
should be checked against those shown on the design drawings as the work is being completed. This includes confirming
that the bridge elements remain square to the centerline of the bridge. Doing so can mitigate the recognition of an error
during a later stage of construction, which may lead to costly modifications or in some cases demolition and reconstruction.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances are the permissible extent or limit of variation. In bridge construction, this limit of variation can be found in a
physical dimension or the property of a material. Bridge construction has inherent variability of both dimensions and material
properties. It is important that the designer and project manager be educated and aware of the permitted tolerances that a
project can withstand to achieve a quality and safe bridge.
Tolerances may vary greatly for different aspects of construction. For example, timber that is one centimeter less than the
thickness shown on the drawing for decking boards may not be acceptable whereas a span length that is one centimeter
less than what is specified has effectively no impact.
PHOTO INVENTORY
Documenting each stage and phase of construction with photos is good practice and required on Bridges to Prosperity
projects. Photos allow the construction team, designer, as well as future inspectors to see exactly how the bridge was built,
and inspect parts of the bridge that may not be visible once construction is completed. Photos may also be used to verify
the proper execution of certain tasks for project managers or engineers to approve before proceeding to the next stage.
AS-BUILT INFORMATION
Actual dimensions to which the bridge was constructed are known as as-built dimensions. During the construction of a
bridge, there are likely components that will not be built to the exact specifications but remain within accepted construction
tolerances. However small these differences may be, it is important to document them in order to provide a correct benchmark
for future inspections and monitoring procedures. The best means of recording the as-built dimensions are to directly mark
the design drawings. A complete set of drawings marked with actual constructed dimensions are called as-built drawings.

4.1 Materials
The quality of a bridge will only be as good as the materials used to build it. Even though obtaining materials can be a time
intensive process, it is important to use the highest quality of materials available. This section should be used as an aid in
sourcing materials for construction.
On most suspended bridge projects, the materials needed for construction will be divided into two groups: materials that are
readily available on or near site, referred to as local construction materials, and materials that will be purchased and then
delivered to site, referred to as delivered construction materials.
Local Construction Materials

All local construction materials (stone, gravel, sand, water, and timber) should be collected on site prior to beginning the
construction phase. When creating a construction sequence and project plan it is important to allow for contingency in
materials acquisition, in particular with critical path elements. Collecting local materials, such as timber or rock, may require
a permit, so coordinate with the local municipality to obtain this information. If any of these construction materials are not
available locally, they must be purchased and delivered to site.
STONE
Stone is used for the wall construction and to fill in the abutments. It is
recommended that stone is collected prior to construction.
It is helpful for the stone used for foundation, tier, or ramp walls to have a flat
face. Stones placed in the corners of these walls can be dressed, hammered
and chiseled, to provide flat and square faces for ease of construction.
GRAVEL
Gravel is used as the coarse aggregate in the concrete and should be rough
and clean with broken faces. Dirt and organics in the mixture will decrease
concrete strength, so any aggregate containing soil must be washed until
clean. Ideal gravel diameter is two centimeters, but intermittent stones with
a maximum diameter of five centimeters are permissible. This is important
because aggregates larger than five centimeters will usually reduce concrete
strength. Gravel can be purchased, collected from river deposits, or broken
from boulders to attain the appropriate size.

SAND
Sand is used as the fine aggregate for concrete and mortar mixes. Sand can
be sourced from river deposits or from a quarry. The quality of the sand should
be assessed before collection by checking for impurities such as mud, clay,
silt, and debris. Avoiding sand with a high content of these materials reduces
the need for washing.
Silt, the most common impurity in sand taken from river deposits, is a material
that when rubbed between your fingers leaves a colored smear, yet lacks the San Albino, Nicaragua
earthen smell of organic soils and must be avoided in sand mixtures. Sand that
contains silt must be washed before use. This can be done so by filling grain
sacks with the sand and washing them in the river.
When silt-free sand cannot be found on site, sand must be purchased. This
is necessary only if there is no locally available sand or if the locally available
sand does not meet the specifications as previously stated.
Do not use beach sand. Beach sand should not be used because of the salt
Gelin, Haiti
content and the particle size and shape.
Before using sand in a mix, screening it through an ordinary or four millimeter screen can help remove large particles, sticks,
or leaves that may have fallen onto the pile.
WATER
The water used for concrete is often not potable. However, it is important
that the water is relatively clean, as the only water typically available in the
quantities needed is river water.
Ensure that the water has a low turbidity, cloudiness, and is highly transparent.
Water of higher turbidity should not be used, but can be stored in a holding
container where over time impurities will settle to the bottom, making the water
on top clearer. Choose a method to mitigate water turbidity that is the most Butare, Rwanda
efficient for the project as there are a number of alternatives.

TIMBER
Timber will be needed for the decking, crossbeams and the nailers for the
bridge walkway. Bridges to Prosperity standard decking boards are a standard
lumber size of 5 centimeters by 20 centimeters. If these lumber dimensions
are not available, be sure to have the engineer check what is selected. Since
the quality of timber can vary, and delays in procuring the timber are not
uncommon, it is best to plan ahead.
It is preferable to obtain a strong hardwood that has been allowed time to San Albino, Nicaragua
adequately dry and that does not have cracks, checks, significant amount of
knots, or any rot. Consult with the local community and leadership to determine
the best species of wood available in the area. If the timber is of questionable strength or durability, it can be treated with
a sealer.
Delivered Construction Materials

All construction materials that cannot be found on site will need to be purchased or donated and delivered to site. Material
procurement and delivery should be included in the construction sequence and project management plan. A time contingency
for material acquisition should be accounted for in the schedule, in particular with critical path elements.
CEMENT
Cement should be Type I (general purpose) or Type II (moderate sulfate
resistance). Other types of cement have specific purposes that do not pertain
to Bridges to Prosperity bridge projects. It is important to buy cement from a
trusted store in the area as it is more likely that the cement has been stored
properly and for a short duration. Cement bags should be stored off the ground,
preferably elevated at least 15 centimeters on timber pallets, stacked to allow
free circulation of air and also covered with a tarp or plastic. Contact with
moisture will cause hydration of the cement and alter the cement properties.
Butare, Rwanda
If cement is not properly stored, there can be significant decreases in the
strength. Even when properly stored, the cement can lose up to 30% of its
strength in three months of storage and 40% of its strength after six months of storage. Therefore, it is important to check
the manufactured and expiration dates printed on the cement bag. Any cement stored for longer than three months should
be tested before use. A hard outer shell or hard spots in the cement bag are indications that the cement has been exposed
to moisture. If hard spots are identified, the bag should not be used. Exposure to water and humid climates can accelerate
these affects.

CABLE
Develop a rough estimate of how much the cable will weigh before arranging transportation, as the size of the truck will be
dependent on the total weight and volume. See Chapter 1, Section 7: Material Estimate to estimate cable length.
If using re-purposed cables, they must be inspected before being considered adequate for use on a bridge.
Churo Alto, Bolivia Lura, Panama Guadalupe, Nicaragua
Cable Inspection
It is imperative that the cable that is to be used is thoroughly inspected for quality. Used cable may have deformations
or may be damaged to the point where it is inadequate for use on a bridge.
Important items to check the cable for:

• Welded joints
• Kinks
• Wire breaks
If welded joints or kinks are encountered, that section of the cable cannot be used.
A careful inspection of the cable should be performed to identify any broken wires. Typical regulations on cable
inspection state that cable can have up to six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or three broken wire
in one strand in one rope lay, where a rope lay is the length along the rope in which one strand makes a complete
revolution around the rope.

CLAMPS
There are two types of clamps that are readily available for cable terminations:
drop forged clamps and malleable clamps. Clamps may be referred to as clips,
U-bolts, or bulldog clamps. Malleable clamps are made from a solid piece of
steel that is heated until the metal is soft and then bent to shape. With drop
forged clamps, the metal is heated until it is liquid and then poured into a
form. Drop forged clamps reduce the possibility of hidden defects that are
sometimes present in malleable clamps have a lower ductility and may loosen
with time. Malleable clamps are not permitted for use on the main cables.
Butare, Rwanda
ONLY drop forged clamps are permitted for use on the main cables of
bridges. If drop forged clamps are not available locally they may need to be
imported.
MASONRY UNITS
Concrete Masonry Units
(CMU) or bricks can be used
as formwork for the towers of a
suspended bridge. CMU blocks
and bricks will need to be strong
enough to withstand the lateral
pressures of wet concrete. Be
aware of the quality of block
Churo Alto, Bolivia La Candelaria, Panama
or brick and obtain the highest
quality possible, free from voids
and cracks. Test the quality of the CMU by dropping it from chest height onto soil. If the CMU does not break, it can be
assumed that the CMU is of sufficient quality. Note the size of locally available block and brick and plan wall dimensions to
uphold the dimensions of the concrete being formed.
REINFORCING BARS
Reinforcing bar is specified for the towers, anchors, and suspenders and
should be deformed and Grade 280 (40,000 lb/in.2). Take note of maximum
lengths of bar available when determining quantities.
Butare, Rwanda
SAFETY FENCING
Wire fencing is used for safety
along either side of the bridge
deck. Quality chain link fencing
with a five centimeter mesh
pattern should be rust free
and galvanized or coated with
aluminum to extend the term
of usage. Nothing less than 11
Mubuga, Rwanda San Albino, Nicaragua
gauge wire should be used for
the fencing as anything less can
be broken or torn too easily.

4.2 Tools
OVERVIEW
A variety of tools will be needed to construct a suspended bridge. A storage area should be designated for each construction
site. This allotted location should be dry in case of inclement weather and have the option to be locked for security purposes.
Planning for the tools needed and a concise inventory can aid in the schedule of the project.
LIST OF SUGGESTED TOOLS

• Automatic level, Philly rod, and • Impact driver • Saw blades
tripod • Ladder • Shovels
• Buckets • Linesman pliers • Spray paint
• Construction square • Machete • Stakes
• Duct tape • Masonry tools • String line
• Drills • Markers • Sockets
• Drill bits • Measuring tapes • Socket wrench
• Excavation bars • Plumb bob • Tamping rod
• Excavation picks • Pipe • Torque wrench
• 4-foot level • Rated rope • Wire cutters
• Hacksaw • Rebar bender • Wood saw
• Hammer (5 pound) • Saw • Winch
Las Papayas, Nicaragua Gelin, Haiti San Albino, Nicaragua

Section 5 - Concrete and Masonry
5.1 Concrete, Grout, and Mortar
SAFETY
Caution should be taken when working with cement. Everyone involved with mixing or handling cement should be educated
on the risks when working with concrete, grout, and mortar, such as chemical burns and cement dust exposure, as well as
the means by which injury can be avoided and first aid to be administered if injury does occur.
The following steps can aid in avoiding cement hazards:

• Establish and discuss a cement mixing plan: location, members, transport
• Wear proper PPE: gloves and other means of covering exposed skin, goggles, respirator mask, boots
• Clear the area of those not involved in the mixing or placing of concrete, mortar, or grout
If some workers do not have proper footwear available, ensure that they wash their feet immediately after mixing concrete
to avoid cement burns.
QUALITY CONTROL
To ensure consistency, concrete, mortar, and grout design mixes should be held constant throughout the entirety of the
project.
Quality Control Charge

To assure proper mixtures, assign person(s) to oversee proportioning and mixing operations. This role takes the responsibility
for the quality of the concrete operations. This individual should be present during all proportioning and mixing and should
be experienced and capable of making decisions in the field. If this person(s) cannot be present throughout the duration of
the project, the foreman or superintendent for the project should be held responsible for mixing on site without the concrete
quality control charge.
Perhaps the most important aspect of quality control when mixing concrete, mortar, and grout, is ensuring the proper water
content. Wetter mixes are typically easier to mix manually and as result, there may be a natural tendency to add water to
ease the physical work. However, adding more water than what is specified in the mix design will reduce the final strength
of the mix. If the specified amount of water has been added to a mix and it has not yet reached the desired workability,
additional manual mixing should be attempted before adding more water.
Checklist
• Clean cement, gravel, sand, and water
• Record quantities of materials used
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

Check the availability and quality of required materials. Locate the source for cement, sand, gravel and water on the job site
or elsewhere if necessary.
Ensure the following:

• Cement should be dry, fresh (no older than 60 days) and from a reliable source
• Water should be clean and transparent
• Sand and gravel should be clean and free of debris (sticks, leaves, trash, etc.)
• Sand should be coarse, not round or shiny and should be free of silt or clay particles
• For concrete, gravel should be no larger than five centimeters (two inches)
Also, note that there are different types of cement and varying levels of quality. Ensure that the cement being used is of
good quality and is the desired Type I or Type II.
Recommended Tools
• Shovels
• Buckets
• Screens
• Flat, clean working area
• Trowels
• Gloves
• Safety glasses/goggles
Cyumba, Rwanda Coko, Rwanda
• Footwear
Materials
• Cement
• Gravel
• Sand
• Water
San Albino, Nicaragua La Candelaria, Panama

MIX DESIGN
Concrete
The intention of this section is to serve as a guideline for standard Table 13.1 – Summary of Mix Design Ratios
and replicable concrete mixing techniques for use on all projects. Mix Cement Sand Gravel
Concrete 1 2 3
Bridges to Prosperity mix design follows a 1:2:3 volumetric ratio
to achieve a minimum strength of 10 megapascals. This means Mortar 1 4 -
that one part cement is mixed with two parts of sand and three Grout (tube) 1 1 -
of gravel. Note that it is assumed that there is a 33% reduction Grout (fill) 1 4 -
from the summation of the volumes of the components to the total
volume of concrete produced.
The water amount will likely vary from site to site, based on the characteristics of the aggregates. As a starting value for the
volume of water, it is recommended to add the smallest amount of water to obtain workability and hydrate all of the cement.
The suggested volume of water needed is 60% of the volume of the cement used. For example, 0.6 buckets of water will
be needed for the same one bucket of cement. Continue to add water until workability is achieved. A workable concrete is
one in which the concrete can flow,
Cement surrounding rebar and filling corners.
Sand Gravel Concrete
Cement Sand Gravel Concrete
Mortar
Mortar is used as part of masonry walls and is made from cement and sand comprised of a ratio of 1:4 with water added
until workable. Mortar does not contain large aggregates. The amount of cement, sand, and water should be consistent
throughout the project. Prepare the mortar to a consistency in which it can be easily handled and spread using a trowel.
Mortar will be used for the ramp and formwork walls.

Grout
Grout mixes are required at the cable tubes of the adjustable anchor as well as the fills of the foundations, towers, and tiers.
Grout mixes are comprised of sand and cement and do not contain large aggregate. For cable tubing use a ratio of one
part cement and one part sand (1:1). The grout used for the rock/grout fill should be of one part cement and four parts sand
(1:4) and should be of a consistency that will flow into and completely fill all voids. The water to cement ratio for all grout
mixtures is approximately 0.5.
MIXING METHODS
Concrete Mixing Methods
The method used to mix concrete can have significant impact on the final strength of concrete produced.
When using a mechanical mixer, proper distribution can be achieved by allowing the dry materials to mix for a minimum of
five minutes. Let the materials become well mixed and slowly add water until the proper workability is reached.
When the use of a mechanical mixer is not feasible, a manual method of concrete mixing is allowable. In order to ensure
material strength properties assumed in the design, it is important to use only clean and fresh materials and mix them using
the volcano or sifting methods. Before starting, place a thin concrete pad where the concrete mixing will take place. This
will limit the amount of unwanted constituents in the mix (i.e. soil, grass, sticks, etc.) and will allow less water to escape.
The “volcano” or cone method is the most commonly used method of manually mixing concrete. Take care to thoroughly
mix dry materials before creating the volcano by shoveling the materials back and forth into newly formed, better mixed
piles at least twice. Make a cone of thoroughly mixed dry material with a basin in the top where water can be placed. Dry
material is then mixed in with the water and shoveled back and forth, taking care not to lose any of the water, until the mix
is of a uniform and workable consistency.
San Albino, Nicaragua San Albino, Nicaragua San Albino, Nicaragua
The sifting method requires the materials to be added in stages. First, mix the dry gravel and sand. Once well mixed, add the
cement and gently mix the pile so no cement is lost. Using shovels, mix the dry components thoroughly. A well distributed
mixture can be achieved by shoveling the materials into a single pile, then moving the pile twice, back and forth. After the
dry materials are well mixed, add water using the same method. During this process, continue moving the pile to ensure
uniformity.
Placing Concrete
Before starting, wet contact surfaces to prevent dry surfaces from absorbing
the wet cement paste from the concrete mix. Place concrete within an hour
of mixing to prevent hardening before placement, and discard the concrete if
the time limit is exceeded. When working in the heat of the day this time could
be significantly reduced. Concrete should not be dropped at a height greater
than one meter as can cause the aggregate and cement paste to separate and
reduce the final concrete strength. Concrete should be rodded to ensure that
it is well consolidated and free of entrapped air. Either a piece of reinforcing
Butare, Rwanda
bar or a stick may be used to rod the concrete with an ideal diameter of 16
millimeters. If the diameter is smaller, the rod may introduce air into the concrete rather than remove it.

Curing
Fresh concrete may crack when it is allowed to dry rapidly. Thus, proper curing
of concrete is essential. After the concrete is placed, covering it with wet burlap
sacks or plastic sheeting will help reduce the amount of moisture lost due to
evaporation, ensure consistent hydration, and mitigate cracking due to rapid
drying. Moistening empty cement bags and covering the fresh concrete is
another method of curing. Hydrate the concrete by adding water to the surface
each day.
Mortar and Grout Mixing Methods
Mortar and grout should be
mixed similarly to concrete on a
controlled surface. It is important
that mortar and grout is mixed
thoroughly and placed within a
maximum of one hour.
Coko, Rwanda La Tranca, Nicaragua
5.2 Masonry
SAFETY
In case of masonry wall collapses, a limited access zone should be established around the area of masonry construction.
Consider where the wall is being built, the activities occurring in the surrounding area, and the height at which the masonry
is being constructed. When building tall masonry structures, it may be necessary to construct scaffolding to use as a working
platform. This creates additional safety considerations including working at heights and working below other activities. See
Section 2: Culture of Safety for additional safety and PPE requirements.
QUALITY CONTROL
To ensure the proper mixtures, review Section 5.1. It is important that the correct dimensions and quality of materials are
satisfied. If there are any deviations from plans or mix specifications, they should be documented in the as-builts.
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

Recommended Materials Recommended Tools
• Stone • Shovels
• Concrete masonry unit or brick • Buckets
• Sand • Trowels
• Water • Level
• String
• Plumb bob
• Square
• Wood formwork
• Gloves
• Closed toe footwear

STONE MASONRY
Care should be taken to ensure a stone masonry structure is strong and long lasting. This can be done by using as many
large stones and as little mortar as possible, and placing the stones as the mortar is being mixed to ensure a quality product.
Additional dressing may be required to ensure proper fit and to avoid shims or small rocks to balance a stone in place as it
is better to prepare the stone so that it fits without assistance.
Stone Masonry Construction Best Practices

• Pack the mortar around the stones with a masonry trowel or by hand to ensure there are no gaps
• Always stagger each layer of masonry
• Try to place large stones so that their large face is facing down
• Good masonry uses five centimeters or less of mortar between joints
• Stagger masonry joints
Cyumba, Rwanda Butare, Rwanda Churo Alto, Bolivia
CMU BLOCK MASONRY

Concrete masonry unit (CMU) blocks are used as the formwork for the concrete
towers and the primary function when used in this fashion is to resist the fluid
pressure of concrete when casting the towers. For proper bonding, ensure
blocks are wet before applying mortar, and mix small batches to ensure that
the mortar is fresh and workable. Mortar between CMU blocks should not be
thicker than one to two centimeters. To ensure there are no gaps, pack the
mortar around the blocks with a masonry trowel or by hand. If hollow blocks
are being used, each cell should be filled with concrete or mortar. It is also best
practice to stagger each layer of masonry.
Note the size of locally available block and plan wall dimensions accordingly. It is ideal to use whole blocks instead of having
to break or cut blocks to fit dimensions.
When casting the towers in accordance with the construction guidelines of Section 6: Construction, no reinforcing within
the cells is required. If using CMU blocks other than described in this manual, reinforcing may be required and a qualified
engineer should be contacted.
BRICK
Bricks can be used as formwork on the towers of suspended bridges. Mortar
between bricks should not be thicker than one to two centimeters. Pack the
mortar around the blocks with a masonry trowel or by hand to ensure there
are no gaps.
When casting the pedestals in accordance with the construction guidelines of

Section 6: Construction, no reinforcing is required. If using bricks other than
described in this manual, reinforcing may be required and a qualified engineer Churo Alto, Bolivia
should be contacted.

Section 6 - Construction
This section contains provisions for the construction of a suspended bridge. There are ten subsections in Section 6: Construction,
structure as follows:
6.1 Construction Layout 6.6 Begin Ramp Walls

6.2 Excavation 6.7 Cable Hoisting
6.3 Foundation and Tiers 6.8 Build Backwall and Continue Ramp Construction
6.4 Towers 6.9 Construct Walkway, Grout Tubes and Construct Ramp Topping
6.5 Anchors 6.10 Completion
6.1 Construction Layout
SCOPE
The layout of the proposed structure shall be measured and marked on the
existing topography to ensure the correct placement of the footings, ramps,
and anchors. These markings will instruct where the excavations shall take
place.
Safety
When performing the construction layout, it can be helpful to be aware of the
surrounding safety concerns. Be aware of any dangerous insects or animals Cerca la Source, Haiti
that one may come into contact with during construction. If crossing the river,
take additional safety measures when the water is high or when crossing an existing structure.
A clear working environment, free of large branches and other tripping hazards (rocks and roots), can provide a safe
construction site. Be aware of steep terrain. During this activity, removal of trees or tree branches may take place. Proper
PPE, safety suggestions, and additional information can be found in Section 2: Culture of Safety.
QUALITY CONTROL
The initial construction layout is critical to begin a successful project. During this stage, the establishment of centerline,
foundation locations with respect to the survey markers, and verification of the span length and difference in height are of
utmost importance. Once the abutment foundations and anchors have been marked, it is good practice to confirm all of
the dimensions with respect to the design drawings and correct and discrepancies. If using survey equipment, it should be
calibrated to ensure accuracy of measurement. Laser distance finders should be used with caution and only for general
verifications.
In the event that offset distances from survey points on either side of the river or the overall span length or elevations do
not match those shown on the design drawings and exceed the established tolerances, the engineer should be contacted
immediately. The initial survey may have been processed incorrectly and should be rechecked. The project should be halted
until a resolution is determined. Continuing to construct the bridge that does not match the design drawings may result in
an unsafe structure.
Quality Control Checklist: Quality Control Photos

• Identify existing survey points marked at the site • Survey stakes along centerline on left and right
• Establish centerline of bridge banks
• Confirm bridge span and offsets from survey points • Pulled centerline with indication of tower locations
• Tower foundations marked and located correctly square to • Pulled centerline with indication of anchor
centerline locations
• Anchors marked and located correctly square to centerline
• As-built dimensions recorded and marked on drawings

MATERIALS AND TOOLS

Recommended Tools:
• 100 meter measuring tape
• Level
• String line
• Plumb bob
• Spray paint
• Stakes
• Machete
• Hammer
LAYOUT CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Establish Centerline
Locate an existing survey point by observation or benchmark. Ideally, all
survey points are discoverable. With two or more existing surveyed points,
establish the centerline of the bridge across the river with a string line and/or
long measuring tape.

Step 2 – Stake Foundation and Anchor Points Along Centerline
Establish the left and right areas of construction. The orientation of the left and
right side of the river is determined by standing facing downstream. Clear the
area of all debris that may obstruct the site layout. Using a long measuring
tape, string line, or surveying equipment, establish the centerline of the bridge
and place a stake along the centerline at front of the right foundation FOF(R).
Repeat this process for the left bank. From these main points, the extents of
the footing/anchors can be marked.
Candelaria, Panama
BENCHMARK
(RIGHT)
℄ BRIDGE
Figure 14.1 – Excavation Layout Step 2
Step 3 – Stake Construction Benchmarks

From the stake at the front of the foundation, place an additional stake at the back of the anchor. From this point, place
a construction benchmark stake a minimum of five meters away from the river along the centerline. This construction
benchmark stake will act as the permanent centerline marker and thus, needs to be placed firmly so as not to move during
construction. This should be done on each side of the river.
BENCHMARK
(RIGHT)
℄ BRIDGE
Step 4 – Stake Left and Right Abutments

Place stakes at all corners of the foundations and anchors. These points can be established on either side of the centerline
by using the 3-4-5 method.
BENCHMARK
(RIGHT)
℄ BRIDGE
Figure 14.2 – Excavation Layout Step 4
3-4-5 Method:
The four corners of each
substructure element are to
be marked from the bridge
centerline. Using a 12 meter
string or measuring tape,
connect the end at FOF(R)
while an additional person
Chameau, Haiti
holds the 4 meter mark
along the centerline. A third person then holds the string or measuring tape at the 9 meter mark, repositioning until the
remaining 3 meters can reach back to FOF(R). Holding the string or measuring tape taught in this position will create
a triangle with sides of 3, 4, and 5 meter sides and will form a right angle at the junction of the 3 and 4 meter sides. A
stake should be added to point “a” and used to mark the front corners of the footing excavation. Repeat this process to
mark the remaining corners of all excavations.
Spray paint the top of the stakes after they have been placed in all four
corners of each foundation and anchor. Stake and mark locations for the
left and right ramp walls, then connect all stakes with a string. Verify both
sides are square to each other and confirm that the layout matches the
plans and that all corners are square. Finally, mark the ground with spray
paint to establish the excavation perimeters and remove the string lines to
prevent tripping hazards. Cerca la Source, Haiti

6.2 Excavation
SCOPE
This section contains provisions for abutment excavations, including tower
foundations, anchors, and ramp walls.
SAFETY
Excavations and trenches pose a major safety concern on bridge sites.
Benching or sloping plans are required for excavations deeper than 1.5 meters.
Recommended benching dimensions are 1.0 meters deep by 1.0 meters wide
or sloping the excavation to a maximum of 45°. Keep in mind that benching Cerca la Source, Haiti
excavations can significantly increase the amount of material to be removed
and as such, the project schedule may need to be modified accordingly.
The edges of excavations must be kept free of materials that could fall or roll into excavations. Before excavating consider
the soil classification, potential buried utilities, as well as ingress and egress from the excavation. Proper benching, grading,
shoring and drainage should be executed. Place spoils a minimum of one meter from the edge of the excavation and be
aware of people in and around the work area. When working in the excavation, hardhats should be worn to protect workers
from potential falling hazards. Means of drainage can be constructed to divert rain water away, and pumps should be used
in high water table environments.
It can be helpful to designate an excavation perimeter that keeps people and animals away and safe from falling into the
hole.
Several people may be working in close proximity to one another and tools such as shovels, picks, and excavation bars can
present striking hazards to other workers. It is important to be mindful of the location of all workers when swinging tools.
Additionally, when ejecting spoils out of the excavation, make sure that all workers are clear of the area where spoils are
placed. This location should be sufficiently away from the excavation so that they do not fall back into or block access to
the work area. Proper PPE including work boots, safety glasses, hard hats, and gloves should be worn.
When excavating in rock, additional safety precautions should be taken. Chipping rock creates flying hazards and as
such, eye protection absolutely must be worn. If a jackhammer is required, consult the manufacturer for additional safety
requirements.

QUALITY CONTROL
The primary goals during the excavation stage are to prepare the abutment areas such that the foundations ramp walls,
and anchors may be correctly constructed. All excavation dimensions should be checked against the design drawings and
care should be taken to establish the correct elevations at the base of the abutments relative to one another (left and right)
as well as the high water line. If the elevations are not consistent with the design within tolerances, the required freeboard
may not be acquired. Tolerance limits shall be specified by the design engineer.
Additional aspects of quality control during excavations include monitoring ground water intrusion and checking the soils
competency for bearing. In the event water is found to be entering the excavation, proper drainage or means of extraction
should be implemented to prevent collapse of the soil walls and permit masonry or concrete to be placed undisturbed.
If incompetent soils are discovered or large boulders are uncovered that inhibit the abutment from being constructed as
designed, the design engineer should be informed.
Quality Control Checklist: Quality Control Photos

• Foundation excavation depths and elevations • Foundation excavations
• Anchor (beam or drum) excavation depths and • Anchor excavations
elevation • Ramp wall excavations
• Approach ramp wall widths and depths
• All excavation plan dimensions consistent with
drawings
• Base of foundation and anchor are level
• No ground water entering excavation
• Proper bearing capacity of soils at base of excavation
• As-built elevations and dimensions recorded and
marked on drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

Recommended Tools:
• Measuring tape
• Level
• String line
• Automatic level and tripod
• Philly Rod
• Plumb bob
• Spray paint
• Excavation bars
• Picks
• Shovels
• Machete
• Hammer
• Carpentry nails
• Buckets

EXCAVATION SEQUENCE IN SOIL

Step 1 – Excavate the Foundation Areas
Excavate the area indicated for the foundation area. Maintain vertical soil walls
along the perimeter of the excavation as this will serve as the formwork for the
foundation stone masonry walls. Repeat the excavation process on each side
of the river. Once completed, compact the bottom of the excavation area by
means of stomping or compacting posts.
Churo Alto, Bolivia

Step 2 – Excavate the Anchor Areas
Excavate the areas for the anchor making sure to bench or slope where required.
Referring to the Anchor Details sheet of the drawing set for dimensions,
remove the soil area needed to place the anchor. The anchor excavation shall
be parallel to the foundation and centered on the structure centerline, and if
applicable, ensure that proper benching is used. Once completed, compact
the bottom of the excavation area by means of stomping or compacting posts.
Butare, Rwanda
Step 3 – Excavate the Ramp Wall Areas
Remove the soil in the locations for the ramp walls between the foundation and
anchor excavations per the standard drawings.
Gelin, Haiti
Step 4 – Excavate the Cable Areas
The area between the ramp walls, anchor, and foundation must be excavated
to a depth that allows the proper cable placement and angle. In-situ soil
beneath the cable locations should remain.
Churo Alto, Bolivia

EXCAVATION CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE IN ROCK
Since stakes may not enter the rock, use spray paint to mark the excavation
area. Ensure the rock surface beneath foundation and anchor areas are rough,
but clean of debris and organic materials such as soil and brush.
Following the same process listed in Excavation Sequence in Soil and

establish the area of excavation per plan set. Use an excavation bar and pick
to establish the ease of removing the rock. If the rock is too hard to be removed
with an excavation bar, possible methods may be implemented including the Jicaro, Nicaragua
usage of a hammer and rock pick, chisel and hammer, or jackhammer.
If dowel bars are required, use a rock drill to create holes in which the dowel bars to be interested. If a rock drill is used,
extra safety precautions should be taken per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

6.3 Foundation and Tiers
SCOPE AND TERMINOLOGY

This section contains provisions for the foundation and tier construction
operations.
Level Pad – A concrete layer used between the ground and foundation; the
layer is the width of the stone masonry walls
Foundation – The structural base of the towered portion of the abutment;

comprised of stone masonry walls with a rock/grout fill built to ground line Churo Alto, Bolivia
Tier – One or more structural elements placed between the foundation and tower; the tiers are one meter in height and
comprised of stone masonry walls with a rock/grout fill; the highest tier will support the tower
Stone Masonry Wall – Constructed of stone and mortar; thicknesses vary per plans
Rock/Grout Fill – A 30 centimeter lift comprised of large stone, small stone, gravel and sand, placed largest to smallest,
amongst which is placed a grout mixture
SAFETY
Before beginning foundation and tier construction, be aware of the hazards that accompany carrying heavy rocks, cement
bags, and other materials over the rugged terrain of a bridge construction site. These materials are heavy and using
a proper lifting technique and working within one’s physical limitations can help mitigate injury. Proper eye protection
is required when moving, dropping, and dressing stones which can result in flying rock fragments. Additionally, proper
footwear and hand protection can prevent injury if stones are dropped.
Avoid contact with cement dust or concrete. When opening and pouring out cement bags, be careful not to inhale cement
dust as this can lead to irritation of the nose and throat and choking. Repeated exposures increase one’s risk of silicosis
which has long term effects and can even be fatal. Eye protection must be worn to prevent irritation of the eyes.
The hazards related to wet cement contacting one’s skin are minimal if for a short exposure duration. However, prolonged
exposure can lead to alkaline burns or skin ulcers. Make sure to wash off wet cement from skin quickly and be sure to
remove any cement trapped in gloves, boots, or clothing. When mixing concrete, proper PPE and planning can reduce the
hazards from working with cement.
Constructing the final tiers can present limited access, objects falling from the work area, and any of the other additional
challenges of working at heights. Hardhats, scaffolding, and additional means of fall protection should be introduced to
make tower construction safer.
Additional PPE, safety suggestions, and information can be found in Section 2: Culture of Safety.

QUALITY CONTROL
The foundation and tier portions of the abutment provide support for the main cables and transfer all of the vertical load
into the ground. Each stone masonry perimeter wall should be constructed plumb using mortar within an hour of mixing to
ensure horizontal and vertical load capacities are met. When filling each foundation or tier level, use a range of stone sizes
along with gravel and sand to reduce internal voids and reach the fill density assumed in the design. The incremental grout
layer is important to reduce the overall lateral pressure against the stone masonry walls. The perimeter concrete topping
creates a level bearing surface that helps transfer vertical loads to the walls below. Greater horizontal friction resistance is
generated by keeping this concrete surface rough and by placing larger rocks at the interior of the foundation or tier that will
penetrate into the tier above it.
All foundation and tier dimensions should be checked against the design drawings with an emphasis on the orientation
relative to the bridge centerline. Consult the design engineer for tolerance limits on as-built dimensions.
When beginning the foundation construction, it is good practice to verify the excavation dimensions and elevations and
check for any water seepage. Often times the excavation may be completed well in advance of the foundation construction
and wind or rain may have altered the excavation during the elapsed time.
Quality Control Checklist: Quality Control Photos:

(For each foundation and tier constructed) (For each foundation and tier constructed)
• Excavation free of standing or seeping water • Completed perimeter walls
• Orientation square to bridge centerline • Interior partially filled with rock and grout
• Plan and elevation dimensions • Completely filled foundation or tier
• Masonry wall thickness • Completed foundation or tier with perimeter concrete
• Interior filled with rock and grout (no soil) topping
• Roughened concrete slab around surface perimeter
• Mortar and grout placed within one hour of mixing
marked on drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

Recommended Materials: Recommended Tools:
• Cement • Shovels
• Sand • Buckets
• Stone • Masonry tools
• Gravel • Construction square
• Compacted fill material • Level
• Plumb bob
• String line
• Tape measure
• Spray paint
• Stakes
• Tamping rod

FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Prepare Foundation Base
Confirm the foundation excavation is level from front to back and side to side,
square to the opposing foundation, and centered on the centerline. Construct
a five centimeter thick concrete level pad beneath the masonry wall footprint
that is placed onto soil at the base of the foundation to create a level bearing
surface for stone masonry. See Section 5: Concrete and Masonry, for concrete
specifications.
Gelin, Haiti
Step 2 – Place Foundation Corner Stones
Once the level pad has been cast and is level, place a stone in each corner
of the foundation excavation. These stones should be dressed to be square.
Gelin, Haiti
Step 3 – Construct Foundation Walls
Place mortar and stones in between the corner stones using a string line to
act as a guide to obtain a consistent 30 centimeter wall thickness. Stones shall
be placed as close together as possible. Once the perimeter walls have been
constructed within the corner stones, repeat this process moving upward until
the four foundation walls have reached plan height.
It is not recommended that unreinforced CMU, block, or brick be used in the

construction of foundation walls. Because of the varying quality and increased Churo Alto, Bolivia
chance of wall blowout, consult with a qualified engineer before using CMU,
block, or brick for foundations.
Step 4 – Fill Foundation

After the foundation walls have been constructed, the interior must be filled.
In approximately 30 centimeter lifts, place a layer of large stones within the
perimeter. Between the large stones, fill the gaps with smaller stones and
the remaining voids with gravel and smaller aggregate. By using a tamping
rod, voids can be minimized and the fill density will increase. A grout mixture
shall be poured over each lift to aid in consolidation of the fill and reduce
voids. Repeat this process until the foundation has been filled. See Section 5:
Concrete and Masonry for grout specifications.
Gelin, Haiti
Step 5 – Cast Concrete Perimeter Topping Slab

A concrete slab shall be placed on top of the outer edges of the top of foundation.
The slab shall be 70 centimeters wide, a minimum of five centimeters thick, and
must be roughened. Using a construction square, plumb bob, tape measure,
and level, verify each foundation is correctly sized and aligned.
Churo Alto, Bolivia

TIER CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Layout, Verify, Construct and Repeat
Following the construction of
the foundation, lay out the tier
to be constructed on top of the
foundation per the plan set.
Using tier dimensions, repeat
the foundation construction steps
2 through 5 to construct each
required tier. Ensure that the
alignment of each tier is true to
the centerline. Gelin, Haiti Chimore, Bolivia
Kanyarira, Rwanda Gelin, Haiti Candelaria, Panama

6.4 Towers

This section contains provisions for tower construction operations.
Tower – Bearing for the walkway and handrail cables, and transition to
the bridge; the towers are comprised of concrete, a masonry perimeter,
reinforcement, cable saddles, and plastic tubing to form two columns and a
walkway
Masonry Perimeter – Composed of concrete masonry units (CMU), brick, or Butare, Rwanda
dressed masonry; used as formwork for the towers
Cable Saddle – A steel wheel embedded in the tower; used as a bearing device for the handrail cables
Walkway Hump – 20 centimeters of concrete placed as a bearing for the walkway tubing and cables
Walkway Topping – A concrete layer that provides a smooth transition from the walkway ramp to the decking of the bridge,
and is placed over the walkway cables and tubes
Column – Comprised of concrete, reinforcing bars, and masonry formwork; a section of the tower used to provide elevation
between the walkway and handrail cables; the cable saddle and handrail cable are placed at the top of the column
SAFETY
Before beginning tower construction, be aware of the hazards that accompany carrying heavy rocks, masonry, cement
bags, reinforcing bars and other materials over the terrain of a bridge construction site. Eye protection, foot protection and
hand protection can prevent injury when working with the materials and tools needed for the towers.
The hazards related to wet cement contacting one’s skin is minimal if for a short exposure duration. However, prolonged
remove any cement trapped in gloves, boots, or clothing. When mixing concrete and mortar, proper PPE and planning can
reduce the hazards from working with cement.
Hand and eye protection should be worn when cutting reinforcing bar. Take special care when bending and transporting
rebar a cover all exposed ends of vertical bars with mushroom caps or by tying a piece of wood over a series or rebar to
avoid impalement.
Constructing the towers can present limited access, objects falling from the work area, and any of the other additional
challenges of working at heights. Hardhats, scaffolding, and additional means of fall protection should be introduced to
make tower construction safer.
Proper PPE, safety suggestions, and additional information can be found in Section 2: Culture of Safety.

QUALITY CONTROL
The towers on each abutment directly support the main cables and transfer all vertical loads and any transverse horizontal
wind loads from bridges without lateral stabilization systems into the tiers. The internal concrete portion of the tower serves
as the main structural component while the masonry serves as formwork. When different types of masonry are used than
assumed on the drawings, care should be taken to make sure the minimum concrete dimensions are still met. The steel
reinforcing cage should be placed centered in the column as best possible while maintaining proper clearances on all sides.
It is essential to make sure each handrail cable saddle is in proper alignment with the bridge centerline to prevent any
adverse lateral loads at the top of the towers. Furthermore, it is important to verify the vertical distance between the handrail
cable and walkway cable support points.
All tower dimensions should be checked against the design drawings with an emphasis on the orientation relative to
the bridge centerline and level cable support points across the walkway hump and between towers. Consult the design
engineer for tolerance limits on as-built dimensions.

• Orientation square to the bridge centerline • Reinforcing cage placed with base course of masonry
• Reinforcing bar size and placement • Column formed with masonry prior to concrete
• Concrete column dimensions placement
• Saddle elevations (level to one another) • Saddle (wheel) placement
• Saddle alignment with bridge centerline • Completed columns
• Walkway hump elevation • Completed walkway hump with cable guides
• As-built dimensions and elevations recorded and • Completed tower
marked on drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Water • Grinder
• Dressed/shaped stone • Masonry tools
• Gravel • Construction square
• CMU or bricks • Level
• Cables • Plumb bob
• Tubing • String line
• Tie wire • Tape measure
• Reinforcing bars (column reinforcement and cable • Spray paint
guides) • Wire cutters
• Wheel • Saw
• Saw blades
• Hacksaw

TOWER CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Layout Tower
Refer to the standard Tower Details sheet of the plan set for dimensions of the
tower. Begin tower construction by marking the base dimensions onto the tier
that the tower will be built upon confirming that that they are made with respect
to the centerline of bridge and normal to the opposing abutment and tower to
ensure proper cable installation.
Step 2 – Prepare Materials

Using a rebar bender or field
constructed bending table, bend
the reinforcing bars per plans.
Prepare the mortar and concrete
that will be needed to construct the
tower. See Section 5: Concrete
and Masonry for concrete and
mortar specifications.
San Albino, Nicaragua San Albino, Nicaragua
Step 3 – Construct Tower Base Level

Place four masonry blocks in the four corners of the tower and build a 20
centimeter tall masonry perimeter. Place the 16mm u-shaped T01 bars 7.5
centimeters above of the highest tier. Installing the T02 stirrups at this stage
of construction will help keep the T01 bars stable. Correct placement of
reinforcement can be obtained by using rocks. Fill the remaining 20 centimeter
base with concrete.
Gelin, Haiti
Step 4 – Construct Tower

Continue to build the masonry walls of the towers and fill with concrete. This process shall be done in 20-40 centimeter lifts
so that the masonry walls do not receive too much wet concrete pressure. 7.5 centimeter clear cover shall be provided for
all reinforcing per drawing details.
If stones are used instead of masonry block or brick formwork, the height and inside dimensions of the walls must be kept
the same to ensure the same reinforced concrete structure is constructed.
Gelin, Haiti San Albino, Nicaragua San Albino, Nicaragua

Step 5 – Embed Wheel Saddle

Embed a steel wheel in each column of the tower. Ensure that the tire valve
hole is rotated such that it is embedded in concrete and not visible. Using a
level to confirm that wheel elevations are equal to one another and the ground,
place the wheel such that the bearing point of the cable is 1.5 meters above
the base of the tower.
Candelaria, Panama
Step 6 – Place Concrete around Wheels

Fill the wheels with concrete and ensure there are no voids on either side or
beneath the wheel. Finish the top of each tower column with concrete from the
masonry to the wheel edge forming a smooth hump ensuring that the steel
portion is exposed along the full length of the arc to ensure steel to steel cable
contact. Pull a string from the cable bearing location on the wheel to the anchor
location to confirm the concrete topping will not interfere with the final resting
positions of the cable.
Gelin, Haiti
Step 7 – Place Concrete Walkway Hump
Place a 20 centimeter tall
concrete hump and the T03 cable
guide bars between the tower
columns. This hump will be the
bearing location for the plastic
tubing that will hold the walkway
cables.
Gelin, Haiti Gelin, Haiti

6.5 Anchors

This section contains provisions for anchor construction.
Adjustable Anchor – The anchor on the high side of the river; comprised of
reinforcing steel and concrete; requires plastic tubing and erection hooks;
main cables are placed through the plastic tubing then wrapped and clamped
around the reinforcing cage; cables will be hoisted from this anchor
Anchor Beam – A rectangular beam comprised of concrete and a reinforcing Terera Sur, Nicaragua
bar cage and placed; the cables of the bridge wrap the anchor beam
Drum Anchor – A cylindrical element comprised of concrete and a reinforcing bar cage; can be used in locations where there
is unfractured rock at the anchor location
Erection hook – Bent reinforcing bar used to attach a winch while hoisting cables and sag setting
Fixed Anchor – The anchor on the low side of the river; comprised of reinforcing steel and concrete; does not require plastic
tubing or erection hooks; main cables shall be wrapped around the reinforcing cage and clamped
Flexible Plastic Tubing – Tubing to surround the cables in the anchor; must be able to bend around the reinforcing cage
without kinking
SAFETY
When performing the anchor construction, it is helpful to be aware of the surrounding safety concerns. A clear working
environment, free of large branches and other tripping hazards, can provide a safe construction site. Consider ingress and
egress from the excavation. Before constructing the anchor, be aware of the hazards that accompany carrying cement bags
and other materials over the terrain of a bridge construction site. Hardhats, foot protection, and hand protection can prevent
injury if materials or tools are dropped.
The reinforcing cage for the anchor of any suspension bridge is extremely heavy and creates many risks. Always create a
plan for moving the steel cages and communicate the plan with everyone involved. It can be beneficial to assign a person to
direct the crew as the reinforcing cage is moved. This person should be able to command attention and communicate with
the entire group, both local community members and volunteers.
Hand and eye protection should be worn when cutting reinforcing bar. Take special care when bending and transporting the
bars to avoid abrasions.
The hazards related to wet cement contacting one’s skin are minimal if for a short exposure duration. However, prolonged
remove any cement trapped in gloves, boots, or clothing.

QUALITY CONTROL
The concrete beam or drum anchors provide a means to terminate the main cables and transfer loads to the rest of the
abutment. The concrete strength and quality are essential to the anchor performance. While casting the anchors, use
a vibrator or rod to work the concrete free of voids and distribute around reinforcing and cables. All concrete should
be placed within one hour of mixing. The surface of concrete already placed may need to be moistened if too much
time elapses between concrete batches, especially on warm, dry, or windy days. If a construction joint is required, take
measures to prevent debonding between layers. Such measures include roughening the concrete surface, maintaining
enough clearance around horizontal reinforcing such that coarse aggregate can pass, and moistening the existing concrete
surface prior to placing new concrete.
When beginning the foundation construction, it is good practice to verify the excavation dimensions and elevations and
check for any water seepage. Often times the excavation may be completed well in advance of the foundation construction
and wind or rain may have altered the excavation during the elapsed time. Verify anchor dimensions with the design
drawings with an emphasis on the orientation relative to the bridge centerline. Consult the design engineer for tolerance
limits on as-built dimensions.

• Excavation free of standing or seeping water • Reinforcing cage placed in excavation
• Reinforcing bar size, quantity, bends and placement • Fixed anchor cage with cables installed
• Anchor beam or drum dimensions and orientation with • Adjustable anchor cage with cables and tubing
respect to the bridge centerline installed
• Cable placement or tubing placement • Completed anchor
• Erection hook placement
• As-built dimensions recorded and marked on
drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Gravel • Grinder
• Tie wire • Masonry tools
• Reinforcing bars • Construction square
• Cable • Level
• Flexible plastic tubing • Plumb bob
• Forged cable clamps • String line
• Tamping rod
• Tape measure
• Spray paint
• Wire cutters

BEAM ANCHOR CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Assemble Anchor Reinforcing
Using a rebar bender or assembled bending table, bend the reinforcing bars
required. See the standard anchor details (Chapter 2: Construction Drawings)
for reinforcing bar bend information. While assembling the anchor reinforcing
cage, ensure the proper spacing and splice lengths are provided.
Bakokwe, Rwanda
Step 2 – Unspool Cable
Take care when unspooling the cable as kinks in the cable are detrimental to
the material strength and are a point of weakness. Furthermore, take care not
to lay the cable in sandy areas as sand may get in between the cable strands
and cause damage. Use heavy tie wire to wrap the loose ends of the cable
and prevent unraveling.
Lura, Panama
Step 3 – Drape Cables
The cables should be draped through the tower walkway tubes and across
the river. Place the walkway cables in the fixed anchor excavation and the
handrail cables over the saddles and into the excavation. The ends of each
cable must drape off of the tower, following a straight path behind the tiers and
into the anchor excavation. At the adjustable anchor place the cables through
the flexible plastic tubing.
Churo Alto, Bolivia

Step 4 – Place Anchor Reinforcing Cages
Set the anchor reinforcing cages into the anchor excavations and on top of the main cables. Roll the anchor cage to the
correct angle so that it is parallel to the front face of anchor. Wrap each cable around the cage and extend the tail towards
the tower ensuring that the location of each cable is positioned and aligned behind its respective bearing location at the
tower. Install the erection hooks onto the adjustable side reinforcing cage in the proper locations.
Rugogwe, Rwanda Amayito, Nicaragua Churo Alto, Bolivia
Step 5 – Clamp Cables at Fixed Anchor

Refer to the drop forged cable clamp Table 6.1 for the correct number of clamps and clamp spacing. The dead end of the
cable (tail) should sit on top of the live end. At the fixed anchor, apply and fully tighten the cable clamps per manufacturer’s
specified torque or until a 25% reduction in cross section in the dead end of the cable has been achieved. The clamp saddle
shall lie against the live end of the cable (never saddle a dead horse). The U-bolt of the clamp should lie against the dead
end of the cable.


3/4 19 4 5 12 130
7/8 22 4 5 13 225
1 25 5 6 14 225
1 1/8 29 6 6 15 225
1 1/4 32 7 6 16 360
1 3/8 35 7 6 16 360
1 1/2 38 8 7 18 360
Step 6 – Place Concrete at Fixed Anchor

Place blocking under the cables to achieve the proper angle from the anchor to the tower, per plan set. Creating the correct
angle can be done by pulling a string line from the anchor to the embedded saddle at the tower and the cable guides in
the walkway hump. Fill the anchor excavation with concrete while achieving the dimensions specified in the Anchor Details
of the plans. Ensure that the entire anchor cage is completely submerged in concrete with adequate cover of the rebar.
Concrete should be uniformly mixed and thoroughly consolidated against the faces of all forms/excavation and around
reinforcing bars. Rod the concrete with a 16 millimeter diameter bar or stick to ensure no pockets of air remain. See Section
5: Concrete and Masonry for concrete specifications.
Mubuga, Rwanda Gelin, Haiti Churo Alto, Bolivia
Step 7 – Prepare Adjustable Anchor and Place Concrete

Repeat step five for the adjustable anchor. Wrap each cable around the cage ensuring the dead end (tail) is facing towards
the tower. Again, ensure that the location of each cable is positioned and aligned behind its respective bearing location at
the tower. Tighten two clamps with enough torque such that one can begin to see a reduction in the cross section of the
dead end of the cable.
Repeat the concrete placing process that was performed on the fixed anchor in Step 6. Concrete must be kept free from the
interior of the tubes by capping the ends with rags, tape, used cement bags, or other materials.
Cerca la Source, Haiti Gelin, Haiti Cerca la Source, Haiti

DRUM ANCHOR CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Build Cages
Place the vertical anchor rods as
shown in to the diagram below.
First tie together the outer rebar
cage with 10mm rebar specified
for the outer drum.
Moletis, Ethiopia Moletis, Ethiopia
Step 2 – Add Erection Hook

Tie the erection hook to the anchor that will be adjustable. Attach the bent
rebar erection hook beneath the upper stirrup of the outer cage. A cable winch
will attach to the hook while setting cable sag so ensure the hooks are well
secured.
Keranyo, Ethiopia
Step 3 – Place Rebar Cages and Pour Inner Drum

Place the inner cage inside the
excavation pit embedded to the
depth specified in drawings,
leaving the top of the rebar cage
approximately 55 centimeters
above ground (on adjustable
side, the erection hook must
face towards tower). Place the
Chaqui Cocha, Bolivia
outer cage around the inner
cage, attaching vertical rebar to
the backside of the drum. Verify
both cages are vertical and flush
and tie together at the back of
the excavation pit, furthest from
the tower. The outer cage diameter allows the handrail cables to come off the
tower and connect to the anchor at a straight line. The inner drum diameter
allows the walkway cables to come off the saddles and connect to the anchor
in a straight line. Frame and pour the inner drum with concrete mix proportion
1:2:3.
Step 4 – Position Cables

Position the cables to either side of the river. Thread four meters of plastic tubing on each of the cables on the adjustable
side. The non-adjustable side does not need tubing. For spans less than 40 meters, both loose ends must lie on the
adjustable end.

Step 5 – Pull Walkway Cable around the Anchor

Each walkway cable needs to wrap around the inner anchor and each loose end should be placed into the approach area
after 180 degree turn. Once secured, the cable must come off the walkway saddle and follow a straight path to the anchor.
The cable should wrap around the drum below the erection hook.
When using 3 walkway cables the middle one will be wrapped around the anchor drum and tied to itself.
Step 6 – Clamp Walkway Cables

Tie the walkway cables onto the opposing walkway cable after wrapping behind the anchor. Hand-tighten the cable clamps
so the saddle touches the live-end of the cable. (Never saddle a dead horse!) Hand tighten the adjustable side. Tighten non-
adjustable side to specified torque with minimum one meter long pipe or wrench. If clamps are malleable rather than drop
forged, clamp failure will occur if taken to an equivalent torque. For spans less than 40 meters, there are no clamps on the
fixed end as the cable is continuous. Rather, wrap the cable fully around the respective drum and return to adjustable side.
Step 7 – Pour the Anchor

Fill the excavation pit with concrete and continue to cast the drum to an
elevation 60 centimeters above the ground surface. Ensure 5 centimeters
of cover in all directions. Do not fill with rocks. DO NOT USE FORM-WORK
BELOW GROUND. Cast the fixed side first. Take care to tamp the concrete
mixture to ensure no voids form. Repeat for the adjustable side, ensuring no
concrete gets into the tubes and that the tube ends remain exposed. Let both
sides cure for a minimum of four days.
Step 8 – Pull Handrail Cables Around the Anchor
Each handrail must wrap around the outer anchor (both cages should be
incased in concrete) and the loose end should be placed into approach area.
Once secured, the cable must come off either the walkway or handrail saddle
and follow a straight path to the anchor. The cable should wrap around the
drum at ground level beneath the walkway cables.
Step 9 – Clamp Handrail Cables

Tie the handrail cable onto the opposing handrail cable after wrapping behind Keranyo, Ethiopia
the anchor. Hand-tighten the cable clamps immediately. Torque until the dead
end of the cable’s diameter has reduced at least 25%. If clamps are malleable rather than drop forged, clamp failure will
occur if taken to full torque, but cross-sectional reduction is critical.

6.6 Begin Ramp Walls

This section contains provisions for approach ramp construction.
Ramp Stone Masonry Wall – A ramp stone masonry wall is comprised of stone
and mortar with widths that vary from 30 centimeters to 70 centimeters in
thickness.
SAFETY
When constructing ramp walls, methods of ingress and egress from the Gelin, Haiti
excavation should be established. Proper benching, grading, shoring and
drainage should be executed. Keep spoils away from the edge of the excavation and determine rules on general activity,
including tool usage, around the excavation.
Be aware of the hazards that accompany carrying heavy stones, cement bags, and other materials over the terrain of a
bridge construction site. Moving, dropping, and dressing stones can result in rock fragment flying into the eyes. Proper
footwear and hand protection can prevent injury if stones or tools are dropped.
Mortar is mixed during this step. The proper PPE and planning can reduce the hazards from working with cement.
Constructing the ramp walls can present limited access, objects falling from the work area, and any of the other additional
challenges of working at heights. Hard hats, scaffolding and other means of fall protection should be introduced to make
ramp wall construction safer.
QUALITY CONTROL
The approach ramp not only provides a means of access to the bridge, but also provides a substantial portion of the
abutment mass and a connection between the anchor and foundation and tiers. The approach ramp walls create this
connection, contain the stone fill, and support the concrete topping slab. Each stone masonry wall should be constructed
plumb using mortar within 60 minutes of mixing.
All ramp wall dimensions should be checked against the design drawings. Consult the design engineer for tolerance limits
on as-built dimensions.

• Excavation free of standing or seeping water • Completed upstream and downstream walls
• Masonry wall thickness • Completed backwall
• Top of wall elevations
• Connected to both anchor and foundation/tiers
• Mortar used within one hour of mixing
drawings

MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Large stone • Masonry tools
• Small stone • Construction square
• Gravel • Level
• Tie wire • Plumb bob
• Reinforcing bars • String line
• Tamping rod
• Tape measure
SEQUENCE
Construct Ramp Walls
Using stone and mortar, lay the first layer of stones in the ramp wall excavation
areas per plan set. Reference the plans for wall width requirements noting that
the width of the wall increases for larger structures. Repeating lifts of masonry
stone and mortar, the walls should be built to a height equal to the top of the
foundation before sag can be set. The out-to-out dimension of the ramp walls
at the walkway surface is three meters. When thicker walls are required due to
the height above ground, the walls are widened to the outside. See Section 5:
Concrete and Masonry for mortar specifications. Cerca la Source, Haiti
Unreinforced CMU, block, or brick walls should not be used in the construction of ramp walls. Because of the varying quality
and increased chance of wall blowout, consult with a qualified engineer before using these materials in ramps walls.

6.7 Cable Hoisting

This section contains provisions for cable installation and how to position them
properly.
Hoisting sag – The initial position of the cable prior to installing the walkway
f-value – Distance from the lowest tower saddle to the lowest point on the
cable; the f-value is calculated using equation 6.1 along with the hoisting sag
percentage and as-built dimensions. Taba, Rwanda
Setting sag is one of the most dangerous processes during a suspended

build. Extensive planning should be done before this step is executed. Hand
protection and teamwork should be present when handling the cable.
Hardhats, foot protection, and hand protection can prevent injury if cables,
clamps or tools are dropped. Proper PPE, safety suggestions, and additional
information can be found in Section 2: Culture of Safety.
Winch Safety
A winch, also known as a come along, cable puller, tirfor, or cable hoist, is
used for adjusting cables and sag setting on all cable bridge projects. These
are two of the most critical steps in the construction process and are potentially
some of the more dangerous. Special care needs to be taken in the selection
and use of a winch. A winch should never be used for anything other than
its intended purpose. Any failure can lead to a cable slip, which is extremely
dangerous. A loose cable can whip out of control and cause significant injury.
Proper personal protective equipment should be worn when operating a winch.
Gelin, Haiti
A thorough inspection of the cable winch intended for use in cable sag setting
is mandatory prior to use. A failed winch can seriously injure or even kill a
person. Never use a winch that you do not trust, has been provided by an
unknown source, shows excessive rusting or is broken. Do not use a cheater
bar.
Ensure that all devices being used are capable of carrying the load force,
including the anchor points, and any other straps or fastening devices that may
be used to carry the load. Use appropriate end clamps and connections. Inspect
the chain for wear, twists, excessive dirt, broken links, and proper lubrication.
Inspect winch cable, chain, and hooks for deformations, cracks, damage, and
properly operating latches. Do not use a winch if parts are damaged.
Before tensioning cables and putting any load on the winch, determine
danger zones and safe zones. Dangers zones are areas which are unsafe
and should not be occupied during sag setting. Determine areas that are safe
escape routes to be used in case of emergency. Communicate the location of
those areas to all workers on the site. Do not straddle the winch. Only active
participants in the cable sag setting should be present at site. Never allow
participants or spectators to stand in front of the anchor when cable or cable
winch are under tension.

Cable Safety
Never use a cable clamp at the saddle to “hold” live cable under tension. Never leave a cable unsecured. Before tensioning
a cable ensure the tail of the dead end of the cable is secured to another cable before releasing the clamps.
Cables can slip. Ensure all clamps are fully torqued to the manufacturer’s requirements or the required deformation.
ESCAPE ROUTE
DANGER ZONE ESCAPE ROUTE DANGER ZONE
Figure 14.3 – Winch Safety Zones

QUALITY CONTROL
Hoisting the main cables sets the geometry for the walkway and ultimately determines what forces the abutments must
resist. If the cables are set either too high, too low, or out of level, the bridge may lose serviceability with a walkway that is
too steep or slanted, or the bridge abutments may experience a greater load demand than for which they were designed.
The main cable hoisting has major implications for the overall functionality and safety of the bridge structure.
Calculating the correct f-value and the methods for locating the low point on the bridge site should be clearly understood and
carried out by a qualified person. Survey equipment should be calibrated to ensure accuracy of measurement.
Hoisting all of the cables may take enough time that weather conditions at the project site can influence the cables hoisted
position in the form of temperature changes. Pre-stretched cables are typically used, but they may still experience slight
elongations and changes in elevation with the tensions associated with hoisting. The position of all cables should be verified
a minimum of 24 hours after hoisting. Consult the design engineer for tolerance limits on as-built sag values.
Installing the proper number of the correctly sized clamps at the appropriate spacing and torque is also paramount to the
safety and performance of the bridge. If a torque wrench is not available, using the reduced diameter method is a sufficient
alternative.
Coating the cables inside the approach ramp with tar or mastic helps prevent corrosion in the event water enter the ramp fill.

• Anchor has properly cured • Cross section of cable with measurement
• Verify span length and difference in elevation • Installed clamps
• Correct cable and clamp size • Torqued clamp showing cable diameter reduction
• Inspect cable for wire damage or splices • Adjustable anchor tubes filled with grout
• Handrail cables in proper bearing on tower saddles • Cables coated in tar or mastic
• Walkway cables through sleeve and between guides • Hoisted cables with level
over walkway hump
• Correctly calculated f-value
• Correct number and spacing of clamps
• Clamps sufficiently torqued
• Tube in adjustable anchor filled with grout
• Portion of cable below ramp coated in tar or mastic
drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Cable • Winch
• Drop forged cable clamps • Torque wrench
• Roofing tar • Automatic level and tripod
• 4-foot level
• Measuring tape
• String line
• Spray paint
• Permanent marker
• Duct tape

BEAM ANCHOR SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Establish and Mark the f-value
Ensure that the walkway cables and handrail cables are installed to their proper
angles. Using the as-built dimensions of the towers, calculate the hoisting
sag and f-value. At the lower of the two tower elevations on the side that the
fixed anchor is on, the f-value shall be measured down from the cable bearing
location on the saddle and marked on the abutment or newly established
benchmark near the tower. A newly established benchmark may need to be
made if the f-value exists at an elevation lower that the abutment. Place the
four-foot level on the handrail saddle. Using the level, measure down from the
bottom of the level to the required f-value. Mark this measurement with spray
paint and a more precise location over the paint with a permanent marker.
Establish markings for both the walkway and handrail cables.
The vertical distance, f, between the lowest point of the cable and the lower
walkway saddle is calculated by:
f= ((14.(
16 $ h Hoist
in which:
h Hoist = 0.046 $ L ((14.(
where:
L = span length, m
SPAN (L)
L/2 L/2
ΔH
hHoist
LOW POINT
hDL
hLL
f
SPAN (L)
L/2 L/2

ΔH
oist
L
LL
Step 2 – Place Automatic Level

Assemble and set an automatic level opposite of the marked abutment. The
level should be placed in a safe location that is away from the cables and the
winch danger zone. Because it will be used for a long period of time, the level
should also be placed somewhere that is comfortable and easy to access on
stable, level ground away from spoil piles. Finally, when choosing a location for
the level it is important that it can be swiveled to view both the f-value markings
and the center of the span of the bridge where the cables will be at their lowest
point. Once set up in place, calibrate the automatic level by setting the center Gelin, Haiti
cross hair at the same elevation as the f-value mark.
Step 3 – Attach Winch

First attach the winch to the erection hook and use a small piece of extra main cable to create a hoisting loop with two drop
forged clamps and loosely attach it to the main cable to be hoisted. By hand, pull the main cable as taut as possible, position
the hoisting loop within the throw of the winch, and securely attach the hoisting loop to the main cable with two drop forged
clamps. With the winch attached to an erection hook, attach the acting end of the winch to the hoisting loop and slowly let
go of the main cable.
Cable Winch Attachment:

The cable winch should always be attached to the nearest erection hook to ensure that the cable is raised in a straight line
between tower saddle and anchor.
Hoisting Loop:
Make a loop by clamping approximately three meters of extra cable length to itself with two fully tightened clamps. The cable
used to make the loop should be the same diameter as the main cable. Clamp the cable loop to the main cable and attach
the winch to the cable loop.
TOWARDS ANCHOR TOWARDS RIVER
HOISTING LOOP
WINCH CABLE CLAMPS FOR LOOP
CLAMPS FOR MAIN CABLE MAIN CABLE

Figure 14.5 – Raising Loop
Step 4 – Hoist Cables

Once the main cable is safely attached to the winch or cable puller, slowly pull
the cable towards the anchor. With the drop forged clamps removed, hoist the
cable into the sight of the automatic level and above the marking on the tower.
The winch is not positioned to tension the main cable at the same angle that
the main cable will rest. As a result, the main cable may drop significantly once
the tension is removed from the winch, and it is best to raise the cable to at
least above the top crosshair of the automatic level. Once the cable has been
raised to the desired elevations, hand tighten two drop forged clamps onto the
Gelin, Haiti
cable. One holding clamp should be attached at the base connection of the
cable, 50 centimeters from the face of the anchor, and tightened so that the cross sectional diameter of the cable is slightly
FULLY TIGHTENED CLAMP
reduced. Install a second clamp to connect the tail to the live portion of the cable. This second clamp should be installed
CABLE SLACK
with some slack in the cable to allow for adjusting and should be fully tightened. Slowly release the tension of the cable
STRIKE CABLE WITH
winch. While the LARGE
order or setting
PIECE the handrail versus walkway cables is not important, it is essential the cables farthest away
OF WOOD
from the automatic level are set first to not block the line of sight to the other cables.
cm
~100
Step 5 – Adjust Cables

Once the tension in the winch has been removed, the cable will most likely
lower. It is important to ensure that there is not additional slack inLOOP
HOISTING the backstay
of the cable. The backstays
WINCH CABLE may need to be shaken to move any additional
CLAMPS FOR LOOP
slack in the cable to the main span of the bridge. If the cable has not lowered
to the marked location, adjustments can be made by striking the cable. Using
a large piece of wood, strike the cable between the clamps. Striking the cable
will allow the cable to slip, moving the cable closer to the crosshairs of the
automatic level. If the cable does not move, slowly loosen CLAMPStheFOR
holding clamp
MAIN CABLE MAIN CABLE
Mata de Tules, Nicaragua
one quarter turn and then strike the cable again. The clamp nuts should
be turned at one quarter intervals until the cable begins to very slowly slip
through the clamps when struck by the piece of wood. This movement may
be barely noticeable through the automatic level, but care should be taken to
not overly loosen the clamps as this could lead to the cable slipping entirely
and can create a dangerous situation. Stop lowering the bottom of the cable
reaches the center crosshair of the automatic level view. Once the desired
cable elevation is reached, fully install two additional clamps to hold the cable
in place during the 24 hour waiting period.
Mata de Tules, Nicaragua
Repeat this process for all cables.

CABLE SLACK
STRIKE CABLE WITH

LARGE PIECE OF WOOD
cm
~100
SLIGHTLY LOOSENED CLAMP
Figure 14.6 – Sag Adjustment Method
Both handrail cables and all walkway cables should be level relative to each
other. The handrail cables and walkway cables should be 1.10 meters apart
vertically. If there is more than half a cable width of change or slip over the
course of a day, the cables must be adjusted. Because unnoticeable slack or
differences in cable temperature may subside, allow 24 hours for observation
and adjustment to ensure the cables are in the correct position.
Corner of Love, Nicaragua

Step 6 – Clamp Cables

After verifying the elevation of the cables, fully install all required clamps. As
performed on the fixed anchor, refer to the drop forged cable clamp Table
6.2 or manufacturer’s specifications for the correct number of clamps and
clamp spacing. The clamp saddle shall lie against the live end of the cable,
(never saddle a dead horse). The U-bolt of the clamp shall lie against the
dead end of the cable. Torque the cable clamps of the adjustable anchor to
the manufacturer’s specified torque or until a 25% reduction in cross sectional
diameter has been achieved in the dead end of the cable. If the clamps are not
tightened sufficiently, failure of the structure could occur, as the cable could
slip through the clamps.

3/4 19 4 5 12 130
7/8 22 4 5 13 225
1 25 5 6 14 225
1 1/8 29 6 6 15 225
1 1/4 32 7 6 16 360
1 3/8 35 7 6 16 360
1 1/2 38 8 7 18 360
Step 7 – Coat Cables

Part of the backstays of the cables will be embedded in the ramp. The
embedded portion of the cable shall be coated with roofing tar or mastic to
help prevent corrosion in the event water enters the ramp fill.
Vaquilla, Panama

DRUM ANCHOR SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Set Sag and Temporarily Clamp Cables to
Themselves
Cable #1 wrapped around drum and attached back to Cable #1,
likewise Cable #2 is attached back to Cable #2. Use minimum of
two (2) clamps and hand-tighten fully.
Keranyo, Ethiopia
Step 2 – Attach Temporary Cable Piece
Cut 5 meters of cable as temporary cable and place around the anchor. Attach the temporary cable to the ‘live
end’ of both cables (#1 and #2) to keep the tension. Use minimum of two (2) clamps and hand-tighten fully.
Step 3 – Remove Temporary Clamps

Remove the hand-tightened clamps from cable #1 and move the loose cable tail to the opposing cable (#2) and
clamp in place. Do the same for cable #2. Use the complete number of clamps required.
Step 4 – Remove Temporary Cable

Remove the excess cable.
NOTE: The same applies both to the walkway cables on the inner drum, and the handrail cables on the outer
drum.
When using 3 walkway cables the middle cable stays attached to itself

6.8 Build Backwall and Continue Ramp Construction

This section contains provisions for ramp and slab construction.
Rock/Grout Fill – 30 centimeter lifts comprised of large stone, small stone,

gravel and sand, placed largest to smallest, between which is placed a grout
mixture
Backwall – A 30 centimeter wide wall of stone and mortar located above the
anchor Butare, Rwanda
SAFETY
Refer to Section 6.6: Begin Ramp Walls to review the safety concerns when constructing the ramp walls.
Moving and dropping stones can result flying rock fragments. Proper eye protection, foot protection, and hand protection
can prevent injury if stones, reinforcing bars, or tools are dropped.
QUALITY CONTROL
The approach ramp not only provides a means of access to the bridge, but also provides a substantial portion of the
abutment mass and a connection between the anchor and foundation and tiers. The interior fill should be constructed with
only stone, gravel, and sand with grout layers to minimize cracking and settlement of the concrete topping slab. When filling
the approach ramp, care should be taken not to damage the cables with sharp edges of rocks. Using a range of stone sizes
along with gravel and sand helps reduces internal voids and generates higher densities. The incremental grout layer is
important to reduce the overall lateral earth pressure against the stone masonry walls.

• Interior filled with rock and grout (no soil) • Interior prior to fill
• Fill material properly tamped to minimize voids • Interior partially filled with rock and grout
• Concrete topping slab thickness • Completely filled approach
• Concrete and grout placed within one hour of mixing • Completed approach ramp with concrete topping
marked on drawing

MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Water • Construction square
• Large stone • Level
• Small stone • Plumb bob
• Gravel • String line
• Tie wire • Tamping rod
• Reinforcing bars if required • Tape measure
• Sequence
Build Backwall, Ramp Walls, and Place Fill

A 30 centimeter backwall shall be built to drawing specifications.
Continue to build the ramp walls and place fill in 30 centimeter lifts to plan width and height. A lift consists of large stone
followed by small stones and finally a gravel and sand. Use the gravel and sand specifically to minimize void areas. A
string line from the top tier to the top of backwall should be placed to ensure that the required wall height and correct slope
are achieved. In-situ soil and rock may remain if below the cable area, but soil and other organics must not be used as fill
above this area. The ramp walls and as much of the fill that can be placed while still allowing access to the clamps on the
adjustable anchor should be completed before decking is installed.
Butare, Rwanda Butare, Rwanda Rugogwe, Rwanda

6.9 Construct Walkway, Grout Tubes, and Construct Ramp Topping Slab

This section contains provisions for bridge deck construction and ramp
completion.
Bridge Deck - Comprised of swing assemblies spaced at one meter spacing

with decking boards placed longitudinally along the length of the span
Swing Assembly - Can be comprised of a wooden crossbeam with or without

a nailer Butare, Rwanda
Crossbeam – Comprised of hardwood and bears on top of the walkway cables; suspenders are placed through each end
of the crossbeam
Timber Decking – Two meter lengths with a 5 centimeter by 20 centimeter cross section; used as the walking surface of
the bridge
Suspender – 10 millimeter deformed reinforcing bars cut to a minimum of two meters; used to connect the walkway and
handrail cables
Nailer – Attached to the top of the cross beam to increase the amount of surface area available for decking installation
Walkway topping slab – A 10 centimeters concrete slab placed on top of the approach ramp after the ramp walls and fill
have been constructed
SAFETY
Before beginning superstructure construction, be aware of the hazards that
accompany carrying heavy rocks, cement bags, suspenders, timber and
other materials over the terrain of a bridge construction site. Hardhats, foot
protection, and hand protection can prevent injury if construction materials or
tools are dropped.
Eye protection should be worn when cutting reinforcing bars to make

suspenders or preparing timber decking boards. Take special care when Cerca la Source, Haiti
bending, drilling, and transporting these materials. When mixing concrete and
grout, proper PPE and planning can reduce the hazards from working with
cement.
Construction of the superstructure can present limited access, objects falling from the work area, and many of the other
additional challenges of working at heights. Be cognizant of the instability that will occur when walking on loose crossbeams.
Hardhats must be worn by anyone working below the walkway. Workers installing the decking must wear fall protection.
While the main cables of the bridge can be used as anchorage points, it is important to ensure that the appropriate type of
fall protection is selected, especially when working near the abutments of the bridge where the fall distance may be limited.
Pushing out swing assemblies and installing decking planks present the highest risk for a fall. Take extra precaution when
performing these activities and be cognizant of footing as swing assemblies are often loose and unstable until the decking
planks are installed. In the case that worker does fall, it is vital to have a safety plan in place to effectively recover the victim
as quickly as possible.

QUALITY CONTROL
The walkway allows users to safety cross the bridge. The decking boards and fencing will experience the most wear and
impact from people, animals, and weather. These exposed components undergo substantial dynamic movements from
typical traffic as well as wind that can lead to premature deterioration or failure if not installed properly. Each component of
the walkway, crossbeams, nailers, decking boards, suspenders, and fencing should be installed per plan as best possible.
The crossbeam spacing and decking board dimensions are critical to satisfying the design loads. The oversized hole for the
suspender connection to the crossbeam is of utmost importance to reduce potential fatigue related failures. Care should
also be taken to ensure the fencing is appropriately fixed to the edge of decking boards as snags can easily cause damage
that may lead to unsafe conditions. Consult the design engineer for tolerance limits on as-built dimensions.

• Verify cables are level and at correct sag • Completed deck
• Crossbeams dimensions and spacing • Suspender to crossbeam connection
• Suspender hole sufficiently oversized • Suspender to handrail connection
• Nailer dimension and properly fastened (if applicable) • Completed walkway with fencing installed
• Decking board dimensions and spacing
• Decking boards properly fastened
• Vertical distance between handrail and walkway
cables
• Suspenders tightly wrapped around crossbeam and
handrail cable
• Fencing sufficiently attached to deck and handrail
cable
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Crossbeams • Masonry tools
• Timber decking boards • Buckets
• Nailer boards (if needed) • Shovels
• 10 millimeter deformed reinforcing bars • Wood saw
• 75 millimeter lag screws • Hack saw
• Fencing • Blades
• Galvanized tie wire • Drill
• U-nails • Drill bits
• Cement • Impact driver
• Sand • Sockets
• Gravel • Socket wrench
• Water • Pipe hammers, two-pound if available
• Measuring tape
• Wire cutters
• Markers

SEQUENCE
Crossbeams
Prepare the crossbeams for the
decking swing assembly. Wood
crossbeams, per plan, should be
predrilled to provide four holes
for the suspender installation. It
is important to ensure the holes
are oversized with respect to the San Albino, Nicaragua San Albino, Nicaragua
reinforcing bar as the suspender
connection is prone to fatigue failure if snug. See Bridge Deck Details for more
information.
Suspenders
Continue the preparation for the decking swing assembly by cutting and bending
suspenders. To make a suspender, cut 10 millimeter deformed reinforcing bars
to a minimum of two meters. At a location of 40 centimeters from one end,
make a “U” bend to fit into a crossbeam per the standard drawings. Use two
suspenders for each decking swing assembly. Butare, Rwanda
Butare, Rwanda Butare, Rwanda Butare, Rwanda
Deck boards
Deck boards should have two pre-drilled holes at each end and one in the middle, for a total of five. Mark the center of each
board at each to aid in the placement and alignment during installation. See the Bridge Deck Details for more information.
Nailers
If required, one meter nailer boards shall be cut to length and predrilled and attached to the crossbeams. Four predrilled
holes must be provided to attach the nailer to the crossbeam. Place a longitudinal and transverse centerline on each nailer
board. If a nailer is not required, mark the centerlines on each crossbeam.
Butare, Rwanda Butare, Rwanda San Albino, Nicaragua

Step 2 – Assemble and Launch Swings

Place the crossbeam assembly on top of the walkway cables. Insert the suspenders into the interior predrilled holes of the
crossbeam from below while placing the walkway cable(s) between the suspender and crossbeam. The short end of the
suspender shall be received through the outside predrilled hole. Wrap the short end of the suspender over the crossbeam,
then downward and flush to the edge of the crossbeam. The long length of the suspender should be bent over to hook over
the handrail cable. This should be performed near the tower for all assemblies and a spacer should be placed between the
walkway and handrail cables to ensure that a uniform suspender length is maintained.
San Albino, Nicaragua San Albino, Nicaragua San Albino, Nicaragua
Continue to assemble and launch the swings. All of the swings should be
launched along the cables before the decking installation begins. The first
crossbeam closest to the tower should be firmly attached near the tower
to prevent the decking from slipping. Place clamps on the outside walkway
cables, on the river side of the crossbeam, to keep the first swing in place.
Step 3 – Install Decking

Begin to place decking. The deck is comprised of five planks in width. Attach the planks to the nailer/crossbeams with
five lag screws. The planks are staggered along the span of the structure. Using the marks placed on the nailer or wood
crossbeam, place a two-meter center board. Align the top center mark of the decking board with the centerline on the third
swing. Only at the ends of the bridge, install a one-meter board on either side of the center board. The end of the board
shall be aligned with the transverse centerline of the second swing. Place and install two two-meter boards on the outside
of the installed decking. Align the middle marks on the outside decking boards with the centerline of the second swing, and
the end centerline markings on the decking boards with the transverse centerline of the third swing. This process shall be
repeated for the opposite end of the bridge. The decking should allow the swings to be successfully placed at one meter
intervals. See Bridge Deck Details for more information.
Continue to install decking boards. Using the marks placed on the nailer or wood crossbeam, place the center board first.
Continue to align the top center mark of the decking boards with the centerlines on the nailer/crossbeam and then placing
boards outside of the center boards. All decking boards throughout the main span are two meters in length. Two lag screws
should be installed at each end of the decking boards with one screw in the center.
San Albino, Nicaragua El Pueblito, Nicaragua Butare, Rwanda

Step 4 – Wrap Suspenders

When the decking has been finished completely wrap each suspender around
the handrail cable.
Step 5 – Install Fencing

On the bridge, uncoil the fencing and stretch out the wire as much as possible.
Depending on the length of the bridge, several rolls may be required. Multiple
rolls of fencing can be connected by placing two ends of adjacent fencing
rolls to one another and ensuring that the wire pattern of each roll of fencing
is oriented the same, weaving
a wire of the opposite direction
between the two ends. Once
stretched out, lay the fencing
flat on the walkway. Secure the
fencing to the bridge by nailing it
to the decking with u-nails at 25
centimeter intervals. When the
fencing has been placed across Churo Alto, Bolivia Butare, Rwanda
the length of the span, tightly
push the top of the fencing over
and around the handrail cables,
and tie it tightly to itself using
galvanized tie wire. Finally, attach
the fencing to the suspenders
with the galvanized tie wire in
three places. Repeat this process
until the length has fencing on
Butare, Rwanda Butare, Rwanda
both sides of the bridge.
Step 6 – Grout Cable Tubes

After the decking has been installed and the cables have been set to the
correct sag and the clamps fully torqued, the tubes around the cables of the
adjustable anchor shall be filled with grout. Grout should be poured in the
tubes to reduce the potential for corrosion if penetrated by water. Grout should
be evenly distributed and fill the tubes until it begins spilling out of the opening.
See Section 5: Concrete and Masonry for grout specifications.
Step 7 – Finish Ramp Fill and Place Concrete Approach Slab

After the space between the
ramp walls has been completely
filled and compacted, place the
concrete approach slab on top of
the ramp. The approach slab shall
be a thickness of 10 centimeters
and constructed above the ramp
walls. See Section 5: Concrete
San Albino, Nicaragua San Albino, Nicaragua
and Masonry for concrete
specifications.

Step 8 – Place Concrete Walkway Topping

To ensure a smooth transition between the decking and the ramp approach,
a walkway topping be constructed after the decking and fencing have been
completely installed. Formwork may be required to place the final concrete
over the existing hump and walkway cable tubes. The top of ramp transition
should meet the elevation of the decking boards landing at the tower location.
See Section 5: Concrete and Masonry for concrete specifications.
6.10 Completion
QUALITY CONTROL
When the bridge has been completed, the area should be free from all hazardous materials. Grade surrounding area to provide
smooth and safe access to the bridge and ensure that water will not drain toward the structure. Mark each handrail cable at the
centerline of each saddle such that any cable movement can be monitored on future inspections.
Quality Control Checklist:

• Completed bridge decking free of debris
• Clear work area
• Graded access to bridge
• Mark handrail cables at centerline saddle
Quality Control Photos:

• Completed bridge from bridge centerline
• Completed bridge from left abutment
• Completed bridge from right abutment
• Completed bridge from upstream
• Completed bridge from downstream
Butare, Rwanda San Albino, Nicaragua Churo Alto, Bolivia

Appendix 3.1
Team Leader _______________ Weekending ______________
Daily Work Plan
Safety is a Team Effort

Project Manager Review Safety Review
HOW TO USE THE DAILY WORK PLAN
1. Discuss the entire job with all employees that will be involved.
Ask for ideas and input on how to perform the job productively and safely. It is very
important to discuss each step of the job and note any comments or questions from your
crew.
2. Description of work
This should be a summary of the task at hand, example: form walls for grit chamber
number one. Then complete the project location, date, Team Leader name, and work area.
3. Work Items
Enter a brief step-by-step description of the task to be performed, using a new block for
each step of the task.
4. Equipment / Tools / Materials

List all tools, materials, and equipment to be used during the performance of each task.
5. Potential Hazards
List any potential hazards or injuries that might occur during the performance of each task.
6. Steps to Prevent Hazards / Accidents / Injuries

List what methods you would take for each step to prevent hazards, accidents, and injuries
for each task.
7. Work Area Hazards

Complete thoroughly addressing hazards that are out of crew’s control, (weather,
subcontractors, conditions, etc.)
8. Presentation
Once you have completed the Daily Work Plan, discuss each step with the crew performing
the work in a safety meeting before the work begins. Ask for and answer any questions,
comments and input from the crew members. Once all questions have been resolved have
each member signs the bottom of the Daily Work Plan.
9. When you have completed and have presented the Daily Work Plan, post it in your work
area.
10. Turn in Daily Work Plan book at the end of the week for review by Project Manager and
Safety Manager.
By performing each step of the Daily Work Plan and planning safety into your work we can and will
decrease the potential for accidents and injuries on all Bridges to Prosperity job sites.
Daily Work Plan Project: Date:
Weather : Circle One Jobsite Conditions: Discussion Leader:
Clear Overcast Rain Snow Work Area:
Temperature:
Description of Work:
Hold Points:
Work Items Equipment / Tools / Materials Potential Hazards Steps to Prevent Hazards / Accidents
SIGNATURES:
WORK AREA HAZARDS AND END OF DAY REVIEW MUST BE COMPLETELY FILLED OUT
Daily Site Inspection
Crew Date
Team Leader Time
Conditions Saf e At Risk N/A Behaviors Saf e At Risk N/A

Daily Work Plan Accessible Proper Lifting Techniques
PPE (proper selection) Proper Body Position
Excavation Inspected Avoiding Pinch Points
Fall Protection Inspected Staying Out of the Line of Fire
Fall Hazards Eyes on Work/Path
Tool/Equipment Condition Proper Ascending/Descending
Electrical Hazards Eye/Face Protection
Scaff olds (inspected, setup) Hand Protection
Ladders (setup & tied off) Fall Protection
Rigging Hearing Protection
MSDS (review ed & understood) Respiratory Protection
Rebar Protection Body Protection
Housekeeping Clothing & Boots
Access/Egress Tool/Equipment Selection
Fire Prevention & Protection Communication
Barricading Hoses/Cords/Leads
Fire Extinguisher Ladders (use & selection)
Proper Storing of Materials
Cleaning As They Go
Hazards to be corrected: Date corrected: Corrected by:
Inspection perf ormed by:

DAILY EXCAVATION INSPECTION
Date: Time: Project:

Location:
Weather: Sunny, Cloudy, Rainy Wind: Temperature:
Excavation Depth AND Width
Soil Type Cohesive OR Granular
Protection Type: Benching Sloping Shielding / Shoring
Visual Inspection:
Excess water in excavation? Yes No
Fissures around top of slope Yes No
Fissures in excavation walls? Yes No
Is there potential for a cave-in? Yes No
Is there potential for an Yes No
atmospheric hazard?
If you answered yes to any of the above questions…DO NOT ENTER
Comments:
Inspector’s name:

Location:
Visual Inspection:
atmospheric hazard?
Comments:
Inspector’s name:

Location:
Visual Inspection:
atmospheric hazard?
Comments:
Inspector’s name:
FALL PROTECTION INSPECTION FORM
Project: __________________________________ Inspected By: _______________________

Area: ____________________________________ Date: ______________________________
Team Member: ID Remove From Comments
Acceptable
No. Service
Yes No Yes No
Full Body Harness
Connectors:
Double Legged
Lanyard
Rebar Hook
Retractable
Anchor Point NA
Initials:
Area: ____________________________________ Date: ______________________________

No. Acceptable
Service
Yes No Yes No
Full Body Harness
Connectors:
Double Legged Lanyard
Rebar Hook
Retractable
Anchor Point NA
Initials:
Area: ____________________________________ Date: ______________________________

No. Acceptable
Service
Yes No Yes No
Full Body Harness
Connectors:
Rebar Hook
Retractable
Anchor Point NA
Initials:
WORK AREA HAZARDS
Potential Hazards Steps to Prevent Accidents-Injuries
What is the worst that can happen today? ____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the most likely cause of injury today? _________________________________________________________________________________
What will you do to prevent both of the above from happening? __________________________________________________________________
 Am I carrying the tools and materials needed for  Are all ladders secured top and bottom?  Can I come into contact with electrical energy?
the job?  Are ladders placed at the proper pitch?  Can I come into contact with excessive heat?
 Do my tools have all guards and handles in  Are step ladders set up on solid, level ground?  Is a fire extinguisher needed for today’s work?
place?  Is fall protection worn for work from ladders?  Can I come into contact with a toxic or corrosive
 Are all cords protected by a GFCI?  Can I suffer a strain by bending, lifting, pulling, chemical?
 Am I carrying all of the PPE needed for the job? pushing, twisting, or reaching?  Have I reviewed the MSDS for all chemicals I will
 Can I be caught in, by, or in between objects?  Is there a potential for a hazardous be using?
 Is there a potential to slip, trip, or fall? environment? (e.g. toxic gases, vapors, mists,  Have all inspections been completed –
 Are people working above me? dusts, fumes, heat, cold, pressure, etc?) Excavation, Scaffold, Fall Protection, Ladder,
 Are people working below me?  Has atmospheric testing been done? Hand and Power Tool, etc?
 Are my tools, materials, and equipment secure  Can I come into contact with moving parts of  Are others creating a hazard to my work area?
from falling? equipment or machines?
END OF DAY REVIEW

Please review today’s Daily Work Plan and ask yourself the following questions. You may add any comment you may have to today’s work or future
work in the space below. Work together with your crew and or coworkers so you may see every angle of potential hazards.
 Did I or anyone around me get injured in any way during the course of today’s activities?
 Were all potential hazards identified in today’s Daily Work Plan?
 Were there any near hits or close calls today?
 Is there anything we should look at in tomorrow’s Daily Work Plan to do differently either in regards to Safe Production, Potential Hazards or
Conditions?
 Did we leave our work area in a CLEAN and SAFE order including any associated Excavations, Safety Barriers, Hole Covers, Ladders,
Scaffolding, etc.? Is there anything we missed or left out that could be a potential hazard to me or someone else in the morning?
If ALL crew members agree to comments, please sign below. Thank you for another safe and successful day on the Job.
Incident Report
Incident date: Incident time: Project: Reported by
Description (What, Where, When, Who, How)
What acts or conditions directly caused the incident?
What other factors contributed to the incident?
What steps have/ will be taken to prevent a similar incident.
Action Item Person Responsible Completion Date
Project Manager: Safety and Health Rep.:
Signature: Signature:
Chapter 4
Inspection and Maintenance
Section 1 - Bridge Committee Annual Inspection | Page 164

Section 2 - Technical Inspection | Page 165
Section 3 - Maintenance | Page 167
Introduction
NOTE: a copy of this section of the manual should be left with each partnering community in the local language and a
second copy with the sponsoring institution upon the completion of a bridge project.
Maintenance is essential for the safety of all bridge projects. As should be outlined in project agreements, the community, local gov-
ernment, and bridge committee leaders are responsible for monitoring the bridge to ensure safety and for performing basic annual
maintenance. B2P technical inspection requirements are not covered herein, but please contact B2P staff for further information as
required.
Bridge maintenance includes both bridge upkeep and scheduled inspections, typically required twice in the first five years after the
bridge opening. The community is responsible for general bridge upkeep and the local sponsoring institution (typically the govern-
ment body) is responsible for returning to the site for technical inspections. The Bridge Committee (reference Volume 1: Project
Development) must designate a person or team of people from the community to inspect the structure after every rainy season and
the sponsoring institution shall designate the engineer to complete inspections.
If Bridges to Prosperity is directly involved in the construction of the bridge, B2P will work with the agency to designate responsibility
and support when required.
For concerns of safety concern or impending bridge failure, contact Bridges to Prosperity immediately (contact at info@
BridgestoProsperity.org), irrespective of our involvement.

In order to keep the bridge in optimum condition, continual upkeep is required. An annual inspection is essential to main-
tenance. Following the end of the rainy season, one or more representatives of the Bridge Committee must visit the bridge
site and complete the inspection outlined below. Once the inspection is complete, corresponding maintenance must be
arranged and carried out if required (see Section 3: Maintenance).
1.1 Annual Inspection Checklist
• Remove any excess mud and debris from the bridge deck
• Ensure weeds and plants growing beneath the bridge do not obstruct the bridge
• Ensure all bolts, screws and nails are in place and tightened
• Replace deteriorating wood deck panels
• Replace deteriorating crossbeams
• Ensure that fencing is secure; should any wires be loose or fencing missing, repair or replace to original condition
• Check for erosion; should erosion or scour occur, causing the water to reroute toward the anchor or approach,
contact the local supporting agency and request assistance with a drainage structure
• Evaluate the condition of all stone masonry walls; check for cracks in mortar joints, bulging or rotating walls, and
separation between the tiers and approach ramp
• Measure the distance between the paint on the cable and the saddle guides (inset bottom right). If the cable has
shifted more than ten centimeters (0.1m), contact the local supporting agency immediately and if possible, Bridges
to Prosperity (contact at www.BridgestoProsperity.org).

Following the completion of the bridge, a follow-up technical inspection should be completed a minimum of two times during
the first five years of the bridge service life. If the pedestrian bridge continues to be used beyond 10 years, a technical in-
spection should be completed every five (5) years. Beyond 30 years, the bridge must be reviewed by an engineer to ensure
safety of cables, structure and decking.
Upon completion, please keep one copy of the completed report and send a copy to Bridges to Prosperity.
2.1 Materials Required

• Digital camera
• Pen & paper
• Copy of Technical Inspection Form
2.2 Technical Inspection Considerations
GENERAL BRIDGE DATA

All relevant information regarding the location, construction completion date and previous inspection date for bridges built
by Bridges to Prosperity is available. It is best to have all of this information on hand, including a copy of the original bridge
drawings, before heading into the field. This will allow the inspector to note any significant changes in sag, span length, or
easily identify repairs that have been performed since the last Technical Inspection was carried out.
CABLE CONDITION
Inspect the cable at all points of insertion into concrete, the approach or into the ground. Look for frayed, stretched, or worn
cable along its entire length.
Reference the colored mark on the cable, which originated between the guides on the saddles. If the amount of movement
exceeds 1% of original cable length, cable slip or excessive cable stretch has occurred (if length unknown, warning at more
than 10 centimeters), please contact B2P immediately (info@bridgestoprosperity.org).
DECKING
A survey noting condition of the decking along the span length must be completed. Missing planks or crossbeams, recent
repairs, type of crossbeam, fastener type(s), suspender size, suspender material (smooth or deformed rebar), fencing
material, etc. will all be noted.
Inspection of the deck will require access to the underside of the bridge. As such, it is best to arrange for inspections to be
completed in the dry season.
APPROACH WALLS & RAMP

Inspect the condition of the approach walls and ramp. Evaluate and document extent of cracking on concrete approach
ramp. Typical source of crack propagation is the insertion point of cable, or settlement within the approach. Note opinion
on source of cracks. If cracks between rock walls exist, look into the approach to evaluate if excessive settlement has oc-
curred inside. Note if any usage issues occur. This may include water pooling, excessive cracks or bumps in the approach
or connection to ground, etc.

ANCHORS
Inspect the area surrounding the anchors (far end of approach away from river, on both abutments). Take special note if ero-
sion has occurred and what the drainage path of run-off water appears to take. If the erosion has caused scour, undercutting
the anchor, reference the maintenance section.
RIVER BANK EROSION AND SITE EVALUATION

Inspect the area surrounding the bridge, on both abutments. Take special note if erosion has occurred and what the drain-
age path of run-off water appears to take. If the erosion has caused scour, undercutting the anchor, approach or foundation
structure, reference the maintenance section.
FOUNDATION, TIERS & TOWERS

Inspect the foundation, tiers and towers. Note the masonry condition of towers and check if one is able to pick out aggregate
with hands only.
On either side, verify the base foundation layer is level. Note if the foundation structure appears to be dipping towards the
water or slipping, or if the walls appear to be rotating under the ramp or the approach. If the structure has settled in either
manner creating change of elevation of line greater than 30 centimeters, contact agency responsible for bridge.
2.3 Technical Inspection Form
At the time of print, the B2P Inspection protocol is undergoing significant updates. As such, the Technical Inspection Form
is not included herein but can be requested via info@bridgestoprosperity.org.

This section includes mandatory upkeep items to be completed during every annual inspection, as well as solutions to repair
bridge components should maintenance be warranted.
3.1 Overall Site Condition
If either the annual community or Technical Inspection shows erosion and scour are undermining the bridge structure, a
drainage structure or slope protection measure may allow the water to reroute, thus saving the structure from further dam-
age.
Slope protection and drainage systems are required at sites when excess run-off may influence the slope stability. It is
recommended to avoid sites where any instability is prevalent. If unavoidable, it is necessary to drain out the runoff and
seepage to ensure the stability of the slope and to avoid under-scour of structures. Water should be collected as closely
as possible to its origin and navigated away from the bridge structures. This may require a surface catch drain on a slope,
drainage around the structure or both.
In the event either bank in front of the abutment foundation has eroded and the setback has reduced from the original as-
built drawings or previous inspection report, slope protection such as rip-rap or gabion walls may need to be constructed in
order to prevent further erosion.
Examples of subsurface and surface drainage systems are shown below. For further details, reference Volume 2, Chapter
1: Suspended Bridge Design.
3.2 Cables & Clamps
If the cable is found to be corroding or fraying, estimate the percentage of the cable cross-section that has been damaged.
If greater than 10% of the cable diameter is fraying, evaluate the extent of the damage. If localized in one point, consider a
splice. Reference cable-manufacturing materials for details.

3.3 Decking
If any decking planks are rotting through or missing entirely, they must be replaced. The standard thickness of a decking
board is five centimeters, but verify with the existing planks on site before purchasing. Reference Volume 2, Chapter 2:
Suspended Bridge Drawings, specifically the walkway details. Note that the pattern of laying the decking boards requires a
stagger, as shown in the picture to the right.
If any crossbeams are in need of replacement, either an additional board must be attached to the bottom as reinforcement
or the beam must be replaced. Crossbeams should be replaced one at a time. Trying to replace multiple beams at one time
may result in the distance between the handrail and the deck cables being compromised.
If replacement is chosen, start by removing the deck panels directly above the crossbeam in question. Unwrap the fencing
in the direct location; cutting may be required. Secondly, unwrap the suspenders from the top of the cable, which likely will
require a pipe. Unwrap the suspender from the crossbeam. Take new pre-drilled crossbeam and suspender and fit into
place. Reference Volume 2, Chapter 3: Suspended Bridge Construction for details. Complete the process by screwing and
nailing the decking boards back into place. Replace and repair any damaged fencing before documenting the completed
maintenance project.
3.4 Approach Walls & Ramp
If the inspection finds that the approach structure is degrading, use a cement mortar to patch the areas. If severe degrada-
tion, consider patching with wedge stones.
If the ramp is cracking from settlement (not just localized cracking around the insertion points of the cable), rip out the 10
centimeter thick concrete ramp topping, backfill the approach with additional well-graded large aggregate and stone and
recover with a fresh layer of concrete, 10 centimeters thick.
3.5 Anchors
If the inspection notes that erosion and scour are undermining the anchor, a drainage structure may allow the water to re-
route, thus saving the structure from further damage. Reference Volume 2, Chapter 1: Suspended Bridge Design for further
details on drainage structures.
3.6 Foundation Tiers & Towers
If the inspection finds that the masonry structure is degrading, use a cement mortar to patch the areas. If severe degrada-
tion, consider replacing when possible.
If the structure is found to be slipping (either slipping downhill, or tipping forward), consult a local engineer to evaluate the
stability of the slope. If considered unsafe, close the bridge. It is possible to reconstruct the structure of the failing side using
many of the scrapped materials, but do not relocate at such a distance that the cables create a lateral load on the opposing
side towers. A local engineer may recommend buttressing the area with a column or adding a ring of support around the
tier if it is leaning or severely degraded.

Volume 3
Suspension Cable Bridges

SUSPENSION BRIDGE VOLUME 3
Contents

Introduction
1.1 Scope and Limitations 2
1.2 Allowable Stress Design Methodology 2
1.3 Standard Designs 3
2.1 Design Objectives 4
2.2 Bridge Layout 5
2.3 Geometric Requirements 6
2.4 Geotechnical Investigation 8
2.5 Hydrology and Hydraulics 8
3.1 Loads 9
3.2 Load Combinations 11
3.3 Material Properties 11
4.1 Cable Analysis 12
4.2 Walkway Analysis 15
4.3 Suspender Analysis 16
4.4 Steel Tower Analysis 16
4.5 Concrete Pedestal Analysis 17
4.6 Concrete Footing Analysis 18
4.7 Anchor Analysis 19
Section 5 - Suspension Bridge Design
5.1 Standard Bridge Design Procedure 25
5.3 Determine Foundation Locations and Sizes 26
5.4 Select Tower, Pedestal, Footing, Anchor and Walkway Drawings 27
6.1 Retaining Walls 29
6.2 Wind Guys 30
6.3 Drainage 30
6.4 Bank Protection 31
Contents
7.1 Cable & Clamps 32
7.2 Steel Reinforcement Bar 32
7.3 Decking 32
7.4 Concrete and Masonry 33
7.5 Other Materials 33
7.6 Contingency 33
8.2 Determine Foundation Locations and Sizes 34
8.3 Select Footing, Pedestal, Anchor, Tower, Walkway and Ramp Drawings 36

Introduction
Chapter 3 - Suspension Bridge Construction

Introduction
Section 1 - Construction Overview
2.1 Overview 138
2.2 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 141
2.3 Hand and Power Tool Safety 143
2.4 Fall Protection 144
3.1 Overview 147
3.2 Quality Control Activities 147
4.1 Materials 149
4.2 Tools 155
5.1 Concrete, Grout, and Mortar 156
5.2 Masonry 159
Contents
6.1 Construction Layout 161
6.2 Excavation 164
6.3 Footings 167
6.4 Pedestals 170
6.5 Ramps 173
6.5 Anchors 176
6.7 Towers 180
6.8 Cable Hoisting 185
6.9 Walkway 193
6.10 Completion 200
Appendix 3.1
Chapter 4 - Maintenance and Inspection

Introduction
1.1 Annual Inspection Checklist 214
2.1 Materials Required 215
2.2 Technical Inspection Considerations 215
2.3 Technical Inspection Form 216
3.1 Overall Site Condition 217
3.2 Cables & Clamps 217
3.3 Decking 218
3.4 Approach Walls & Ramp 218
3.5 Anchors 218
3.6 Footing and Pedestals 218
3.7 Towers 218
Tables

Introduction
Table 3.1 – Assumed Material Unit Weights 11
Table 6.1 – Retaining Wall Design Parameters 29
Table 7.1 – Number of Clamps Required per Cable Size 32
Table 7.2 – Other Material Quantities 33

Introduction

Introduction
Table 5.1 – Summary of Mix Design Ratios 157
Appendix 3.1
Tables

Introduction
Figures

Introduction
Figure 2.1 – Typical Elevation View 5
Figure 2.2 – Typical Plan View 5
Figure 2.3 – Geometric Constraints 6
Figure 4.2 – Cable Geometry and Forces for a Cable Subjected to a Uniform Distributed Load 13
Figure 4.3 – Backstay and Tower Cable Geometry and Forces 14
Figure 4.4 – Cable Forces at Tower 17
Figure 4.5 – Bearing Pressure 18
Figure 4.7 – Bending Radius Efficiency Chart 19
Figure 4.6 – Typical Anchor System 19
Figure 4.8 – Anchor Sliding Free Body Diagram 21
Figure 4.9 – Active Pressure and Passive Resistance Acting on Anchor Beam 22
Figure 4.10 – Anchor Uplift Freebody Diagram 23
Figure 5.1 – Suspension Bridge Terminology 25
Figure 5.2 – Example Layout Drawing 28
Figure 6.1 – Retaining Wall Design Parameters 29
Figure 6.2 – Typical Wind Guy Layout 30
Figure 6.3 – Example Section of Drainage System 30
Figure 8.1 – Groundline Profile 34
Figure 8.2 – Survey profile with setback requirements shown 34
Figure 8.3 – Survey profile with pedestals selected to satisfy setback and ΔH 35
Figure 8.4 – Preliminary pedestals that satisfy 2 meter freeboard 35
Figure 8.5 – Preliminary layout with towers selected and anchors located 35
Figure 8.6 – Elevation view of final suspension bridge layout 37
Figures

Introduction

Introduction
Figure 1.1 – Bridge Terminology 136
Figure 2.1 – Proper Scaffold Bearing Surface 145
Figure 6.4 – Raising Loop 191
Figure 6.5 – Sag Adjustment Method 192
Figure 6.6 – Restraint Cable to Handrail Cable Transition 196
Appendix 3.1

Introduction
Chapter 1
Bridge Design
Section 1 - Design Philosophy | Page 2

Section 2 - General Design and Location Features | Page 4
Section 3 - Loads and Materials | Page 9
Section 4 - Structural Analysis and Evaluation | Page 12
Section 5 - Suspension Bridge Design | Page 25
Section 6 - Other Structures | Page 29
Section 7 - Material Estimate | Page 32
Section 8 - Design Example | Page 34
Volume 3: Suspension Cable Bridges
Introduction
In 2003, the Bridges to Prosperity (B2P) staff traveled to Nepal to train with Helvetas to learn about their cable-suspended bridge
technology. In addition to learning about design and construction of the suspended bridge, Helvetas also taught B2P their approach
to participatory bridge building at the community level.
B2P has been developing our unique suspension bridge design alternatives since 2008. What started as the search for a solution for
flood-plain and flat terrain conditions has resulted in many bridge designs and detail alternatives.
B2P has encountered new technical and cultural challenges as we have taken the technology from Asia to Africa, and then to Latin
America. The designs have been modified and adapted to better suit local conditions in each given area of work. B2P has modified
construction practices and expanded flexibility in design alternatives and design process materials to ensure that the suspension
pedestrian bridge remains a locally sustainable option for communities in varying topographic and geographic regions of the world.
There are four chapters in Volume 3 - Suspension Pedestrian Bridge Manual, structured as follows:
• Chapter 1: Suspension Bridge Design and Analysis
• Chapter 2: Suspension Bridge Drawings (Not included in public release. Please contact B2P to access these drawings.)
• Chapter 3: Suspension Bridge Construction
• Chapter 4: Suspension Bridge Operations and Maintenance
As with any modulated design, usage assumptions must be made by the bridge designer. The following manual will attempt to
provide both drawings for standard designs and a design guide for those interested in bridge uses not covered within this text. For
further design guidelines, please reference the Helvetas Nepal Short Span Trail-Bridge Technical Handbook as well as internationally
accepted design standards and locally pertinent design codes and standards.

No representations or warranties are implied or expressed herein. In consideration of this manual being provided gratis to others,
provided herein.
Rio Abajo, Nicaragua
Structural engineering involves ensuring the capacity of a structure (its ability to carry load) will exceed the demand on that structure.
The purpose of this bridge design manual is to ensure bridge safety by providing background information regarding the structural
engineering utilized to generate standard designs and offering guidance to design a standard suspended cable bridge. In order
to account for uncertainties with both determining the capacity and demand of a structural element or system, this design manual
utilizes the Allowable Stress Design (ASD) methodology with safety factors determined from reliability of loading and structural
performance.
The first Bridges to Prosperity publication, Pedestrian Bridge Manuals First Edition, was published in 2009 with a design section
predominately focused on producing a standard suspended bridge design. Ensuing publications up to the Bridge Builder Manual
Fourth Edition, 2014 have sought to increase the information provided regarding the design background and more clearly convey
and simplify bridge design procedures and expanded to cover suspension bridge designs. Furthermore, design theory and practice
have continued to evolve due to increased understanding of structural behavior and construction best practices gained through
experience and research. This Volume is the first release for the design and construction of suspension bridges.
This section will briefly discuss the scope and limitations of this manual, the ASD methodology and the philosophy of standardized
bridge design.
1.1 Scope and Limitations
The guidelines in this manual are intended for the design of suspension cable bridges with the stated assumptions. As
with any modulated design, usage assumptions must be made by the bridge designer and engineering judgement must be
implemented. For situations falling outside of the modulated design parameters, the design philosophies of this manual may
be applied with additional design criteria accounted for where required.
The cable suspension bridge is intended for pedestrians, livestock and narrow transportation aids (bicycles, wheelbarrows,
motorbikes, etc.). For this reason, a one meter walkway width was selected for all standard bridge designs. Widening the
walkway up to one and a half meters is possible with further engineering of the anchor, tower, pedestal, footing and decking,
but any additional width in excess of one and a half meters risks the inadvisable use by small cars. It is recommended that
any bicycles, animals or motorbikes be walked across, but all are considered acceptable for crossing.
The modulated designs in this manual utilize dead loads associated with timber decking. If a steel deck is chosen, one must
account for the corresponding dead load.
The maximum span length for the modulated suspension cable bridge designs in this manual is 84 meters. Due to
1.2 Allowable Stress Design Methodology
Bridges to Prosperity has adopted the use of Allowable Stress Design (ASD), also known as “working stress design” or
“service load design,” for designing suspended cable bridges. ASD methodology is based on a principle that stresses
developed in a structural component under normal service loading conditions do not exceed a predetermined limit. The
general ASD equation is as follows:
/Q # Rn
i
FS ((1.(
The left side of the equation, Qi, is the stress in a component from a given load effect and is determined by elastic structural
analysis. The right side of the equation represents a nominal stress limit (Rn) such as yielding or fracture, divided by a
factor of safety (FS). The value of the factor of safety depends on the importance of the structural element and the level of
uncertainty involved with calculating demand and capacity of that component.
An alternative design methodology is Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD). LRFD is a probability-based design
philosophy in which reduction factors are applied to materials and magnification factors are applied to loads to account for
differing variability of each component. Both reduction factors and magnification factors are catered to specific materials
and loading conditions. Conversely, ASD treats all loads in a given load combination with the same variability and does not
consider the concurrent situation with higher than expected loads with lower than expected strengths. The factor of safety
takes care of that dual situation. The ASD approach has served very well with suspension bridge design and produced safe
structures around the world.
1.3 Standard Designs
The primary purpose of this bridge design manual is to provide users with a basic engineering background as well as a
practical way to design safe cable suspension bridges. In order to accomplish this goal, B2P has engineered a series
of modulated design drawings and details that accommodate different geometric conditions. These modulated design
drawings, used in conjunction with the design guide presented in this chapter, comprise what is referred to as a standard
design. Each standard design captures a range of span lengths and eliminates the need for detailed engineering calculations
for every bridge project. As such, the standard designs not only promote design efficiencies by reducing engineering and
drafting time requirements, but also permit use by those without advanced engineering education. However, because
each standard is designed for a worst case situation for a given set of conditions, they may not be the most economical
designs from a material and labor standpoint. Sometimes a more site-specific solution may be a better alternative and the
principles outlined in Section 4: Structural Analysis and Evaluation must be employed. For bridge designs that do not fit the
design assumptions, a site-specific solution must also be generated. These site-specific bridge designs are deemed “non-
standard” and an engineer with appropriate education must be involved in the design process.
This general bridge design guide provides minimum requirements for bridge layout, geometric clearances and constraints,
geotechnical investigation, and hydrology and hydraulics. Additional design objectives such as safety, durability, serviceability,
maintainability, constructability, economics and aesthetics are also addressed.
In addition to technical bridge design, selection of a bridge site should also take into consideration the local economics, social and
environmental concerns, land ownership impacts, and long term maintenance and inspection responsibilities. Refer to Volume 1:
Project Development for more information on these topics.
2.1 Design Objectives
The design engineer’s primary objective is public safety. Other aspects of design including durability, serviceability,
maintainability, constructability, economics, and aesthetics are secondary.
SAFETY
Safety is of utmost importance not only from a structural integrity standpoint but also from the aspect of users. Considerations
should be made for user safety such as adequate railings, walkway materials that will accommodate bare feet, and safety
fencing with a mesh sufficient to prevent passage of objects or small children. Minimum requirements to ensure structural
safety are presented in the Section 4: Structural Analysis and Evaluation.
DURABILITY
Quality materials should be selected in conjunction with proper detailing to maximize resistance to usage and weather
and thereby extending the structures’ lifespan. Examples of details that enhance durability are sufficient concrete cover for
reinforcing bar, galvanized fasteners, treated wood, and corrosion protection measures for buried cables and components
that come in direct contact with soil and/or water.
SERVICEABILITY
Cable suspension bridges without lateral stabilization are inherently flexible structures that can sway in the wind and bounce
with pedestrian traffic. Nonetheless, bridges should be designed to limit the typical deformations experienced during use
such that negative psychological effects such as feeling queasy can be avoided. Additional considerations should be made
for limiting the walkway slope on approach ramps and at the ends of the bridge span near towers.
MAINTAINABILITY
Considerations should be made for economical maintenance of the bridge to extend the overall lifespan of the major
structural components. Safety fencing, suspenders, decking, and crossbeams should be detailed in a way that permits ease
of replacement. For example, untreated timber, such as pine, may only last a year or two in high moisture environments
whereas treated tropical hardwoods may last more than ten years.
CONSTRUCTABILITY
The standard designs presented in this manual and the construction methods discussed in Volume 3, Chapter 3: Suspension
Bridge Construction have evolved through experience to ensure fabrication and erection can be completed in a safe,
economical, and efficient manner. Bridge sites present a wide array of challenges for construction and specific requirements
designated by the engineer should be incorporated into construction drawings.
ECONOMY
Bridges to Prosperity optimizes the economic efficiency of its bridges by utilizing locally available materials. For instance,
construction of the approach ramps typically sources locally gathered stones from nearby rivers. Additionally, sand can be
sifted from the river so long as the quality can be maintained. Availability of materials, fabricators, labor, and shipping should
be considered.
AESTHETICS
Bridge aesthetics are not considered by B2P. Decorating bridges is allowed so long as the structural integrity is not
compromised.
2.2 Bridge Layout
A bridge site should be selected with adequate room for foundation placement in a location that satisfies all clearance
requirements. Considerations should also be made for proximity to existing roadways and potential impact damage from
both road and waterway vehicles. Typical Elevation and Plan diagrams for suspension bridges are shown in Figures 2.1
and 2.2.
LEFT SPAN RIGHT

BACKSTAY ℄ SPAN BACKSTAY
MAIN SUPPORTING CABLE
LEFT SAG SPAN HANDRAIL CABLE RIGHT
BACKSTAY ℄ SPAN BACKSTAY
MAIN SUPPORTING CABLE
WALKWAY FREEBOARD
SAG
HANDRAIL
HIGH WATER LINE CABLE
LEFT ANCHOR
LEFT TOWER
AND FOUNDATION WALKWAY FREEBOARD
RIGHT TOWER RIGHT ANCHOR
LEFT ANCHOR HIGH WATER LINE AND FOUNDATION
LEFT TOWER
AND FOUNDATION
RIGHT TOWER RIGHT ANCHOR
AND FOUNDATION
Figure 2.1 – Typical Elevation View
EXISTING PATH
EXISTING PATH
EXISTING PATH
EXISTING TREE
(TYP)
RIGHT
EXISTING ANCHOR
PATH
℄ LEFT TOWER ℄ RIGHT TOWER
EXISTING TREE
(TYP)
RIGHT ANCHOR
℄ LEFT TOWER ℄ RIGHT TOWER
LEFT ANCHOR
BOULDER FIELD RIVER FLOW DIRECTION

LEFT ANCHOR
BOULDER FIELD RIVER FLOW DIRECTION
Figure 2.2 – Typical Plan View
0°
3
SOIL CONDITIONS
2.3 Geometric Requirements
The following geometric requirements are implemented to reduce the engineering needed for each project, limit the exposure
to certain environmental effects such as wind and floods, maintain serviceability with maximum walkway slopes, and avoid
other hazards such as powerlines and overhead tree branches.
SPAN (L)
ΔH
3.0m HIGH WATER LINE
(MIN.)
35°
3.0m
FREEBOARD
(MIN.)
Figure 2.3 – Geometric Constraints
SPAN LENGTH
The maximum span length for the modulated suspended cable bridge designs in this manual is 84 meters. Due to dynamic
effects of lateral wind loadings for spans exceeding 84 meters, lateral stabilizing measures (wind guys) must be implemented.
For locations with exceptionally high wind speeds, a qualified engineer should be consulted to determine the necessity of
lateral stabilization.
Maximum Span 84 meters
FOUNDATION SETBACK
The tower foundations should be at least 3.0 meters from the top edge of each riverbank for soil conditions and 1.5 meters
for rock. This setback helps avoid situations where erosion or rock fall may encroach upon the foundations. To avoid slope
stability concerns the tower foundations should also be placed behind the line of the angle of internal friction of the bank
from any point along the slope. For a foundation placed in soil, a 35° angle should be used and for foundations placed in
rock, a 60° angle should be used. When drawing lines with the appropriate angle, the entire tower foundation should be
located on the opposite side of the line as the river. Where top of bank and toe of slope locations are not very well defined,
the slope stability and potential erosion may be less of a concern and these provisions should be applied as best possible.
Minimum Setback 3.0 meters and 35° from bank (for soil)
1.5 meters and 60° from bank (for rock)
DIFFERENCE IN ELEVATION
A large height differential from one side of the river to the other not only has adverse structural effects, such as excessive
eccentricity on the abutment tower, but also decreases serviceability by producing steep walkways. The final design dictates
the height difference between the cable saddles shall not exceed 2% of the span length (L/50) in order to limit these effects.
The maximum height difference (DH) equation is as follows:
Maximum Height Difference DH = L ((2.(

50
where:
FREEBOARD
Freeboard is the clear distance from the lowest point of the bridge walkway to the high water level. The high water level
is the absolute highest point the river level has reached including such cases as hurricanes or other large flood events.
Maintaining a proper freeboard is important to prevent the bridge from being damaged by logs or other debris drifting down
the river during high water events. Such an event may lead to a catastrophic failure of the structure. The topography of the
area will dictate the magnitude of required freeboard. For flatter areas with substantial floodplains, a freeboard value of two
meters may be acceptable because increased volume of water flow results in nominal increases in water level. In locations
with steeper slopes, a minimum freeboard of three meters is required because channelized waterways can rise rapidly with
increased flow. Foundation heights may be increased to achieve proper freeboard, but there is a structural limitation to how
high they may be constructed. A key factor for determining the appropriate freeboard value to use is whether or not the
lowest point of the walkway cables is sufficiently above the lower bank where flood waters may disperse horizontally rather
than rise vertically.
Minimum Freeboard 2.0 meters (floodplains)
3.0 meters (gorges and valleys)
CABLE DESIGN SAG

The Cable Design Sag for the fully loaded position of the completed bridge is assumed to be 9.09% of the span length
(L/11) for all bridge spans. While suspended cable forces decrease with increased sag percentages (i.e. when cables are
lower), this restriction is imposed to limit the required height of towers to keep the walkway sufficiently above the waterway.
Conversely, because cable forces increase with decreased sag percentages (i.e. when cables are more straight across the
river), the resulting forces from cables with less sag would require larger foundations.
ENVIRONMENT AND UTILITIES

Bridge sites are often located near existing low water vehicular crossings, which may have power lines running alongside
the roadway. Projects may also be located in heavily vegetated areas where large trees are obstructive or pose threats to
the bridge. Bridges to Prosperity suggests the following clearance requirements:
Minimum overhead power line clearance 10.0 meters in any direction
Minimum horizontal roadway clearance 3.0 meters from any roadway to bridge component
Minimum vertical roadway clearance 5.0 meters beneath suspended bridge cables
Trees that threaten falling on the structure Shall be removed
Trees that do not pose falling risk Shall be at least 2.0 meters clear from bridge components
Tree branches All branches should be removed from above the bridge structure
2.4 Geotechnical Investigation
For both abutment locations, one must determine the type of anchorage best suited for the geological conditions of the site.
A geotechnical investigation should be conducted to determine the type of foundations and estimate the expected costs of
labor and materials.
Reference Volume 1, Section 4: Technical Assessment for more detailed information on geotechnical investigation and soil
and rock classifications.
2.5 Hydrology and Hydraulics
Two of the biggest threats to the lifespan of a bridge are the potential for erosion that may compromise the bridge abutments
and high water carrying large debris.
Hydrologic investigations should be conducted as best possible by using historical flood information and talking to local
community members about flood events. In addition to maximum flood levels, the flood frequency, water velocities, and
distribution of flow should also be determined.
Hydraulic studies should investigate the channel migration (i.e. whether or not the river channel has meandered from its
current location), bank stability, potential for large debris, and high water marks. The study should include a larger portion of
the watershed upstream and not be restricted to the immediate bridge vicinity. Furthermore, any effect the proposed bridge
structure may have on flood flow patterns or potential for scour should be investigated.
This section describes loads and load combinations that should be used for bridge design along with their appropriate application.
This section also discusses material property assumptions used for the standard designs presented in this manual.
3.1 Loads
During the analysis and design process, various loads affecting the bridge need to be considered. There are two primary
types of loads that must be considered: Permanent Loads and Transient Loads. Each type of load has various contributors
that together define the magnitude of the Permanent Loads and Transient Loads.
PERMANENT LOADS
Permanent Loads are ones that remain relatively constant over time and include the weight of the structure itself and earth
pressures constantly in contact with the bridge structure.
Dead Load (DL)

The Dead Load includes the weight of all permanent components of the bridge structure. The actual dead load of the bridge
is to be based on material takeoff and will vary according to crossbeam and decking materials used, cable sizes, fencing
weight, stone and concrete volumes and densities, etc. For cable suspension bridges, 1.0 kilonewton per meter (68 lb/ft) is
a conservative assumption for the dead load of the cables and walkway surface including the suspenders and fencing for
a bridge with a one meter wide walkway. The dead load of each tower, foundation, and anchor, shall be calculated based
on actual volumes and materials used.
Lateral Earth Pressure (EH)

Lateral Earth Pressure is the pressure a soil exerts in the horizontal direction and should be included with abutment, wall,
and retaining structure designs. Two types of lateral earth pressures to be considered are at-rest and active. At-rest pressure
is the in-situ lateral pressure and should be used when the resisting structural component can tolerate little or no movement.
An active soil pressure occurs when a soil mass is allowed to relax or deform laterally to the point of mobilizing its available
shear resistance in trying to resist lateral deformation. Active soil pressure should only be used on structural components
such as retaining walls that will move or rotate away from the soil until the soil active state is reached. Determination of
lateral earth pressures is covered in Section 4: Structural Analysis and Evaluation.
TRANSIENT LOADS
Transient Loads include any temporary or brief forces that act on the bridge structure. Transient Loads include people,
vehicles, wind, earthquakes, and anything that can be moved along the walkway.
Wind Load (WL)

Reference Helvetas Short Span Trail Bridge Manual (2003), SSTB-D Type.
The design Wind Load is taken as a uniformly distributed load based on a wind speed of 160 kilometers per hour acting
horizontally on the walkway. This corresponds to a wind pressure of 1.3 kN/m2 acting on the lateral bridge area of 0.3 m2 per
meter span. Using a wind drag coefficient of 1.30, the lateral design wind load is 0.50 kN/m span. In the case of a standard
suspension bridge, the foundation structures are sufficient to resist this design wind load.
Wind Load also affects the dynamic behavior of the bridge. However, practical experience has proven that bridges of up
to 120 meter spans show no significant dynamic effects due to wind load. Therefore, no lateral stabilizing measures are
considered in this standard suspended design guide. For special cases with spans greater than 120 meters or extremely
windy areas where wind speeds exceed 160 kilometers per hour, an engineer should be contacted to design a wind guy
system for lateral stabilization.
Distributed Live Loads (LL)

Reference AASHTO Guide Specification for Design of Pedestrian Bridges, 1997.
A Distributed Live Load is a uniform force applied to the full length of the walkway surface, representing people, animals,
or motorbikes. Primary load carrying structural components, including cables and foundations, shall be designed for a
distributed live load of 4.07 kilonewtons per square meter (kN/m2) (85 lb/ft^2) of bridge walkway area.
If the bridge walkway area exceeds 37 square meters (400 ft^2), the distributed live load may be reduced by the following
equation:
$ 3.14 kN m2 (65 psf)

w= 4.07 kN m 2 $ c 0.25 +
4 . 57
me w * 4 ((3.(
A1 # 4.07 kN m2 (85 psf)
where:
w = design live load (kN/m2)
A1 = walkway area (m2).
This reduction accounts for the reduced probability of the entire bridge being fully loaded simultaneously. The minimum live
load that should be applied regardless of span length is 3.14 kN/m2 (65 lb/ft^2).
Secondary members, including bridge deck, crossbeams, and suspenders, shall be designed for a live load of 4.07 kN/m2
(85 lb/ft2), with no reduction allowed.
A more recent version of the AASHTO Guide Specification for Design of Pedestrian Bridges has been published with an
increased Distributed Live Load value of 4.22 kN/m2 (90 psf) with no reduction for increased loading area. B2P believes the
likelihood of a rural footbridge being fully loaded to this level at any span length is unrealistic and has decided not to adopt
this revision.
Point Live Loads (PL)

A Point Live Load is a singular force acting on any structural component. For the cases of rural pedestrian bridges, loads
such as livestock, horses, and motorbikes may be larger in magnitude than the calculated Distributed Live Load and
may act on a smaller area. The walkway system, including decking and crossbeams, shall support a point load of 2.22
kilonewtons (500 lbs.) anywhere between suspenders.
Ice and Snow Load (SL)

Ice and snow loads are considered to be covered by the Design Live Load and are not utilized independently in this bridge
manual.
Seismic Load (EQ)

Cable suspension bridges are inherently flexible structures and an independent load case for seismic forces is not considered
due to the low probability of an earthquake occurring simultaneously with a full live load.
Temperature Load (TU)

Additional forces resulting from thermal effects on cables negligible and are not included in the standard design process.
3.2 Load Combinations
It is not probable for all of the potential load effects on a bridge to occur simultaneously. As a result, it is necessary for an
engineer to consider different combinations of loads that may occur at the same time to ensure the bridge can withstand
various loading scenarios that it may experience throughout its lifespan. The following load combinations account for the
practical combinations of loads that may be applied:
For standard cable suspension bridges:

DL + EH + LL ( (3.(
DL + EH + LL + 0.3*WL ((3.(
DL + EH + WL ((3.(
3.3 Material Properties
Actual strength values should be determined via certification and or testing. B2P otherwise assumes the following strengths
for standard cable suspension bridges
Concrete f 'c = 15 MPa (2200 lb/in.2) mixed by drum mixer or other

f 'c = 10 MPa (1500 lb/in.2) mixed by hand
Structural Steel fy = 240 MPa (35,000 lb/in.2)
Steel Reinforcing fy = 275 MPa (40,000 lb/in.2)
Soil q u = 286 kPa (6000 lb/ft2)

z = 33c
Cable/Wire Rope Per certification: If using re-purposed wire rope, a certified breaking strength can be attained
through load testing the cable at the section showing its greatest wear.
Table 3.1 – Assumed Material Unit Weights

Material SI Units Imperial Units
Steel 7850 kg/m3 490 lb/ft3
Concrete 2400 kg/m3 150 lb/ft3
Timber 900 kg/m3 56 lb/ft3
General Soil 1800 kg/m3 112 lb/ft3
Stone Masonry 2100 kg/m3 131 lb/ft3
Broken Rock 1900 kg/m3 120 lb/ft3
Water 1000 kg/m3 62.4 lb/ft3
The following section details basic design criteria and assumptions used by Bridges to Prosperity when designing cable suspension
bridges. This section is intended for use in design verification and need not be referenced for non-engineer designers, as all standard
designs account for the following codes and assumptions. For standard bridge projects, skip to Section 5: Suspension Bridge Design.
Design of all other structural elements shall be per recognized design codes using Factors of Safety consistent with Allowable
Strength Design methodology. SPAN (L)
L/2 L/2
Referenced design codes include:
• AASHTO Guide Specification for Design of Pedestrian Bridges, 1997
ΔH
• AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, 7th Edition, 2014
hHoist
LOW POINT
hDL
hLL
• ACI 318-14 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
f
• AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) Steel Construction Manual, 14th Edition
• NDS (National Design Specification for Wood Construction), 2015 Edition
4.1 Cable Analysis
OVERVIEW
A cable hanging between two supports and carrying a uniformly distributed load along the true horizontal (as opposed
to along its length) forms a parabola as opposed to a catenary. The maximum deflection of a cable relative to a chord
connecting the support points is called the cable sag. There are three sag values to consider when designing the main
cables for a suspension bridge: Hoisting Sag, Dead Load Sag, and Live Load Sag.
Hoisting Sag (hHoist) is the resting position of the cable when only supporting its own weight.
Dead Load Sag (hDL) is the cable’s position under full dead load.
Live Load Sag (hLL) is the cable’s position under full dead load plus full live load.
SPAN (L)
L/2 L/2
ΔH
hHoist
LOW POINT
hDL
hLL
f
The change in sag values from one loading condition to the next reflects the elastic elongation in the cables as more load
is applied. Bridges to Prosperity bases designs upon the geometric profile created using the Live Load Sag value. For all
suspension bridges, the Live Load Sag value is equal to the span length divided by 11. The initial position of the cables
prior to adding the walkway (Hoisting Sag) and the permanent position of the cable under full dead (Dead Load Sag) can
be determined iteratively with known loadings and cable properties (area and modulus of elasticity). In the absence of this
refined analysis, the Hoisting Sag and Live Load Sag values can be approximated with the following values:
h Hoist = 7.50% $ L ( (4.(

h DL = 7.85% $ L ((4.(
h LL = 9.09% $ L ((4.(
where:
Note: The Hoisting Sag is used during construction to calculate the distance to the lowest point of the cable (f).
℄ SADDLE
GEOMETRY AND FORCES

The following equations and diagrams describe the theory governing the geometry of the main span cables and the
resulting forces.
SPAN (L)
PvHigh PtHigh
L/2
Ph
ΔH
PvLow
PtLow
hsag
Ph
Ph Ph
Low High
Figure 4.2 – Cable Geometry and Forces for a Cable Subjected to a Uniform Distributed Load
Horizontal Tension:
= w c $ L (ANCHOR)
2
PhBACKSTAY Ph Ph MAIN SPAN (RIVER)
((4.(
8 $ h sag
where:
Ph = horizontal cable tension, kN PvBack + PvMain
w = distributed load, kN/m
PvBack
L = bridge span length, m
hsag = cable Sag, m PtBack
Ph
Angle to Horizontal (High Side):

℄ TOWER
4 $ h sag + DH
i High = tan -1 b l ((4.(
L
Vertical Tension (High Side):
Pv High = Ph $ tan (i High)

((4.(
Total Tension (High Side):
Pt High = Ph ((4.(
cos (i High)
Angle to Horizontal (Low Side):
4 $ h sag - DH
i Low = tan -1 b l ((4.(
L
Vertical Tension (Low Side):
Pv Low = Ph $ tan (i Low) ((4.(

Total Tension (Low Side):
Pt Low = Ph ((4.1(
cos (i Low)
BACKSTAY (ANCHOR) Ph Ph MAIN SPAN (RIVER)
PvBack + PvMain
PvBack
PtBack
Ph
℄ TOWER
Figure 4.3 – Backstay and Tower Cable Geometry and Forces
Total Backstay Tension:
Pt Back = Ph ((4.1(
cos (a)
Vertical Backstay Tension:
Pv Back = Pt Back $ sin (a) ((4.1(
Total Main Span Tension:
Pt Main = Pt High or Pt Low ((4.1(
Vertical Main Span Tension:
Pv Main = Pt Main $ sin ^ i h (

(4.1(
Total Vertical Reaction at Tower:
R Tower = Pv Back + Pv Main (

(4.1(
CABLE DESIGN
Available cable diameters and associated certified breaking strengths should be researched for each project. Bridges to
Prosperity program staff will provide certified breaking strengths of available inventory in B2P Program Countries. For a list
of active B2P Program Countries, please visit the B2P website.
In lieu of using applied and ultimate cable stresses for cable design, the applied force and ultimate breaking strength can
be used since the cable area remains constant.
Cable design shall satisfy:
Ps 1 Pu ((4.1(
FS
where:
Ps = maximum axial tension in cable, kN
Pu = ultimate breaking strength of cable, kN
4.2 Walkway Analysis
OVERVIEW
The B2P standard steel crossbeams and timber decking boards have been designed according to AISC 14th Edition and
NDS 2015, respectively. Each timber decking board shall be designed to carry the applied loads without exceeding the
adjusted design values. Adjusted design values take into consideration the conditions under which the timber will be used,
including moisture content, load duration, and shape. It is the responsibility of the engineer to apply the appropriate design
values along with adjustment factors when conducting crossbeam and decking design.
Both the steel crossbeams and timber decking are considered to be secondary members and shall carry un-reduced
distributed live load values and point loads in accordance with Section 3: Loads and Materials. The decking boards shall be
checked for both flexure and shear. Typically, the point load case will govern the decking design. B2P suggests minimum
dimensions for decking boards of 5cm x 20cm (2” x 8”).
TIMBER DECKING ANALYSIS

Each timber element shall be checked for both flexure and shear. Decking boards are a minimum of two meters long
spanning between three crossbeams, but are conservatively analyzed as a simply supported member with a one-meter
span. Typically, the point load case will govern and Bridges to Prosperity suggests minimum dimensions for decking boards
of 5cm x 20cm (2” x 8”). Decking boards are a minimum of two meters long spanning between three crossbeams (with the
exception of end planks), but are conservatively analyzed as a simply supported member with a one meter span.
STEEL CROSSBEAM ANALYSIS

The B2P standard crossbeam is comprised of two small steel angles that are either welded or bolted together back-to-back.
Steel crossbeams were specified for the standard design due to their longer life span and the relative difficulty of replacing
them when the bridge is in service. The standard steel crossbeams are supported at the ends by the suspenders. As such,
the crossbeam design loads are determined using basic statics equations assuming a simply supported beam carrying a
distributed load over the width of the timber nailer. The steel crossbeams shall be checked for both flexure and shear.
4.3 Suspender Analysis
OVERVIEW
The suspenders function to transfer load from the steel crossbeams into the main cables. The suspenders are subjected to
environmental factors and cyclical bending within the flexible structure. As a result, Bridges to Prosperity uses a factor of
safety of 5.0 to account for the likelihood of potential fatigue failure and corrosion of the steel over time. Even though smaller
bars or wires may be used, B2P recommends using no less than a 10 millimeter deformed reinforcing bar (#3 bar), with a
minimum yield strength of 274 megapascals. The increased factor of safety also reduces the risk of progressive failure if
a single suspender breaks and neighboring suspenders must transfer additional load. Smooth reinforcing bar often is of
inferior quality and strength, and thus should be avoided.
SUSPENDER DESIGN CHECK

For the axial design check of suspenders, the calculated stress in the member due to the maximum axial load must be less
than or equal to the yield stress divided by a factor of safety.
fy
fs 1 ((4.1(
FS
in which:
fs = P ((4.1(
A
where:
P = axial load, kN
A = steel reinforcing bar area, mm2
4.4 Steel Tower Analysis
OVERVIEW
This section briefly describes the design of the steel towers. More details can be found in the Section 7 Design Example.
The standard suspension bridge towers are made of round steel pipe sections and are fabricated in country per the B2P
Standard Suspension Drawings found in Chapter 2. Also note that the steel towers have a hinge at the base. The hinge
permits the tower to rotate slightly towards the river when the bridge is fully loaded and rotate back when the load is
removed. Other designs with a steel tower that is fixed at the base (i.e. the bottom of the tower is cast in concrete) have
been built but the design of this type of tower is outside the scope of this manual.
STEEL TOWER DESIGN

The structural steel design is per AISC Manual of steel construction, 14th Edition using the Allowable Stress Design
provisions. The tower is analyzed for combined bending and axial loads resulting from the vertical cable load along with
horizontal wind load. Due to the complexities of the indeterminate frame analysis, the use of analysis software is highly
recommended.
Based on the load combinations presented in Section 3: Loads and Materials, determine the Dead Load, Live Load and
Wind Load acting on the bridge superstructure. Using these values, calculate the vertical and horizontal forces at the top of
each tower leg. Either solving by hand or using an analysis software, compute the axial load and moment demand in each
component of the tower frame.
In order to determinePDLthe+ LL
capacities
PDL + LL of each PDL + LL PDL + LL
tower frame member, the 2 effective2 length of 2 2
each compression member must be determined.
Consult the AISCPWind
manual for further information on PWind Ph Ph
determining the effective length of a compression 
PtBack PtMain  
member. Using the appropriate code equations, the
steel pipe capacity can be calculated. Note that for PvBack + PvMain
the steel tower frames used in the standard designs,

the pipes should be checked for each segment
between brace points as well as about each axis.
Using the calculated forces and capacity of each

tower section, the appropriate Allowable Stress
Design equations for axial load, moment, and
combined axial load and moment can be applied to
verify the safety of the tower℄ design. If using
TOWER LEG alternate
℄ TOWER LEG ℄ TOWER LEG ℄ TOWER LEG ℄ TOWER
details than the standard designs presented in this Figure 4.4 – Cable Forces at Tower
manual, be sure to check other components such as
bracing members and connections.
4.5 Concrete Pedestal Analysis
OVERVIEW
This section describes the design of the pedestals that support the steel towers at the base. The pedestals can be used to
minimize height differential from one side to the other by varying the height.
CONCRETE PEDESTAL DESIGN

The concrete pedestals are designed using the ACI specification for the design of plain concrete, or concrete without steel
reinforcement. This design assumption is made due to the pedestals’ relatively low height to width ratio and low side loading
where no moments will be introduced. Dimension the pedestal using the ACI Plain Concrete Nominal Axial Strength of
Cross-section equation.
Design of cross sections subject to compression shall be based on:
Pn $ Pu ((4.1(
FS
in which:
Pn = 0.6 $ f 'c $ : 1 - b l c l D $ A 1
2
((4.2(
32h
where:
lc = height of pedestal, m
h = minimum dimension of pedestal, m
A1 = loaded area, m2
f’c = compressive strength of concrete, MPa
Although the pedestals are sufficient to take the load without reinforcing steel, a minimal amount is added. B2P adds
one half of one percent of the area of concrete for added durability. The 13 millimeter stirrups are placed at 300 millimeter
spacing per AASHTO 8.18.2.3.2 (Ties).
4.6 Concrete Footing Analysis
OVERVIEW
All of the vertical forces generated in the cables are transferred through the towers and pedestal into the footing. Additional
vertical load is also generated from the self-weight of the towers, pedestal, and portions of the ramp directly above the
footing. For load cases that include wind load as a lateral force and the subsequent unbalanced reactions beneath each
tower leg, the bearing pressure beneath the footing are lower towards the windward side and higher towards the leeward
side or the bridge. To perform satisfactorily, the maximum bearing pressure generated must not exceed the bearing capacity
of the soil. Furthermore, the resultant cable force, considering the backstay and main span components of the cable’s
influence on the tower saddle, must not cause overturning.
BEARING PRESSURE CHECK

The load per unit area of the foundation at which shear failure in soil occurs is called the ultimate bearing capacity. The
allowable soil bearing capacity is the ultimate bearing capacity divided by a factor of safety. Specific values for the ultimate
bearing pressure should be determined for the soil found at the bridge site. The designs in this manual assume ultimate
soil bearing pressure of 286 kilopascals (kPa) (6,000 lbs/ft2) for unsaturated soil conditions. Suspension bridge footings are
often placed in floodplain locations where water levels may rise above the tower footing. For such cases, the ultimate soil
bearing pressure must be reduced to account for the saturated soil conditions.
Bearing pressure shall satisfy:
qu
qs 1 ((4.2(
FS
where:
qs = maximum bearing pressure, kPa
qu = ultimate bearing pressure, kPa
Due to the unbalanced tower reactions from the load case including wind, the bearing pressure beneath the footing is not
uniform. The maximum bearing pressure can be calculated using the equivalent width method as shown in the following
diagram:
q s = PTotal
℄ FOOTING
((4.2(
B* $ l
PTotal in which:
e B*/2
B * = 2M ((4.2(
PTotal
where:
B* l = length of foundation, m
B* = effective width, m
M = total overturning moment about base, kN-m
Figure 4.5 – Bearing Pressure PTotal = total vertical load including self weight, kN
℄ FOUNDATION
18 PTotal — Bridges to Prosperity —

e B*/2
4.7 Anchor Analysis
OVERVIEW
The suspension bridge anchor system resists vertical and horizontal forces induced by the cables. This manual is limited
to anchors designed for soil conditions only. For rock anchor designs, refer to a qualified engineer for analysis support. The
anchor system is comprised of a concrete anchor blocks, transition arms, and anchor beam. The anchor blocks contain
a steel pipe for securing the ends of the cables. The transition arms transfer the entire load from the anchor block to the
anchor beam. The anchor beam is the primary means of resistance by engaging passive earth pressures and utilizing a
large mass of soil as overburden. The anchor system was created in this way to provide an easy, above ground connection
for the cables while minimizing total concrete works. The anchor system shall be primarily designed to satisfy sliding
and uplift.
ANCHOR BLOCK ANCHOR PIPE
ANCHOR BEAM
TRANSITION ARM
Figure 4.6 – Typical Anchor System
DESIGN OF ANCHOR BLOCK

The transition block is the above ground portion of the anchor system that encases the steel pipe that the cables wrap
around. The reinforcing steel bars connecting the anchor beam to the anchor block through the transition arm are also
looped around the embedded steel pipe. Because of this direct steel connection from the steel pipe to the anchor beam,
the transition block has minimal design aspects. The pipe must be checked for shear and bending capacity using standard
concrete filled pipe equations from the AISC Manual for Steel Construction. However, for the purposes of B2P designs, the
factor of safety for this pipe shall be 3.0 due to the importance of this component. The anchor block should be designed for
minimum reinforcing steel to control cracking and increase durability.
POverburden
An additional consideration to be made when sizing the embedded steel pipe is the radius and how it may affect the
efficiency of the cable connection. If the pipe radius is smaller than the minimum bending radius for the cable it’s anchoring,
the capacity of the cable is reduced. The minimum bending radius can be found in bending efficiency charts for wire rope.
PvBack
PActive Ph RPassive
PAnchor
H1
Figure 4.7 – Bending Radius Efficiency Chart

h
2
19 H2 — Bridges to Prosperity —
h PActive RPassive
DESIGN OF TRANSITION ARM

The transition arms are heavily reinforced concrete beams primarily in tension. Since they serve such an important role in
connecting the anchor beam to the above-ground transition block where the cables will attach, the factor of safety is also set
at 3.0. The transition arms in the standard designs ensure that none of the main tension reinforcing bars exceed six meters
in length because of typical availability and difficulty in procuring bars longer than this. Splicing the main tension steel in the
transition arm is not recommended with traditional lap splices, but with the use of mechanical connections instead. The yield
strength of reinforcing bars in the standard designs is assumed to be 275 megapascals (40,000 lbs/in2).
fy
fs # ((4.2(
FS
in which:
fs = P ((4.2(
Ab $ n
where:
fs = axial stress, MPa
P = total axial load on transition arm, kN
Ab = area of reinforcing bar, mm2
N = number of reinforcing bars
DESIGN OF ANCHOR BEAM

Concrete anchor beams are used in soil conditions where the predominate sliding and uplift resistances are provided by the
soil. The uplift resistance is provided by the weight of the concrete beam itself as well as the weight of soil placed above it.
The sliding is prevented by engaging the passive resistance of the soil in front of the anchor beam.
The following assumptions have been made for the standard concrete anchor beam design:
• Soil wall friction is neglected as a conservative simplification
• Soil is cohesionless (i.e. c = 0)
• No consideration of earthquake design has been taken into account
• Backfill is required above the anchor beam to provide the necessary resistance
• No surcharge loads are acting on the anchor beam
Design has been completed assuming anchor beams are in non-saturated conditions. Where a high water table is a
concern, assume saturated condition is possible and deduct the buoyant force of the anchor beam and soil.
ANCHOR BEAM SLIDING CHECK

In order for the passive resistance from the soil to be engaged, the soil must first deform from the beam moving forward a
small amount. When this happens, it causes a lateral active earth pressure to develop behind theANCHOR
beam BLOCK
as it slides forward ANCHOR PIP
(i.e. the earth exerts a force on the anchor in the same direction as the cable force). The anchor beam also resists sliding
through friction with the soil along each interface. The self-weight of the anchor beam along with the soil above it contribute
to the total vertical load used for determining the friction resistance. The total horizontal driving force is a summation of
the horizontal cable force and the active earth pressure. The total horizontal resistance is a summation of the friction and
ANCHOR BEAM
passive resistance of the soil.
TRANSITION ARM
Anchor beam sliding shall satisfy:
Rs 1 Rn ((4.2(
FS
where:
Rs = horizontal driving force, kN
Rn = horizontal resisting force, kN
The total driving and resisting forces can be calculated

using static analysis. A free body diagram of associated
POverburden
loads acting on the anchor beam are shown in the
following diagram:
Horizontal Forces: PvBack

PActive Ph RPassive
PActive = active earth pressure, kN
PAnchor
Ph = horizontal cable force on concrete anchor beam, kN
RPassive = passive resistance, kN
Figure 4.8 – Anchor Sliding Free Body Diagram
Vertical Forces:
PvBack = vertical component of backstay cable force, kN
POverburden = self-weight of soil above anchor, kN
The total horizontal driving force is found by summing the horizontal forces:
H1
R s = PActive + Ph Anchor ((4.2(
h
The total horizontal resisting force is found by summing the passive
H
2
2
resistance and the friction resistance:
R n = R Friction + R Passive h PActive RPassive ((4.2(
The friction resistance is found by adding the vertical forces and multiplying by a coefficient of sliding friction:
R Friction = n $ (Pv Back + POverburden) ((4.2(
in which the coefficient of sliding friction can be taken as: n = tan ( 3 z)

4
where:
z = internal angle of friction, deg
n = coefficient of sliding friction, unitless
ANCHOR BEAM
TRANSITION ARM
The active earth pressure and passive resistance can be calculated according to Rankine theory for a cohensionless soil.
The coefficient of active earth pressure (Ka) is the term used to express the ratio of the lateral earth pressure to the vertical
earth pressure (weight of the soil above). The coefficient of passive resistance (Kp) is the term used to express the ratio
of the lateral resistance to the vertical earth pressure (weight of the soil above). The general equations for the coefficients
according to Rankine’s theory are given by the following expressions:

K a = cos b $ e o ((4.3(

K p = cos b $ e o ((4.3(
where:
z = internal angle of friction, deg
POverburden
b = soil angle, deg
If the soil behind the anchor is level, the above equations can be reduced to a simplified form:
Pv
1 -Back
sinPhz ((4.3(
PActive Ka = RPassive
1 + sin z
PAnchor
1 + sin z
Kp = ((4.3(
1 - sin z
Because the anchor beam is buried, not all of the area of the triangle for the depth of the anchor can be included. For
the standard designs in this manual, the triangle is truncated to a height equal to one and a half times the beam vertical
dimension as measured from the bottom of the beam. The following diagram depicts the active pressure and passive
resistance acting on the anchor beam.
H1
h
2
H2
h PActive RPassive
Figure 4.9 – Active Pressure and Passive Resistance Acting on Anchor Beam
The resultant forces on the anchor are given as the following:
PActive = 1 $ K a $ c $ H 2 $ w ((4.3(
2
R Passive = 1 $ K p $ c $ w $ ^ H 2 - H 1 h ((4.3(
2
in which:
H 1 = max (H 2 - 1.5h, 0.5) ((4.3(
where:
PActive = force due to active earth pressure, kN H2 = soil depth to bottom of anchor, m
Ka = active earth pressure coefficient L = length of the anchor beam, m
c = soil density, kN/m3 RPassive = passive resistance, kN
h = anchor beam height, m Kp = passive resistance coefficient, unitless
ANCHOR BEAM UPLIFT CHECK

The anchor beam resists uplift through self-weight of concrete and material activated above the beam.
Anchor beam uplift shall satisfy:
Vd 1 Vr ((4.3(
FS
where:
Vs = vertical uplift force, kN
Vn = vertical resisting force, kN
The total vertical uplift and resisting forces can be calculated using static analysis. A free body diagram of associated loads
acting on the anchor beam are shown in the following diagram. Note that the soil directly above the anchor is considered
as well as the soil that is within a one horizontal to two vertical (1H:2V) slope from the top edges of the anchor. This soil
is considered assuming that if the anchor were to be pulled out of the ground, it would engage more soil than just the soil
directly above it.
B PvBack = vertical cable force at anchor, kN

POverburden = self-weight of soil above anchor beam, kN
2 POverburden
1
The weight of overburden resisting uplift can be found by:
H2
Poverburden = b + B $ ^ H 2 - h h $ L $ c $ g ((4.3(
2
h PvBack
PAnchor in which:
b B = b + ^ H 2 - h h $ tan (30c) ((4.3(
Figure 4.10 – Anchor Uplift Freebody Diagram where:

b = anchor beam base width, m L = length of anchor beam, m
H2 = soil depth to bottom of anchor, m c = density of overburden, kg/m3
h = anchor beam height, m g = gravity = 9.81 m/s2
WATER TABLE AND BUOYANT FORCES

If the water table rises above the base of the concrete anchor beam, the unit weights of the soil and concrete must be
taken as buoyant unit weights (i.e. typical unit weight of the material minus the buoyant force acting on the material). The
buoyant force is equal to the weight of water displaced. In the case of concrete, it can be assumed that it will displace 100%
of its volume that is submerged whereas soil will displace approximately 60% of its volume that is submerged. As such, the
submerged situation will significantly decrease the resisting forces.
Depending on the duration of the submerged case, the factor of safety may be reduced. For a Temporary Case (referring
to a single event in a season), FS = 1.25. For a Long Term Case (referring to the entire rainy season), FS must remain 1.5.
Seek support from a qualified engineer for all saturated cases.
ANCHOR BEAM
The anchor itself is designed as a concrete beam. Since the forces applied to it are relatively low compared to the size of
the beam, minimum reinforcement per AASHTO 5.7.3.3.2 is added for resistance in bending. This states that the factored
nominal resistance is greater than 1.2 times the cracking moment. Reinforcement was also added for shear resistance in
the form of stirrups, which are also helpful for construction purposes and increased durability.
Volume 3: Suspension
HANDRAIL Cable Bridges
SUSPENDER
TOWER
CABLE FENCING
BACKSTAY
This section outlines the steps in order to select appropriate drawings from Bridges to Prosperity’s standard suspension bridge design
DECKING
drawings, found in Volume 3, Chapter 2: Suspension Bridge Drawings. This process does notTIERS require a technical background and
CROSSBEAM
requires few design calculations related to geometry to be performed. All pertinent design assumptions and bridge geometries
BACKWALL
have
WALKWAY CABLE
been taken into account in the standard B2P suspension bridge drawings. For background information and design assumptions, refer
to Section 4: Structural Analysis and Evaluation.
FOUNDATION
5.1 Standard Bridge Design ProcedureAPPROACH RAMP
ANCHOR BEAM
Designing a standard suspension bridge requires minimal technical background. The general procedure for completing a
set of bridge drawings after completion of a topographic survey is as follows:
• Draw the topographic profile from the survey data

• Determine bridge foundation locations and sizes
• Select tower, pedestal, footing, anchor and walkway drawings
• Determine cable size and quantity
• Compile final set of drawings
• Calculate material quantities
RESTRAINT CABLE
MAIN CABLE
SUSPENDER
TOWER
BACKSTAY
HANDRAIL CABLE
PEDESTAL
FENCING
ANCHOR BLOCK
DECKING
CROSSBEAM
TRANSITION ARM APPROACH RAMP FOOTING
ANCHOR BEAM
Figure 5.1 – Suspension Bridge Terminology
Complete a bridge profile survey using an Abney level, automatic level, digital theodolite, or other means, as available.
Reference Volume 1, Section 4: Technical Assessment for complete details.
Using the survey information, generate a topographic profile for the proposed centerline. This can be done with ordinary
graph paper and engineer’s scale or using computer automated design (CAD) software. When producing the profile line,
verify that the left tower shown in the bridge profile is referring to the left bank, when facing downstream.
5.3 Determine Foundation Locations and Sizes
The tower footing locations determine the span of the bridge in the bridge profile. When determining the footing locations
and sizes, the following criteria must be met:
• The maximum span length of 84 meters

• Footings must be placed at least 3.0 meters back from the edge of bank in a soil slope and 1.5 meters from edge
of bank in a rock slope
• Footings must be placed behind an angle of internal friction of the soil (35°) or rock (60°) as measured from the
base of the river bank
• The difference in height between cable saddles on either side of the span shall not be more than 2% of the span
(L/50)
• The maximum pedestal height is 2.0 meters above ground
• The minimum freeboard between the lowest point of the cable under dead load and the high water level shall be
3.0 meters in gorges and valleys and 2.0 meters in floodplains
These geometric design criteria and background information are discussed further in depth in Section 2: General Design
and Location Features.
In order to arrive at a final tower footing location along with the required pedestal height, follow these steps:
Step 1 - Place each preliminary footing such that the front of footing fulfills the required minimum setback. Verify the footing
is located behind the appropriate slope line. If the footing does not satisfy the slope line setback, shift the location away from
the river until the requirements are met. Verify the span length does not exceed 84 meters.
Step 2 - Determine the pedestal height required by checking the difference in elevation. Starting with the minimum pedestal
height of 1.0 meter (only 0.5 meters above ground), check that the elevation difference does not exceed the Span/50 limit,
or 2% of span length. If the level difference exceeds this amount, increase the pedestal height at the lower tower in half
meter increments until the requirement is met. Alternatively, the footings may be shifted further away from the river to gain
elevation if located on a slope. In some cases, a combination of increasing pedestal height and shifting the footing back
generates the most efficient design. When the difference in elevation parameter is fulfilled, once again verify the span does
not exceed 84 meters. If the difference in elevation cannot be satisfied, a new location must be found or a qualified engineer
must design specifically for the site.
Step 3 - Verify the freeboard between the lowest point of cable and high water elevation. The easiest way is to assume that
the deck will be linear when it is fully loaded. In this case, a straight line can be drawn from the top of one pedestal to the
top of the other to represent the deck. Measure the distance from the high water level (HWL) specified on the layout to this
line to ensure that the minimum freeboard requirements are met. If the value of freeboard is less than required, the designer
must increase the pedestal height on either one or both footings or shifting the footings back on a hill slope. Note that the
freeboard should be measured only above the river channel in most cases where flood debris can travel. The shortest
distance between the walkway and the HWL is typically at one side of the river channel or the other. If freeboard cannot be
met or the span must increase beyond 84 meters, a new location may be required.
Step 4 - Finalize the bridge profile and calculate the cable hoisting sag. If all the geometric requirements have been met
after following Steps 1 through 3, the final footing locations along with the pedestals and cable profile can be drawn. In
order to construct the bridge such that the final cable profile is located at the design level, the cables must be initially set
at a higher elevation to allow for deflections associated with cable elongation once the crossbeams and walkway decking
are applied.
In lieu of a more rigorous analysis, the cable hoisting sag may be approximated as 7.5% of the span length. The vertical
distance, f, between the lowest point of the cable in the hoisted position and the lower tower saddle is calculated by:
f= ((5.(
16 $ h Hoist
where:
DH = elevation difference between tower saddles, m
hHoist = hoisting sag, m
Step 5 – Locate the anchors such that the cable backstay slope is approximately one vertical to two horizontal (1V:2H).
This ratio is a good balance between a backstay angle that is too shallow, requiring extensive distance to the anchor and a
backstay angle that is too steep and causes instability of the towers. Based on the slope of the terrain, the distance to the
back of anchor will vary for each project. In order to locate the anchors, the height of the towers must first be determined.
The table at the beginning of Chapter 2: Suspension Bridge Drawings lists the required tower height for each span length.
Using the combined height of the pedestal and tower, the backstay cable slope can be drawn from the top of the tower using
the 1V:2H ratio. The center of the anchor beam should be placed on this line such that the bottom of the transition block is
placed 10 centimeters below the ground surface.
5.4 Select Tower, Pedestal, Footing, Anchor and Walkway Drawings
Based on a given span length and pedestal height, the drawings for the tower, pedestal, footing, anchor, walkway and ramp
may be selected. In many cases, the pedestals and footings may be different for each side of the river. The table found at
the beginning of Chapter 2: Suspension Bridge Drawings may be helpful in the selection of drawings for a give span length.
Each selected drawing can then be assembled into the complete drawing set.
The Walkway Details drawing shows crossbeam, decking, cable spacing, suspender and fencing details for constructing
the bridge. There are four different walkway drawings detailing the approach ramp, dependent upon the pedestal heights.
Within the suspension design table provide in Chapter 2: Suspension Bridge Drawings, in the row that corresponds to the
span, the maximum cable tension can be found. Use this tension with a minimum factor of safety of 3.0 when sizing the
cable for the bridge.
The quantity and spacing of cable clamps can also be determined from the following table:

3/4 19 4 5 12 130
7/8 22 4 5 13 225
1 25 5 6 14 225
1 1/8 29 6 6 15 225
1 1/4 32 7 6 16 360
1 3/8 35 7 6 16 360
1 1/2 38 8 7 18 360
A complete set of bridge drawings should include a Layout sheet with Plan and Elevation views along with appropriate
selected Footing, Pedestal, Anchor, Tower, and Walkway drawings.
Include the following critical information on the Layout drawing.
Critical Dimensions
• Span length
• Reference to survey data
• Footing elevations
• Pedestal heights
• Tower heights
• Depth to anchors
• Distance to back of anchors
• Freeboard from High Water Line
• Sag (design and hoisting)
• Height differential between towers
• Cable size and quantity
1843cm 4400cm 1599cm
550cm TOWER (TYP)
184cm
(2) 26mmØ CABLES EACH SIDE
155cm
100cm
200cm
PT J
BM 1
197cm 200cm FREEBOARD RIGHT FOOTING
LEFT FOOTING 300cm
ELEV. 99.70m ENVELOPE ELEV. 100.70m
LEFT ANCHOR RIGHT ANCHOR
ELEV. 98.40m ELEV. 99.60m
NOTES:
2. DESIGN SAG = 2.35m (9.09%)
Figure 5.2 – Example Layout Drawing
In addition to the bridge itself, other structures may be required as a greater part of the entire project. Some of these other structures
may include:
• Retaining walls
• Wind guys
• Drainage
• Bank protection
This section outlines some general design criteria for each of these structures.
6.1 Retaining Walls
Retaining walls may be necessary in locations where excessive excavation into soils or fractured rock is required behind
abutments or anchorages and would become unstable if left alone. Retaining walls may be comprised of gabion baskets,
timber, dry stone, traditional masonry walls and cast-in-place concrete. Dry stone retaining walls are typically preferable as
they require only local materials and are constructed with the least amount of additional cost. Timber wall designs are also
readily available, but require subsurface drainage.
In lieu of a more rigorous analysis along with a soil study, the guidelines in Figure 6.1 can be used for dry stone retaining
wall design. Depending on the topography of the site, the slope of the walls may vary greatly. A maximum height of dry stone
wall is suggested to be no greater than three meters and should be used when hill slopes are no greater than 35° above
the wall. Sites with greater slope angles should not be considered, as stability issues are likely.
Wt
 TOP WIDTH, Wt 0.6 - 1.0 m
Table
BASE 6.1 Wb
WIDTH, – Retaining Wall0.5
Design
- 0.7 mParameters
Top Width, Wt 0.6 - 1.0 m
FRONT BATTER varies
Base Width, Wb (0.5 - 0.7)H
Front Batter
REAR BATTER varies varies
H
Rear Batter varies

FOUNDATIONFoundation
DEPTH Depth  0.5 m ≥ 0.5 m
α < 35°
  35°
H <3m
1 H  3m
3
Wb
Figure 6.1 – Retaining Wall Design Parameters
6.2 Wind Guys
Wind guys are required for any span exceeding 120 meters and at bridge sites with extreme wind conditions as deemed
necessary by the design engineer. The suspension bridges herein are designed to withstand a 160 kilometer per hour (100
miles per hour) wind load without any additional lateral support. Wind guys significantly increase the cost of the bridge as
two additional cables, considerable additional cable clamps and four additional anchorages are required.
The following additional information is required when wind guys are determined to be necessary:
• Additional topographic information is needed up and downstream from the bridge center axis, typically a distance
equal to 20% of the span
• Additional geotechnical site-investigation is also required for each anchor location.
A basic plan view of a wind guy system is shown in Figure 6.2. For design material on wind guy structures, see Helvetas
Trail Bridge Design Manual and other engineering references.
WIND GUY ANCHOR
WIND TIES (TYP)
WIND GUY CABLE
Figure 6.2 – Typical Wind Guy Layout
6.3 Drainage
Slope protection and drainage systems are required

at sites when excess run-off may influence the slope
stability. We recommended avoiding sites where MASONRY WALL
instability is prevalent. If unavoidable, it is necessary to
drain out the runoff and seepage to ensure the stability of
the slope and to avoid the scouring of these structures. MEDIUM GRAVEL
Water should be collected as closely as possible to its
origin and navigated away from the bridge structures.
This may require a surface catch drain on a slope, PERFORATED
drainage around the structure, or both. DRAIN PIPE
In the areas directly affected by seepage, sub-surface FABRIC

drainage may be required around the anchorage and/ BARRIER
or foundation areas. A recommended sub-surface drain
system is shown below. If excavation finds sitting water, Figure 6.3 – Example Section of Drainage System
subsurface drainage is a must.
Additional surface drainage channels assist in redirecting unwanted surface water. To avoid scouring to the drainage
channel, additional protection in the form of protection walls and or sheeting should be considered.
6.4 Bank Protection
bridge abutment placement should be well back from river channels thereby eliminating the need for the same. River bank
accounted for during planning stages of bridge construction.
Gabion walls are generally designed as gravity structures, which use their own weight to resist earth and water pressures.
Horizontal layers of wire mesh cages may be stepped either on the front or back side depending on the required application.
An engineer is required to design the structure and specify the fill material. The fill material must have both strength and
durability to resist the effects of water and weathering. Typically, 8-25 centimeter diameter stone is specified, and if well-
graded stone-fill is specified, the volume of stone required to fill the casing is nearly the volume of the empty containers.
The following section details material quantity take-offs. This section is intended for use only for B2P standard suspension bridges.
Additional materials may be required for modified structures.
7.1 Cable & Clamps
Select steel cable based on cable breaking strengths as outlined in Section 5: Suspension Bridge Design. Cables should
be chosen based on availability and efficiency of design. The length of each cable required can be found using the following
equation.
L cable = 1.04 $ ^ L + 14 + d left + d right h ((7.(
where:
Lcable = total length of each cable to cut, m
L = span length, m
dleft = distance from centerline of left tower saddle to back of left anchor, m
dright = distance from centerline of right tower saddle to back or right anchor, m
This is an empirical formula developed through experience Table 7.1 – Number of Clamps Required per Cable Size
in the field. Fourteen meters provides excess horizontal Cable Diameter Number of Clamps
length that is helpful while laying out cables (particularly
(in.) (mm)
with longer spans) and provides length to account for cable
sag and wrap-back around the anchors. The distance 3/4 19 4
between anchors and towers dleft and dright are per the 7/8 22 4
standard construction drawings. An additional 4% is used 1 25 5
as contingency. 1 1/8 29 6
1 1/4 32 7
The quantity of clamps per cable is dependent on the size
1 3/8 35 7
of the cable. Refer to the manufacture’s specifications to
choose the appropriate number of clamps. 1 1/2 38 8
7.2 Steel Reinforcement Bar
Rebar quantities are specified in the standard construction drawings with the exception of the bar needed for the suspenders.
When estimating the number of reinforcing bars required on a project, it is important to consider the available length of bars
in the region in which materials are being purchased.
7.3 Decking
Bridges to Prosperity’s standard designs use steel crossbeams, and wood nailers and decking. The quantity of crossbeams
and nailers will be one more than the nominal bridge span. The quantity of decking boards can be estimated based on the
nominal bridge span. The increased length of the deck due to sag does not need to be considered as it will be covered by
the contingency.
7.4 Concrete and Masonry
Concrete quantities for tier and tower construction are specified in the standard construction drawings. The concrete
required for the ramp cap is variable and must be calculated per the final design. Refer to the Chapter 3, Section 5: Concrete
and Masonry for concrete mixing ratios to determine the quantities of sand, gravel, and cement.
The amount of cement used in masonry construction can be highly variable as it depends on several factors including the
masonry techniques used, the size and shape of rocks available, and whether or not formwork is used. The size of the ramp
walls and cap will depend not only on the design of the bridge, but the topographical features of the sites. When calculating
the amount of cement to be used in masonry construction it is best to consult with the local builder that will be working on
the project.
A general estimate of the cement required for stone masonry wall construction in tiers and ramp walls can be made by
assuming (4) 42.5 kilogram bags per cubic meter of wall to be constructed. Additional cement will be required for slurry
within the tiers and ramps. An estimate of the amount of cement to be used for slurry can be estimated as 20% of the
cement to be used in the stone masonry wall construction. The amount of sand to be used in the mortar and slurry should
be calculated using the proportions specified in Chapter 3, Section 5: Concrete and Masonry.
7.5 Other Materials
Quantities for additional miscellaneous materials must be calculated. An example of this can be found in Table 7.2.
Table 7.2 – Other Material Quantities

Material Quantity
Sand Varies based on design
Gravel Varies based on design
Masonry block / bricks / stone Varies based on design
8mm cable Varies based on design
10mm wire rope clips Varies based on design
8mm wire rope clips 10
Grease 2 liters
Tie wire 10kg
Lag screw: 10mm x 7.5cm long 5-6 per deck panel + 4 per cross beam if using nailer
Lag screw: 10mm x 5cm long 6 per crossbeam
Fencing: 1.20m (4’) tall Bridge span x 2
Fence post: 5cm ø pipe, 150cm long 4
Anchor pipe (219 O.D. / 203 I.D). x 70cm 4
Galvanized tie wire 5kg
U-nails/Staples 1kg per 10 linear meters
Scaffolding Varies based on design and type available
7.6 Contingency
As with any material estimation, it is best practice to include a contingency to prevent a shortage of materials on site and
delaying construction. Bridges to Prosperity recommends a 10% contingency for all materials. A larger contingency should
be applied to steel reinforcing bar estimates if the length of available bar is not accounted for in the initial estimates.
The following is a design example for a suspension bridge using AutoCAD and the Bridges to Prosperity standard construction
drawings. The provided information in the technical survey shows a floodplain type terrain with soils at foundation locations on both
sides of the river.
Using the survey information, draw the ground profile in AutoCAD. Verify the soil slopes where footings and anchors may
be placed are suitable and expected span length is not greater than 84 meters.
4300cm
PT L
PT J PT K
PT A PT B BM 1 PT C
PT H
PT G
PT F
PT D PT E
Figure 8.1 – Groundline Profile
8.2 Determine Foundation Locations and Sizes
SETBACK
Sketch the setback requirements for soil conditions.
• 3.0 meters from the top of bank

• 35° from the bottom of bank or any point along bank
In Figure 8.2, the right footing is governed by the three meter setback and the left footing is governed by the 35° setback.
300cm 300cm
35°
Figure 8.2 – Survey profile with setback requirements shown
DIFFERENCE IN HEIGHT
Place foundations on both sides behind the setback requirement and select the pedestal heights based on the difference in
height (ΔH) limit of Span/50. With a one meter tall pedestal on the higher, right footing, a one and a half meter tall pedestal is
required on the left as shown in Figure 8.3. Note that footing is buried one half meter below ground and the width increases
as the pedestals get taller. Also remember to place the entire footing behind the setback requirement.
100cm
150cm
50
1
Figure 8.3 – Survey profile with pedestals selected to satisfy setback and ΔH
FREEBOARD
For the given profile, determined to be a floodplain because of the flat left side, a freeboard of two meters is required. Draw
a line between the tops of pedestals to check if freeboard is met. If not, use trial and error to increase the pedestal heights
in half meter increments or shift the footings further away from the river if the ground slope increases until the appropriate
freeboard is obtained. The fully loaded cable sag value shall be 9.09% of span length, or Span/11. During this process,
make sure that neither the ΔH requirement nor the maximum span length are violated. Figure 8.4 shows that the left
pedestal has been increased to two meters tall in order to satisfy the freeboard requirement.
200cm
100cm
44000cm
219cm
Figure 8.4 – Preliminary pedestals that satisfy 2 meter freeboard
LOCATE ANCHORS
Once the setback, difference in height, and freeboard requirements have been met, the span length can be finalized. For
this case, a span length of 44 meters will be used. From the design table in Chapter 2: Suspension Bridge Drawings, a 44
meter span uses towers that are 5.5 meters tall. The towers can now be added to the drawing making sure to account for
the additional height between the center of the hinge and the top of the pedestal. With the towers drawn, a backstay line
of action can be drawn from the top of the tower at a slope of 1V:2H (one vertical to two horizontal) away from the river.
The center of the anchor beam should be placed along this line such that the anchor block is also set into the ground by 10
centimeters. Once drawn, verify that the anchor beam has at least one and a half meters of soil cover. Figure 8.5 shows the
towers and anchors added to the drawing.
1
1 2
2
184cm
155cm
Figure 8.5 – Preliminary layout with towers selected and anchors located
8.3 Select Footing, Pedestal, Anchor, Tower, Walkway and Ramp Drawings
Using the design table in Chapter 2: Suspension Bridge Drawings along with the layout drawing, all of the standard drawings
for footings, pedestals, anchors, towers and walkway can be selected.
Drawings selected for this bridge design:

Left Footing F05 5.0m x 1.6m 42 – 63 METER SPAN
Right Footing F04 5.0m x 1.4m 42 – 63 METER SPAN
Left Pedestal P07 1.0m x 0.8m x 2.0m TALL 42-63 METER SPAN
Right Pedestal P05 1.0m x 0.8m x 1.0m TALL 42-63 METER SPAN
Anchors A07, A08 & A09 5.0 METER BEAM 42-47 METER SPAN
Towers T07, T08 & T09 5.5 METER STEEL TOWER 42-47 METER SPAN
Walkway W01, W02 WALKWAY DETAILS
Left Ramp W05 2.0 METER PEDESTAL

Right Ramp W03 1.0 METER PEDESTAL
To select the size and quantity of cables, first determine the load demand on the cables. Using the design table in Chapter 2,
find the maximum cable force listed for the span length chosen. For a 44 meter span, the maximum cable tension is 975 kN.
For this project, 26 millimeter (1”) diameter and 32 millimeter (1 ¼”) diameter cables are available with breaking strengths
of 386 kN and 585 kN, respectively. The required cable safety factor is 3.0.
 Cable Selection
Currently available cable: Diameter Breaking Strength

26mm 386 kN
32mm 585 kN
Determine the number of cables required for each cable diameter:
Pr * FS
Number of Cables Required, C r =
BreakingStrength
325*3.0
=1" = 2.53
386.0
325*3.0
=
1 1/4" = 1.67
585.0
 Cable Safety Factor

# Cables Size Strength Capacity
Main Cables = 2 32mm 585 kN 1170 kN ( 263,026 lb )
Maximum Cable Capacity, P n = 1170 kN ( 263,026 lb )
Pn (Maximum Cable Capacity) 1170

Factor of Safety
= = = 3.60
Pr (Maximum Cable Tension) 325
= 3.60 > 3.00 OKAY
Either four 26 millimeter diameter cables or two 32 millimeter diameter cables satisfy the safety factor. Select the 32
millimeter diameter cable size since fewer are required.
Next, determine the quantity and spacing of cable clamps from Table 5.1. For 32 millimeter diameter cables, seven clamps
are required with 15 millimeter spacing.
A complete set of bridge drawings should include a Layout sheet with Plan and Elevation views along with the previously
selected Footing, Pedestal, Anchor, Tower, Walkway and Ramp drawings.
1843cm 4400cm 1599cm
550cm TOWER (TYP)
184cm
(2) 26mmØ CABLES EACH SIDE
155cm
100cm
200cm
PT J
BM 1
197cm 200cm FREEBOARD RIGHT FOOTING
LEFT FOOTING 300cm
ELEV. 99.70m ENVELOPE ELEV. 100.70m
LEFT ANCHOR RIGHT ANCHOR
ELEV. 98.40m ELEV. 99.60m
NOTES:
2. DESIGN SAG = 4.00m (9.09%)
Figure 8.6 – Elevation view of final suspension bridge layout
Chapter 2
Construction Drawings
Introduction
Please note: Standard drawings are not included in the public version of this text in order to make it necessary for bridge builders
to reach out to Bridges to Prosperity, or other qualified partners, for training and additional support prior to beginning a bridge
project. Bridges to Prosperity is eager to provide technical assistance and training to help ensure the successful and safe
completion of bridge projects throughout the world. For more information, please send an email to info@bridgestoprosperity.org.
SPAN LIVE LOAD DEAD HOISTING DECK H PIPE SIZE CABLE TENSION DRAWING SET - REQUIRED SHEETS SPAN
LENGTH SAG LOAD SAG SAG CAMBER (TOWER) (O.D./I.D.) (ALL CABLES) TITLE LAYOUT FOOTING PEDESTAL ANCHOR TOWER WALKWAY RAMP LENGTH
(m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (mm) (kN) (lbs) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (m)
30 2.73 2.40 2.25 1.25 4.50 168 / 154 233 52380 30
31 2.82 2.48 2.33 1.17 4.50 168 / 154 241 54126 31
32 2.91 2.56 2.40 1.09 4.50 168 / 154 249 55872 32
33 3.00 2.64 2.48 1.01 4.50 168 / 154 256 57618 33
34 3.09 2.72 2.55 0.93 4.50 168 / 154 264 59364 34
T01, T02 & T03
A01, A02 & A03

35 3.18 2.80 2.63 0.85 4.50 168 / 154 272 61110 35
36 3.27 2.88 2.70 0.77 4.50 168 / 154 280 62856 36
F01, F02, or F03

37 3.36 2.96 2.78 1.19 5.00 168 / 154 287 64602 37
P01, P02, P03, or P04

38 3.45 3.04 2.85 1.11 5.00 168 / 154 293 65886 38
39 3.55 3.12 2.93 1.03 5.00 168 / 154 298 67095 39
40 3.64 3.20 3.00 0.95 5.00 168 / 154 304 68297 40
T04, T05 & T06
A04, A05 & A06
41 3.73 3.28 3.08 0.87 5.00 168 / 154 309 69493 41

42 3.82 3.36 3.15 1.29 5.50 168 / 154 314 70683 42
43 3.91 3.44 3.23 1.21 5.50 168 / 154 320 71867 43
44 4.00 3.52 3.30 1.13 5.50 168 / 154 325 73045 44
W01 & W02
45 4.09 3.60 3.38 1.05 5.50 168 / 154 330 74218 45

T07, T08 & T09
A07, A08 & A09
46 4.18 3.68 3.45 0.97 5.50 168 / 154 335 75385

R01, R02, R03, or R04
46
47 4.27 3.76 3.53 0.89 5.50 168 / 154 341 76548 47
48 4.36 3.84 3.60 1.31 6.00 168 / 154 346 77705 48
49 4.45 3.92 3.68 1.23 6.00 168 / 154 351 78857 49
DRAW A SITE-SPECIFIC LAYOUT FOR EACH PROJECT
50 4.55 4.00 3.75 1.15 6.00 168 / 154 356 80005 50

51 4.64 4.08 3.83 1.07 6.00 168 / 154 361 81148 51
T10, T11 & T12
A10, A11 & A12
F04, F05, or F06

P05, P06, P07, or P08
52 4.73 4.16 3.90 0.99 6.00 168 / 154 366 82287 52

LIST ALL OF THE BRIDGE AND DESIGN INFORMATION AND GENERAL NOTES
53 4.82 4.24 3.98 1.41 6.50 168 / 154 371 83422 53

54 4.91 4.32 4.05 1.33 6.50 168 / 154 376 84552 54
55 5.00 4.40 4.13 1.25 6.50 168 / 154 381 85678 55
56 5.09 4.48 4.20 1.17 6.50 168 / 154 386 86801 56
T13, T14 & T15
A13, A14 & A15
57 5.18 4.56 4.28 1.09 6.50 168 / 154 391 87919 57

58 5.27 4.64 4.35 1.01 6.50 168 / 154 396 89034 58
SPAN LIVE LOAD DEAD HOISTING DECK H PIPE SIZE CABLE TENSION DRAWING SET - REQUIRED SHEETS SPAN
LENGTH SAG LOAD SAG SAG CAMBER (TOWER) (O.D./I.D.) (ALL CABLES) TITLE LAYOUT FOOTING PEDESTAL ANCHOR TOWER WALKWAY RAMP LENGTH
(m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (m) (mm) (kN) (lbs) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (m)
59 5.36 4.72 4.43 1.43 7.00 219 / 203 401 90145 59
60 5.45 4.80 4.50 1.35 7.00 219 / 203 406 91252 60
61 5.55 4.88 4.58 1.27 7.00 219 / 203 411 92357 61
62 5.64 4.96 4.65 1.19 7.00 219 / 203 416 93457 62
T16, T17 & T18
A16, A17 & A18
F04, F05, or F06

P05, P06, P07, or P08
63 5.73 5.04 4.73 1.11 7.00 219 / 203 421 94555 63
64 5.82 5.12 4.80 1.53 7.50 219 / 203 425 95649 64
65 5.91 5.20 4.88 1.45 7.50 219 / 203 430 96740 65
66 6.00 5.28 4.95 1.37 7.50 219 / 203 435 97828 66
67 6.09 5.36 5.03 1.29 7.50 219 / 203 440 98913 67
T19, T20 & T21
A19, A20 & A21

68 6.18 5.44 5.10 1.21 7.50 219 / 203 445 99995 68
69 6.27 5.52 5.18 1.13 7.50 219 / 203 450 101074 69
70 6.36 5.60 5.25 1.55 8.00 219 / 203 454 102151 70
71 6.45 5.68 5.33 1.47 8.00 219 / 203 459 103225 71
72 6.55 5.76 5.40 1.39 8.00 219 / 203 464 104296 72
W01 & W02
73 6.64 5.84 5.48 1.31 8.00 219 / 203 469 105364 73

T22, T23 & T24
A22, A23 & A24

R01, R02, R03, or R04
74 6.73 5.92 5.55 1.23 8.00 219 / 203 473 106430 74

75 6.82 6.00 5.63 1.65 8.50 219 / 203 478 107493 75
F07, F08, or F09
P09, P10, P11, or P12
76 6.91 6.08 5.70 1.57 8.50 219 / 203 483 108554 76

77 7.00 6.16 5.78 1.49 8.50 219 / 203 488 109643 77
DRAW A SITE-SPECIFIC LAYOUT FOR EACH PROJECT
78 7.09 6.24 5.85 1.41 8.50 219 / 203 494 111067 78

T25, T26 & T27
A25, A26 & A27
79 7.18 6.32 5.93 1.33 8.50 219 / 203 500 112491 79

LIST ALL OF THE BRIDGE AND DESIGN INFORMATION AND GENERAL NOTES
80 7.27 6.40 6.00 1.25 8.50 219 / 203 507 113915 80

81 7.36 6.48 6.08 1.67 9.00 219 / 203 513 115339 81
82 7.45 6.56 6.15 1.59 9.00 219 / 203 519 116763 82
83 7.55 6.64 6.23 1.51 9.00 219 / 203 526 118186 83
T28, T29 & T30
A28, A29 & A30
84 7.64 6.72 6.30 1.43 9.00 219 / 203 532 119610 84

SPAN SUSPENDER - DIMENSION "H" (mm) NOTE: THIS IS THE OVERALL HEIGHT AFTER BENDING. ADD LEG LENGTHS FOR CUTTING. SPAN
LENGTH DISTANCE FROM TOWER CENTERLINE (m) LENGTH
(m) +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 +14 +15 +16 +17 +18 +19 +20 +21 +22 +23 +24 +25 +26 +27 +28 +29 +30 +31 +32 +33 +34 +35 +36 +37 +38 +39 +40 +41 +42 (m)
30 4471 4028 3617 3239 2896 2584 2304 2059 1845 1666 1517 1403 1322 1272 1256 30
31 4488 4056 3656 3287 2949 2641 2365 2120 1905 1720 1567 1444 1352 1290 1260 31
32 4501 4082 3693 3331 2999 2697 2423 2178 1962 1775 1616 1486 1385 1314 1270 1256 32
33 4514 4107 3727 3375 3048 2750 2480 2235 2018 1828 1666 1531 1423 1340 1286 1259 33
34 4526 4130 3759 3415 3095 2801 2533 2290 2073 1883 1715 1575 1461 1371 1308 1268 1256 34
35 4538 4152 3790 3452 3140 2849 2585 2344 2127 1934 1766 1620 1500 1403 1332 1283 1259 35
36 4550 4174 3821 3490 3182 2897 2634 2395 2179 1985 1814 1666 1541 1439 1359 1301 1268 1256 36
37 5003 4586 4195 3827 3484 3166 2872 2603 2358 2138 1942 1771 1625 1502 1404 1331 1281 1257 37
38 5014 4609 4225 3865 3529 3214 2924 2658 2414 2193 1997 1822 1671 1544 1439 1358 1300 1265 1254 38
39 5026 4629 4254 3900 3571 3262 2976 2711 2469 2248 2050 1874 1720 1588 1477 1389 1323 1278 1257 39
40 5036 4648 4281 3936 3610 3307 3024 2762 2521 2302 2102 1924 1768 1632 1516 1422 1349 1295 1265 1254 40
41 5046 4666 4307 3968 3650 3350 3071 2812 2573 2353 2154 1974 1815 1675 1556 1456 1376 1317 1276 1257 41
42 5535 5118 4722 4348 3995 3663 3353 3065 2798 2553 2328 2125 1943 1783 1644 1527 1431 1356 1302 1270 1260 42
43 5545 5138 4749 4382 4035 3708 3402 3117 2852 2608 2384 2179 1996 1833 1691 1568 1466 1384 1323 1282 1263 43
44 5555 5156 4775 4415 4073 3752 3451 3169 2905 2662 2438 2234 2048 1883 1737 1610 1502 1415 1347 1299 1269 1260 44
45 5563 5173 4800 4447 4111 3795 3496 3217 2956 2713 2491 2285 2100 1932 1784 1653 1541 1448 1373 1318 1281 1263 45
46 5574 5189 4824 4476 4147 3835 3540 3265 3006 2766 2542 2338 2151 1981 1830 1696 1580 1482 1402 1340 1295 1269 1260 46
47 5582 5205 4847 4505 4181 3874 3584 3310 3054 2816 2593 2389 2201 2030 1877 1740 1620 1518 1433 1364 1313 1279 1262 47
48 6044 5636 5247 4876 4523 4188 3871 3573 3292 3030 2785 2559 2352 2161 1990 1836 1701 1584 1484 1403 1339 1294 1266 1257 48
49 6052 5652 5270 4905 4558 4228 3916 3621 3343 3081 2839 2613 2405 2215 2040 1885 1745 1624 1520 1433 1364 1312 1277 1260 49
50 6060 5668 5293 4934 4592 4267 3958 3666 3391 3133 2892 2665 2457 2266 2091 1933 1791 1666 1557 1465 1391 1333 1291 1265 1257 50
51 6068 5683 5314 4962 4625 4304 3999 3712 3439 3182 2941 2718 2509 2317 2141 1981 1836 1708 1596 1500 1420 1355 1307 1276 1259 51
52 6076 5697 5335 4988 4657 4340 4040 3754 3484 3231 2992 2768 2560 2367 2191 2028 1882 1750 1635 1534 1450 1381 1326 1288 1265 1257 52
53 6541 6134 5744 5370 5013 4671 4346 4037 3744 3467 3207 2964 2736 2525 2331 2151 1989 1843 1713 1599 1501 1420 1356 1306 1274 1258 53
54 6549 6149 5765 5397 5045 4708 4387 4082 3792 3517 3260 3017 2790 2579 2382 2203 2037 1890 1756 1639 1537 1451 1381 1325 1287 1264 1256 54
55 6556 6163 5786 5424 5076 4744 4427 4125 3839 3566 3310 3069 2842 2630 2435 2253 2087 1936 1800 1680 1574 1485 1409 1348 1303 1273 1257 55
56 6564 6177 5805 5449 5106 4780 4466 4167 3883 3615 3359 3118 2894 2683 2486 2304 2136 1984 1845 1722 1613 1518 1437 1373 1320 1284 1264 1256 56
57 6571 6192 5825 5475 5137 4813 4503 4209 3927 3660 3407 3169 2943 2732 2537 2354 2186 2030 1890 1763 1651 1553 1468 1399 1341 1299 1271 1257 57
58 6577 6204 5845 5498 5165 4846 4541 4248 3971 3705 3454 3217 2993 2783 2586 2402 2233 2077 1933 1805 1689 1587 1500 1425 1365 1317 1283 1262 1256 58
59 7093 6690 6302 5929 5569 5224 4892 4576 4275 3987 3713 3455 3211 2981 2765 2564 2378 2204 2046 1902 1774 1658 1558 1472 1400 1342 1299 1270 1255 59
60 7099 6704 6321 5953 5598 5257 4930 4618 4319 4034 3763 3506 3262 3033 2818 2616 2428 2255 2094 1948 1817 1699 1594 1504 1429 1366 1317 1282 1261 1254 60
61 7108 6717 6340 5977 5627 5291 4968 4658 4362 4079 3810 3555 3312 3084 2870 2668 2479 2304 2144 1996 1862 1740 1633 1537 1458 1390 1337 1297 1269 1255 61
62 7114 6729 6358 5999 5655 5322 5003 4698 4405 4124 3858 3604 3363 3135 2921 2719 2531 2354 2191 2042 1905 1781 1670 1573 1488 1417 1358 1314 1280 1260 1254 62
63 7119 6741 6375 6022 5682 5354 5038 4735 4446 4169 3904 3651 3412 3185 2971 2768 2580 2403 2240 2087 1949 1823 1710 1609 1521 1445 1382 1332 1294 1268 1255 63
64 7622 7218 6827 6450 6085 5734 5396 5071 4760 4463 4178 3906 3647 3403 3171 2953 2748 2556 2377 2212 2060 1920 1794 1682 1582 1497 1424 1364 1318 1286 1265 1258 64
65 7628 7230 6845 6472 6112 5766 5432 5112 4803 4507 4226 3956 3699 3454 3223 3006 2801 2607 2428 2261 2107 1966 1837 1722 1619 1529 1452 1389 1337 1298 1272 1259 65
66 7635 7242 6862 6494 6140 5797 5467 5149 4844 4552 4272 4003 3748 3505 3274 3057 2852 2658 2478 2310 2155 2012 1881 1763 1656 1563 1482 1414 1357 1315 1284 1264 1258 66
67 7640 7253 6879 6516 6166 5827 5501 5187 4884 4594 4317 4051 3798 3555 3326 3108 2903 2710 2528 2359 2202 2058 1924 1803 1695 1599 1514 1441 1381 1332 1296 1272 1259 67
68 7647 7265 6896 6538 6191 5857 5534 5224 4924 4637 4361 4097 3845 3604 3376 3158 2954 2759 2578 2407 2249 2103 1968 1845 1733 1634 1545 1469 1405 1352 1312 1282 1264 1258 68
69 7653 7277 6911 6558 6215 5885 5566 5259 4962 4678 4404 4143 3892 3651 3424 3208 3003 2810 2627 2456 2296 2149 2012 1887 1773 1670 1579 1499 1431 1373 1328 1294 1270 1259 69
70 8124 7726 7339 6966 6603 6252 5914 5587 5271 4969 4678 4399 4132 3875 3632 3401 3181 2973 2777 2592 2421 2260 2112 1975 1851 1737 1636 1547 1470 1405 1352 1310 1281 1262 1257 70
71 8130 7737 7356 6986 6628 6282 5946 5623 5312 5012 4723 4444 4180 3925 3683 3452 3233 3024 2828 2644 2471 2309 2159 2020 1894 1778 1675 1582 1501 1431 1374 1327 1293 1270 1258 71
72 8135 7747 7372 7007 6653 6310 5979 5659 5350 5052 4766 4491 4226 3974 3732 3502 3283 3076 2879 2693 2520 2357 2206 2065 1936 1818 1711 1616 1532 1459 1397 1347 1307 1279 1262 1257 72
73 8141 7759 7387 7027 6676 6338 6010 5693 5387 5093 4809 4535 4273 4023 3781 3552 3334 3126 2929 2744 2568 2404 2252 2110 1979 1858 1749 1651 1564 1488 1422 1367 1324 1291 1269 1258 73
74 8146 7768 7402 7046 6701 6365 6041 5727 5425 5132 4849 4579 4318 4069 3830 3601 3383 3176 2979 2792 2617 2453 2298 2155 2022 1900 1788 1688 1597 1517 1449 1390 1342 1304 1278 1262 1257 74
75 8621 8222 7835 7459 7094 6740 6398 6065 5746 5435 5137 4849 4573 4308 4054 3810 3578 3357 3147 2948 2760 2583 2417 2263 2119 1987 1866 1755 1654 1567 1489 1423 1367 1323 1290 1268 1256 75
76 8626 8233 7850 7479 7118 6768 6428 6100 5783 5476 5180 4895 4619 4356 4103 3861 3629 3408 3199 3000 2810 2634 2467 2310 2165 2031 1907 1794 1692 1599 1519 1449 1390 1341 1304 1278 1260 1255 76
77 8632 8244 7865 7498 7140 6795 6459 6134 5819 5515 5221 4938 4666 4404 4152 3910 3680 3460 3250 3050 2862 2682 2516 2358 2210 2074 1948 1834 1728 1635 1550 1476 1414 1362 1320 1288 1268 1256 77
78 8637 8253 7880 7517 7165 6822 6489 6167 5855 5554 5262 4981 4710 4449 4199 3959 3728 3509 3299 3100 2911 2732 2564 2405 2257 2119 1992 1874 1767 1669 1583 1506 1440 1384 1337 1301 1276 1260 1255 78
79 8641 8262 7894 7535 7186 6848 6518 6200 5890 5592 5302 5024 4754 4495 4246 4006 3777 3558 3349 3149 2961 2781 2612 2452 2303 2163 2034 1915 1804 1705 1615 1536 1466 1406 1356 1317 1287 1267 1256 79
80 8646 8272 7907 7553 7208 6872 6546 6231 5924 5629 5341 5064 4797 4540 4292 4054 3825 3607 3398 3199 3009 2830 2659 2500 2349 2207 2076 1955 1843 1741 1649 1566 1493 1430 1376 1333 1299 1276 1260 1255 80
81 9122 8729 8345 7973 7609 7256 6913 6580 6258 5944 5642 5350 5068 4795 4533 4281 4039 3807 3585 3373 3172 2980 2798 2627 2465 2314 2173 2042 1921 1810 1710 1618 1537 1468 1406 1357 1316 1286 1266 1255 81
82 9127 8738 8359 7990 7631 7281 6943 6612 6292 5983 5681 5391 5111 4841 4580 4328 4089 3857 3635 3424 3222 3030 2848 2676 2514 2362 2219 2086 1963 1849 1746 1652 1569 1496 1432 1377 1333 1298 1274 1259 1254 82
83 9132 8748 8373 8008 7652 7307 6970 6645 6327 6020 5722 5434 5154 4885 4627 4377 4137 3906 3686 3474 3272 3081 2898 2725 2561 2408 2264 2129 2004 1889 1783 1688 1601 1524 1458 1399 1352 1313 1285 1265 1255 83
84 9137 8757 8387 8025 7673 7332 6998 6674 6360 6056 5760 5474 5198 4931 4672 4424 4184 3955 3734 3523 3323 3129 2946 2773 2608 2454 2309 2173 2047 1929 1822 1723 1634 1555 1484 1424 1371 1330 1297 1274 1259 1254 84
BILL OF MATERIALS
REINFORCING BARS (PER TOWER)
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
5 EQ. SPA. ℄ BRIDGE F01 16 (#5) 385 16 61.6
F04 (TYP)
(TYP)
F02 16 (#5) 105 26 27.3
F03 16 (#5) 146 36 52.6
F04 13 (#4) 284 4 11.4
ITEM QUANTITY
℄ TOWER
CONCRETE 2.40m3
(TYP)
4 EQ. SPA.
(TOP & BOTTOM)

8 - F01 SPA. @ 15cm
F03 (TYP)
20cm
13 - F02 SPA. @ 30cm (TOP & BOTTOM) 20cm
25cm
(TYP)
(TYP)
7.5cm
65cm
20cm
125cm 65cm
PLAN F03 F04

-
℄ BRIDGE A
& SYMMETRY
℄ TOWER LEG 250cm ℄ TOWER LEG ℄ TOWER
29cm 125cm 58cm
58cm 29cm
PEDESTAL
(TYP)
GL GL
(TYP)
F03 F03 F03
50cm
F01
PROJECT 85cm
F04 F04 F02 F04
50cm
F02 (TOP & BOTTOM) F01 (TOP & BOT.)
CLR.
200cm 60cm
7.5cm
400cm 120cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
NOTES:
1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES
COPYRIGHT: MATERIAL FROM THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE FREELY QUOTED, TRANSLATED OR OTHERWISE USED. ANY
Produced by: MODIFICATIONS MUST BE APPROVED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY'S DESIGN TEAM. FOOTING DETAILS
Bridges to Prosperity DISCLAIMER: THE CALCULATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS IN THE PLAN ARE NOT ATTRIBUTABLE TO BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY AND
4.0m x 1.2m
1031 33rd Street, Suite 170 ANYONE USING THIS PLAN SHOULD VERIFY THE CALCULATIONS ACCORDING TO SITE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS AND LOCAL 30 - 41 METER SPAN
STANDARDS. ALL USING THE MANUAL AGREE TO HOLD BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY HARMLESS TO ANY AND ALL LIABILITY.
Denver, CO 80205 DRAWING NUMBER
EDITED AND PUBLISHED BY: BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY, INC., 2016
Revision : September 2016 F01
BILL OF MATERIALS
5 EQ. SPA. ℄ BRIDGE BAR SIZE LENGTH LENGTH
F04 (TYP) NAME QUANTITY
(TYP) (mm) (cm) (m)
F01 16 (#5) 385 20 77.0
F02 16 (#5) 145 26 37.7
F03 16 (#5) 146 36 52.6
F04 13 (#4) 284 4 11.4
ITEM QUANTITY
℄ TOWER
CONCRETE 3.20m3
(TYP)
4 EQ. SPA.
(TOP & BOTTOM)

10 - F01 SPA. @ 15cm
F03 (TYP)
20cm
25cm
(TYP)
65cm
(TYP)
12.5cm
20cm
125cm 65cm
PLAN F03 F04

-
℄ BRIDGE A
& SYMMETRY
29cm 125cm 58cm
58cm 29cm
PEDESTAL
(TYP)
GL GL
(TYP)
F03 F03 F03
50cm
F01
PROJECT 85cm
F04 F04 F02 F04
50cm
CLR.
200cm 80cm
7.5cm
400cm 160cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
NOTES:
4.0m x 1.6m
BILL OF MATERIALS
5 EQ. SPA. ℄ BRIDGE REINFORCING BARS (PER TOWER)
F04 (TYP)
(TYP) BAR SIZE LENGTH LENGTH
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
F01 16 (#5) 385 26 100.1
F02 16 (#5) 185 26 48.1
F03 16 (#5) 146 36 52.6
F04 13 (#4) 284 4 11.4
ITEM QUANTITY
℄ TOWER
CONCRETE 4.00m3
(TYP)
4 EQ. SPA.
(TOP & BOTTOM)

13 - F01 SPA. @ 15cm
F03 (TYP)
20cm
25cm
65cm

(TYP)
20cm
125cm
10cm
(TYP)
65cm
PLAN F03 F04

-
℄ BRIDGE A
& SYMMETRY
29cm 125cm 58cm
58cm 29cm
PEDESTAL
(TYP)
GL GL
(TYP)
F03 F03 F03
50cm
F01
PROJECT 85cm
F04 F04 F02 F04
50cm
CLR.
200cm 100cm
7.5cm
400cm 200cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
NOTES:
4.0m x 2.0m
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
6 EQ. SPA. ℄ BRIDGE (mm) (cm) (m)
F04 (TYP)
(TYP) F01 16 (#5) 485 18 87.3
F02 16 (#5) 125 34 42.5
F03 16 (#5) 146 40 58.4
F04 13 (#4) 324 4 13.0
ITEM QUANTITY
℄ TOWER
CONCRETE 3.50m3
(TYP)
4 EQ. SPA.
(TOP & BOTTOM)

9 - F01 SPA. @ 15cm
F03 (TYP)
20cm
25cm
(TYP)
10cm
(TYP)
65cm
20cm
125cm 85cm
PLAN F03 F04

-
℄ BRIDGE A
& SYMMETRY
39cm 150cm 58cm
78cm 78cm 29cm
PEDESTAL
(TYP)
GL GL
(TYP)
F03 F03 F03
50cm
F01
PROJECT 85cm
F04 F04 F02 F04
50cm
CLR.
250cm 70cm
7.5cm
500cm 140cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
NOTES:
5.0m x 1.4m
BILL OF MATERIALS
(TYP) (mm) (cm) (m)
F01 16 (#5) 485 20 97.0
F02 16 (#5) 145 34 49.3
F03 16 (#5) 146 40 58.4
F04 13 (#4) 324 4 13.0
ITEM QUANTITY
℄ TOWER
CONCRETE 4.00m3
(TYP)
4 EQ. SPA.
(TOP & BOTTOM)

10 - F01 SPA. @ 15cm
F03 (TYP)
20cm
25cm
(TYP)
65cm
(TYP)
12.5cm
20cm
125cm 85cm
PLAN F03 F04

-
℄ BRIDGE A
& SYMMETRY
39cm 150cm 58cm
78cm 29cm
PEDESTAL
(TYP)
GL GL
(TYP)
F03 F03 F03
50cm
F01
PROJECT 85cm
F04 F04 F02 F04
50cm
CLR.
250cm 80cm
7.5cm
500cm 160cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
NOTES:
5.0m x 1.6m
BILL OF MATERIALS
F04 (TYP)
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
F01 16 (#5) 485 26 126.1
F02 16 (#5) 185 34 62.9
F03 16 (#5) 146 40 58.4
F04 13 (#4) 324 4 13.0
ITEM QUANTITY
℄ TOWER
CONCRETE 5.00m3
(TYP)
4 EQ. SPA.
(TOP & BOTTOM)

13 - F01 SPA. @ 15cm
F03 (TYP)
20cm
25cm
65cm

(TYP)
20cm
125cm
10cm
(TYP)
85cm
PLAN F03 F04

-
℄ BRIDGE A
& SYMMETRY
39cm 150cm 58cm
78cm 29cm
PEDESTAL
(TYP)
GL GL
(TYP)
F03 F03 F03
50cm
F01
PROJECT 85cm
F04 F04 F02 F04
50cm
CLR.
250cm 100cm
7.5cm
500cm 200cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
NOTES:
5.0m x 2.0m
BILL OF MATERIALS
(TYP) (mm) (cm) (m)
F01 16 (#5) 535 20 107.0
F02 16 (#5) 145 36 52.2
F03 16 (#5) 146 52 75.9
F04 13 (#4) 404 4 16.2
ITEM QUANTITY
℄ TOWER
CONCRETE 4.40m3
(TYP)
6 EQ. SPA.
(TOP & BOTTOM)

10 - F01 SPA. @ 15cm
F03 (TYP) 20cm
25cm
(TYP)
85cm
(TYP)
12.5cm
20cm
125cm
105cm
PLAN F03 F04

-
℄ BRIDGE A
& SYMMETRY
49cm 175cm 78cm
98cm 39cm
PEDESTAL
(TYP)
GL GL
(TYP)
F03 F03 F03
50cm
F01
PROJECT 85cm
F04 F04 F02 F04
50cm
CLR.
275cm 80cm
7.5cm
550cm 160cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
NOTES:
5.5m x 1.6m
BILL OF MATERIALS
F04 (TYP)
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
F01 16 (#5) 535 26 139.1
F02 16 (#5) 185 36 66.6
F03 16 (#5) 146 52 75.9
F04 13 (#4) 404 4 16.2
ITEM QUANTITY
℄ TOWER
CONCRETE 5.50m3
(TYP)
6 EQ. SPA.
(TOP & BOTTOM)

13 - F01 SPA. @ 15cm
F03 (TYP) 20cm
25cm
85cm

20cm
(TYP) 125cm
10cm
(TYP)
105cm
PLAN F03 F04

-
℄ BRIDGE A
& SYMMETRY
49cm 175cm 78cm
98cm 39cm
PEDESTAL
(TYP)
GL GL
(TYP)
F03 F03 F03
50cm
F01
PROJECT 85cm
F04 F04 F02 F04
50cm
CLR.
275cm 100cm
7.5cm
550cm 200cm
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
NOTES:
5.5m x 2.0m
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
P01 16 (#5) 95 36 34.2
P02 13 (#4) 284 8 22.7
P03 13 (#4) 86 16 13.8
ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 1.28m3
-
A ℄ BRIDGE
℄ PEDESTAL & SYM. ℄ PEDESTAL
P03 (TYP) TOWER BASE
35cm
P03 (TYP) SLOPE TO DRAIN
(STAGE 2)
P02
20cm
-
CONSTRUCTION
3 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

C JOINT
P01 P01
MASONRY
P02
MASONRY
100cm
FORMWORK 20cm
- FORMWORK
65cm
B
(STAGE 1)
F03 FROM FOOTING F03 FROM FOOTING
65cm
20cm
10cm
125cm 65cm
FOOTING FOOTING
-
ELEVATION SECTION A P02
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
80cm ℄ PEDESTAL
40cm P01 62cm
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
℄ TOWER P03 (SPA. AS SHOWN)
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
80cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE
40cm
P01
P03 (SPA. AS SHOWN) P02
(LAP W/ F03)
NOTES:
- - 1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR
SECTION B SECTION C CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES.
Produced by: MODIFICATIONS MUST BE APPROVED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY'S DESIGN TEAM. PEDESTAL DETAILS
0.8m x 0.8m x 1.0m TALL
Revision : September 2016 P01
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
P01 16 (#5) 145 36 52.2
P02 13 (#4) 284 10 28.4
- P03 13 (#4) 86 16 13.8
A ℄ BRIDGE
℄ PEDESTAL & SYM. ℄ PEDESTAL ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 1.92m3
35cm
P03 (TYP) SLOPE TO DRAIN
(STAGE 2)
MASONRY
FORMWORK
-
CONSTRUCTION
C JOINT
P01 P01 MASONRY

FORMWORK
150cm
P02
115cm
(STAGE 1)
20cm
5 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

-
B

65cm
20cm
10cm
125cm 65cm
FOOTING FOOTING
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
80cm ℄ PEDESTAL
40cm P01 62cm
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
80cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE
40cm
P01
(LAP W/ F03)
NOTES:
0.8m x 0.8m x 1.5m TALL
BILL OF MATERIALS
- NAME QUANTITY
A (mm) (cm) (m)
℄ BRIDGE
℄ PEDESTAL & SYM. ℄ PEDESTAL P01 16 (#5) 195 36 70.2
P03 (TYP) TOWER BASE P02 13 (#4) 284 14 39.8
35cm
P03 (TYP) SLOPE TO DRAIN 13 (#4)
(STAGE 2)
P03 86 16 13.8
- ITEM QUANTITY
CONSTRUCTION
C JOINT CONCRETE 2.56m3
MASONRY MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P02
200cm
P01 P01
165cm
(STAGE 1)
7 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

20cm
-
B

65cm
20cm
10cm
125cm 65cm
FOOTING FOOTING
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
80cm ℄ PEDESTAL
40cm P01 62cm
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
80cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE
40cm
P01
(LAP W/ F03)
NOTES:
0.8m x 0.8m x 2.0m TALL
- BILL OF MATERIALS
A ℄ BRIDGE
℄ PEDESTAL & SYM. TOWER BASE ℄ PEDESTAL REINFORCING BARS (PER TOWER)
P03 (TYP)
35cm
P03 (TYP) SLOPE TO DRAIN BAR SIZE LENGTH LENGTH
QUANTITY
(STAGE 2)
P02 NAME (mm) (cm) (m)
20cm
P01 16 (#5) 245 36 88.2
-
CONSTRUCTION 13 (#4)
C P02 284 18 51.1
JOINT
P03 13 (#4) 86 16 13.8
MASONRY MASONRY ITEM QUANTITY

FORMWORK FORMWORK
CONCRETE 3.20m3
P02
P01 P01
250cm
215cm
(STAGE 1)
8 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

20cm
-
B

65cm
20cm
10cm
125cm 65cm
FOOTING FOOTING
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
80cm ℄ PEDESTAL
40cm P01 62cm
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
80cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE
40cm
P01
(LAP W/ F03)
NOTES:
0.8m x 0.8m x 2.5m TALL
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
P01 16 (#5) 95 40 38.0
P02 13 (#4) 324 8 25.9
P03 13 (#4) 106 8 8.5
P04 13 (#4) 86 8 6.9
ITEM QUANTITY
- CONCRETE 1.60m3
A ℄ BRIDGE
P03
35cm
P02 P03 (TYP) P04 SLOPE TO DRAIN
(STAGE 2)
20cm
-
CONSTRUCTION
3 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

C JOINT
P01 P01
P02
MASONRY MASONRY
100cm
20cm
FORMWORK - FORMWORK
65cm
B
(STAGE 1)
65cm
20cm
10cm
150cm 85cm
FOOTING FOOTING
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
100cm ℄ PEDESTAL
50cm P01 82cm
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
15cm
(TYP)
P04 (SPA. AS SHOWN)

℄ TOWER
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
80cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE 62cm
40cm
P04
P01
(LAP W/ F03)
NOTES:
1.0m x 0.8m x 1.0m TALL
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
P01 16 (#5) 145 40 58.0
P02 13 (#4) 324 10 32.4
- P03 13 (#4) 106 8 8.5
A ℄ BRIDGE P04 13 (#4) 86 8 6.9
P03 ITEM QUANTITY
35cm
P03 (TYP) P04 SLOPE TO DRAIN
(STAGE 2)
MASONRY CONCRETE 2.40m3
FORMWORK
-
CONSTRUCTION
C JOINT
P01 P01 MASONRY

FORMWORK
150cm
P02
115cm
(STAGE 1)
20cm
5 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

-
B

65cm
20cm
10cm
150cm 85cm
FOOTING FOOTING
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
100cm ℄ PEDESTAL
50cm P01 82cm
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
15cm
(TYP)
P04 (SPA. AS SHOWN)

℄ TOWER
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
80cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE 62cm
40cm
P04
P01
(LAP W/ F03)
NOTES:
1.0m x 0.8m x 1.5m TALL
BILL OF MATERIALS
- NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
A ℄ BRIDGE
P03 P02 13 (#4) 324 14 45.4
35cm
P03 (TYP) P04 SLOPE TO DRAIN 13 (#4)
(STAGE 2)
P03 106 8 8.5
P04 13 (#4) 86 8 6.9
-
CONSTRUCTION
C JOINT ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 3.20m3
MASONRY MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P01 P01
P02
200cm
165cm
(STAGE 1)
7 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

20cm
-
B

65cm
20cm
10cm
150cm 85cm
FOOTING FOOTING
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
100cm ℄ PEDESTAL
50cm P01 82cm
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
15cm
(TYP)
P04 (SPA. AS SHOWN)

℄ TOWER
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
80cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE 62cm
40cm
P04
P01
(LAP W/ F03)
NOTES:
1.0m x 0.8m x 2.0m TALL
- BILL OF MATERIALS
A ℄ BRIDGE
P04 (TYP) ℄ PEDESTAL & SYM. TOWER BASE ℄ PEDESTAL REINFORCING BARS (PER TOWER)
35cm
P03 P03 (TYP) P04 SLOPE TO DRAIN BAR SIZE LENGTH LENGTH
P02 QUANTITY
(STAGE 2)
NAME (mm) (cm) (m)
20cm
P01 16 (#5) 245 40 98.0
-
CONSTRUCTION 13 (#4)
C P02 324 18 58.3
JOINT
P03 13 (#4) 106 8 8.5
P04 13 (#4) 86 8 6.9
MASONRY
MASONRY FORMWORK
FORMWORK ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 4.00m3
P01 P01
P02
250cm
215cm
(STAGE 1)
8 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

20cm
-
B

65cm
20cm
10cm
150cm 85cm
FOOTING FOOTING
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
100cm ℄ PEDESTAL
50cm P01 82cm
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
15cm
(TYP)
P04 (SPA. AS SHOWN)

℄ TOWER
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
80cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE 62cm
40cm
P04
P01
(LAP W/ F03)
NOTES:
1.0m x 0.8m x 2.5m TALL
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
P01 16 (#5) 95 52 49.4
P02 13 (#4) 404 8 32.3
P03 13 (#4) 126 8 10.1
P04 13 (#4) 106 8 8.5
ITEM QUANTITY
- CONCRETE 2.40m3
A ℄ BRIDGE
TOWER BASE
P04 (TYP) P03
35cm
(STAGE 2)
P02
20cm
-
CONSTRUCTION
3 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

C JOINT
P01 20cm
MASONRY P01
P02
MASONRY
100cm
FORMWORK FORMWORK
-
65cm
B
(STAGE 1)
20cm
85cm
10cm
175cm
FOOTING FOOTING 105cm
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
120cm ℄ PEDESTAL
60cm P01
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
102cm
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
P04 (SPA. AS SHOWN)
15cm
(TYP)
℄ TOWER
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
100cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE 82cm
50cm
P04
P01
(LAP W/ F03) NOTES:
1.2m x 1.0m x 1.0m TALL
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
P01 16 (#5) 145 52 75.4
P02 13 (#4) 404 10 40.4
- P03 13 (#4) 126 8 10.1
A ℄ BRIDGE P04 13 (#4) 106 8 8.5
TOWER BASE
P04 (TYP) P03 ITEM QUANTITY
35cm
(STAGE 2)
MASONRY CONCRETE 3.60m3
FORMWORK
-
CONSTRUCTION
C JOINT
P01 P01 MASONRY

FORMWORK
150cm
P02
20cm
115cm
(STAGE 1)
5 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

-
B

20cm
85cm
10cm
175cm
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
120cm ℄ PEDESTAL
60cm P01
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
102cm
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
P04 (SPA. AS SHOWN)
15cm
(TYP)
℄ TOWER
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
100cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE 82cm
50cm
P04
P01
(LAP W/ F03) NOTES:
1.2m x 1.0m x 1.5m TALL
BILL OF MATERIALS
- NAME QUANTITY
A (mm) (cm) (m)
℄ BRIDGE
TOWER BASE
P04 (TYP) P03 P02 13 (#4) 404 14 56.6
35cm
P03 (TYP) P04 SLOPE TO DRAIN 13 (#4)
(STAGE 2)
P03 126 8 10.1
P04 13 (#4) 106 8 8.5
-
CONSTRUCTION
C JOINT ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 4.8m3
MASONRY
FORMWORK MASONRY
FORMWORK
P01 P01
P02
200cm
165cm
(STAGE 1)
7 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

20cm
-
B

20cm
85cm
10cm
175cm
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
120cm ℄ PEDESTAL
60cm P01
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
102cm
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
P04 (SPA. AS SHOWN)
15cm
(TYP)
℄ TOWER
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
100cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE 82cm
50cm
P04
P01
(LAP W/ F03) NOTES:
1.2m x 1.0m x 2.0m TALL
- BILL OF MATERIALS
A ℄ BRIDGE
℄ PEDESTAL & SYM. TOWER BASE ℄ PEDESTAL REINFORCING BARS (PER TOWER)
P04 (TYP)
P03
35cm
P03 (TYP) P04 SLOPE TO DRAIN BAR SIZE LENGTH LENGTH
QUANTITY
(STAGE 2)
P02 NAME (mm) (cm) (m)
20cm
P01 16 (#5) 245 52 127.4
-
C CONSTRUCTION P02 13 (#4) 404 18 72.7
JOINT
P03 13 (#4) 126 8 10.1
P04 13 (#4) 106 8 8.5
MASONRY
MASONRY FORMWORK
FORMWORK ITEM QUANTITY
CONCRETE 6.00m3
P02
250cm
P01 P01
215cm
(STAGE 1)
8 - P02 SPA. @ 30cm

20cm
-
B

20cm
85cm
10cm
175cm
-
15cm
(TYP)
℄ PEDESTAL
120cm ℄ PEDESTAL
60cm P01
MASONRY P02 MASONRY
102cm
FORMWORK FORMWORK
P03
P04 (SPA. AS SHOWN)
15cm
(TYP)
℄ TOWER
℄ TOWER
P01
P01
100cm
(LAP W/ F03)
TOWER BASE 82cm
50cm
P04
P01
(LAP W/ F03) NOTES:
1.2m x 1.0m x 2.5m TALL
470cm ANCHOR BLOCK ANCHOR PIPE
100cm FILLED WITH CONCRETE
37.5cm
25cm
SEE BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL
32.5cm
FOR CLAMP NO. AND SPA.
70cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM & SYMMETRY
℄ TRANSITION
65cm
ARM
-
15cm
B
BLOCKOUT
130cm
℄ BRIDGE DETAIL 1
400cm
& SYMMETRY
8mmØ (5 16") RESTRAINT

SEE DETAIL 1 CABLE ANCHORED TO 20cm 20cm
PIPE WITH (4) CLAMPS
-
℄ TRANSITION
A
ARM
20cm
ANCHOR BLOCK
20cm
70cm
ANCHOR BEAM
GL
30cm
PLAN
20cm
SLOPE BLOCKOUT
CONSTRUCTION JOINT FOR DRAINAGE
ANCHOR BLOCK ERECTION HOOK
TRANSITION ARM
STAGE 3
70cm
GL
-
SECTION B
10cm
TRANSITION ARM
VARIES
34c
(150cm MIN.)
m
180cm
ANCHOR
BEAM
STAGE 2
NOTES:
100cm
STAGE 1
60cm
2. CONSTRUCTION STAGES:
STAGE 1 - ASSEMBLE REINFORCING CAGE FOR ANCHOR BEAM WITH PROJECTING
TRANSITION ARM BARS. CAST ANCHOR BEAM.
100cm 300cm 70cm STAGE 2 - ASSEMBLE REINFORCING CAGE FOR TRANSITION ARMS. CAST TRANSITION ARMS.
- STAGE 3 - ASSEMBLE REINFORCING CAGE FOR ANCHOR BLOCK WITH PIPE FOR CABLE.
SECTION A FORM AND CAST ANCHOR BLOCK.
Produced by: MODIFICATIONS MUST BE APPROVED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY'S DESIGN TEAM. ANCHOR DETAILS 1
4.0 METER BEAM
Revision : September 2016 A01
FOR ANCHOR BLOCK DETAILS
SEE ANCHOR DETAILS 3
GL
m
- 50c
.@
D PA
)S
AIRS
5 (P A02
A03 A0
20cm
6-
EQ. SPA. A01
(TYP E.F.)
A05 (PAIRS)
(TYP) A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

℄ TRANSITION
ARM CONSTRUCTION JOINT
10cm CLR.
A02 (TYP) (TYP)
A01 (TYP)
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX
(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
℄ BRIDGE SECTION C
& SYMMETRY
13 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

13.5cm 7.5cm
-
℄ TRANSITION A02 (TYP)
ARM C
A01 (TYP) A05
ANCHOR BEAM
A05
℄ TRANSITION ARM & SYM.

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
PLAN -
SECTION D
NOTES:
1. MIN. CONCRETE COVER = 7.5cm UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
4.0 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 595 8 47.6
10cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 580 8 46.4
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A01 & A02 BARS (TYP) A03 19 (#6) 385 20 77.0
A04 13 (#4) 350 13 45.5
168mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 89 32 28.5
S) A06 55cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
35cm
AIR
05 (P A07 13 (#4) 89 4 3.6
2 -A
A08 13 (#4) 167 8 13.4
A06
10cm
CONCRETE (PER ANCHOR)
A02 10cm
ANCHOR BEAM (STAGE 1) 4.00m3
A01
TRANSITION ARM (STAGE 2) 1.39m3
ANCHOR BLOCK (STAGE 3) 0.68m3
A07
TOTAL 6.07m3
℄ TRANSITION ARM QUANTITY
15cm
CONSTRUCTION JOINT ITEM
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
& SYMMETRY
ANCHOR PIPE, (168 O.D. / 154 I.D.) x 55cm 2
- -
SECTION SECTION 20cm
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 30.5cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
A05 (PAIRS) 30.5cm

ANCHOR PIPE 530cm
21cm
21cm
516cm 80cm
14cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
38cm
70cm
- 13cm
16.5cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
55cm
55cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
A02 (TYP) A08 A07

20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP) 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)
PLAN A05 A06 A07 A08

NOTES:
1. MIN. CONCRETE COVER = 5cm UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
4.0 METER BEAM
470cm
100cm ANCHOR BLOCK ANCHOR PIPE
FILLED WITH CONCRETE
25cm
32.5cm
62.5cm
95cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM & SYMMETRY
℄ TRANSITION
65cm
ARM
-
15cm
B
BLOCKOUT
130cm
℄ BRIDGE DETAIL 1
450cm
& SYMMETRY

SEE DETAIL 1 CABLE ANCHORED TO 20cm 20cm
-
℄ TRANSITION
A
ARM
20cm
ANCHOR BLOCK
20cm
70cm
ANCHOR BEAM GL
30cm
PLAN
20cm
SLOPE BLOCKOUT
TRANSITION ARM
STAGE 3
70cm
GL
-
SECTION B
10cm
TRANSITION ARM
VARIES
34c
(150cm MIN.)
m
180cm
ANCHOR
BEAM
STAGE 2
NOTES:
100cm
STAGE 1
60cm
4.5 METER BEAM
GL
m
- 50c
.@
D PA
)S
A03 IRS
15cm
A
EQ. SPA. 5 (P A02
A0
6-
A01
(TYP E.F.)
A05 (PAIRS)
(TYP) A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

℄ TRANSITION
ARM CONSTRUCTION JOINT
10cm CLR.
A02 (TYP) (TYP)
A01 (TYP)
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX
(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
& SYMMETRY
15 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

13.5cm 7.5cm
-
℄ TRANSITION A02 (TYP)
ARM C
A01 (TYP) A05
A05
ANCHOR BEAM

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
PLAN -
SECTION D
NOTES:
4.5 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 595 8 47.6
10cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 580 8 46.4
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A03 19 (#6) 435 20 87.0
A01 & A02 BARS (TYP)
A04 13 (#4) 350 15 52.5
168mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 89 32 28.5
) 55cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
IRS A06
35cm
5 (PA 13 (#4)
0 A07 89 4 3.6
2 -A
A08 13 (#4) 167 8 13.4
A06
10cm
A02 10cm
A01
A07
TOTAL 6.57m3
15cm
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
& SYMMETRY
- -
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 30.5cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
A05 (PAIRS) 30.5cm

ANCHOR PIPE 530cm
21cm
21cm
516cm 80cm
14cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
38cm
70cm
- 13cm
16.5cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
55cm
55cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
A02 (TYP) A08 A07

20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP) 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)

NOTES:
4.5 METER BEAM
470cm
100cm
37.5cm
SEE BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FILLED WITH CONCRETE
32.5cm
70cm
25cm
℄ TRANSITION
65cm
ARM ℄ TRANSITION
ARM & SYMMETRY
-
15cm
180cm
B
BLOCKOUT
℄ BRIDGE DETAIL 1
500cm
& SYMMETRY
20cm 20cm
SEE DETAIL 1 CABLE ANCHORED TO
20cm
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM A ANCHOR BLOCK
20cm
70cm
GL
30cm
PLAN
ANCHOR BEAM
20cm
SLOPE BLOCKOUT
TRANSITION ARM
STAGE 3
70cm
GL
-
SECTION B
10cm
TRANSITION ARM
VARIES
34c
(150cm MIN.)
m
180cm
ANCHOR
BEAM
STAGE 2
NOTES:
100cm
STAGE 1
60cm
5.0 METER BEAM
GL
m
- 50c
A03 .@
10cm
EQ. SPA. D PA
)S
AIRS
A05 (PAIRS) 5 (P
A0 A02
(TYP) 6-
A01
(TYP E.F.)
℄ TRANSITION A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

ARM
A02 (TYP)
A01 (TYP) CONSTRUCTION JOINT
10cm CLR.
(TYP)
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
& SYMMETRY
17 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

13.5cm 7.5cm
A02 (TYP)
A01 (TYP) A05
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM C
A05
ANCHOR BEAM ℄ TRANSITION ARM & SYM.

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
PLAN -
SECTION D
NOTES:
5.0 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 595 8 47.6
10cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 580 8 46.4
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A03 19 (#6) 485 20 97.0
A04 13 (#4) 350 17 59.5
168mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 89 32 28.5
) 55cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
IRS A06
35cm
5 (PA 13 (#4)
0 A07 89 4 3.6
2 -A
A08 13 (#4) 167 8 13.4
A06
10cm
A02 10cm
A01
A07
TOTAL 7.07m3
15cm
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
& SYMMETRY
- -
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 30.5cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
A05 (PAIRS) 30.5cm

ANCHOR PIPE 530cm
21cm
21cm
516cm 80cm
14cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
38cm
70cm
- 13cm
16.5cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
55cm
55cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
A02 (TYP) A08 A07

20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP) 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)

NOTES:
5.0 METER BEAM
470cm
100cm

SEE BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FILLED WITH CONCRETE
32.5cm
62.5cm
95cm
25cm
℄ TRANSITION
65cm
ARM ℄ TRANSITION
ARM & SYMMETRY
-
15cm
180cm
B
BLOCKOUT
℄ BRIDGE DETAIL 1
550cm
& SYMMETRY
20cm 20cm
20cm
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM A ANCHOR BLOCK
20cm
70cm
GL
30cm
PLAN
ANCHOR BEAM 20cm
SLOPE BLOCKOUT
TRANSITION ARM
STAGE 3
70cm
GL
-
SECTION B
10cm
TRANSITION ARM
VARIES
34c
(150cm MIN.)
m
180cm
ANCHOR
BEAM
STAGE 2
NOTES:
100cm
STAGE 1
60cm
5.5 METER BEAM
GL
A03
20cm
m
EQ. SPA. - 50c
.@
D PA
)S
AIRS
A05 (PAIRS) 5 (P
A0 A02
(TYP) 6-
A01
(TYP E.F.)
℄ TRANSITION A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

ARM
A02 (TYP)
10cm CLR.
(TYP)
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
& SYMMETRY
18 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

13.5cm 7.5cm
A02 (TYP)
A01 (TYP) A05
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM C
A05

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
ANCHOR BEAM
PLAN -
SECTION D
NOTES:
5.5 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 595 8 47.6
10cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 580 8 46.4
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A03 19 (#6) 535 20 107.0
A04 13 (#4) 350 18 63.0
168mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 89 32 28.5
S) A06 55cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
35cm
AIR
05 (P A07 13 (#4) 89 4 3.6
2 -A
A08 13 (#4) 167 8 13.4
A06
10cm
A02 10cm
A01
A07
TOTAL 7.57m3
15cm
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
& SYMMETRY
- -
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 30.5cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
A05 (PAIRS) 30.5cm

ANCHOR PIPE 530cm
21cm
21cm
516cm 80cm
14cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
38cm
70cm
- 13cm
16.5cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
55cm
55cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
A02 (TYP) A08 A07

20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP) 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)

NOTES:
5.5 METER BEAM
470cm
100cm
32.5cm
25cm
87.5cm
120cm
℄ TRANSITION
℄ TRANSITION ARM & SYMMETRY
65cm
ARM
-
15cm
180cm
BLOCKOUT
℄ BRIDGE DETAIL 1
600cm
& SYMMETRY

CABLE ANCHORED TO 20cm 20cm
SEE DETAIL 1
-
℄ TRANSITION
20cm
ARM A
ANCHOR BLOCK
20cm
70cm
GL
30cm
ANCHOR BEAM PLAN
SLOPE BLOCKOUT
TRANSITION ARM
20cm
-
STAGE 3 SECTION B
70cm
GL
TRANSITION ARM
10cm
(MIN)
150cm
ANCHOR
40c
180cm
m
BEAM
STAGE 2 NOTES:
100cm
STAGE 1 2. CONSTRUCTION STAGES:
60cm
6.0 METER BEAM
A03
15cm
GL
EQ. SPA.
m
- 50c
.@
D PA
)S
AIRS
A05 (PAIRS) 5 (P
A0 A02
(TYP) 6-
A01
(TYP E.F.)
℄ TRANSITION A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

ARM
A02 (TYP)
10cm CLR.
(TYP)
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
& SYMMETRY
20 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

13.5cm 7.5cm
A02 (TYP)
A01 (TYP) A05
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM C
A05

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
PLAN -
ANCHOR BEAM SECTION D
NOTES:
6.0 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 595 8 47.6
10cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 580 8 46.4
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A03 19 (#6) 585 20 117.0
A04 13 (#4) 350 20 70.0
168mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 89 32 28.5
) 55cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
IRS A06
35cm
5 (PA 13 (#4)
0 A07 89 4 3.6
2 -A
A08 13 (#4) 167 8 13.4
A06
10cm
A02 10cm
A01
A07
TOTAL 8.07m3
15cm
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
& SYMMETRY
- -
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 30.5cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
A05 (PAIRS) 30.5cm

ANCHOR PIPE 530cm
21cm
21cm
516cm 80cm
14cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
38cm
70cm
- 13cm
16.5cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
55cm
55cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
A02 (TYP) A08 A07

20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP) 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)

NOTES:
6.0 METER BEAM
473cm
100cm
80cm
32.5cm
40cm
145cm
℄ TRANSITION
80cm
ARM
-
15cm
180cm
BLOCKOUT
℄ BRIDGE DETAIL 1
650cm
& SYMMETRY

CABLE ANCHORED TO 23cm 23cm
SEE DETAIL 1
-
℄ TRANSITION
A
23cm
ARM
ANCHOR BLOCK
23cm
70cm
GL
PLAN
24cm
ANCHOR BEAM
SLOPE BLOCKOUT
TRANSITION ARM
23cm
-
STAGE 3 SECTION B
70cm
GL
TRANSITION ARM
10cm
(MIN)
150cm
ANCHOR
40c
180cm
m
BEAM
STAGE 2 NOTES:
100cm
60cm
6.5 METER BEAM
A03 SEE ANCHOR DETAILS 3
10cm
EQ. SPA.
GL
m
- 50c
.@
D PA
)S
A05 (PAIRS) AIRS
(TYP) 5 (P
A0 A02
6-
A01
(TYP E.F.)
℄ TRANSITION A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

ARM
A02 (TYP)
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
A01 (TYP)
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
& SYMMETRY
22 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

13.5cm 7.5cm (TYP SPA.)
A02 (TYP)
A05
A01 (TYP)
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM C
A05

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
PLAN -
SECTION D
ANCHOR BEAM
NOTES:
6.5 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 600 12 72.0
17.5cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 585 12 70.2
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A03 19 (#6) 635 20 127.0
A04 13 (#4) 350 22 77.0
219mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 104 32 33.3
)
AIRS 70cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
5 (P
41cm
A0 A06 13 (#4)
2- A07 104 2 2.1
A08 13 (#4) 169 8 13.5
A06 CONCRETE (PER ANCHOR)
A02 ANCHOR BEAM (STAGE 1) 6.50m3
A01 10cm
A07 TOTAL 9.42m3
15cm
ITEM
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
CONSTRUCTION JOINT & SYMMETRY
- -
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 33cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
26cm
A05 (PAIRS)
26cm
ANCHOR PIPE
530cm 33cm
516cm 80cm
21cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
40cm
70cm
- 15cm
16cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
70cm
70cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
20cm
(TYP)
A02 (TYP) A08 A07 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP)
NOTES:
6.5 METER BEAM
473cm
100cm
130cm
150cm
32.5cm
40cm
℄ TRANSITION
80cm
ARM
-
15cm
200cm
BLOCKOUT
DETAIL 1
℄ BRIDGE
700cm
& SYMMETRY
8mmØ (5 16") RESTRAINT 23cm 23cm

-
℄ TRANSITION
23cm
ARM A
ANCHOR BLOCK
23cm
70cm
GL
PLAN
24cm
ANCHOR BEAM SLOPE BLOCKOUT

TRANSITION ARM
23cm
-
STAGE 3 SECTION B
70cm
GL
TRANSITION ARM
10cm
(MIN)
150cm
ANCHOR
40c
180cm
m
BEAM
STAGE 2 NOTES:
100cm
60cm
7.0 METER BEAM
A03
20cm
EQ. SPA.
GL
m
- 50c
A05 (PAIRS) .@
D PA
)S
(TYP) AIRS
5 (P
A0 A02
6-
A01
(TYP E.F.)
℄ TRANSITION
ARM
A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

A02 (TYP)
A01 (TYP)
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
& SYMMETRY
23 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

A02 (TYP)
A05
A01 (TYP)
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM C
A05

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
PLAN -
SECTION D
ANCHOR BEAM
NOTES:
7.0 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 600 12 72.0
17.5cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 585 12 70.2
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A03 19 (#6) 685 20 137.0
A04 13 (#4) 350 23 80.5
219mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 104 32 33.3
)
AIRS 70cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
5 (P
41cm
A0 A06 13 (#4)
2- A07 104 2 2.1
A08 13 (#4) 169 8 13.5
A01 10cm
A07 TOTAL 9.92m3
15cm
ITEM
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
- -
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 33cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
26cm
A05 (PAIRS)
26cm
ANCHOR PIPE
530cm 33cm
516cm 80cm
21cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
40cm
70cm
- 15cm
16cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
70cm
70cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
20cm
(TYP)
A02 (TYP) A08 A07 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP)
NOTES:
7.0 METER BEAM
473cm
100cm
32.5cm
155cm
175cm
40cm
FOR CLAMP NO. AND SPA. ℄ TRANSITION
ARM & SYMMETRY
℄ TRANSITION
80cm
ARM -
15cm
B
BLOCKOUT
200cm
℄ BRIDGE DETAIL 1
750cm
& SYMMETRY
PIPE WITH (4) CLAMPS 23cm 23cm
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM A
23cm
ANCHOR BLOCK
23cm
70cm
GL
PLAN
24cm
ANCHOR BEAM
SLOPE BLOCKOUT
TRANSITION ARM
23cm
-
STAGE 3 SECTION B
70cm
GL
TRANSITION ARM
10cm
(MIN)
150cm
ANCHOR
40c
180cm
m
BEAM
STAGE 2 NOTES:
100cm
60cm
7.5 METER BEAM
A03
15cm
EQ. SPA.
GL
m
- 50c
A05 (PAIRS) .@
D PA
)S
(TYP) AIRS
5 (P
A0 A02
6-
A01
(TYP E.F.)
℄ TRANSITION
ARM
A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

A02 (TYP)
A01 (TYP)
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
& SYMMETRY
25 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

A02 (TYP)
A05
A01 (TYP)
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM C
A05

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
PLAN -
SECTION D
ANCHOR BEAM
NOTES:
7.5 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 600 12 72.0
17.5cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 585 12 70.2
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A03 19 (#6) 735 20 147.0
A04 13 (#4) 350 25 87.5
219mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 104 32 33.3
)
AIRS 70cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
5 (P
41cm
A0 A06 13 (#4)
2- A07 104 2 2.1
A08 13 (#4) 169 8 13.5
A01 10cm
A07 TOTAL 10.42m3
15cm
ITEM
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
- -
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 33cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
26cm
A05 (PAIRS)
26cm
ANCHOR PIPE
530cm 33cm
516cm 80cm
21cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
40cm
70cm
- 15cm
16cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
70cm
70cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
20cm
(TYP)
A02 (TYP) A08 A07 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP)
NOTES:
7.5 METER BEAM
473cm
100cm
32.5cm
180cm
220cm
SEE BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL ℄ TRANSITION
40cm
FOR CLAMP NO. AND SPA. ARM & SYMMETRY
℄ TRANSITION -
80cm
15cm
ARM B
BLOCKOUT
200cm
DETAIL 1
℄ BRIDGE
800cm
& SYMMETRY
23cm 23cm
23cm
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM A
ANCHOR BLOCK
23cm
70cm
GL
PLAN
24cm
SLOPE BLOCKOUT
TRANSITION ARM
ANCHOR BEAM 23cm
-
STAGE 3 SECTION B
70cm
GL
TRANSITION ARM
10cm
(MIN)
150cm
ANCHOR
40c
180cm
m
BEAM
STAGE 2 NOTES:
100cm
60cm
8.0 METER BEAM
A03
10cm
EQ. SPA.

GL
m
- 50c
A05 (PAIRS) .@
D PA
)S
(TYP) AIRS
5 (P
A0 A02
6-
A01
(TYP E.F.)
℄ TRANSITION
ARM
A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

A02 (TYP)
A01 (TYP)
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
& SYMMETRY
27 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

A02 (TYP)
A05
A01 (TYP)
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM C
A05

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
PLAN -
SECTION D
NOTES:
ANCHOR BEAM 1. MIN. CONCRETE COVER = 7.5cm UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
8.0 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 600 12 72.0
17.5cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 585 12 70.2
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A03 19 (#6) 785 20 157.0
A04 13 (#4) 350 27 94.5
219mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 104 32 33.3
)
AIRS 70cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
5 (P
41cm
A0 A06 13 (#4)
2- A07 104 2 2.1
A08 13 (#4) 169 8 13.5
A01 10cm
A07 TOTAL 10.92m3
15cm
ITEM
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
- -
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 33cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
26cm
A05 (PAIRS)
26cm
ANCHOR PIPE
530cm 33cm
516cm 80cm
21cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
40cm
70cm
- 15cm
16cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
70cm
70cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
20cm
(TYP)
A02 (TYP) A08 A07 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP)
NOTES:
8.0 METER BEAM
473cm
100cm
32.5cm
205cm
245cm
℄ TRANSITION
SEE BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL ARM & SYMMETRY
40cm
-
15cm
℄ TRANSITION B
80cm
BLOCKOUT
ARM
200cm
DETAIL 1
℄ BRIDGE
850cm
& SYMMETRY
5
8mmØ ( 16") RESTRAINT 23cm 23cm
-
℄ TRANSITION
23cm
ARM A
ANCHOR BLOCK
23cm
70cm
GL
PLAN
24cm
SLOPE BLOCKOUT
TRANSITION ARM
ANCHOR BEAM 23cm
-
STAGE 3 SECTION B
70cm
GL
TRANSITION ARM
10cm
(MIN)
150cm
ANCHOR
40c
180cm
m
BEAM
STAGE 2 NOTES:
100cm
60cm
8.5 METER BEAM
A03
20cm
EQ. SPA. FOR ANCHOR BLOCK DETAILS
GL
m
- 50c
.@
D PA
)S
AIRS
5 (P
A05 (PAIRS) A0 A02
6-
(TYP) A01
(TYP E.F.)
A04
6 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

℄ TRANSITION
ARM

A01 (TYP)
4 - A03 @ 15cm MAX

(TYP TOP AND BOT.)
-
& SYMMETRY
28 - A04 SPA. @ 30cm

A02 (TYP)
A05
A01 (TYP)
-
℄ TRANSITION
ARM C
A05

(TYP)
5cm CLR.
PLAN -
SECTION D
ANCHOR BEAM
NOTES:
8.5 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
NAME QUANTITY
(mm) (cm) (m)
- 5cm
F A01 19 (#6) 600 12 72.0
17.5cm
A08 SPA. A02 19 (#6) 585 12 70.2
A08 ANCHOR PIPE A03 19 (#6) 835 20 167.0
A04 13 (#4) 350 28 98.0
219mm Ø ANCHOR PIPE, A05 13 (#4) 104 32 33.3
)
AIRS 70cm LONG A06 16 (#5) 187 4 7.5
5 (P
41cm
A0 A06 13 (#4)
2- A07 104 2 2.1
A08 13 (#4) 169 8 13.5
A01 10cm
A07 TOTAL 11.42m3
15cm
ITEM
(PER ANCHOR)
A07 SPA.
- -
E F
11.5cm
23cm
11.5cm 33cm
23cm
20cm
80cm
26cm
A05 (PAIRS)
26cm
ANCHOR PIPE
530cm 33cm
516cm 80cm
21cm
(TYP)
A01 A02 A04
40cm
70cm
- 15cm
16cm
℄ TRANSITION
ARM E
70cm
70cm
FRONT
56cm
13cm
A06
25cm
20cm
(TYP)
A02 (TYP) A08 A07 75cm

SIDE
20cm
(TYP)
A01 (TYP)
NOTES:
8.5 METER BEAM
BILL OF MATERIALS
STRUCTURAL STEEL (PER TOWER)
ITEM SIZE (mm) LENGTH (mm) QTY. LENGTH (m)
P01 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 4500 2 9.0
P02 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 650 2 1.3
P03 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 462 4 1.9
TOTAL 12.2
TOWER CANT = 15cm L01 76x76x6 3106 2 6.21
(AWAY FROM SPAN)
250cm L02 76x76x6 2282 2 4.56
SADDLE SEE DETAIL 2 TOTAL 10.77

125cm
2-L02 SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 ITEM SIZE (mm) LENGTH (mm) QTY. MASS (kg)
PL01 PL 13x84 200 4 6.9
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
PL03 PL 10x200 229 2 7.2
SEE DETAIL 1
PL04 BENT PL 6x200 405 8 30.5
PL05 PL 6x100 200 4 3.8
220cm
PL06 PL 6x100 100 2 1.0
PL07 PL 6x100 350 4 6.6
TOWER LEG
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 TOTAL 62.1
L01 QUANTITY
ITEM
(PER TOWER)
450cm
BOLT/NUT/WASHERS (19mm), 75mm 16
TOWER LEG
NOTES:
1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR CONSTRUCTION
GUIDELINES.
TOWER BASE TOWER BASE 2. USE PIPE LEG TO LEVEL AND SQUARE HINGE BASES.
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 3. FABRICATOR TO MATCH-DRILL AND LABEL CONNECTIONS TO FACILITATE FIELD
TOWER APPROACH ASSEMBLY.
℄ HINGE PEDESTAL RAMP 4. GREASE HINGE PIPE (P02) PRIOR TO SETTING AND ERECTING TOWER.
5. ALL COMPONENTS TO BE PAINTED AFTER FABRICATION.
15cm
L01 OR L02 CABLE CLAMP EACH
SIDE OF TOWER
GL GL
PEEN THREADS 19mm Ø x 5cm BOLT
NUT
PL06
TOWER FOOTING
WASHER
℄ TOWER LEG ℄ BRIDGE ℄ TOWER LEG ℄ TOWER LEG
TOWER ELEVATION SIDE VIEW DETAIL 1 DETAIL 2

Produced by: MODIFICATIONS MUST BE APPROVED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY'S DESIGN TEAM. TOWER DETAILS 1
4.5 METER STEEL TOWER
Revision : Septmeber 2016 T01
NOTES: -
℄ TOWER LEG ℄ TOWER LEG
1. ALL STEEL: fy=240 MPa (35 ksi) OR BETTER A & ℄ SADDLE & ℄ SADDLE
2 ALL BOLTS: ASTM A325
3. ALL WELDS: E70XX 20cm
5.2cm 7cm
(TYP) PL02
16mm Ø x 12.5cm BOLT
PL02 16mm Ø BOLT
℄ TOWER LEG (TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
TYP EDGE (TYP EA. SIDE)
CUT SLOTS FOR SADDLE 6 PL03
PL03
P01 TO PL03
6
P01 TO PL01 PL01

6 PL01
PL01 TO PL03
6
P01 P01
PL05
220cm
-
CABLE SADDLE SECTION A
-
6cm B
(TYP) 19mm Ø BOLTS ℄ TOWER 19mm Ø BOLTS
450cm
LEG ℄ TOWER LEG
P01 19mm Ø x 7.5cm BOLTS

PL04 PL04
6 PL04
P02
PL05 P02
℄ HINGE ℄ HINGE
TYP
6
PL04
PL04 P03
3.5cm P03
P02 FILL P02 WITH P03
50cm
CONCRETE
TYP PL07
℄ HINGE 6
PL07
15cm
FILL P03 WITH
32.5cm 21cm CONCRETE
6
65cm 42cm
-
TOWER LEG TOWER BASE SECTION B
15cm
1.6cm 1.6cm
20cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
5.6cm 5.6cm
2cm CHAMFER 22.9cm
(TYP)
m
8.4cm
10cm
5cm
R16
R16
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
.5cm
R16.5c
⅊ 10mm
⅊ 13mm
8.4cm
⅊ 13mm
.5cm
R17.5cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.)
PL01 PL02 PL03
450cm
450cm
20cm 10cm
m
.5c
R8
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R 0
6cm
(TY 9cm
180°
(TYP) Ø2.1cm (TYP) Ø2.1cm
5cm
3cm
3cm
10cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R8.
4cm
31.8cm
TRIM TAPER PL05 PL06
(TYP)
5.5cm
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
35cm
65cm
9cm
20cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm
⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) PL04 PL07

P02 310.6cm
3.5cm 155.3cm
R9.
(TYP)
2cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L01 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
228.2cm
46.2cm
40.8cm
3.5cm 114.1cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) (TYP)
Ø2.1cm TYP
P03 (3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
BILL OF MATERIALS
P01 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 5000 2 10.0
P02 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 650 2 1.3
TOWER CANT = 15cm P03 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 462 4 1.9
(AWAY FROM SPAN) TOTAL 13.2
250cm
L01 76x76x6 3246 2 6.49
125cm SADDLE
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 SEE DETAIL 2 L02 76x76x6 2282 2 4.56
2-L02
TOTAL 11.05
ITEM SIZE (mm) LENGTH (mm) QTY. MASS (kg)
PL01 PL 13x84 200 4 6.9
SEE DETAIL 1
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
PL03 PL 10x200 229 2 7.2
PL04 BENT PL 6x200 405 8 30.5
240cm
PL05 PL 6x100 200 4 3.8
PL06 PL 6x100 100 2 1.0
PL07 PL 6x100 350 4 6.6
L01 TOWER LEG
QUANTITY
500cm
ITEM
(PER TOWER)
TOWER LEG
NOTES:
GUIDELINES.
15cm
SIDE OF TOWER
GL GL
NUT
PL06
TOWER FOOTING
WASHER

5 METER STEEL TOWER
NOTES: - ℄ TOWER LEG ℄ TOWER LEG
5.2cm 7cm
(TYP) PL02
PL02 16mm Ø BOLT
℄ TOWER LEG (TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
TYP EDGE (TYP EA. SIDE)
CUT SLOTS FOR SADDLE 6 PL03
PL03
P01 TO PL03
6
P01 TO PL01 PL01

6 PL01
PL01 TO PL03
6
P01 P01
PL05
240cm
-
-
6cm B
(TYP) 19mm Ø BOLTS ℄ TOWER 19mm Ø BOLTS
500cm
LEG ℄ TOWER LEG
P01 19mm Ø x 7.5cm BOLTS

PL04 PL04
6 PL04
P02
PL05 P02
℄ HINGE ℄ HINGE
TYP
6
PL04
PL04 P03
3.5cm P03
50cm
CONCRETE
TYP PL07
℄ HINGE 6
PL07
15cm
FILL P03 WITH
6
65cm 42cm
-
5 METER STEEL TOWER
15cm
1.6cm 1.6cm
20cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
5.6cm 5.6cm
2cm CHAMFER 22.9cm
(TYP)
m
8.4cm
10cm
5cm
R16
R16
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
.5cm
R16.5c
⅊ 10mm
⅊ 13mm
8.4cm
⅊ 13mm
.5cm
R17.5cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.)
PL01 PL02 PL03
500cm
500cm
20cm 10cm
m
.5c
R8
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R 0
6cm
(TY 9cm
180°
5cm
3cm
3cm
10cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R8.
4cm
31.8cm
(TYP)
5.5cm
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
35cm
65cm
9cm
20cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm
⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) PL04 PL07

P02 324.6cm
3.5cm 162.3cm
R9.
(TYP)
2cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L01 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
228.2cm
46.2cm
40.8cm
3.5cm 114.1cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) (TYP)
Ø2.1cm TYP
P03 (3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
5 METER STEEL TOWER
BILL OF MATERIALS
TOWER CANT = 15cm P01 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 5500 2 11.0
(AWAY FROM SPAN) P02 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 650 2 1.3
300cm
P03 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 462 4 1.85
150cm SADDLE SEE DETAIL 2
2-L02 SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 TOTAL 14.2
L01 76x76x6 3184 4 12.74
L02 76x76x6 2782 2 5.56
SEE DETAIL 1 TOTAL 18.3

165cm
PL01 PL 13x84 200 4 6.9
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
PL03 PL 10x200 229 2 7.2
L01
PL04 BENT PL 6x200 405 8 30.5
PL05 PL 6x100 200 6 5.7
PL06 PL 6x100 100 3 1.4
PL07 PL 6x100 350 4 6.6
165cm
TOWER LEG
550cm
QUANTITY
ITEM
(PER TOWER)
L01
TOWER LEG
NOTES:
GUIDELINES.
15cm
SIDE OF TOWER
GL GL
NUT
PL06
TOWER FOOTING
WASHER

NOTES: -
5.2cm 7cm
(TYP) PL02
PL02 16mm Ø BOLT
℄ TOWER LEG (TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
CUT SLOTS FOR SADDLE TYP EDGE (TYP EA. SIDE)
6 PL03
PL03
P01 TO PL03
6
6 P01 TO PL01
6 PL01
PL01 TO PL03 PL01
6
165cm
PL05
P01 P01
-
P01
-
6 B
19mm Ø BOLTS ℄ TOWER 19mm Ø BOLTS
550cm
LEG ℄ TOWER LEG
165cm
PL05
PL04 PL04 19mm Ø x 7.5cm BOLTS

6cm
(TYP) PL04
P02
P02
6 ℄ HINGE ℄ HINGE
TYP
6
PL04
PL04 P03
PL05
3.5cm P03
50cm
CONCRETE
TYP PL07
℄ HINGE 6
PL07
15cm
FILL P03 WITH
6
65cm 42cm
-
15cm
1.6cm 1.6cm
20cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
5.6cm 5.6cm
2cm CHAMFER 22.9cm
(TYP)
m
8.4cm
10cm
5cm
R16
R16
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
.5cm
R16.5c
⅊ 10mm
⅊ 13mm
8.4cm
⅊ 13mm
.5cm
R17.5cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.)
PL01 PL02 PL03
550cm
550cm
20cm 10cm
m
.5c
R8
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R 0
6cm
(TY 9cm
180°
5cm
3cm
3cm
10cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R8.
4cm
31.8cm
(TYP)
5.5cm
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
35cm
65cm
9cm
20cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm
⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) PL04 PL07

P02 318.4cm
3.5cm 159.2cm
R9.
(TYP)
2cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP) L01
(3 TOTAL) ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
228.2cm
46.2cm
40.8cm
3.5cm 114.1cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) (TYP)
Ø2.1cm TYP
P03 (3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
BILL OF MATERIALS
TOWER CANT = 15cm
(AWAY FROM SPAN) ITEM SIZE (mm) LENGTH (mm) QTY. LENGTH (m)
300cm
P01 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 6000 2 12.0
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 P02 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 650 2 1.3
2-L02
P03 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 462 4 1.9
TOTAL 15.2
L01 76x76x6 3370 4 13.48
SEE DETAIL 1 L02 76x76x6 2782 2 5.56
TOTAL 19.04
200cm
PL01 PL 13x84 200 4 6.9
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
L01
PL03 PL 10x200 229 2 7.2
PL04 BENT PL 6x200 405 8 30.5
PL05 PL 6x100 200 6 5.7
PL06 PL 6x100 100 3 1.4
PL07 PL 6x100 350 4 6.6
600cm
200cm
TOWER LEG
QUANTITY
ITEM
(PER TOWER)
L01 BOLT/NUT/WASHERS (19mm), 75mm 16
TOWER LEG
NOTES:
GUIDELINES.
15cm
SIDE OF TOWER
GL GL
NUT
PL06
TOWER FOOTING
WASHER

6 METER STEEL TOWER
5.2cm 7cm
(TYP) PL02
PL02 16mm Ø BOLT
℄ TOWER LEG (TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
6 PL03
PL03
P01 TO PL03
6
6 P01 TO PL01
6 PL01
PL01 TO PL03 PL01
6
200cm
PL05
P01 P01
-
P01
-
6 B
600cm
LEG ℄ TOWER LEG
200cm
PL05

6cm
(TYP) PL04
P02
P02
TYP
6
PL04
PL04 P03
PL05
3.5cm P03
50cm
CONCRETE
TYP PL07
℄ HINGE 6
PL07
15cm
FILL P03 WITH
6
65cm 42cm
-
6 METER STEEL TOWER
15cm
1.6cm 1.6cm
20cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
5.6cm 5.6cm
2cm CHAMFER 22.9cm
(TYP)
m
8.4cm
10cm
5cm
R16
R16
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
.5cm
R16.5c
⅊ 10mm
⅊ 13mm
8.4cm
⅊ 13mm
.5cm
R17.5cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.)
PL01 PL02 PL03
600cm
600cm
20cm 10cm
m
.5c
R8
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R 0
6cm
(TY 9cm
180°
5cm
3cm
3cm
10cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R8.
4cm
31.8cm
(TYP)
5.5cm
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
35.1cm
65cm
9cm
20cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm
⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) PL04 PL07

P02 337.0cm
3.5cm 168.5cm
R9.
(TYP)
2cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP) L01
(3 TOTAL) ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
228.2cm
46.2cm
40.8cm
3.5cm 114.1cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) (TYP)
Ø2.1cm TYP
P03 (3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
6 METER STEEL TOWER
TOWER CANT = 15cm
(AWAY FROM SPAN)
BILL OF MATERIALS
300cm
2-L02 SEE TOWER DETAILS 2
P01 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 6500 2 13.0
P02 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 650 2 1.3
P03 PIPE 168.3 O.D./154.1 I.D. 462 4 1.9
SEE DETAIL 1 TOTAL 16.2
L01 76x76x6 3580 4 14.32
L02 76x76x6 2782 2 5.56
235cm
TOTAL 19.88
PL01 PL 13x84 200 4 6.9
L01
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
PL03 PL 10x200 229 2 7.2
PL04 BENT PL 6x200 405 8 30.5
PL05 PL 6x100 200 6 5.7
PL06 PL 6x100 100 3 1.4
650cm
PL07 PL 6x100 350 4 6.6
235cm
TOWER LEG
QUANTITY
ITEM
(PER TOWER)
L01 BOLT/NUT/WASHERS (19mm), 75mm 16
TOWER LEG BOLT/NUT/WASHERS (19mm), 50mm 13
NOTES:
GUIDELINES.
15cm
SIDE OF TOWER
GL GL
NUT
PL06
TOWER FOOTING
WASHER

NOTES: -
5.2cm 7cm
(TYP) PL02
PL02 16mm Ø BOLT
℄ TOWER LEG (TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
6 PL03
PL03
P01 TO PL03
6
6 P01 TO PL01
6 PL01
PL01 TO PL03 PL01
6
235cm
PL05
P01 P01
-
P01
-
6 B
650cm
LEG ℄ TOWER LEG
235cm
PL05

6cm
(TYP) PL04
P02
P02
TYP
6
PL04
PL04 P03
PL05
3.5cm P03
50cm
CONCRETE
TYP PL07
℄ HINGE 6
PL07
15cm
FILL P03 WITH
6
65cm 42cm
-
15cm
1.6cm 1.6cm
20cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
5.6cm 5.6cm
2cm CHAMFER 22.9cm
(TYP)
m
8.4cm
10cm
5cm
R16
R16
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
.5cm
R16.5c
⅊ 10mm
⅊ 13mm
8.4cm
⅊ 13mm
.5cm
R17.5cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.)
PL01 PL02 PL03
650cm
650cm
20cm 10cm
m
.5c
R8
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R 0
6cm
(TY 9cm
180°
5cm
3cm
3cm
10cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R8.
4cm
31.8cm
(TYP)
5.5cm
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
35cm
65cm
9cm
20cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm
⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) PL04 PL07

P02 358.0cm
3.5cm 179.0cm
R9.
(TYP)
2cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP) L01
(3 TOTAL) ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
228.2cm
46.2cm
40.8cm
3.5cm 114.1cm
6" PIPE (163 O.D. /154 I.D.) (TYP)
Ø2.1cm TYP
P03 (3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
BILL OF MATERIALS
P01 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 7000 2 14.0
P02 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 800 2 1.6
P03 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 509 4 2.1
TOTAL 17.7
TOWER CANT = 20cm L01 76x76x6 3742 4 14.97
300cm (AWAY FROM SPAN) L02 76x76x6 2731 2 5.46
150cm SADDLE TOTAL 20.43
2-L02 SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 SEE DETAIL 2 ITEM SIZE (mm) LENGTH (mm) QTY. MASS (kg)
PL01 PL 13x90 250 4 9.2
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
SEE DETAIL 1 PL03 PL 10x250 274 2 10.8
PL04 BENT PL 6x240 483 8 43.7
265cm
PL05 PL 6x100 200 6 5.7
PL06 PL 6x100 100 3 1.4
PL07 PL 6x100 420 4 7.9
L01
TOTAL 84.8
QUANTITY
TOWER LEG ITEM
(PER TOWER)
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2
700cm
265cm
NOTES:
L01 1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR CONSTRUCTION
GUIDELINES.
2. USE PIPE LEG TO LEVEL AND SQUARE HINGE BASES.
3. FABRICATOR TO MATCH-DRILL AND LABEL CONNECTIONS TO FACILITATE FIELD
TOWER BASE TOWER BASE ASSEMBLY.
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 4. GREASE HINGE PIPE (P02) PRIOR TO SETTING AND ERECTING TOWER.
TOWER APPROACH
℄ HINGE PEDESTAL RAMP

SIDE OF TOWER
20cm
GL GL PEEN THREADS 19mm Ø x 5cm BOLT
NUT
PL06
TOWER FOOTING WASHER
℄ TOWER LEG ℄ BRIDGE ℄ TOWER LEG ℄ TOWER

7 METER STEEL TOWER
7.7cm 7cm
(TYP) 16mm Ø x 12.5cm BOLT PL02
16mm Ø BOLT
℄ TOWER LEG (TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
TYP PL02 EDGE (TYP EA. SIDE)
6 PL03
CUT SLOTS FOR SADDLE PL03
P01 TO PL03
6
P01 TO PL01 PL01

6 6 PL01 TO PL03 PL01
6
PL05 P01 P01
265cm
-
P01
-
B
6 LEG & SYM. ℄ TOWER LEG
PL05
265cm
700cm
6cm PL04
(TYP)
P02
P02
TYP PL04
PL05 6
P03
PL04
P03
FILL P02 WITH 5cm
P02 CONCRETE
55cm
P03
℄ HINGE PL07
TYP
6
PL07
15cm
40cm FILL P03 WITH
6 CONCRETE
80cm 26cm
52cm
-
7 METER STEEL TOWER
1.6cm 1.6cm 15cm
25cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
8.2cm 8.2cm 27.4cm
2cm CHAMFER
(TYP)
9cm
9cm
cm
10cm
5cm
R21.5
⅊ 10mm
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
R21.5
cm
R21.5
⅊ 13mm
cm
⅊ 13mm
R22.5cm
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.) PL02 PL03
PL01
700cm
700cm
20cm 10cm
1cm
R1
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R0
6cm
(TY 8cm
180°
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
4cm
4cm
(TYP) Ø2.1cm
5cm
10cm
10cm
1cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R1
TRIM TAPER 36.8cm
PL05 PL06
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
42cm
5cm
80cm
24cm
14cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm ⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
PL04 PL07
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
374.2cm
P02
3.5cm 187.1cm
R1
(TYP)
1.7
cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L01 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
273.1cm
3.5cm 136.6cm
50.9cm
43.3cm
(TYP)
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
P03
(TYP)
3.5cm
7 METER STEEL TOWER
BILL OF MATERIALS
P01 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 7500 2 15.0
P02 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 800 2 1.6
P03 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 509 4 2.1
TOWER CANT = 20cm
TOTAL 18.7
350cm (AWAY FROM SPAN)
L01 76x76x6 4346 4 17.38
175cm SADDLE
2-L02 SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 L02 76x76x6 3231 2 6.46
SEE DETAIL 2
TOTAL 23.84
SEE DETAIL 1 PL01 PL 13x90 250 4 9.2
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
PL03 PL 10x250 274 2 10.8
300cm
PL04 BENT PL 6x240 483 8 43.7
PL05 PL 6x100 200 6 5.7
PL06 PL 6x100 100 3 1.4
L01 PL07 PL 6x100 420 4 7.9
TOTAL 84.8
QUANTITY
ITEM
TOWER LEG (PER TOWER)
750cm
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 BOLT/NUT/WASHERS (19mm), 75mm 16
300cm
NOTES:
L01 GUIDELINES.
TOWER BASE ASSEMBLY.
TOWER BASE 4. GREASE HINGE PIPE (P02) PRIOR TO SETTING AND ERECTING TOWER.
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 5. ALL COMPONENTS TO BE PAINTED AFTER FABRICATION.
TOWER APPROACH

SIDE OF TOWER
20cm
NUT
PL06

NOTES: ℄ TOWER LEG ℄ TOWER LEG
7.7cm 7cm
(TYP) 16mm Ø x 12.5cm BOLT PL02
16mm Ø BOLT
℄ TOWER LEG (TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
6 PL03
CUT SLOTS FOR SADDLE PL03
P01 TO PL03
6
P01 TO PL01 PL01

6 6 PL01 TO PL03 PL01
6
PL05 P01 P01
300cm
-
P01
-
B
6 LEG & SYM. ℄ TOWER LEG
PL05
300cm
750cm
6cm PL04
(TYP)
P02
P02
TYP PL04
PL05 6
P03
PL04
P03
FILL P02 WITH 5cm
P02 CONCRETE
55cm
P03
℄ HINGE PL07
TYP
6
PL07
15cm
40cm FILL P03 WITH
6 CONCRETE
80cm 26cm
52cm
-
1.6cm 1.6cm 15cm
25cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
8.2cm 8.2cm 27.4cm
2cm CHAMFER
(TYP)
9cm
9cm
cm
10cm
5cm
R21.5
⅊ 10mm
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
R21.5
cm
R21.5
⅊ 13mm
cm
⅊ 13mm
R22.5cm
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.) PL02 PL03
PL01
750cm
750cm
20cm 10cm
1cm
R1
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R0
6cm
(TY 8cm
180°
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
4cm
4cm
(TYP) Ø2.1cm
5cm
10cm
10cm
1cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R1
TRIM TAPER 36.8cm
PL05 PL06
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
42cm
5cm
80cm
24cm
14cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm ⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
PL04 PL07
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
434.6cm
P02
3.5cm 217.3cm
R1
(TYP)
1.7
cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L01 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
323.1cm
3.5cm 161.6cm
50.9cm
43.3cm
(TYP)
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
P03
(TYP)
3.5cm
BILL OF MATERIALS
P01 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 8000 2 16.0
TOWER CANT = 20cm P02 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 800 2 1.6
350cm (AWAY FROM SPAN) P03 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 509 4 2.1
175cm SADDLE TOTAL 19.7

2-L02 SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 SEE DETAIL 2 L01 76x76x6 3748 6 22.49
L02 76x76x6 3231 2 6.46
TOTAL 28.95
SEE DETAIL 1
PL01 PL 13x90 250 4 9.2
200cm
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
PL03 PL 10x250 274 2 10.8
L01
PL04 BENT PL 6x240 483 8 43.7
PL05 PL 6x100 200 8 7.5
PL06 PL 6x100 100 4 1.9
200cm
PL07 PL 6x100 420 4 7.9
TOTAL 87.1
L01 QUANTITY
ITEM
800cm
TOWER LEG (PER TOWER)
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 BOLT/NUT/WASHERS (19mm), 75mm 16
200cm
L01 NOTES:
GUIDELINES.
TOWER APPROACH

SIDE OF TOWER
20cm
NUT
PL06

8 METER STEEL TOWER
℄ TOWER LEG
7.7cm 7cm
CUT SLOTS FOR SADDLE (TYP) 16mm Ø x 12.5cm BOLT PL02
16mm Ø BOLT
(TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
6 6 PL03
PL03
200cm
PL05 P01 TO PL03
6
P01 TO PL01 PL01

6 PL01 TO PL03 PL01
6
P01 P01
200cm
PL05 -
-
B
P01 19mm Ø BOLTS ℄ TOWER 19mm Ø BOLTS
LEG & SYM. ℄ TOWER LEG
800cm
6 PL04 PL04 19mm Ø x 7.5cm BOLTS
200cm
PL05 PL04
6cm P02
(TYP) P02
℄ HINGE ℄ HINGE
TYP PL04
6 6
P03
PL05 PL04
P03
5cm
FILL P02 WITH
P02
55cm
CONCRETE P03
PL07
℄ HINGE TYP
6
PL07
15cm
FILL P03 WITH
CONCRETE
40cm 26cm
6
80cm 52cm
-
8 METER STEEL TOWER
1.6cm 1.6cm 15cm
25cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
8.2cm 8.2cm 27.4cm
2cm CHAMFER
(TYP)
9cm
9cm
cm
10cm
5cm
R21.5
⅊ 10mm
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
R21.5
cm
R21.5
⅊ 13mm
cm
⅊ 13mm
R22.5cm
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.) PL02 PL03
PL01
800cm
800cm
20cm 10cm
1cm
R1
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R0
6cm
(TY 8cm
180°
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
4cm
4cm
(TYP) Ø2.1cm
5cm
10cm
10cm
1cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R1
TRIM TAPER 36.8cm
PL05 PL06
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
42cm
5cm
80cm
24cm
14cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm ⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
PL04 PL07
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
374.8cm
P02
3.5cm 187.4cm
R1
(TYP)
1.7
cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L01 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
323.1cm
3.5cm 161.6cm
50.9cm
43.3cm
(TYP)
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
P03
(TYP)
3.5cm
8 METER STEEL TOWER
BILL OF MATERIALS
TOWER CANT = 20cm P01 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 8500 2 17.0
350cm (AWAY FROM SPAN)
P02 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 800 2 1.6
175cm SADDLE P03 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 509 4 2.1
2-L02 SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 SEE DETAIL 2 TOTAL 20.7
L01 76x76x6 3854 6 23.12
L02 76x76x6 3231 2 6.46
SEE DETAIL 1
TOTAL 29.58
220cm
PL01 PL 13x90 250 4 9.2
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
L01
PL03 PL 10x250 274 2 10.8
PL04 BENT PL 6x240 483 8 43.7
PL05 PL 6x100 200 8 7.5
PL06 PL 6x100 100 4 1.9
220cm
PL07 PL 6x100 420 4 7.9
TOTAL 87.1
850cm
L01 QUANTITY
TOWER LEG ITEM
(PER TOWER)
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2
220cm
NOTES:
GUIDELINES.
TOWER APPROACH

SIDE OF TOWER
20cm
NUT
PL06

℄ TOWER LEG
7.7cm 7cm
16mm Ø BOLT
(TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
6 6 PL03
PL03
220cm
PL05 P01 TO PL03
6
P01 TO PL01 PL01

6 PL01 TO PL03 PL01
6
P01 P01
220cm
PL05 -
-
B
850cm
220cm
PL05 PL04
6cm P02
(TYP) P02
℄ HINGE ℄ HINGE
TYP PL04
6 6
P03
PL05 PL04
P03
5cm
FILL P02 WITH
P02
55cm
CONCRETE P03
PL07
℄ HINGE TYP
6
PL07
15cm
FILL P03 WITH
CONCRETE
40cm 26cm
6
80cm 52cm
-
1.6cm 1.6cm 15cm
25cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
8.2cm 8.2cm 27.4cm
2cm CHAMFER
(TYP)
9cm
9cm
cm
10cm
5cm
R21.5
⅊ 10mm
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
R21.5
cm
R21.5
⅊ 13mm
cm
⅊ 13mm
R22.5cm
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.) PL02 PL03
PL01
850cm
850cm
20cm 10cm
1cm
R1
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R0
6cm
(TY 8cm
180°
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
4cm
4cm
(TYP) Ø2.1cm
5cm
10cm
10cm
1cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R1
TRIM TAPER 36.8cm
PL05 PL06
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
42cm
5cm
80cm
24cm
14cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm ⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
PL04 PL07
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
385.4cm
P02
3.5cm 192.7cm
R1
(TYP)
1.7
cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L01 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
323.1cm
3.5cm 161.6cm
50.9cm
43.3cm
(TYP)
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
P03
(TYP)
3.5cm
BILL OF MATERIALS
TOWER CANT = 20cm
(AWAY FROM SPAN) ITEM SIZE (mm) LENGTH (mm) QTY. LENGTH (m)
350cm
P01 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 9000 2 18.0
175cm SADDLE
2-L02 SEE TOWER DETAILS 2 P02 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 800 2 1.6
SEE DETAIL 2
P03 PIPE 219.1 O.D. / 202.7 I.D. 509 4 2.1
TOTAL 21.7
SEE DETAIL 1 L01 76x76x6 3967 6 23.8
L02 76x76x6 3231 2 6.46
240cm
TOTAL 30.26
PL01 PL 13x90 250 4 9.2
L01
PL02 PL13x100 150 4 6.1
PL03 PL 10x250 274 2 10.8
PL04 BENT PL 6x240 483 8 43.7
PL05 PL 6x100 200 8 7.5
240cm
PL06 PL 6x100 100 4 1.9
PL07 PL 6x100 420 4 7.9
900cm
L01 TOTAL 87.1
QUANTITY
TOWER LEG ITEM
(PER TOWER)
SEE TOWER DETAILS 2
240cm
NOTES:
GUIDELINES.
TOWER APPROACH

SIDE OF TOWER
20cm
NUT
PL06

9 METER STEEL TOWER
℄ TOWER LEG
7.7cm 7cm
16mm Ø BOLT
(TYP)
5mm CHAMFER INSIDE
6 6 PL03
PL03
240cm
PL05 P01 TO PL03
6
P01 TO PL01 PL01

6 PL01 TO PL03 PL01
6
P01 P01
240cm
PL05 -
-
B
900cm
240cm
PL05 PL04
6cm P02
(TYP) P02
℄ HINGE ℄ HINGE
TYP PL04
6 6
P03
PL05 PL04
P03
5cm
FILL P02 WITH
P02
55cm
CONCRETE P03
PL07
℄ HINGE TYP
6
PL07
15cm
FILL P03 WITH
CONCRETE
40cm 26cm
6
80cm 52cm
TOWER LEG -
9 METER STEEL TOWER
1.6cm 1.6cm 15cm
25cm 8cm 3.5cm
3.5cm
8.2cm 8.2cm 27.4cm
2cm CHAMFER
(TYP)
9cm
9cm
cm
10cm
5cm
R21.5
⅊ 10mm
Ø1.8cm (TYP)
R21.5
cm
R21.5
⅊ 13mm
cm
⅊ 13mm
R22.5cm
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.) PL02 PL03
PL01
900cm
900cm
20cm 10cm
1cm
R1
12cm 4cm 5cm
4cm
.
P)
R0
6cm
(TY 8cm
180°
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
4cm
4cm
(TYP) Ø2.1cm
5cm
10cm
10cm
1cm
⅊ 6mm ⅊ 6mm
R1
TRIM TAPER 36.8cm
PL05 PL06
3.5cm
P01 (TYP)
42cm
5cm
80cm
24cm
14cm
10cm
⅊ 6mm
Ø2.1cm ⅊ 6mm
(TYP)
PL04 PL07
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
396.7cm
P02
3.5cm 198.4cm
R1
(TYP)
1.7
cm
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L01 ∠ 76x76x6
(TYP)
3.5cm
323.1cm
3.5cm 161.6cm
50.9cm
43.3cm
(TYP)
8" PIPE (219 O.D. / 203 I.D.)
Ø2.1cm (TYP)
(3 TOTAL) L02 ∠ 76x76x6
P03
(TYP)
3.5cm
9 METER STEEL TOWER
℄ TOWER
ATTACH RESTRAINT DECK SECTION NEAR TOWER DECK SECTION NEAR MID-SPAN
CABLE TO ANCHOR MAIN CABLE
BLOCK
RESTRAINT CABLE 8mm ( 5 16") Ø (TYP) RESTRAINT CABLE (TYP),
(REQUIRED EACH SIDE) CLAMP AS CLOSE TO TOP
CLAMP AS POSSIBLE
10mm (3 8") Ø (TYP) -
A
SUSPENDER (TYPE 1) SEE SUSPENDER SCHEDULE FOR
10mm (3 8") Ø TYPE 1 AND TYPE 2 CUT LENGTHS.
SUSPENDER
(TYP)
WIRE ROPE CLIP
10mm (3 8") Ø (TYP)
SUSPENDER (TYPE 2) SUSPENDER (TYPE 1)

10mm (3 8") Ø 10mm (3 8") Ø
HAND CABLE CLAMP MESH FENCING
8mm (5 16") Ø (TYP) 10mm (3 8") Ø (TYP) HAND CABLE (TYP)
1 MESH FENCING (TYP)
5cm (2 1 2") Ø PIPE,

150cm LONG 5
2
20cm
3 100cm MIN. -
(5) 20cm x 5cm DECK PLANKS B
TIMBER DECKING
100cm 1cm +/- 0.5cm
SPA. STEEL CROSSBEAM
TYP CROSSBEAM WITH TIMBER NAILER (TYP)
20cm x 5cm x 110cm TIMBER SILL
EMBED PIPE 40cm INTO LAG SCREW (TYP)

15cm Ø BLOCKOUT STEEL CROSSBEAM ℄ BRIDGE
ELEVATION
-
SECTION A
SUSPENDER
TIMBER DECKING
CLAMP NOTES:
10mm (3 8") Ø LAG SCREW (TYP) 1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR
LEGEND:
1 - EYE BOLT, WELDED CHAIN LINK OR SIMILAR EYE FOR HAND CABLE
STEEL CROSSBEAM TIMBER NAILER 2 - CONSTRUCT RAMP 20cm BELOW TOP OF PEDESTAL
SEE WALKWAY DETAILS 2 - SEE BRIDGE DECK DETAILS 2 3 - WALKWAY TOPPING SLAB TO BE CAST AFTER DECKING IS COMPLETED
VIEW B 4 - ATTACH BOTTOM OF FENCE TO SIDE OR TOP OF DECK WITH 1" U-NAILS
5 - ATTACH TOP OF FENCE TO HAND CABLE WITH 4mm TIE WIRE @ 25cm MAX
Produced by: MODIFICATIONS MUST BE APPROVED BY BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY'S DESIGN TEAM.
WALKWAY DETAILS 1
1031 33rd Street, Suite 170 ANYONE USING THIS PLAN SHOULD VERIFY THE CALCULATIONS ACCORDING TO SITE SPECIFIC CONDITIONS AND LOCAL
Revision : September 2016 W01
℄ TOWER
BILL OF MATERIALS
STEEL (PER CROSSBEAM)
LAG SCREW 10mm ( 3 8 ") x 75mm (3") LONG (TYP) LENGTH
(2) AT EACH END AND (1) AT CENTER OF PLANK ITEM SIZE (mm) QUANTITY TOTAL (m)
SEE NOTE 2 (mm)
PL10 15x30 15 1 0.015
L03 ∠44x44x6 1200 2 2.4
D01 25 Ø 100 2 0.2
45cm ITEM TOTAL
TIMBER NAILER (20cm x 5cm x 110cm) 1
LAG SCREW (10mm) 50mm 6
70cm
℄ BRIDGE
7cm 4cm
2cm GAP 50cm

15cm
20cm
5cm (2 1 2") Ø PIPE
15cm
2.5cm
15cm
5.5cm
4.5cm
5.5cm 5.5cm
100cm TIMBER PLANKS 200cm TIMBER DECKING
AT START OF DECKING STAGGERED 100cm (TYP)
15cm
15cm
H (SEE SUSPENDER SCHEDULE)

H (SEE SUSPENDER SCHEDULE)
15cm
15cm
-
ELEVATION
C 4cm 4cm
5cm 110cm
20cm x 5cm TIMBER NAILER
(TYP) PL10
D01 (TYP)
13 (6)
TYP TYPE 1 - SUSPENDER TYPE 2 - SUSPENDER
(10mm Ø DEFORMED REINFORCING BAR) (10mm Ø DEFORMED REINFORCING BAR)
LAG SCREW 10mm ( 3 8") Ø L03 TYP
6
50mm (2") LONG (TYP) 20cm
SEE NOTE 2 ELEVATION - CROSSBEAM TIMBER NAILER
120cm D01
5cm
16cm 44cm ℄ CROSSBEAM AND SYM. 1.5cm

℄ BAR PL10
L03
(TYP)
2.5cm
LAG SCREW
L03
-
SECTION C
L03 PL10 TIMBER D01 (TYP) NOTES:

1.5cm
13mm (1 2") Ø PREDRILLED HOLES (TYP), 1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR CONSTRUCTION
3 EACH ANGLE (6 TOTAL) NAILER
GUIDELINES.
PLAN - CROSSBEAM 2. USE 8mm ( 5 16") PILOT HOLE IN NAILER AND 10mm ( 3 8") PILOT HOLE IN DECKING.
WALKWAY DETAILS 2
Revision : September 2016 W02
-
A
℄ BRIDGE
CAST WALKWAY BUILD-UP 200cm
AFTER DECKING COMPLETE ℄ TOWER
CONCRETE CAP TIMBER DECKING 100cm
10cm
*MAX SLOPE 3H:1V
30cm
3* CONCRETE CAP
GL 1 GL
30cm
100cm
30cm
70cm
(TYP)
(TYP)
BOTTOM OF STONE
MASONRY WALL
ROCK/GROUT FILL TOWER TOWER ROCK/GROUT STONE MASONRY
FOOTING FOOTING FILL WALL (TYP)
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
℄ TOWER
30cm WALL
(FULL LENGTH)
PEDESTAL (TYP)
STONE MASONRY WALL

FLUSH WITH FRONT FACE
OF PEDESTALS
200cm
ROCK/GROUT
FILL
TOWER FOOTING NOTES:

STONE MASONRY WALL 1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR
2. DIG A 30cm TRENCH IN EXISTING GROUND FOR BASE LAYER OF WALL.
IN-SITU SOIL BETWEEN THE TRENCH MAY REMAIN.
3. CONSTRUCT THE RAMP WALLS IN 100cm LIFTS. BACKFILL WITH STONE,
GRAVEL, AND SAND ENSURING STONE IS TAMPED INTO PLACE PRIOR
TO BEGINNING THE NEXT WALL SECTION.
PLAN 4. NEITHER SOIL NOR ORGANIC MATERIAL SHALL BE USED FOR BACKFILL.
5. THE FINAL LAYER OF THE APPROACH RAMP SHALL BE A LAYER OF
COMPACTED GRAVEL AND SAND 10cm THICK FOLLOWED BY A 10cm
LAYER OF CONCRETE.
APPROACH RAMP DETAILS
1 METER PEDESTAL
Revision : September 2016 R01
-
A
℄ BRIDGE
CAST WALKWAY BUILD-UP 200cm
AFTER DECKING COMPLETE ℄ TOWER
TIMBER DECKING 100cm
10cm
CONCRETE CAP
CONCRETE CAP
MAX SLOPE 3H:1V 30cm
3
30cm
(TYP) 30cm
1
150cm
GL (TYP) GL
120cm
ROCK/GROUT FILL BOTTOM OF STONE
MASONRY WALL
TOWER TOWER ROCK/GROUT STONE MASONRY
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
℄ TOWER
30cm WALL
(FULL LENGTH)
PEDESTAL (TYP)
STONE MASONRY WALL

OF PEDESTALS
200cm
TOWER FOOTING
NOTES:
STONE MASONRY WALL ROCK/GROUT 1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR
FILL CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES.
2. DIG A 30cm TRENCH IN EXISTING GROUND FOR BASE LAYER OF WALL.
LAYER OF CONCRETE.
APPROACH RAMP DEATILS
1.5 METER PEDESTAL
-
A
℄ TOWER 200cm
TIMBER DECKING 100cm ℄ BRIDGE
10cm
CAST WALKWAY BUILD-UP
AFTER DECKING COMPLETE
CONCRETE CAP
CONCRETE CAP
30cm
MAX SLOPE 3H:1V 30cm
90cm
(TYP)
3 (TYP)
200cm
1
30cm
50cm
GL (TYP) GL
50cm
80cm
(TYP)

MASONRY WALL
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
℄ TOWER
50cm WALL
EXCEEDS 100cm
ABOVE GROUND)
30cm WALL
(WHERE WALL HEIGHT
(FULL LENGTH)
PEDESTAL (TYP)
STONE MASONRY WALL

OF PEDESTALS
200cm
TOWER FOOTING NOTES:
1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR
STONE MASONRY WALL ROCK/GROUT CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES.
FILL 2. DIG A 30cm TRENCH IN EXISTING GROUND FOR BASE LAYER OF WALL.
LAYER OF CONCRETE.
2 METER PEDESTAL
-
A 200cm
℄ TOWER
TIMBER DECKING 100cm ℄ BRIDGE
10cm
CAST WALKWAY BUILD-UP
AFTER DECKING COMPLETE CONCRETE CAP
CONCRETE CAP 30cm 30cm
90cm
(TYP) (TYP)
MAX SLOPE 3H:1V
3
250cm
50cm 50cm
1
30cm
(TYP) (TYP)
GL GL
130cm
MASONRY WALL
-
ELEVATION SECTION A
℄ TOWER
50cm WALL
EXCEEDS 100cm
ABOVE GROUND)
PEDESTAL (TYP)
30cm WALL
(WHERE WALL HEIGHT
(FULL LENGTH)
STONE MASONRY WALL
OF PEDESTALS
200cm
NOTES:
1. SEE BRIDGES TO PROSPERITY BRIDGE BUILDER MANUAL FOR
STONE MASONRY WALL TOWER FOOTING CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES.
ROCK/GROUT 2. DIG A 30cm TRENCH IN EXISTING GROUND FOR BASE LAYER OF WALL.
FILL IN-SITU SOIL BETWEEN THE TRENCH MAY REMAIN.
LAYER OF CONCRETE.
2.5 METER PEDESTAL
Chapter 3
Suspension Bridge Construction
Section 1 - Construction Overview | Page 136

Section 2 - Culture of Safety | Page 138
Section 3 - Quality Control | Page 147
Section 4 - Materials and Tools | Page 149
Section 5 - Concrete and Masonry | Page 156
Section 6 - Construction | Page 161
Introduction
Bridges to Prosperity’s goal is to provide a construction process that results in safe and quality suspension bridges. Health and safety
during construction and after completion of the bridge is the top priority.
There are six sections in Chapter 3: Construction Guide, structured as follows:

• Section 1: Construction Overview
• Section 2: Culture of Safety
• Section 3: Quality Control
• Section 4: Materials and Tools
• Section 5: Concrete and Masonry
• Section 6: Construction
Refer to the following areas, as necessary:

• Volume 1: Project Development
• Volume 3, Chapter 1: Suspension Bridge Design
• Volume 3, Chapter 2: Suspension Bridge Drawings

No representations or warranties are implied or expressed herein. In consideration of this manual being provided free to others,
provided herein.
Chameau, Haiti

SCOPE
The guidelines of this chapter are intended for the construction of standard suspension bridges, from the initial layout to completion.
The primary goal during bridge construction is the health and safety of not only those building the structure, but also those who will
use the bridge for years to come. Section 2: Culture of Safety presents the B2P Safety System and discusses the important aspects
of a Health and Safety Plan.
Inherent in the goal of safety is to produce the highest quality bridge through careful material selection and construction processes
proven to yield long-lasting structures. Quality Control activities such as materials testing and storage, dimension verification, and
photo inventories are a few of the Quality Control activities presented in Section 3: Quality Control in order to maximize the lifespan
of the bridge assure the structure meets the design requirements and minimize construction delays and additional costs that may
arise from errors.
Section 4: Materials and Tools walks through each of the construction materials expected to be used on a suspension bridge project
along with where they may be sourced. Section 4 also provides a list of construction tools to aid in project planning. Section 5:
Concrete, Grout, and Mortar provides instructions for mixing, placing, and curing each of these materials along with safety and
quality control guidelines.
The actual construction sequence and processes are presented in Section 6: Construction. This section is to be used with the
standard drawings from Chapter 2 as selected by using the design process in Chapter 1. Take note that every bridge construction
site is different and limitations may arise. For situations falling outside of the standard parameters and conditions, the construction
process of this manual may be applied with additional action where required. Figure 2.1 shows a typical suspension bridge section
and terminology found throughout this Chapter.
Figure 9.1 – Bridge Terminology

CONSTRUCTION OVERVIEW
The following is an overview of the construction sequence along with anticipated durations for each activity:
Material Collection
Time required: two weeks to several
months
Chameau, Haiti Chameau, Haiti

Construction Layout
Excavation
El Corozo, Nicaragua
Footings
Time required: one to two weeks
Lura, Panama
Pedestals
Lura, Panama
Ramps
Lura, Panama
Anchors
Time required: two to four weeks
Las Calderas, Nicaragua
Towers
Time required: two to three days
Lura, Panama
Cable Hoisting
Time required: two days
Lura, Panama
Walkway
Time required: five to eight days
Lura, Panama
Completion
Time required: one day
Gasura, Rwanda

2.1 Overview
The safety of workers in the site vicinity is the primary focus during the planning and construction phases. A strong safety
culture is a product of shared safety values, attitudes, goals and practices where commitment, communication, and planning
occur on a daily basis. It is important that all personnel support one another in safe work practices on the bridge site.
The safety system presented below was developed by Bridges to Prosperity to help bridge project implementers understand
the principles of safety. The following safety practices are guidelines taken from the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) to aid in safe builds. Because these suggested practices are by no means exhaustive, please
reference OSHA and other safety references to further develop site specific practices to execute a safe bridge build.
The B2P Safety System is comprised of the following six elements:
Leadership
Safety is a function of leadership. As a result, safety must start
with leadership and be consistent throughout. Expectations need
to be set and met by all people on the team without exception. It
is recommended that a safety leadership role, such as a Safety
Manager, be established to monitor and enforce safety policies
established for the bridge construction.
Education
On most projects, each person brings a different level of safety
training and experience, and it is essential that each individual
on the work site can effectively identify hazards and know
the best measures to protect themselves. A bridge project
is an opportunity for safety-educated workers to teach less
knowledgeable workers how to be safe on a work site. This
includes both local community members and visiting volunteers.
Project managers, safety managers, or foremen should organize training sessions to ensure all personnel thoroughly
understand the hazards associated with all tasks and how those hazards can be mitigated.
Each worker’s health has equal importance. Because it is possible that language barriers and cultural differences will
require more time to be spent on training, be sensitive to those working on the bridge site and execute training in a manner
that is culturally appropriate.
Communication
Communication is paramount to a good culture of safety as a lack of communication or miscommunication between workers
can result in a high potential for injury. A project manager, safety manager, or foreman should ensure that all workers
know and accept the safety requirements. Safety briefings and discussions must be thoroughly communicated in the local
language to any community members for the task they will undertake. A language barrier should never be grounds for
exclusion of community members in a construction task.
Planning
Thorough planning is critical to achieving two goals of a robust safety plan:
• Eliminate incidents and problems that can create disruptions in work.

• Increase efficiency by creating a Health and Safety Plan and safe work environment.

Evaluation and Modification

It is important to continually evaluate both conditions and actions on a work site since they are both always changing. If any
of the following situations occur, it is important that those involved stop to discuss them as a team:
• New volunteers on site who were not present for the daily safety meeting
• Construction steps that seem to appear unsafe
• Near hit: an event that did not result in injury, but had the potential to occur
• Changes or modifications from the daily construction or safety plan
Reinforcement
Individuals frequently choose safe behavior as a result of either positive activators or consequences. It is important that all
workers receive proper feedback from everyone on site.
Near Hits
A near hit is an incident that was narrowly avoided and can provide on-site lessons without consequences.
Many people do not report near hits for a fear of punishment or lack of understanding of it’s importance.
Reporting near hits is a positive procedure that can allow changes to prevent future injury or even a fatality.
The information gathered from near hits can be used to modify bridge building procedures in order to
avoid similar dangerous situations in the future. Bridges to Prosperity’s goal is to have a system where
reporting near hits can be done effectively and efficiently. If these are not reported, someone else could be
injured unnecessarily.
HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN

Though site precautionary measures, such as the use of personal protective equipment or fall protection, are critical to
safety on any work site, developing a robust and comprehensive site specific safety plan is the most important aspect of
ensuring a culture of safety on a bridge site.
Safety Planning:
Planning for project safety should take place before breaking ground and should encompass a broad perspective of a
culture of safety throughout the duration of the project. Considerations should include the location of water, latrines and
other sanitation needs for workers, the location of the nearest emergency medical facility, modes of transportation to
emergency medical facilities, relations with the local community, resources that may be available for safety training for
workers, etc. Proper preparation and planning includes ensuring that there is a full inventory of safety equipment on site
before the project begins and allotting for an adequate schedule to complete construction in a safe manner.
Gaseke, Rwanda San Albino, Nicaragua Butare, Rwanda

Work Zone Safety:

A good way to provide a safe work site is to establish a work zone perimeter. Personnel entering the work zone should be
educated in the safety requirements and PPE needed for the activities being performed. This perimeter is in place to protect
members of the construction team as well as members of the public. It is important to keep the work area clean and clear of
hazards to avoid unnecessary incidents. To minimize the risk of injury to observers and the general public, individuals who
are not involved in the construction process should be kept clear of the work zone perimeter.
It can be helpful to discuss when potential hazards, such as harmful plants or animals, are identified on or near a site. On
site, construction safety is more effective if the work crew is educated on possible hazards, how to avoid injury, and the
first-aid procedures to be used if an injury does occur.
Daily Safety Plan:

Setting work objectives and determining how a team can minimize risks and hazards while completing those work objectives
are important to daily on-site safety. This type of planning should be done every day with the workers who will be on site.
The plan should consider the specific tasks planned for the day, recognize any potential hazards, and determine what safety
measures need to be taken. Frequent and regular inspections of the equipment used, the materials, and the job site should
be included.
At the end of the day, conducting another safety review to discuss the results of the daily safety plan and what could be
done to make the site safer is a great way to promote a culture of safety. This includes completing and compiling near hit
and incident reports.
Activity Level Safety Plan:

Individual activity level planning should be performed on a constant basis by considering how each worker is going to
execute an activity in a safe manner and how that activity relates to the daily work plan that was devised at the beginning
of the day. Every worker should be encouraged to recognize potential hazards and to voice their concerns directly with
other members on site, as well as feel empowered to stop work to regroup and discuss a potential dangerous situation if
encountered. Workers should never work alone on site and people and procedures need to be in place to locate and recover
an individual should one become incapacitated.
Documentation:
Recording and reviewing plans, inspections, and reviews can aid in the development of any project or organization’s culture
of safety. The following are examples of standardized forms that can be utilized to aid in safe construction throughout the
project as well as future projects:
• Daily Work Plan

• Daily Site Inspection
• Daily Excavation Inspection
• Fall Protection Inspection
• Work Area Hazards
• End of Day Review
• Incident Report
Examples of these forms can be found in Appendix 3.1.

2.2 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
The goal of a safety program is to eliminate construction hazards through engineering and safe work practices. However,
because not all hazards can be eliminated, personal protective equipment is necessary and worn to act as the last line of
defense against injury or illness. There are many different kinds of PPE depending on the work and the equipment involved.
It is important that all PPE be kept clean and properly maintained and all equipment should be inventoried and discarded
if not functioning properly. Cleaning is particularly important for eye and face protection where dirty or fogged lenses could
impair vision. Ensure multiple types of PPE are compatible if worn together and that defective or damaged PPE is not
used, but rather immediately discarded and replaced. Periodically, as well as when changing activates, reevaluate the
appropriateness of previously selected PPE.
Hard Hats
Hard hats are most important when there are possibilities of striking low hanging
objects, being struck by an object being carried or transported, or falling
objects. Even if these hazards are not present, it is still strongly recommended
to wear a hard hat while within the marked work zone perimeter.
Safety Glasses
Safety glasses must be worn when any of the following are present:
• Dust and other flying particles

• Corrosive gases, vapors, and liquids
• Sparks from cutting metal
• Intense light from welding
• Possible means of impact or impalement to the eyes
Face Shield
Face shields provide more complete protection of the entire face than safety
glasses and are to be worn when there is exposure to dusts, splashes or
sprays of hazardous liquids or materials. The face shield does not provide
a great amount of protection from impacts and as a result, should be worn in
conjunction with safety glasses. It is a requirement to wear a face shield when
cutting reinforcing bars or cables and during other activities involving a grinder.

Hearing Protection
Hearing protection should be worn when power tools, generators, chainsaws,
jackhammers, or loud equipment are used as it can mitigate loud noises and
prevent hearing damage or loss. There are many different types of hearing
protection, including ear plugs, canal caps and ear muffs. If ear plugs are used,
take care that they remain clean and are replaced regularly.
Foot Protection
Work boots or closed toe shoes should be worn at all times while on bridge
sites, but are most important when heavy falling objects, sharp objects, hot
surfaces and/or wet surfaces are present as well as when mixing or placing
concrete. Steel toed boots are highly recommended as they provide additional
protection and can prevent broken bones or bruises.
Hand Protection
Gloves can protect hands from cuts, crushing, abrasions, hot and cold temperatures, and chemicals. They can also provide
additional grip and prevent blisters. Gloves should fit snugly and be chosen based on activity as there are different types
of gloves for various types of applications. Leather, fabric, coated fabric, and rubber are some of the more common types.
Leather gloves are best for protecting against cuts, burns and heat while fabric and coated fabric gloves are best for
protecting against dirt and abrasion and rubber gloves for protecting against chemical burns. It may be safer to remove hand
protection when operating circulating power tools as gloves or loose clothing may become caught in the rotating equipment.

2.3 Hand and Power Tool Safety
Tools can be very dangerous, and the likelihood of injury increases when tools are used improperly. This section will discuss
the hazards associated with tools and ways to prevent possible hazards.
Best Practices:
• Inspect tools before use and operate according to manufacturers’ instructions
• Materials being cut or drilled can be secured via clamps or vice grips to provide both hands to be free to operate
the tool
• Assure that tools are kept clean and sharp as this allows the tool to operate properly and can prevent malfunctions
• Operate within the intended use of the tool
• Ensure that the correct PPE is used with each tool and use guards if possible
• Consider what clothing is worn; gloves, loose fitting clothing, jewelry, or hair can get caught in moving parts
• Store tools in a dry place
• Don’t use in wet locations unless the tool is approved for use in wet conditions
• Keep work areas well lit
• Tools should be safely tied off to prevent them from falling when working at heights
• Unsafe, broken, or damaged tools shall be marked as such and removed from site
HAND TOOL SAFETY

Basic hand tools are most likely used on a daily basis on all work sites. When working side by side with local community
members, a vast array of tools in various states of repair may surface. It is imperative that the tools being used by visiting
volunteers and local community members are inspected to ensure that they are in proper working condition and will not
create unnecessary hazards on site.
Winch Safety
erecting towers and hoisting cables on suspension bridge projects. These are
some of the most critical steps in the construction process and are potentially
the more dangerous. Special care needs to be taken in the selection and
use of a winch as any failure can lead to a cable slip, which is extremely
dangerous. A cable that slips free of a winch can whip out of control and cause
significant injury. A winch should never be used for anything other than its
intended purpose.
Lura, Panama
POWER TOOL SAFETY

The use of electricity adds additional safety risks when using power tools. Power tools necessitate that extra care is taken in
not only using those power tools, but in making sure that all personnel using those tools are sufficiently trained and aware of
the safety requirements of each device. For some workers, it may be their first exposure to using power tools, and naturally,
they may be eager to help and learn new construction methods even though they may be unfamiliar with the hazards of
such tools. For first time users of power tools, clear instruction and close supervision should be provided.
General Rules for Power Tool Safety:

• Disconnect tools when not in use, before servicing, and before
cleaning or changing accessories or guards
• Consider attire when operating power tools: gloves, loose clothing,
and jewelry can get caught in moving parts
• Remove damaged electric tools and mark them “DO NOT USE” in
both English and the local language, and communicate the meaning of
this to all workers
• Dispose of damaged tools that are not able to be repaired
• Do not hold the switch button while carrying a plugged in power tool Lura, Panama

General Rules for Corded Power Tool Usage:

• Keep cords and hoses away from heat, oil, water, and sharp edges
• When possible, use tools that are properly grounded and that are
double insulated
• Portable tools should not be carried by the cord
• Do not hoist or lower power tools by their electrical cords
• Do not yank a cord or hose to disconnect it
• Ensure that cords do not present a tripping hazard
Lura, Panama
• Keep all cords away from work being performed
General Rules for Using a Power Generator:

• Ensure that the generator is rated for the amount of power required by the tools it’s powering
• Generators must be stored in a dry location at all times
• Do not operate a generator indoors and allow for proper ventilation to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning
• Do not operate the generator near combustible material
• Ensure that all extension cords are properly rated and grounded
• Make sure that the generator is regularly maintained as improper maintenance can lead to a malfunction
2.4 Fall Protection
OVERVIEW
Fall prevention is a series of steps taken to mitigate the risk of an unintentional fall while accessing or working at heights.
This is applicable when working near cliffs, constructing the bridge walkway and when working on the pedestals and towers
of a suspension bridge project. All team members should be made aware of site activities which involve fall hazards.
Before working in a harness, workers should be trained in their use to ensure that the fall protection system is implemented
effectively. It is important that a method of recovery is established in the case that a worker has fallen and is caught
suspended from his or her fall protection.
Controlling Fall Exposures:

• Always try to eliminate the fall hazard
• Select appropriate fall protection systems
• Properly construct and install the fall protection systems
• Train workers in the proper selection, inspection, use, and maintenance of fall protection systems
• Supervise everyone on site wearing fall protection

CONSTRUCTING SAFE SCAFFOLDING

Scaffolding is required for the installation of the suspender assemblies of a suspension bridge. When using scaffolding,
ensure that the overall structure, working platforms, access, and stability are assessed before using the structure. Do not
place masonry blocks under scaffolding as a bearing surface, rather use solid pieces of wood which are better suited to
achieve a level and stable surface for a foundation. Bracing of the scaffolding using cable guy wires is required to help to
provide stability when working from the scaffolding and to prevent lateral movement and potential collapse while raising the
tower.
Figure 10.1 – Proper Scaffold Bearing Surface
TYPES OF FALL PROTECTION

Fall protection is necessary for anyone that is working 1.8 meters (6 feet) above the ground or higher. There are many types
and methods of fall protection that can be executed. Used together, these are the different types of fall protection elements
that are typically used when working on a suspension bridge project: harnesses, lanyards or self-retracting lifelines, and
anchorage points.
Another type of fall protection is fencing or guardrails. Installing these safety measures can mitigate the risk of a fall and
may allow workers greater mobility when working at heights.
Harnesses
Harnesses are devices that are worn over one’s clothing and are designed to catch and provide support when a fall occurs.
There is a main ring or “D-ring” on the harness that when worn properly, is located on the back between the shoulder blades.
The D-ring is connected to the lanyard or self-retracting lifeline and is what catches if a fall should occur. Harnesses must
be inspected before each use and if found to be deficient, must be labeled as such and taken out of service immediately.
Reference fall protection experts and the harness manufacturer’s specifications for procedures and inspection information.
General Fitting Rules:

• The D-ring must rest between the shoulder blades
• Straps should be snug while allowing full range of motion
• The chest strap should be across the breast bone
• Have someone else check the harness for twists in the straps
La Conga, Panama La Conga, Panama Lura, Panama

Lanyards
The simplest of connections from a harness to an anchorage point, lanyards
come in many different styles and lengths. It is important that the appropriate
type of fall protection is selected for a given activity. For example, if an individual
is working two meters above the ground falls and is using a two meter lanyard,
he or she would contact the ground before engaging the lanyard deeming it
ineffective. In this scenario, a shorter lanyard or self-retracting lifeline is more
appropriate.
Lura, Panama
Self-Retracting Lifeline
A self-retracting lifeline, also known as a retractable, inertia wheel or yo-yo,
can be used to connect a harness to an anchorage point. The added benefit of
these is that they function similarly to a seat belt. Pulled slowly, it will release
slack, but if pulled quickly the lifeline locks up, minimizing free-fall distance
to less than a meter. These lifelines work best in vertical applications. Do not
connect two retractable lifelines in a series as they are not designed to be
connected in this way and may not function properly if used as such. If used
in a more horizontal application, although the retractable will engage, it is
Gaseke, Rwanda
likely that the individual will swing. This is called a “swing fall” and can be very
dangerous if there are nearby obstacles that the individual might swing into.
Keep possible fall paths in mind when locating or designing an anchorage point.
Anchorage Points
Equally as important as the harness and the lanyard or self-retracting lifeline is
the anchorage point, or the point from which securing occurs. It is always best
to anchor to a point that is at or above the height of the D-ring of the harness
that it is convenient and easily accessible for the individual. Reference OSHA
for more information on designing anchorage points.
Gaseke, Rwanda
RESCUE PLAN
Proper fall protection not only works to mitigate falling risks, but also includes
a plan to safely rescue an individual after a fall. It is likely that an individual
that has fallen will not be able to pull himself/herself back to a safe position.
Also, when the individual is suspended in the harness, it does not take long
before the straps will start cutting off the circulation to one’s legs. Though some
harnesses have straps that the individual can put their feet into to help take
pressure off the leg straps, this only buys the victim a little more time. Having
a rescue plan ahead of time greatly increases the chance of recovering the
person before they go into shock. It may take more than one person to lift the
fallen individual, so it is important to plan accordingly.

3.1 Overview
Bridges to Prosperity is committed to providing quality to the communities served on every project. The quality objectives
are to provide work that is correct the first time and if incorrect, to rectify the situation in a timely manner. In order to
maximize the lifespan of the bridges, assure the structure meets the design requirements and minimize construction delays
and additional costs that may arise from errors, there should be effective measures of quality control.
Quality Control (QC) are those activities performed by the designer, construction team, or manufacturer to ensure and
document that a product meets the requirements of the design drawings and construction procedures set forth in this manual.
Activities may include dimension checking, construction procedures, materials handling, calibrations and maintenance of
equipment, shop drawing review, document control, and any sampling, testing, and inspection done for these purposes.
Quality control procedures should ensure that the work is done to the highest standards the first time.
3.2 Quality Control Activities
The following are general descriptions of quality control activities that may be enacted on a bridge project. Specific quality
control procedures for specific construction stages can be found in their respective descriptions in Section 6 of this chapter.
MATERIALS TESTING
When performing a bridge design, an engineer must designate values to strengths and densities of construction materials
as well as soil properties. Verifying that materials associated with the bridge design meet or exceed the values specified on
the design drawings is imperative to the safety of the structure. If a material does not meet the specified value, the capacity
and safety of the bridge may be reduced.
Materials testing may also be utilized to increase the efficiency of bridge designs by providing values to the design engineer
prior to completing the design. In lieu of specific values for a given project, the design engineer must make conservative
assumptions which may lead to increases quantities, costs, and construction time. In many cases, the material supplier may
be able to provide documents with materials specifications such as the yield strength of a reinforcing bar.
The following are material properties that should be verified with those stated on the drawings or in the calculations. If
testing is not possible, ensure that the assumed values are conservative and that the engineer is aware of the assumptions.
• Soil internal angle of friction

• Soil bearing capacity
• Concrete compressive strength
• Reinforcing bar yield strength
• Steel yield strength
• Cable ultimate breaking strength
• Timber flexural capacity and shear capacity
MATERIAL STORAGE
Once materials have been delivered to a project site, care must be taken to ensure the quality does not degrade. Proper
storage such as keeping cement in a clean, dry location or covering reinforcing bars to prevent rust will help each material
retain the desired properties. Careful placement of sand and gravel stock piles can reduce the amount of waste throughout
the project.

CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS
Generating construction checklist to be used for each stage of construction is good practice. This helps reduce oversight of
critical steps and allows work to progress smoothly and efficiently.
SURVEY EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION

Surveying equipment is used to lay out the bridge and measure the overall span length and difference in elevation. Knowing
these values is critical to the performance of the bridge design. As such, the surveying equipment should be calibrated using
manufacturer recommendations to ensure levelness and accuracy. Reference the equipment user’s guide for instructions
on equipment calibration.
VERIFYING DIMENSIONS
Throughout the construction process from initial layout to walkway installation, verifying the dimensions of what has been
marked or constructed can provide an intermediate level of quality as the project progresses. During each stage, dimensions
should be checked against those shown on the design drawings as the work is being completed. This includes confirming
that the bridge elements remain square to the centerline of the bridge. Doing so can mitigate the recognition of an error
during a later stage of construction, which may lead to costly modifications or in some cases demolition and reconstruction.
TOLERANCES
Tolerances are the permissible extent or limit of variation. In bridge construction, this limit of variation can be found in a
physical dimension or the property of a material. Bridge construction has inherent variability of both dimensions and material
properties. It is important that the designer and project manager be educated and aware of the permitted tolerances that a
project can withstand to achieve a quality and safe bridge.
Tolerances may vary greatly for different aspects of construction. For example, timber that is one centimeter less than the
thickness shown on the drawing for decking boards may not be acceptable whereas a span length that is one centimeter
less than what is specified has effectively no impact.
PHOTO INVENTORY
Documenting each stage and phase of construction with photos is good practice and required on Bridges to Prosperity
projects. Photos allow the construction team, designer, as well as future inspectors the ability to see exactly how the bridge
was built and parts of the bridge that may not be visible once construction is completed. Photos may also be used to verify
the proper execution of certain tasks for project managers or engineers to approve before proceeding to the next stage.
AS-BUILT INFORMATION
Actual dimensions to which the bridge was constructed are known as as-built dimensions. During the construction of a
bridge, there are likely components that will not be built to the exact specifications but remain within accepted construction
tolerances. However small these differences may be, it is important to document them in order to provide a correct benchmark
for future inspections and monitoring procedures. The best method of recording the as-built dimensions is to directly mark
the design drawings. Drawings marked with actual constructed dimensions are called as-built drawings.

4.1 Materials
The quality of a bridge will only be as good as the materials used to build it. Even though obtaining materials can be a time
intensive process, it is important to use the highest quality of materials available. This section should be used as an aid in
sourcing materials for construction.
On most suspension bridge projects, the materials needed for construction will be divided into two groups: materials that are
readily available on or near site, referred to as local construction materials, and materials that will be purchased and then
delivered to site, referred to as delivered construction materials.
Local Construction Materials

All local construction materials (stone, gravel, sand, water, and timber) should be collected on site prior to beginning the
construction phase. When creating a construction sequence and project plan it is important to allow for contingency in
materials acquisition, in particular with critical path elements. Collecting local materials, such as timber or rock, may require
a permit, so coordinate with the local municipality to obtain this information. Construction materials that are not available
locally must be purchased and delivered to site.
STONE
Stone is used for the ramp construction and is recommended to be collected
prior to construction.
Lura, Panama
GRAVEL
Gravel is used as the coarse aggregate in the concrete and should be rough
and clean with broken faces. Dirt and organics in the mixture will decrease
concrete strength, so any aggregate containing soil must be washed
until clean. Large gravel should be broken with a hammer to form rougher
surfaces. Ideal gravel diameter is two centimeters, but intermittent stones with
a maximum diameter of five centimeters are permissible. This is important
because aggregates larger than five centimeters will usually reduce concrete
strength. Gravel can be purchased, collected from river deposits, or broken
La Conga, Panama
from boulders to attain the appropriate size.

SAND
Sand is used as the fine aggregate for concrete and mortar mixes. Sand can
be sourced from river deposits or from a quarry. The quality of the sand should
be assessed before collection by checking for impurities such as mud, clay,
silt, and debris. Avoiding sand with a high content of these materials reduces
the need for washing.
Silt, the most common impurity in sand taken from river deposits, is a material
that when rubbed between your fingers leaves a colored smear, yet lacks the Gaseke, Rwanda
earthen smell of organic soils and must be avoided in sand mixtures. Sand that
contains silt must be washed before use. This can be done so by filling grain
sacks with the sand and washing them in the river.
When silt-free sand cannot be found on site, sand must be purchased. This
is necessary only if there is no locally available sand or if the locally available
sand does not meet the specifications as previously stated.
Do not use beach sand. Beach sand should not be used because of the salt
Gelin, Haiti
content and the particle size and shape.
Before using sand in a mix, screening it through an ordinary or four millimeter screen can help remove large particles, sticks,
or leaves that may have fallen onto the pile.
WATER
The water used for concrete is often times not potable water. This being said,
it is important that the water is relatively clean as typically the only water
available in the quantities needed is river water.
Ensure that the water has a low turbidity and cloudiness, and is highly
transparent. Water of higher turbidity should not be used, but can be stored in
a holding container where over time impurities will settle to the bottom, making
the water on top clearer. Choose a method to mitigate water turbidity that is the La Conga, Panama
most efficient for the project as there are a number of alternatives.

TIMBER
Timber will be needed for the decking, crossbeams and the nailers for
the bridge walkway. Bridges to Prosperity standard decking boards are a
standard lumber size of 5 centimeters by 20 centimeters. If these lumber
dimensions are not available, be sure to have the engineer check what is
selected. Since the quality of timber can vary, and delays in procuring the
timber are not uncommon, it is best to plan ahead.
It is best to obtain a strong hardwood that has been allowed time to adequately Lura, Panama
dry and that does not have cracks, checks, significant amount of knots, or any
rot. Consult with the local community and leadership to determine the best
species of wood available in the area. If the timber is of questionable strength or durability, it can be treated with a sealer.
Delivered Construction Materials

All construction materials that cannot be found on site will need to be purchased or donated and delivered to site. Material
procurement and delivery should be included in the construction sequence and project management plan. A time contingency
for material acquisition should be accounted for in the schedule, in particular with critical path elements.
CEMENT
Cement should be Type I (general purpose) or Type II (moderate sulfate
resistance). Other types of cement have specific purposes that do not pertain
to Bridges to Prosperity bridge projects. It is important to buy cement from a
trusted store in the area as it is more likely that the cement is stored properly in
a dry location without contacting soil, and is not stored for very long. Cement
bags should be stored off the ground, preferable 15 centimeters on timber
pallets, stacked to allow free circulation of air and also covered with a tarp or
plastic. Contact with moisture will cause hydration of the cement and alter the
El Zarzal, Nicaragua
cement properties. If cement is not properly stored, there can be significant
decreases in the strength. Even when properly stored, the cement can lose
up to 30% of its strength in three months of storage and 40% of its strength after six months of storage. Therefore, it is
important to check the manufactured and expiration dates printed on the cement bag. Any cement stored for longer than
three months should be tested before use. A hard outer shell or hard spots in the cement bag are indications that the cement
has been exposed to moisture. If hard spots are identified, the bag should not be used. Exposure to water and humid
climates can accelerate these affects.

CABLE
Develop a rough estimate of how much the cable will weigh before arranging transportation, as the size of the truck will be
dependent on the total weight and volume. See Chapter 1, Section 7 to estimate cable length.
If using re-purposed cables, they must be inspected before being considered adequate for use on a bridge.
Lura, Panama Lura, Panama Guadalupe, Nicaragua
Cable Inspection
It is imperative that the cable that is to be used is thoroughly inspected for quality. Used cable may have deformations
or may be damaged to the point where they become inadequate for use on a bridge.
Important items to check the cable for:

• Welded joints
• Kinks
• Wire breaks
A careful inspection of the cable should be performed to identify any broken wires.
Typical regulations on cable inspection state that cable can have up to six randomly distributed broken wires in one
rope lay or three broken wire in one strand in one rope lay, where a rope lay is the length along the rope in which one
strand makes a complete revolution around the rope.

CLAMPS
There are two types of clamps that are readily available for cable terminations;
drop forged clamps and malleable clamps. Clamps may be referred to as
wire rope clips, bulldog clamps, etc. Malleable clamps are made from a solid
piece of steel that is heated until the metal is soft and then bent to shape.
With drop forged clamps, the metal is heated until it is liquid and then poured
into a form. Drop forged clamps reduce the possibility of hidden defects that
are sometimes present in malleable clamps which have a lower ductility and
may loosen with time. Malleable clamps are not permitted for use on the
La Conga, Panama
main cables. ONLY drop forged clamps are permitted for use on the main
cables of bridges. If drop forged clamps are not available locally they may
need to be imported.
MASONRY UNITS
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU)
or bricks can be used as
formwork for the pedestals of a
suspension bridge. CMU blocks
and bricks will need to be strong
enough to withstand the lateral
pressures of wet concrete. Be
aware of the quality of block
Lura, Panama Llapallapani, Bolivia
or brick and obtain the highest
quality possible, free from voids
and cracks. Test the quality of the CMU by dropping it from chest height onto soil. If the CMU does not break, it can be
assumed that the CMU is of sufficient quality. Note the size of locally available block and brick and plan wall dimensions to
uphold the dimensions of the concrete being formed.
REINFORCING BARS
Reinforcing bar is specified for the footings, pedestals, anchors, and
suspenders and should be deformed and Grade 280. Take note of maximum
lengths of bar available when determining quantiles.
Lura, Panama

STRUCTURAL STEEL
Crossbeams
The recommended crossbeams are sections of steel bars welded to two steel
angles. Crossbeams are typically fabricated in a shop and delivered to site.
Structural steel grade and dimensions should be manufactured as stated in
the standard Walkway Detail Drawings. The crossbeams must be painted with
anticorrosive paint after fabrication.
Gaseke, Rwanda
Towers
Tower assemblies are also typically manufactured in a shop and delivered to
site. It is imperative that the pieces are assembled and marked in the shop
prior to delivery to ensure that they will properly fit together. If pieces do not
fit together, it is much easier to fix the problem before they leave the shop.
For suspension bridges with towers that require multiple pieces, insist that the
fabricator clearly marks which pieces match together for ease of assembly.
The towers are painted with anticorrosive paint after fabrication.
Lura, Panama
Ensure that all bolts, nuts, and washers are included in the shipment or
acquired before tower assembly should occur. Install two nuts or peen the
bolts on the towers. Take note of any specialized tower material or equipment that may be needed. Structural steel grade
and dimensions should be manufactured as stated in the standard Tower Detail Drawings. All steel tower elements must be
painted with anticorrosive paint after fabrication.
SAFETY FENCING
Wire fencing is used for safety
along either side of the bridge
deck. Quality chain link fencing
with a five centimeter mesh
pattern should be rust free
and galvanized or coated with
aluminum to extend the term
of usage. Nothing less than 11
La Conga, Panama Gaseke, Rwanda
gauge wire should be used for
the fencing as anything less can
be broken or torn too easily.

4.2 Tools
OVERVIEW
A variety of tools will be needed to construct a suspension bridge. A storage area should be designated for each construction
site. This allotted location should be dry in case of inclement weather and have the option to be locked for security purposes.
Planning for the tools needed and a concise inventory can aid in the schedule of the project.
LIST OF SUGGESTED TOOLS

• Automatic level, Philly rod, and • Linesman pliers • Shovels
tripod • Machete • Slings
• Buckets • Masonry tools • Spray paint
• Construction square • Markers • Stakes
• Duct tape • Measuring tapes • String line
• Drills • Plumb bob • Sockets
• Drill bits • Pipe • Socket wrench
• Excavation bars • Pulleys • Tamping rod
• Excavation picks • Rated rope • Torque wrench
• 4-foot level • Rebar bender • Wire cutters
• Hacksaw • Saw • Wood saw
• Hammer (5 lb) • Saw blades • Winch
• Impact driver • Scaffolding
La Conga, Panama Las Papayas, Nicaragua La Conga, Panama

5.1 Concrete, Grout, and Mortar
SAFETY
Caution should be taken when working with cement. Everyone involved with mixing or handling cement should be educated
on the risks when working with concrete, grout, and mortar, such as chemical burns and cement dust exposure, as well as
the means by which injury can be avoided and first aid to be administered if injury does occur.
The following steps can aid in avoiding cement hazards:

• Establish and discuss a cement mixing plan: location, members, transport
• Wear proper PPE: gloves and other means of covering exposed skin, goggles, respirator mask, boots
• Clear the area of those not involved in the mixing or placing of concrete, mortar, or grout
If some workers do not have proper footwear available, ensure that they wash their feet immediately after mixing concrete
to avoid cement burns.
QUALITY CONTROL
To ensure consistency, concrete, mortar, and grout design mixes should be held constant throughout the entirety of the
project.
Quality Control Charge

To assure proper mixtures, assign person(s) to oversee proportioning and mixing operations. This role takes the responsibility
for the quality of the concrete operations. This individual should be present during all proportioning and mixing and should
be experienced and capable of making decisions in the field. If this person(s) cannot be present throughout the duration of
the project, the foreman or superintendent for the project should be held responsible for mixing on site without the concrete
quality control charge.
Perhaps the most important aspect of quality control when mixing concrete, mortar, and grout, is ensuring the proper water
content. Wetter mixes are typically easier to mix manually and as result, there may be a natural tendency to add water to
ease the physical work. However, adding more water than what is specified in the mix design will reduce the final strength
of the mix. If the specified amount of water has been added to a mix and it has not yet reached the desired workability,
additional manual mixing should be attempted before adding more water.
Checklist
• Clean cement, gravel, sand, and water
• Record quantities of materials used
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

Check the availability and quality of required materials. Locate the source for cement, sand, gravel and water on the job site
or elsewhere if necessary.
Ensure the following:

• Cement should be dry, fresh (no older than 60 days) and from a reliable source
• Water should be clean and transparent
• Sand and gravel should be clean and free of debris (sticks, leaves, trash, etc.)
• Sand should be coarse, not round or shiny and should be free of silt or clay particles
• For concrete, gravel should be no larger than 5 centimeters (2 inches)
Also, note that there are different types of cement and varying levels of quality. Ensure that the cement being used is of
good quality and is the desired Type I or Type II.

Recommended Tools
• Shovels
• Buckets
• Screens
• Flat, clean working area
• Trowels
• Gloves
Lura, Panama Mubuga, Rwanda
• Footwear
Materials
• Cement
• Gravel
• Sand
• Water
MIX DESIGN San Albino, Nicaragua Lura, Panama

Concrete
The intention of this section is to serve as a guideline for standard and Table 13.1 – Summary of Mix Design Ratios
replicable concrete mixing techniques for use on all projects. Mix Cement Sand Gravel
Concrete 1 2 3
Bridges to Prosperity mix design follows a 1:2:3 volumetric ratio to
achieve a minimum strength of 10 megapascals (MPa). This means Mortar 1 4 -
that one part cement is mixed with two parts of sand and three of Grout 1 4 -
gravel. Note that it is assumed that there is a 33% reduction from the
summation of the volumes of the components to the total volume of
concrete produced.
The water amount will likely vary from site to site, based on the characteristics of the aggregates. As a starting value for the
volume of water it is recommended to add the smallest amount of water to obtain workability and hydrate all of the cement.
The suggested volume of water needed is 60% of the volume of the cement used. For example, 0.6 buckets of water will
be needed for the same one bucket of cement. Continue to add water until workability is achieved. A workable concrete is
one in which the concrete can flow,
Cement surrounding rebar and filling corners.
Sand Gravel Concrete
Cement Sand Gravel Concrete
Mortar
Mortar is used as part of masonry walls and is made from cement and sand comprised of a ratio of 1:4 with water added
until workable. Mortar does not contain large aggregates. The amount of cement, sand, and water should be consistent
throughout the project. Prepare the mortar to a consistency in which it can be easily handled and spread using a trowel.
Mortar will be used for the ramp and formwork walls.
Grout
A grout mix is required within the ramp fill and is comprised of sand and cement; it does not contain large aggregate. The
mix consists of one part cement and two parts sand (1:2) and should be of a consistency that will flow into and completely
fill all voids. The water to cement ratio for the grout mixture is approximately 0.5.

MIXING METHODS
Concrete Mixing Methods
The method used to mix concrete can have significant impact on the final strength of concrete produced.
When using a mechanical mixer, proper distribution can be achieved by allowing the dry materials to mix for a minimum of
five minutes. Let the materials become well mixed and slowly add water until the proper workability is reached.
When the use of a mechanical mixer is not feasible, a manual method of concrete mixing is allowable. In order to ensure
material strength properties assumed in the design, it is important to use only clean and fresh materials and mix them using
the volcano or sifting methods. Before starting, place a thin concrete pad where the concrete mixing will take place. This
will limit the amount of unwanted constituents in the mix (i.e. soil, grass, sticks, etc.) and will allow less water to escape.
The “volcano” or cone method is the most commonly used method of manually mixing concrete. Take care to thoroughly
mix dry materials before creating the volcano by shoveling the materials back and forth into newly formed, better mixed
piles at least twice. Make a cone of thoroughly mixed dry material with a basin in the top where water can be placed. Dry
material is then mixed in with the water and shoveled back and forth, taking care not to lose any of the water, until the mix
is of a uniform and workable consistency.
Lura, Panama Lura, Panama Lura, Panama
The sifting method requires the materials to be added in stages. First, mix the dry gravel and sand. Once well mixed, add the
cement and gently mix the pile so no cement is lost. Using shovels, mix the dry components thoroughly. A well distributed
mixture can be achieved by shoveling the materials into a single pile, then moving the pile twice, back and forth. After the
dry materials are well mixed, add water using the same method. During this process, continue moving the pile to ensure
uniformity.
Placing Concrete
Before starting, wet contact surfaces to prevent dry surfaces from absorbing
the wet cement paste from the concrete mix. Place concrete within an hour of
mixing to prevent hardening before placement, and discard the concrete if the
time limit is exceeded. When working in the heat of the day this time could be
significantly reduced. Concrete should not be dropped at a height greater than
one meter as can cause the aggregate and cement paste to separate reducing
the final concrete strength.
La Conga, Panama

Curing
Fresh concrete may crack when it is allowed to dry rapidly. Thus, proper curing
of concrete is essential. After the concrete is placed, covering it with wet burlap
sacks or plastic sheeting will help reduce the amount of moisture lost due to
evaporation, ensure consistent hydration, and mitigate cracking due to rapid
drying. Moistening empty cement bags and covering the fresh concrete is
another method of curing. Hydrate the concrete by adding water to the surface
each day. After casting the anchor block, allow 36 hours of cure time before
installing and hoisting the cables.
La Conga, Panama
Mortar and Grout Mixing

Mortar and grout should be
mixed similarly to concrete on a
controlled surface. It is important
that mortar and grout is mixed
thoroughly and placed within a
maximum of one hour.
Gasura, Rwanda _____, _____
5.2 Masonry
SAFETY
In case of masonry wall collapses, a limited access zone should be established around the area of masonry construction.
Consider where the wall is being built, the activities occurring in the surrounding area, and the height at which the masonry
is being constructed. When building tall masonry structures, it may be necessary to construct scaffolding to use as a working
platform. This creates additional safety consideration including working at heights and working below other activities. See
Chapter 3, Section 3 for additional safety and PPE requirements.
QUALITY CONTROL
To ensure the proper mixtures, review Section 5.1. It is important that the correct dimensions and quality of materials are
satisfied. If there are any deviations from plans or mix specifications, they should be documented in the as-builts.
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

Recommended Materials Recommended Tools
• Stone • Shovels
• Concrete Masonry Unit or Brick • Buckets
• Sand • Trowels
• Water • Level
• String
• Plumb bob
• Square
• Wood formwork
• Gloves
• Closed toe footwear

STONE MASONRY
Care should be taken to ensure a stone masonry structure is strong and long lasting.
Use as many large stones, as little mortar as possible, and place the stones as the mortar is being mixed to ensure a quality
product. Additional dressing may be required to ensure proper fit. Avoid shims or small rocks to balance a stone in place as
it is better to prepare the stone so that it fits without assistance.
Stone Masonry Construction Best Practices

• Pack the mortar around the stones with a masonry trowel or by hand
to ensure there are no gaps
• Always stagger each layer of masonry
• Try to place large stones so that their large face is facing down
• Good masonry uses five centimeters or less of mortar between joints
Lura, Panama
• Stagger masonry joints
CMU BLOCK MASONRY

CMU blocks are typically used as the formwok for the concrete pedestals and
the primary function when used in this fashion is to resist the fluid pressure of
concrete when casting the pedestals. For proper bonding, ensure blocks are
wet before applying mortar, and mix small batches to ensure that the mortar
is fresh and workable. Mortar between CMU blocks should not be thicker than
one to two centimeters. To ensure there are no gaps, pack the mortar around
the blocks with a masonry trowel or by hand. If hollow blocks are being used,
each cell should be filled with concrete or mortar. It is also best practice to
Lura, Panama
stagger each layer of masonry.
Note the size of locally available block and plan wall dimensions accordingly. It is ideal to use whole blocks instead of having
to break or cut blocks to fit dimensions.
When casting the pedestals in accordance with the construction guidelines of Section 6, no reinforcing within the cells is
required. If using CMU blocks other than described in this manual, reinforcing may be required and a qualified engineer
should be contacted.
BRICK
Bricks can be used as formwork on the pedestals of suspension bridges.
Mortar between bricks should not be thicker than one to two centimeters. Pack
the mortar around the blocks with a masonry trowel or by hand to ensure there
are no gaps.
When casting the pedestals in accordance with the construction guidelines

of Section 6, no reinforcing is required. If using bricks other than described in
this manual, reinforcing may be required and a qualified engineer should be Llapallapani, Boliva
contacted.

This section contains provisions for the construction of a suspension bridge. There are ten subsections in Section 6: Construction,
structured as follows:
6.1 Construction Layout 6.6 Anchors

6.2 Excavation 6.7 Towers
6.3 Footings 6.8 Cable Hoisting
6.4 Pedestals 6.9 Walkway
6.5 Ramps 6.10 Completion
6.1 Construction Layout
SCOPE
The layout of the proposed structure shall be measured and marked on the
existing topography to ensure the correct placement of the footings, ramps,
and anchors. These markings will instruct where the excavations shall take
place.
SAFETY
When performing the construction layout, it can be helpful to be aware of the
surrounding safety concerns. Be aware of any dangerous insects or animals El Corozo, Nicaragua
that one may come into contact with during construction. If crossing the river,
take additional safety measures when the water is high or when crossing an existing structure.
A clear working environment, free of large branches and other tripping hazards (rocks and roots), can provide a safe
construction site. Be aware of steep terrain. During this activity, removal of trees or tree branches may take place. Proper
PPE, safety suggestions, and additional information can be found in Section 2.
QUALITY CONTROL
The initial construction layout is critical to begin a successful project. During this stage, the establishment of centerline,
footing locations with respect to the survey markers, and verification of the span length and difference in height are of
utmost importance. Once the footings and anchors have been marked, it is good practice to confirm all of the dimensions
with respect to the design drawings and correct any discrepancies. If using survey equipment, it should be calibrated to
ensure accuracy of measurement. Laser distance finders should be used with caution and only for general verifications.
In the event that offset distances from survey points on either side of the river or the overall span length or elevations do
not match those shown on the design drawings and exceed the established tolerances, the engineer should be contacted
immediately. The initial survey may have been processed incorrectly and should be rechecked. The project should be halted
until a resolution is determined. Continuing to construct the bridge that does not match the design drawings may result in
an unsafe structure.

• Identify existing survey points marked at the site • Survey stakes along centerline on left and right
• Establish centerline of bridge banks
• Confirm bridge span and offsets from survey points • Pulled centerline with indication of tower locations
• Footings marked and located correctly square to • Pulled centerline with indication of anchor locations
centerline
• Anchors marked and located correctly square to
centerline
• As-built dimensions recorded and marked on drawings

MATERIALS AND TOOLS

Recommended Tools:
• Level
• String line
• Plumb bob
• Spray paint
• Stakes EXCAVATION STRING LINES
EXISTING SURVEY POINT
• Machete STAKES
• Hammer
LAYOUT CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Establish Centerline
Locate an existing survey point by observation or benchmark. Ideally, all
survey points are discoverable. With two or more existing surveyed points,
establish the centerline of the bridge across the river with a string line and/or
PLUMBlong
BOBmeasuring
USED tape. OFFSET PAST
TO MARK ANCHOR BENCHING
CORNERS
Dos Aguas, Panama

Step 2 – Stake Footing and Anchor Points Along Centerline
Establish the left and right areas of construction. The orientation of the left and right side of the river is determined by
standing facing downstream. Clear the area of all debris that may obstruct the site layout. Using a long measuring tape,
string line, or surveying equipment, establish the centerline of the bridge and place a stake along the centerline at back of
right anchor beam (BOA-R), front of right anchor block (FOB-R), and front of right footing (FOF-R). Repeat this process for
the left bank. From these main points, the extents of the footing/anchors can be marked.
BENCHMARK
(RIGHT)
℄ BRIDGE
Excavation Layout Step 2
Step 3 – Stake Construction Benchmarks

From the stake at the back of the anchor beam, place an additional stake a minimum of five meters away from the river
along the centerline. This construction benchmark stake will act as the permanent centerline marker and thus, needs to be
placed firmly so as not to move during construction. This should be done on each side of the river.
BENCHMARK
(RIGHT)
℄ BRIDGE

Step 4 – Stake Left and Right Footings and Anchors

Place stakes at all corners of the footings and anchor elements. These points can be established on either side of the
centerline by using the 3-4-5 method.
BENCHMARK
(RIGHT)
℄ BRIDGE
Excavation Layout Step 4
3-4-5 Method:
The four corners of each
substructure element are to
be marked from the bridge
centerline. Using a 12 meter
string or measuring tape,
connect the end at FOF-R
while an additional person
Chameau, Haiti
holds the 4 meter mark
along the centerline. A third
person then holds the string or measuring tape at the 9 meter mark, repositioning until the remaining 3 meters can
reach back to FOF-R. Holding the string or measuring tape taught in this position will create a triangle with sides of
3, 4, and 5 meter sides and will form a right angle at the junction of the 3 and 4 meter sides. A stake should be added
to point “1” and used to mark the front corners of the footing excavation. Repeat this process to mark the remaining
corners of all excavations.
Spray paint the top of the stakes after they have been placed in all four
corners of each footing and anchor. Stake and mark locations for the left
and right ramp walls, then connect all stakes with a string. Verify both
sides are square to each other and confirm that the layout matches the
plans and that all corners are square. Finally, mark the ground with spray
paint to establish the excavation perimeters and remove the string lines to
prevent tripping hazards. Rio Abajo, Nicaragua

6.2 Excavation
SCOPE
This section contains provisions for footing and anchor excavations.
SAFETY
Excavations and trenches pose a major safety concern on bridge sites.
Benching or sloping plans are required for excavations deeper than 1.5 meters.
Recommended benching dimensions are 1.0 meters deep by 1.0 meters wide
or sloping the excavation to a maximum of 45°. Keep in mind that benching
excavations can significantly increase the amount of material to be removed Lura, Panama
and as such, the project schedule may need to be modified accordingly.
The edges of excavations must be kept free of materials that could fall or roll into excavations. Before excavating consider
the soil classification, potential buried utilities, as well as ingress and egress from the excavation. Proper benching, grading,
shoring and drainage should be executed. Place spoils a minimum of one meter from the edge of the excavation and be
aware of people in and around the work area. When working in the excavation, hardhats should be worn to protect workers
from potential falling hazards. Means of drainage can be constructed to divert rain water away, and pumps should be used
in high water table environments.
It can be helpful to designate an excavation perimeter that keeps people and animals away and safe from falling into the
hole.
Several people may be working in close proximity to one another and tools such as shovels, picks, and excavation bars can
present striking hazards to other workers. It is important to be mindful of the location of all workers when swinging tools.
Additionally, when ejecting spoils out of the excavation, make sure that all workers are clear of the area where spoils are
placed. This location should be sufficiently away from the excavation so that they do not fall back into or block access to
the work area. Proper PPE including work boots, safety glasses, hard hats, and gloves should be worn.
When excavating in rock, additional safety precautions should be taken. Chipping rock creates flying hazards and as
such, eye protection absolutely must be worn. If a jackhammer is required, consult the manufacturer for additional safety
requirements.

QUALITY CONTROL
The primary goals during the excavation stage are to prepare the foundation locations such that the tower footings and
cable anchors can be correctly constructed. All excavation dimensions should be checked against the design drawings and
care should be taken to establish the correct elevations at the bottom of excavations relative to one another (left and right)
as well as the high water line. If the elevations are not consistent with the design within tolerances, the required freeboard
may not be acquired. Tolerance limits shall be specified by the design engineer.
Additional aspects of quality control during excavations include monitoring ground water intrusion and checking the soil’s
competency for bearing. In the event water is found to be entering the excavation, proper drainage or means of extraction
should be implemented to prevent collapse of the soil walls and permit masonry or concrete to be placed undisturbed. If
incompetent soils are discovered or large boulders are uncovered that inhibit the foundations from being constructed as
designed, the design engineer should be informed.

• Tower footing excavation depths and elevations • Footing excavations
• Anchor beam excavation depths and elevation • Anchor excavations
• All excavation plan dimensions consistent with
drawings
• Base of footing and anchor are level
• No ground water in excavation
• Proper bearing capacity of soils at base of excavation
marked on drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

Recommended Tools:
• Measuring tape • Excavation bars
• Level • Picks
• String line • Shovels
• Automatic level and tripod • Machete
• Philly rod • Hammer
• Plumb bob • Nails
• Spray paint • Buckets
EXCAVATION SEQUENCE IN SOIL

Step 1 - Excavate Footing Areas
Excavate the area indicated for the footing areas. Maintain vertical soil walls
along the perimeter of the excavation as this will serve as the formwork for the
footing concrete when placed. Repeat the excavation process on each side
of the river. Once completed, compact the bottom of the excavation area by
means of stomping or compacting posts.
Tubungo, Rwanda

Step 2 - Excavate Anchor Areas

Excavate the areas for the anchor making sure to bench or slope where required. Referring to the Anchor Details sheet of
the drawing set for dimensions, remove the soil areas needed to place all of the anchor elements per the drawing set. Once
completed, compact the bottom of the excavation area by means of stomping or compacting posts.
Lura, Panama Las Calderas, Nicaragua El Triangulo, Nicaragua
EXCAVATION CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE IN ROCK

Since stakes can be hard to use, use spray paint to mark the excavation area. Ensure the rock surface beneath the
excavations is rough, but clean of debris and organic materials such as soil and brush, so that it will bond to the first layer
of concrete.
Following the same process for Excavation in Soil, establish the area of excavation per plan set. Use an excavation bar
and pick to establish the ease of removing the rock. If the rock is too hard to be removed with an excavation bar, possible
methods may be implemented including using a bar and rock pick, chisel and hammer, or jackhammer.

6.3 Footings

This section contains provisions for the footing construction operations.
Footing - The structural base of the pedestals and tower; the footing is
embedded in the soil and comprised of concrete and reinforcing bars
SAFETY
Before beginning footing construction, be aware of the hazards that accompany
the transport of cement bags, reinforcing bars, and other materials over rugged Lura, Panama
terrain of a bridge construction site. Proper footwear and hand protection can
prevent injury if materials or tools are dropped.
remove any cement trapped in gloves, boots, or clothing. When mixing concrete, proper PPE and planning can reduce the
hazards from working with cement.
avoid impalement.
Additional PPE, safety suggestions, and information can be found in Section 2.

QUALITY CONTROL
The concrete footing distributes vertical loads from the pedestals to a larger surface area on the ground. The concrete
strength and quality are essential to the footing performance. While casting the footing, use a vibrator or rod to work
the concrete free of voids and distribute around reinforcing. All concrete should be placed within 60 minutes of mixing.
The surface of concrete already placed may need to be moistened if too much time elapses between concrete batches,
especially on warm, dry, or windy days. Take care to place the bars projecting into the pedestals as once the footing is cast,
they cannot be moved.
When beginning the footing construction, it is good practice to verify the excavation dimensions and elevations and check
for any water seepage. Any excess water in the excavation must be removed before placing concrete. Often times the
excavation may be completed well in advance of the footing construction and wind or rain may have altered the excavation
during the elapsed time. Verify footing dimensions with the design drawings with an emphasis on the orientation relative to
the bridge centerline and consult the design engineer for tolerance limits on as-built dimensions.
Ensure that all materials are of adequate quality as described in Section 4. When mixing concrete, pay special attention
to ensure that the 1:2:3 mix ratio is followed and that excess water is not added to the mix. There is often a tendency to
add more water than is needed as a wetter concrete batch is easier to mix by hand, but it is of utmost importance that the
appropriate water content is met as adding too much water directly affects the strength of the concrete.

• Excavations free of standing or seeping water • Footing reinforcing cages placed in excavations
• Reinforcing bar sizes, quantities, bends and • Completed footings with projecting reinforcing bars
placement
• Footing dimensions and orientation with respect to
the bridge centerline
• Proper placement of bars projecting into pedestals
drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Gravel • Masonry tools
• Water • Construction square
• Tie wire • Level
• Reinforcing bars • Plumb bob
• String line
• Compacting posts
• Tape measure
• Spray paint
• Wire cutters
• Lineman pliers
• Rebar bender or bending jig
• Saw
• Saw blades

FOOTING CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Step 1- Prepare Materials
Determine if the rebar for the project will be cut and bent in fabrication shop or
on site. If performed on site, a hacksaw or grinder should be used for cutting
and a rebar bender or field constructed jig for bending. Cut and bend the
bars specified in the standard drawings for the footing. Care should be taken
to ensure conformity in bar bends of each designation. Concrete should be
prepared with respect to the quantity needed for each stage of construction.
See Section 5.1 for concrete specifications.
Lura, Panama
Step 2 – Place Reinforcing Bars
Confirm the footing excavation and orientation. With tie wire, assemble the
top and bottom reinforcing steel mats per the footing details of the plans. To
properly position the reinforcement in the excavation, ensuring edge clearance,
the cage should be set on top of rocks or pieces of concrete that are roughly
the same height as the desired clearance.
Place and tie the vertical L-shaped F03 bars to the bottom footing reinforcement
mat. These bars will extend from the bottom reinforcing bar mat and out of the El Corozo, Nicaragua
footing into the pedestals. Add two sets of F04 stirrups onto the L-shaped F03
bars and finish the footing reinforcing bar assembly with an additional mat
of longitudinal and vertical 16 mm reinforcement bars. Refer to the Footing
Details for the correct number of reinforcement bars and spacing.
Ensure all of the reinforcing bars are in alignment to the bridge centerline and
match the plans.
Step 3 – Place Concrete

Wet the sides and bottom of the excavation. Take note if there is ground water
at the bottom of the excavation. Standing water should be removed from
the excavation as it can weaken concrete and measures should be taken to
remove the excess water. To avoid voids, a spare piece of reinforcing bar
can be used as a rod to distribute concrete around reinforcement. Ensuring
adequate rodding can be especially difficult in areas of densely packed
rebar so it is best to have a worker exclusively assigned to this task. If a cast
requires multiple batches of concrete, make sure that the rodding penetrates
Lura, Panama
into the previous layer of wet concrete. See Section 5.1 for additional concrete
specifications and curing procedures.

6.4 Pedestals

This section contains provisions for the pedestal construction operations.
Pedestal – Tower of masonry formwork, reinforcing bars, and concrete

comprised to provide the support for the towers of a suspension bridge
Tower Base – Embedded in the pedestals; a steel assembly which provides a

means of rotation for the tower and a bearing for the tower legs
El Corozo, Nicaragua
SAFETY
Before beginning pedestal construction, be aware of the hazards that accompany the transport of masonry, cement bags,
reinforcing bars and other materials over the terrain of a bridge construction site. A hardhat, eye protection, foot protection
and hand protection can prevent injury when working with the materials and tools needed for the towers.
remove any cement trapped in gloves, boots, or clothing. When mixing concrete and mortar, proper PPE and planning can
reduce the hazards from working with cement.
avoid impalement.
Proper PPE, safety suggestions, and additional information can be found in Section 2.
QUALITY CONTROL
The pedestals on each abutment directly support the steel towers and transfer all vertical loads and any transverse horizontal
wind loads from bridges without lateral stabilization systems into the footing. The internal concrete portion of the pedestal
serves as the main structural component while the masonry serves as formwork. When different types of masonry are used
than assumed on the drawings, care should be taken to make sure the minimum concrete dimensions are still met. The
steel reinforcing cage should be placed centered in the column as best possible while maintaining proper clearances on all
sides.
All pedestal dimensions should be checked against the design drawings with an emphasis on the orientation relative to
the bridge centerline and level tower bases between towers. Consult the design engineer for tolerance limits on as-built
dimensions.

• Orientation of masonry is square to the bridge centerline • Reinforcing cage placed with base course of
• Reinforcing bar size and placement masonry
• Concrete pedestal dimensions • Pedestal formed with masonry prior to concrete
• Tower base elevations and alignment (level to one placement
another and square) • Tower base placement with respect to the
• Topping concrete sloped for drainage centerline of the bridge and footing
• As-built dimensions and elevations recorded and marked • Completed pedestal with tower base installed
on drawings

MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Water • Masonry tools
• Dressed/shaped stone • Construction square
• Concrete masonry units (CMU) or bricks • Plumb bob
• Tie wire • String line
• Reinforcing bars • Tape measure
• Spray paint
• Wire cutters
• Lineman pliers
• Saw
• Saw blades
• Hacksaw
PEDESTAL CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Determine if the rebar for the project will be cut and bent in fabrication shop or
on site. If performed on site, a hacksaw or grinder should be used for cutting
and a rebar bender or field constructed jig for bending. Cut and bend the
bars specified in the standard drawings for the footing. Care should be taken
to ensure conformity in bar bends of each designation. Concrete should be
prepared with respect to the quantity needed for each stage of construction.
See Section 5.1 for concrete specifications.
La Conga, Panama
Step 2 – Place Reinforcing Bars
If specified in the pedestal details of the plans, splice additional vertical
longitudinal bars to the reinforcing bars embedded in the footing. Tie the
additional P02 stirrups to the reinforcing bars emerging from the footing.
Lura, Panama

Step 3 – Construct Masonry Formwork

After the reinforcing bars have been attached, the masonry formwork can be
constructed. Mark the foundation of each pedestal perimeter ensuring that each
pedestal marking is properly aligned with the centerline. Wet the area of the
footing where the CMU or brick formwork will be placed. It is recommended that
a maximum height of one meter of formwork be constructed per day. If more than
one meter of pedestal formwork is constructed at once, it may be difficult to place
the concrete for the pedestal and the lateral pressure from the concrete can also
cause wall blowout.
Lura, Panama
Step 4 – Place Pedestal Concrete, Stage 1

After the reinforcement has been placed and the formwork has sufficiently set,
the first stage of concrete can be placed. Wet the inside surface of the walls.
To ensure that the concrete is free of voids, a spare piece of reinforcing bar
can be used to distribute concrete around reinforcement. Never drop concrete
more than one meter, as the cement paste and aggregate can separate and
reduce the strength of the concrete.
Repeat concrete lifts, leaving the remaining 35 centimeters for Stage 2 (hinge
and concrete placement) of the pedestal construction.
Step 5 – Place Tower Base

Fill the P03 tube sections of the tower bases with concrete. Time should be
allotted to allow the concrete to harden before placing them into the pedestals.
Correctly installing the tower bases is essential in ensuring the bridge is square
to the centerline. Pull a string perpendicular to the centerline that would align
with the inside edge of the tower base saddle PL04 plates. Place the tower
bases inside the steel reinforcement with a small amount of concrete around
the pipes to allow bases to stand up on their own. La Conga, Panama
Check each of the following dimensions for the tower bases:

• Distance from centerline
• Perpendicular to centerline
• Level to the ground
• Level relative to each other
Step 6 – Place Remaining Pedestal Reinforcement, Stage 2

Place and tie the remaining reinforcing bars. This reinforcing should include
a final stirrup and a number of U-shaped bars, P03 and sometimes P04 bars. Las Calderas, Nicaragua
Step 7 – Place Concrete

Once the alignment is verified, fill the remainder of the pedestal with concrete.
Take care that the tower base does not move when placing concrete. It is
recommended that a section of pipe is placed on both hinge pieces or string
line is used to ensure they remain aligned with one another during the concrete
placement. Slope the top surface of concrete downward and away from the
tower base to allow water to flow away from steel. Preventing an area for
standing water to sit at the tower base will reduce the premature corrosion of
the steel. Lura, Panama

6.5 Ramps

This section contains provisions for approach ramp construction.
Ramp Stone Masonry Wall – Walls comprised of stone and mortar with widths
that may vary from 30 to 70 centimeters in thickness
Rock/Grout Fill – 30 centimeter lifts of fill comprised of stone, sand and gravel;
the lifts shall be solidified with grout
Walkway topping slab – A 10 centimeter thick concrete slab applied to the
approach ramp after the ramp stone masonry walls and rock/grout fill have
been constructed to plan dimensions
SAFETY
When constructing the ramps, be aware of the hazards that accompany carrying heavy stones, cement bags, and other
materials over the terrain of a bridge construction site. Moving, dropping, and dressing stones can result in rocks flying
about. Hardhats, foot protection and hand protection can prevent injury if stones or tools are dropped.
Constructing the ramp walls can present limited access, objects falling from the work area, and any of the other additional
challenges of working at heights. Hardhats, scaffolding and other means of fall protection should be introduced to make
ramp wall construction safer.

QUALITY CONTROL
The approach ramp provides a means of access to the bridge and should be constructed to maximize user safety. The
approach ramp walls contain the stone fill and support the concrete topping slab. Each stone masonry wall should be
constructed plumb using mortar within one hour of mixing.
The interior fill should be constructed with only stone, gravel, or sand with grout layers to minimize cracking and settlement
of the concrete topping slab. Using a range of stone sizes along with gravel and sand helps reduces internal voids and
generates higher densities. The incremental grout layer is important to reduce the overall lateral earth pressure against the
stone masonry walls.
All ramp wall dimensions should be checked against the design drawings. A maximum slope ratio of 3 horizontal to 1 vertical
(3H:1V) should be used so that the ramp is not too steep to walk up and down. Consult the design engineer for tolerance
limits on as-built dimensions.

• Excavation free of standing or seeping water • Completed upstream and downstream walls
• Masonry wall thickness at base, each transition, and • Completed front wall
top of wall • Interior prior to fill
• Top of wall elevations • Interior partially filled with rock and grout
• Ramp connected to pedestals without gap • Completely filled approach
• Interior filled with rock and grout (no soil) • Fence post installed
• Fill material properly tamped to minimize voids • Completed approach ramp with concrete topping
• Installed walkway fence post
• Concrete topping slab thickness
• Mortar used within 60 minutes of mixing
drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Large stone • Masonry tools
• Small stone • Construction square
• Water • Plumb bob
• Walkway fence post • String line
• Tamping rod
• Tape measure

RAMP CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Excavate Approach Ramp Wall Area
To provide a maximum 3:1 ramp slope, determine the length of ramp. Layout
the two meter wide ramp area. Per walkway details, excavate 30 centimeter
ramp wall trenches from the back of footing to the extents of the ramp.
Lura, Panama
Step 2 – Construct Ramp and Install Walkway Fence Post
Begin to construct the width of
the wall by placing the first layer
of stones and mortar in the ramp
wall excavation areas and in
between the pedestals per plan.
Continue the ramp wall perimeter
until a 30 centimeter lift wall
height is achieved. Fill between
Lura, Panama Lura, Panama
the first lift of the ramp wall
perimeters with a rock/grout fill.
Construct the required number
of ramp wall lifts and fill until the
ramp height and slope have been
achieved. See Section 5.2 for
mortar specifications.
Unreinforced CMU walls should not be used in the construction of ramp walls.
Because of the varying quality and increased chance of wall blowout, consult
with a qualified engineer before using other materials for ramps.
Install the handrail fence post. Location and post embedment as well as
additional details for the ramp are included in the Standard Walkway Details
drawings.
Lura, Panama
Step 3 – Place Concrete Cap
After the walls have been constructed and rock/grout fill has been placed,
place a 10 centimeter thick concrete cap on top of the ramp area and masonry
walls.
Lura, Panama

6.5 Anchors

This section contains provisions for the anchor construction operations.
The anchor is comprised of three reinforced concrete elements: anchor beam,

transition arms, and anchor blocks.
Anchor beam – The first stage of anchor construction; the anchor beam is
comprised of concrete and a reinforcing bar cage and placed in the base of
the anchor excavation Lura, Panama
Transition arm – The second stage of anchor construction; the transition arms are two angled reinforced concrete beams
connecting to the anchor beam
Anchor block - The third stage of anchor construction; the anchor blocks are two reinforced concrete elements connecting
to the transition arms. The anchor pipe is embedded within the anchor block
Anchor pipe – A pipe installed within the anchor block to act as a connection and bearing of the main cables to the anchor;
the main cables wrap around the anchor pipe before clamps are installed
SAFETY
When performing the anchor construction, it is helpful to be aware of the surrounding safety concerns. A clear working
environment, free of large branches and other tripping hazards, can provide a safe construction site. Consider ingress and
egress from the excavation. Before constructing the anchor, be aware of the hazards that accompany carrying cement bags
and other materials over the terrain of a bridge construction site. Hardhats, foot protection, and hand protection can prevent
injury if materials or tools are dropped.
The reinforcing cage for the anchor of any suspension bridge is extremely heavy and creates many risks. Always create a
plan for moving the steel cages and communicate the plan with everyone involved. It can be beneficial to assign a person to
direct the crew as the reinforcing cage is moved. This person should be able to command attention and communicate with
the entire group, both local community members and volunteers.
Hand and eye protection should be worn when cutting reinforcing bar. Take special care when bending and transporting the
bars to avoid abrasions.

QUALITY CONTROL
The concrete anchors consist of a buried beam, transition arms up to the ground level, and an anchor block that provides a
means to terminate the main cables and transfer loads into the ground. The concrete strength and quality are essential to
the anchor performance. While casting the anchors, use a vibrator or rod to work the concrete free of voids and distribute
around reinforcing and cables. All concrete should be placed within 60 minutes of mixing. The surface of concrete already
placed may need to be moistened if too much time elapses between concrete batches, especially on warm, dry, or windy
days. If a construction joint is required, take measures to prevent debonding between layers. Such measures include
roughening the concrete surface, maintaining enough clearance around horizontal reinforcing such that coarse aggregate
can pass, and moistening the existing concrete surface prior to placing new concrete.
When beginning the anchor beam construction, it is good practice to verify the excavation dimensions and elevations and
check for any water seepage. Often times the excavation may be completed well in advance of the anchor construction and
wind or rain may have altered the excavation during the elapsed time. Verify anchor dimensions with the design drawings
with an emphasis on the orientation relative to the bridge centerline. Consult the design engineer for tolerance limits on
as-built dimensions.

• Excavations free of standing or seeping water • Anchor beam reinforcing cages placed in excavations
• Reinforcing bar sizes, quantities, bends and • Transition arm longitudinal reinforcement extending
placement from anchor beams
• Anchor beam dimensions and orientation with respect • Completed anchor beams
to the bridge centerline • Transition arm reinforcing cages placed in
• Transition arm dimensions and orientation with excavations
respect to the bridge centerline • Completed transition arms
• Anchor pipes filled with concrete • Anchor block reinforcing cages tied with concreted
• Anchor block dimensions and orientation with respect filled anchor pipe installed
to the bridge centerline • Completed anchor blocks
• Complete backfill over the anchor beams
drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Gravel • Formwork for anchor blocks and transition arms if
• Water needed
• Tie wire • Masonry tools
• Reinforcing bars • Construction square
• Anchor pipe • Level
• Plumb bob
• String line
• Compacting posts
• Tape measure
• Spray paint
• Wire cutters
• Lineman pliers
• Saw
Lura, Panama Bridge
• Saw blades
• Winch
• Ropes

ANCHOR CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Determine if the rebar for the project will be cut and bent in fabrication shop or on site. If performed on site, a hacksaw or
grinder should be used for cutting and a rebar bender or field constructed jig for bending. Cut and bend the bars specified
in the standard drawings for the footing. Care should be taken to ensure conformity in bar bends of each designation.
Concrete should be prepared with respect to the quantity needed for each stage of construction. See Section 5.1 for
concrete specifications.
Step 2 – Reinforcing Steel Cage Assembly

Once all of the steel has been bent per the anchor details, connect the stirrups
to the longitudinal reinforcing bars with tie wire. While assembling the anchor
reinforcing cage, ensure the proper spacing and splice lengths are provided.
Assemble the cage near the excavation to allow for ease of placement.
When benching has been used, it is possible to assemble the cage in the
excavation. On the lowest seat of benching, construct a build platform. The
elevated form can be built of wood legs with wooden planks. Construct the Lura, Panama
reinforcing steel cage and tie ropes to multiple locations along the cage.
Step 3 – Place Reinforcing Steel Cage

If assembled outside of the excavation, move the cage into the excavation. There are many ways to lower the cage into the
excavation, but no matter the method used, be sure to utilize all available resources to make the process as simple and as
safe as possible. Thoroughly discuss and rehearse placing the reinforcing cage.
If benching has been used, confirm that multiple ropes have been attached along both sides of the anchor cage. With a
team holding up the cage, remove the table of the platform and lower the cage into the excavation.
Step 4 – Install Transition Arm Reinforcing and Cast Anchor Beam Concrete
Ensure the excavation and
reinforcing cage are centered with
respect to the centerline of the
bridge. After the cage has been
set in the anchor excavation,
attach the longitudinal transition
arm reinforcing bars A01 and
A02 to the back side of the
anchor beam cage. Concrete Lura, Panama Lura, Panama
can be placed after confirming
the transition arm bars are at
the correct angle by measuring
the vertical and horizontal as-
built distances from the anchor
beam to the end of the projecting
transition arm rebar. Allow the
concrete interface area at the
anchor beam and transition arms Rio Abajo, Nicaragua Lura, Panama
to remained roughened and
ensure all clear dimensions are satisfied.

Step 5 – Construct Transition Arms

Ensure the transition arm excavations are centered with respect to the centerline
of the bridge and the excavations parallel to the centerline of the bridge. Attach
sets of A07 “U” shaped bars evenly spaced along the longitudinal bars that run
the through the extents of the anchor per plan. Ensure that edge clear distance
is maintained. Non-mechanical reinforcing bar splices are not permitted. See
plans for spacing and quantities.
Place the concrete for the transition arms. If cast on different days, confirm Lura, Panama
the surface between the transition arms and anchor beam is roughened.
A roughened surface will facilitate the bonding of the previous concrete
placement to a new stage.
If the excavations for the anchor beam or transition arms are larger than is
specified in the construction drawings, formwork may be used. Formwork can
be made of wood or masonry, but must support the lateral pressure of the wet
concrete while it is placed. A bond breaker, such as gasoline, can be placed on
the wood forms to allow for ease in removal after a curing period has passed.
Lura, Panama
Step 6 – Construct Anchor Blocks

Attach the bent reinforcing bars (A04, A05, A08, and additional A07 bars) to the bars projecting from the transition arms.
An anchor pipe will be needed at each anchor block, two per anchor. Fill the anchor pipe with concrete and position and
secure it within the reinforcing bars to ensure it cannot be easily moved. If the anchor pipe moves during the construction
process it can result in major alignment problems later. The reinforcing bars extending from the anchor beam through the
transition arm and into the anchor block should be in full contact with the pipe.
Confirm each of the following dimensions and orientation of the anchor pipes:
• Distance to centerline
• Perpendicular to centerline
• Each pipe level to each other and to the ground
Construct formwork to place the concrete for each anchor block. The inside dimensions of the formwork should be built to
achieve the overall dimensions on the standard drawings. When placing concrete for the anchors refer to Chapter 3.5 for
concrete specifications.
After concrete has set, backfill the area over the anchor and transition arms with soil and compact to achieve the original
grade.
Lura, Panama Lura, Panama Lura, Panama

6.7 Towers

This section contains provisions for the tower erection operations.
This manual provides one method for the erection of the steel suspension
towers that has been successful on Bridges to Prosperity projects. For every
project, it is important to evaluate the situation based on the unique aspects
of the site and bridge design. Equipment availability and terrain may dictate
that a deviation from this procedure is required. Whether using this procedure
or another, the erection plan must be reviewed by a qualified person who is Lura, Panama
familiar with the project and the limitations of the site.
SAFETY
Erecting scaffolding, working on scaffolding, and erecting the towers are
dangerous stages of building a suspension bridge and many of the potential
hazards can be eliminated through planning and communication. Constructing
the towers can present limited access, objects falling from the work area, and
any of the other additional challenges of working at heights. Hardhats and
means of fall protection should be introduced to make tower construction safer.
Lura, Panama
Hardhats, foot protection, and hand protection can prevent injury if materials
or tools are dropped. When mixing concrete, proper PPE and planning can reduce the hazards from working with cement.

Winch Safety
A winch, also known as a come along, cable puller, or cable hoist, is used for
erecting towers. As this is a particularly high risk activity, special care needs
to be taken in the selection and use of a winch. A winch should never be
used for anything other than its intended purpose. Any failure can lead to a
losing control of and dropping the tower. Proper personal protective equipment
should be worn when operating a winch.
A thorough inspection of the cable winch intended for use in cable sag setting
Gaseke, Rwanda
is mandatory prior to use. A failed winch can seriously injure or even kill a
person. Never use a winch you do not trust, has been provided by an unknown
source, or shows damage or excessive rusting. Do not use a cheater bar to try and gain additional leverage.
Ensure that all devices being used are capable of carrying the load force, including the anchor points, and any other straps
or fastening devices that may be used to carry the load. Use appropriate end clamps and connections. Inspect the chain
for wear, twists, excessive dirt, broken links, and proper lubrication as well as the cable, chain, and hooks for deformations,
cracks, damage, and properly operating latches. Do not use a winch if parts are damaged.
Before lifting the tower, determine danger zones and safe zones. Dangers zones are areas which are unsafe and should
not be occupied during sag setting. Determine areas which are safe escape routes to be used in case of emergency.
Communicate the location of those areas to all workers on the site. Do not straddle the winch. Only active participants in
the cable sag setting should be present at site. Never allow participants or spectators to stand in front of the anchor when
cable or cable winch are under tension.
ESCAPE ROUTE
ANCHOR POINT
DANGER ZONE
DANGER ZONE ESCAPE ROUTE
ESCAPE ROUTE

QUALITY CONTROL
The towers on each abutment directly support the main cables and transfer all vertical loads and any transverse horizontal
wind loads from bridges without lateral stabilization systems into the pedestals. The quality of steel fabrication is essential
to the performance of the towers. Welds should be inspected and all components should be painted with anti-corrosive
paint. Any scratches or chips in the paint should be repaired. Once assembled, the main steel pipes should be parallel to
one another. All bolts shall be snug tight and to ensure the nuts to not become loose, either double nut the bolt or peen the
threads (strike with a hammer so as to deform the threads and prevent removal of the nut).
All tower dimensions should be checked against the design drawings. Consult the design engineer for tolerance limits on
as-built dimensions.

• Properly orientated crossbracing • Tower and bracing, completed
• Spacer plates between crossbraces • Tower erection method
• Attached tie-back cable • Hoisted towers in canted position
• Greased tower leg pipes
• Secured tower leg cover plates
• Canted towers
• Concrete in tower leg bases
As-Built Information
The towers should match the designed plans for the bridge. Ensure the proper cant is met and the tower bases are secure.
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Cement • Scaffolding
• Sand • Screw jacks or shims
• Gravel • Guy wires and associated clamps
• Water • Planking boards
• Steel tower assembly • Wrench
• Tie-back cable • Shovels
• Tie-back cable clamps • Buckets
• Masonry tools
• Construction square
• Level
• Plumb bob
• String line
• Marker
• Pulleys
• Hauling cable
• Rope
• Slings
• Winch

TOWER CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Step 1 - Planning
It is imperative that a robust erection plan, that includes safety considerations, is developed for everyone involved in the
tower erection. A method of positioning the tower legs, assembling the tower, and erecting the tower should be established.
A trained winch operator should be designated.
Step 2 – Erect Scaffolding and Install Guy Lines

Scaffolding is required and plays
an integral role in the erection
process outlined in this manual.
Scaffolding is used to raise the
towers and hang the suspenders.
The design and selection of the
scaffolding additional equipment
(platforms, internal stairways,
Lura, Panama Lura, Panama
and guy wires) should be led
by a competent, safety trained,
individual. The trained individual
should ensure that the scaffolding
meets quality requirements.
Assemble scaffolding on the

riverside of the tower foundation.
The final height of the scaffolding
La Brisa, Nicaragua El Dorado, Nicaragua
should be greater than the final
height of the towers. Bracing of the scaffolding by means of guy wires is required to help prevent lateral movement and
potential collapse while raising the tower as well as add stability while working from the scaffolding towers during suspender
installation. 10 millimeter guy lines should be installed at each corner of the scaffolding at a minimum at full height and mid
height. Guy lines should be secured to strategically placed and secured anchor points.
To ease erection, construct additional scaffolding on either side of the ramp to provide support for each tower leg. The initial
position of the towers during erection should be horizontal or inclined up to reduce construction loads on the pedestals and
to keep the tower legs contacting the top of the pedestals.
Attach the pulleys and pedestals to the scaffolding. The use of pulleys allows the towers to be raised with less force. Be sure
to develop an execution plan and communicate the plan with all parties on site before starting
Step 3 – Assemble Tower

Lift the tower legs on the
scaffolding with the bases of
the tower legs (P02) oriented
vertically next to the tower bases.
Fill the bases of the tower legs
with concrete as indicated the
Tower Detail Drawings. Grease
Lura, Panama El Corozo, Nicaragua
the tower base saddle plates
(PL04) and once the concrete has set, rotate the tower legs 90º, placing them into the tower bases. Assemble the tower
ensuring all braces are orientated correctly. Include the spacer plates that separate the cross bracing when bolted together.
Assemble the tower so that it is horizontal to the ground. Check all of the tower frame bolts to ensure they are snug tight, the
tightness achieved by the full effort of an individual with an ordinary wrench. Add an additional nut or peen all of the tower
bolts. Grease and install the remaining curved plates (PL04), spacer plates, and bolts of the tower base.

Step 4 – Preparation for Tower Erection

Tie a plumb bob to the top of the tower leg to check alignment and cant when the tower is vertical. Attach two pieces of
wood, that will act as stoppers, to the planking boards that are used as a working platform. The stoppers should be oriented
toward the river and placed so that their ends will touch the tower when the tower is fully erected to its final position. Secured
to the scaffolding, they can aid in determining when the tower has reached its desired cant. Tower cant values can be found
on the Tower Details drawing.
Attach a sling and hauling cable between the cross bracing locations on the tower. Multiple types of pulley system assemblies
can be used, but the pulley should always be higher than the pick point on the tower when the tower is erected vertically.
String the attached hauling cable through the pulley and to the winch.
Lura, Panama Lura, Panama La Brisa, Nicaragua
Step 5 – Raise Towers

Before starting, create a safety perimeter around the tower and ensure the
area is clear and be sure that the execution plan is clearly communicated with
all workers on site. Slowly begin taking the slack out of the hauling cable and
erect the tower using the winch. Station an observer to monitor the tower’s
progress and signal the winch operator when the tower is fully erected and
makes contact with the stoppers. When the tower is vertical, secure the tower
to the scaffolding with rope or ratchet straps.
La Brisa, Nicaragua
Step 6 – Set Towers
Confirm the tower cant using the plumb bob that was attached to the top of the
tower. The towers are set back to allow rotation to a vertical state when the
bridge is fully loaded. If they are not set back, rotation past vertical becomes
possible which could introduce unaccounted for loading.
Repeat this process for the remaining tower. Ensure that the bolts at the tower
bases are secured and tight.
La Brisa, Nicaragua

6.8 Cable Hoisting

This section contains provisions for the cable installation operations.
Design sag – The maximum anticipated sag the cables would experience
under full loading
Hoisting sag – The predicted initial sag that the cable will take under only its
self-weight
Lura, Panama
f-value – Distance from the lowest tower saddle to the lowest point on the
cable, calculated using Equation 6.1, hoisting sag, and as-built dimensions
SAFETY
Setting sag is one of the most dangerous process during a suspension build. Extensive planning should be done before
this step is executed which should include cable transport to the site and across the river, staging, hoisting, and adjustment.
Hand protection should be worn when handling cable to protect against any protruding or broken wires. Cables are heavy
and require many people to move, and as such, teamwork is important in handling the cables and avoiding injury. Take care
not to accidentally drop cables on the hands or feet of other workers.
Lifting the cables over the saddles of the towers can also present a significant hazard. If possible, this activity should be
performed with the help of a pulley attached to the top of the scaffolding with a rope attached to the cable, this way the cable
can be hoisted up from the ground. It is important that the worker pulling the rope and hoisting up the cable is not directly
under the cable as the this presents a very dangerous falling hazard. Once the cable is at the top of the tower, take care
not to overstrain oneself lifting the cable onto the saddle. Again, it is important to make sure that no one is standing below
the tower.
Additional information regarding PPE and safety suggestions can be found in Section 2.

Winch Safety
adjusting cables and sag setting on all cable bridge projects. These are two of
the most critical steps in the construction process and are potentially some of
the more dangerous. Special care needs to be taken in the selection and use
of a winch. A winch should never be used for anything other than its intended
purpose. Any failure can lead to a cable slip, which is extremely dangerous.
A loose cable can whip out of control and cause significant injury. Proper
personal protective equipment should be worn when operating a winch. El Corozo, Nicaragua
A thorough inspection of the cable winch intended for use in cable sag setting is mandatory prior to use. A failed winch
can seriously injure or even kill a person. Never use a winch you do not trust, has been provided
ESCAPE ROUTE by an unknown source or
shows excessive rusting or is broken. Do not use a cheater bar to try and gain additional leverage.
ANCHOR POINT
Ensure that all devices being used are capable of carrying the load force, including the anchor points, and any other straps
or fastening devices that may be used to carry the load. Use appropriate end clamps and connections. Inspect the chain for
wear, twists, excessive dirt, broken links, and proper lubrication. Inspect winch cable, chain, and hooks for deformations,
cracks, damage, and properly operating latches. Do not use a winch if parts are damaged.
DANGER ZONE
Before tensioning cables and putting any loadDANGER
on the winch,
ZONE determine danger zones and
ESCAPE ROUTE safe zones. Dangers zones are
areas which are unsafe and should not be occupied during sag setting. Determine areas which are safe escape routes to be
used in case of emergency. Communicate the location of those areas to all workers on the site. Do not straddle the winch.
Only active participants in the cable sag setting should be present at site. Never allow participants or spectators to stand in
front of the anchor when cable or cable winch are under tension.
Cable Safety
Never use a cable clamp at the saddle to “hold” a live cable under tension. Never leave a cable unsecured! Before tensioning
a cable, ensure the tail of the dead end of the cable is secured to another cable before releasing the clamps.
Cables can slip. Ensure all clamps are fully torqued to the manufacture’s requirements or the required deformation.
ESCAPE ROUTE
DANGER ZONE ESCAPE ROUTE DANGER ZONE

QUALITY CONTROL
Hoisting the main cables sets the geometry for the walkway and ultimately determines what forces the towers and anchors
must resist. If the cables are set either too high, too low, or out of level, the bridge may lose serviceability with a walkway
that is too steep or slanted or the bridge tower and anchors may experience a greater load demand than was designed for.
The main cable hoisting has major implications for the overall functionality and safety of the bridge structure.
Calculating the correct f-value and the methods for locating the low point on the bridge site should be clearly understood and
carried out by a qualified person. Survey equipment should be calibrated to ensure accuracy of measurement.
Hoisting all of the cables may take enough time that weather conditions at the project site can influence the cables hoisted
position in the form of temperature changes. Pre-stretched cables are typically used, but they may still experience slight
elongations and changes in elevation with the tensions associated with hoisting. The position of all cables should be verified
a minimum of 24 hours after hoisting. Consult the design engineer for tolerance limits on as-built sag values.
Installing the proper number of the correctly sized clamps at the appropriate spacing and torque is also paramount to the
safety and performance of the bridge. If a torque wrench is not available, using the reduced diameter method is a sufficient
alternative.

• Anchor has properly cured • Cross section of cable with measurement
• Verify span length and difference in elevation • Installed cable and clamps with appropriate quantity
• Correct cable and clamp size and spacing
• Inspect cable for wire damage or splices • Torqued clamp showing cable diameter reduction
• Cables in proper bearing on tower saddles and not • Hoisted cables
crossing
• Correctly calculated f-value
• Correct number and spacing of clamps
• Clamps sufficiently torqued with reduced diameter
drawings
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Cable • Winch
• Drop forged cable clamps • Torque wrench
• Automatic level and tripod
• Philly rod
• Measuring tape
• Permanent marker
• Duct tape
• Tie wire
• Grinder
• Long measuring tape

CABLE SETTING SEQUENCE

Step 1 – Unspool Cables
Take care when unwinding the cable from the spool as kinks in the cable
are detrimental to the material strength and become a point of weakness.
Because the presence of sand between the cable strands can cause damage,
it is important not to lay the cable in sandy areas. Use heavy tie wire to wrap
around the loose ends of the cable to stop unraveling.
Lura, Panama
Step 2 –Stage Cables
Once all cables are cut, they should be arranged along the length of the bridge
span. If the cables have been cut to the appropriate size and transported to
site, they should be uncoiled and laid out on the ground. Take care with the
cables and do not allow them to overlap one another.
La Conga, Panama
Attach the end of a stout rope to the cable at the tower location. With multiple
people, pull the rope over the scaffolding allowing the cable to rise to the tower
saddle. Alternatively, a pulley can be attached to the top of the scaffolding and
used to allow workers to pull the cable from the ground up to another worker
at the top of the scaffolding. One at a time, carefully place the cables onto the
tower saddle and remove the rope from the main cable and repeat this process
at each tower saddle.
Gasura, Rwanda

Step 3 – Clamp Cable at Fixed Anchor

Designate the anchor block at the lower elevation to be the fixed anchor. The
f-value should be marked on the tower leg of the fixed anchor and will be used
in sag setting. At the fixed anchor location, place the cables around the anchor
pipe of the anchor block with the live length of the cable should extending
over the towers and across to the opposing anchor. Install the cable clamps
referring to the drop forged cable clamp, Table 6.1, for the correct number of
clamps and clamp spacing per cable diameter. The clamp saddle lies against
the live end of the cable, “never saddle a dead horse!”, and the U-bolt of the
La Conga, Panama
clamp is installed against the dead end of the cable. Torque the cable clamps
of the fixed per the manufacturer’s specified torque or until the minimum
deformation has been achieved.

3/4 19 4 5 12 130
7/8 22 4 5 13 225
1 25 5 6 14 225
1 1/8 29 6 6 15 225
1 1/4 32 7 6 16 360
1 3/8 35 7 6 16 360
1 1/2 38 8 7 18 360

SPAN (L)
L/2 L/2
Step 4 – Establish and Mark the f-value
ΔH
Using the as-built dimensions of the
LOWtower
POINThinges, calculate the hoisting sag and f-value. At the tower on the side of the fixed
hHoist
hDL
hLL
anchor, the f-value shall be measured down from the cable saddle and marked on the tower leg. Alternatively, subtract the
f
f-value from the tower height and measure up from the center of the tower hinge.
The vertical distance, f, between the lowest point of the cable and the lower cable saddle is calculated by:
f= ((14.(
16 $ h Hoist
in which:
h Hoist = 0.075 $ L ((14.(
where:
DH = elevation difference between cable saddles, m
L = span length, m
SPAN (L)
L/2 L/2
ΔH
hHoist
LOW POINT
hDL
hLL
f
Step 5 – Place Automatic Level

Assemble and set an automatic level opposite of the marked tower and
calibrate it by setting the center crosshair at the same elevation as the f-value
mark. The auto level shall be placed in a tensioning safe zone free of obstacles
with an unobstructed view of the marked tower and the center of the span of
the bridge.
Gaseke, Rwanda

Step 6 – Attach Winch

Using a small piece of extra main cable, create a hoisting loop with two drop forged clamps and loosely attach it to the main
cable to be hoisted. By hand, pull the main cable as taut as possible, position the hoisting loop within the throw of the winch,
and securely attach the hoisting loop to the main cable with two drop forged clamps. With the winch attached to an erection
hook in the anchor block, attach the acting end of the winch to the hoisting loop and slowly let go of the main cable. The
After the cable has been set, repeat this process for each cable.
Cable Winch Attachment:

The cable winch should always be attached to the nearest erection hook to ensure that the cable is raised in a straight line
between tower saddle and anchor.
Hoisting Loop:
Make a loop by clamping approximately three meters of extra cable length to itself with two fully tightened clamps. The cable
used to make the loop should be the same diameter as the main cable. Clamp the cable loop to the main cable and attach
the winch to the cable loop.
HOISTING LOOP
CLAMPS FOR MAIN CABLE MAIN CABLE

Figure 14.4 – Raising Loop
Step 7 – Hoist Cables

Once the main cable is safely attached to the winch, slowly pull the cable
towards the anchor. With the drop forged clamps removed, hoist the cable
into the sight of the automatic level and slightly above the marking on the
tower. Hand tighten one drop forged clamp (holding clamp) approximately 10
centimeters from the anchor pipe and fully tighten a second clamp (safety
clamp) approximately one meter from the first clamp with some slack in the
cable between the two clamps. Once the clamps have been installed, slowly
release the tension from the cable winch.
Lura, Panama

HOISTING LOOP Volume 3: Suspension Cable Bridges

Step 8 – Adjust Cables
After the tension of the cable is removed, the cable may lower. If the cable falls to below the middle crosshair of the
automatic level, reattach the winch, remove the clamps, and repeat Step 7 leaving the cable higher in the viewfinder of the
automatic level. If the cable remained above the marked location, adjustments can be made by striking the cable. Using a
large piece of wood, strike the cable between the clamps. Striking
CLAMPSthe
FORcable will allow the cable
MAIN CABLE to slip, moving the cable
MAIN CABLE
closer to the crosshairs of the automatic level. If the cable does not move, slowly loosen the holding clamp one quarter turn
and then strike the cable again. The holding clamp nuts should be turned at one quarter intervals until the cable begins to
very slowly slip through the clamps when struck by the piece of wood. This movement may be barely noticeable through
the automatic level, but care should be taken to not overly loosen the holding clamp as this could lead to the cable slipping
entirely and can create a dangerous situation. Only one strike of the cable may be necessary. Stop lowering the cable when
it is centered in the middle crosshair of the automatic level viewfinder, fully tighten the holding clamp, install and fully tighten
an additional drop forged clamp at the appropriate spacing from the holding clamp.
Repeat this process for all cables. If there is more than half a cable width of change or slip over the course of a day, the
cables must be adjusted. Because unnoticeable slack or differences in cable temperature may surface slowly, allow 24
hours for observation to ensure the cables are in the correct position.

CABLE SLACK
STRIKE CABLE WITH

LARGE PIECE OF WOOD
cm
~100
SLIGHTLY LOOSENED CLAMP
Figure 14.5 – Sag Adjustment Method
Step 9 – Clamp Cables and Install Tower Bolts

After verifying the elevation of the cables, fully install all required clamps and
remove the safety clamp. As performed on the fixed anchor, refer to the drop
forged clamp Table 6.1 (Step 3) or manufacturer’s specifications for the correct
number of clamps and clamp spacing per cable diameter. The clamp saddle
shall lie against the live end of the cable, “never saddle a dead horse!” The
U-bolt of the clamp shall lie against the dead end of the cable. Torque the
cable clamps of the adjustable anchor per the manufacturer’s specified torque
or until the minimum deformation has been achieved. If the clamps are not
Gaseke, Rwanda
tightened sufficiently, failure of the structure could occur.
Install the bolts at the top of each saddle.
El Triangulo, Nicaragua

6.9 Walkway

This section contains provisions for walkway construction. Once the main
cables are adjusted to the proper height and secured with the required number
of clamps at the anchors, the walkway can be installed along the main cables.
The bridge walkway is comprised of swings (crossbeam, nailer, and

suspenders) spaced horizontally at one meter intervals with decking boards
placed longitudinally along the length of the span.
Crossbeam – A steel assembly that supports a nailer and hangs from two
suspenders; suspenders are placed through a crossbeam and nailers are attached with screws
Timber decking – Typically two meter lengths of timber boards of approximately 20 centimeters in width and 5 centimeters
in depth; used as the walking surface of the bridge
Suspender – 10 millimeter deformed reinforcing bars cut to a varying length; used to connect and space the crossbeams
along with length of the main cables, support for the fencing of the bridge
Nailer – Timber boards, 20 centimeters in width and 5 centimeters in depth, attached to the top of the cross beam to
increase the amount of surface area available for nailing decking
SAFETY
Before beginning walkway construction, be aware of the hazards that
accompany carrying suspenders, crossbeams, timber and other materials over
the terrain of a bridge construction site. Hardhats, foot protection, and hand
protection can prevent injury if construction materials or tools are dropped.
Hand and eye protection should be worn when cutting reinforcing bars to
make suspenders or preparing timber decking boards. Take special care when
bending, drilling, and transporting these materials. When mixing concrete and El Triangulo, Nicaragua
grout, proper PPE and planning can reduce the hazards from working with
cement.
Construction of the superstructure can present limited access, objects falling from the work area, and many of the other
additional challenges of working at heights. Be cognizant of the instability that will occur when walking on loose crossbeams.
Hardhats must be worn by anyone under work being performed on the walkway. Workers installing the decking plans must
wear fall protection. When attaching to the safety line, it is important to ensure that the appropriate type of fall protection is
selected especially when working near the abutments of the bridge where the fall distance may be limited. Installing swing
assemblies and decking planks present the highest risk for a fall. Take extra precaution when performing these activities
and be cognizant of footing as decking planks are often loose and unstable until fully installed. In the case that worker does
fall, it is vital to have a safety plan in place to effectively recover the victim as quickly as possible.
Additional information regarding PPE and safety suggestions can be found in Section 2.

QUALITY CONTROL
The walkway allows users to safely cross the bridge. The decking boards and fencing will experience the most wear and
impact from people, animals, and weather. These exposed components undergo substantial dynamic movements from
typical traffic as well as wind that can lead to premature deterioration or failure if not installed properly. Each component of
the walkway, crossbeams, nailers, decking boards, suspenders, and fencing, should be installed per plan as best possible.
The crossbeam spacing and decking board dimensions are critical to satisfying the design loads. Care should also be taken
to ensure the fencing is appropriately fixed to the edge of decking boards as snags can easily cause damage which may
lead to unsafe conditions. Consult the design engineer for tolerance limits on as-built dimensions.

• Verify cables are level and at correct sag • Restraint cable anchorage
• Restraint cable marked for proper suspender spacing • Completed deck
• Restraint cable properly anchored • Suspender to crossbeam connection
• Crossbeams dimensions and spacing (suspenders • Suspender to main cable connection
are vertical) • Walkway landing at approach ramp
• Nailer dimensions and properly fastened • Completed walkway with fencing installed
• Decking board dimensions and spacing
• Decking boards properly fastened
• Clamps installed properly at top and bottom of
suspenders
• Fencing terminated at post
• Fencing sufficiently attached to deck and handrail
cable
MATERIALS AND TOOLS

• Prefabricated steel crossbeams • Wood saw
• Timber decking boards • Hack saw
• Nailer boards • Blades
• 10 millimeter deformed reinforcing bars • Drill
• Lag screws • Drill bits
• Fencing • Impact driver
• Galvanized tie wire • Sockets
• U-nails • Socket wrench
• Gravel • Trowels
• Sand • Pipe
• Water • Hammers, two pound if available
• Measuring tape
• Rope
• Carabineers
• Tool belts
• Markers

WALKWAY CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

Crossbeams
Steel crossbeams should be delivered to site and painted per plans. See the
standard drawings for crossbeam specifications.
Nailers
The nailer boards should be
cut to length and attached to
the steel crossbeams with six Lura, Panama
lag screws. Once the nailer has
been screwed onto the steel
crossbeams, transverse and
longitudinal centerlines should
be marked to provide guides for
aligning the decking boards. It is
important that these centerline
markings are made with respect
to the steel crossbeam, and
not the nailer, in case the nailer
was not exactly centered on the
crossbeam when installed. Lura, Panama Lura, Panama
Suspenders
Cut and bend the suspenders for the swing assembly. Two identical suspenders will be needed for each decking swing
assembly. Because the deck does not parallel the main cables, the suspenders will vary in length along the span. Cut the
suspenders to the correct length and properly label them to ensure correct placement.
With the aid of the Bridge Deck Details of the standard drawings, bend the suspenders to create hooks at each end. Be
aware of the reinforcing bar lengths as each pair will be unique. If the length of suspender exceeds the limits of the bar
length refer to the standard drawings to utilize Type 2 suspenders.
Lura, Panama Lura, Panama Gaseke, Rwanda

Restraint Cable
The restraint cable maintains the spacing of the suspenders along the main
cable. The restraint cable should be marked along its length with the locations
of each suspender and tower. Four restraint cables will be needed, two on
each side of the river. When marking the restraint cable, be aware of the arc
length and additional dog leg length created by the clamp. When installed
the restraint cable is connected at the anchor block and runs over the top of
the tower. From the top of the tower to midspan of the bridge, the restraint
cable follows the main cables of the bridge and suspenders are attached to
Lura, Panama
the restraint cable with clamps. At midspan, the restraint cable switches to
become the handrail for the remaining half of the span paralleling the deck
curvature until it terminates at the fence post in the ramp.
Deck Boards
The bridge deck surface shall
be comprised of two meter
deck boards staggered along
the walkway length. In order to
establish a staggered pattern
at the ends of the bridge, a few
one meter length will be required.
Deck boards need two pre-drilled
La Conga, Panama Lura, Panama
holes at each end and one in
the middle, for a total of five. For
ease of installation and alignment purposes, place a center mark on each edge of each decking board. See the Bridge Deck
Details for more information on dimensions and hole/screw location.
If the wood is very hard, it is advisable to predrill holes for the lag screws. Lag screws may be dipped in grease or soap to
make the installation easier.
Step 2 – Assemble Swings and Install the Marked Restraint Cable

Each pair of suspenders should be connected to a crossbeam assembly and
laid out in the order they will be placed on the bridge. It is recommended to
label each suspender and nailer with an installation order number. Once all
swings are prepared, they can be hoisted up to workers on the scaffolding
one at a time. Refrain from assembling the swings for the final two assembles
at each end as there is a special conflict with the swings and the scaffolding.
The final crossbeams will be attached to the suspenders after scaffolding has
been taken down.
Lura, Panama
Attach the restraint cables to the anchor block and pull them over the saddles and scaffolding.
LEFT RESTRAINT CABLE RIGHT RESTRAINT CABLE
LEFT HANDRAIL CABLE RIGHT HANDRAIL CABLE
Figure 14.6 – Restraint Cable to Handrail Cable Transition

Step 3 – Install Swings along Restraint Cable

One by one, lift the swing sets up to the individuals stationed on the scaffolding using ropes. If available, attach pulleys
to the top of the scaffolding so that the swings can be hoisted from the ground. Swings should be launched from both
sides, with half of the swings being sent out from each side. Be sure the first installed swing assembly is connected at the
appropriate predetermined mark on each restraint cable. The first set of suspenders to be placed are the suspenders for the
middle of the bridge. Ensure that there is adequate additional length of restraint cable to act as the handrail on the opposite
side of the bridge.
Place each suspender over the main cable and restraint cable. With a 3/8” clamp, attach each suspender to a restraint cable
at the designated marking. Finish the installation by clamping the suspender to itself.
Gasura, Rwanda Gaseke, Rwanda El Triangulo, Nicaragua
To prevent bunching and tangling of suspenders, periodically pull the

suspenders towards the center via the restraint cable (additional length in
front) if needed.
For the last two swing assemblies nearest the abutments on either side of the
bridge, install the suspenders only.
Gaseke, Rwanda
Step 4 – Install Safety Cable

Before the placement of the decking boards, a safety line should be installed.
The safety cable is the connection that the fall protection will be attached to
while working on the deck. A suggested location for the safety cable is over the
saddles of the towers, on top of the main cables and saddle bolt, and connected
to the cable anchor blocks on both sides. The scaffolding can be removed if
the safety cable is secured to the anchor block. This cable should be set higher
than the main cables to allow the individual to be tied off above their head
no matter where they are on the bridge. When determining the placement
Lura, Panama
of the safety cable, it is important to consider the type and availability of fall
protection. Long retractable lanyards are ideal for the suggested location of the
safety line. However, if these are not available, the safety line may be too high
to allow access for attachment and detachment of lanyards, and the safety line may need to be located lower.
Step 5 – Remove Scaffolding

Take down the scaffolding. Before the final set of scaffolding is disassembled, ensure that the crossbeams of the last two
swing assemblies have been installed.
Step 6 – Install Final Crossbeams

After the scaffolding has been removed, install the final crossbeams to the suspenders and then fasten the nailers.

Step 7 – Deck Installation

Once the suspenders have been installed and pulled to the proper spacing, the decking process can begin. It is essential to
develop a decking installation plan before starting. Consider the installation process, safety plan, and fall protection/rescue.
It is recommended that the tools used for the decking are attached to workers by means of a rope and carabineer. A tool
connected a worker can prevent it from falling and hitting anyone working below while still allowing an easy exchange from
one worker to another.
The deck is comprised of five planks in width and staggered along the span of
the structure. Beginning at the abutment, use the marks placed on the nailer,
place a two meter long center boar aligning the top center mark of the decking
board with the centerline on the third swing. Only at the ends of the bridge,
install a one meter board on either side of the center board. The end of the
board shall be aligned with the transverse centerline of the second swing.
Place and install two meter boards on the outsides of the installed decking.
Align the middle marks on the outside decking boards with the centerline of
Lura, Panama
the second swing. Align the end centerline markings on the decking boards
with the transverse centerline of the third swing. The decking should allow the
swings to be successfully placed at one meter intervals. Decking installation
should be executed from both sides of the bridge. See Bridge Deck Details for
more information.
El Triangulo, Nicaragua Lura, Panama Lura, Panama
Continue to install decking boards as described. All decking boards throughout the main span shall be of two meters
in length with two screws placed at each and one screw in the center of each board. If available, impact wrenches are
recommended for installing the lag screws into the decking boards.
It is recommended that a spacer be used for the suspenders. A piece of rebar that has a 90º hook on both ends can be
used to ensure the suspenders do not move away. Once decking boards are connected to the next suspender, the spacer
tool can be moved as well.
As the center of the bridge is reached, the suspenders launched from either side of the bridge will come together and there
will be an irregular spacing at midspan. Ensure that this spacing is less than one meter and custom cut decking boards to
length to complete the decking. If the center spacing is greater than one meter, it is necessary to install an additional swing
assembly.

Step 8 – Construct Landing

At either end of the bridge, the
deck will be elevated above
the pedestal height. Once the
decking has been completed and
the bridge is vacated of workers,
construct a small concrete ramp
to make a smooth transition to
access the bridge. The landing
Lura, Panama El Zarzal, Nicaragua
ties into the concrete topping
slab of the ramp. Construct the
landing by making a simple concrete ramp that has a pocket for the end boards to rest. Allow the bridge to remain closed
while the landing is curing. See the Walkway Details sheets for more information.
Step 9 – Install Fencing

On the bridge, unroll the fencing and stretch it as much as possible. While vertical, place the fencing over the side of the
decking, allowing it to rest on the edges of the crossbeams and rest on the suspenders. Push the fencing down to lay flat on
the deck and secure the fencing to the bridge by nailing it to the sides of the decking with u-nails at 25 centimeter intervals.
When the fencing has been placed across the length of the span in this manner, raise the fencing upright. Weave the
handrail cable through the top of the fencing and attach it to each suspender with a clamp, ensuring that the handrail cable
is taught between each suspenders. Secure the handrail cables to each fence post and attach the fencing to the suspenders
with galvanized tie wire at mid height. Repeat this process until the length of the bridge has fencing on both sides.
La Conga, Panama La Conga, Panama Lura, Panama

6.10 Completion
When the bridge has been completed, remove all hazardous materials from
the site. Grade the surrounding areas to provide smooth and safe access to
the bridge. When the bridge has been deemed complete, the bridge can be
opened to the community for use!
QUALITY CONTROL
Quality Control Checklist:
• Completed bridge decking free of debris El Triangulo, Nicaragua
• Clear work area
• Graded access to bridge
Quality Control Photos:

• Completed bridge from bridge centerline
• Completed bridge from left side
• Completed bridge from right side
• Completed bridge from upstream
• Completed bridge from downstream Gasura, Rwanda
Paso Real, Nicaragua

Appendix 3.1
Team Leader _______________ Weekending ______________
Daily Work Plan
Safety is a Team Effort

Project Manager Review Safety Review
HOW TO USE THE DAILY WORK PLAN
1. Discuss the entire job with all employees that will be involved.
Ask for ideas and input on how to perform the job productively and safely. It is very
important to discuss each step of the job and note any comments or questions from your
crew.
2. Description of work
This should be a summary of the task at hand, example: form walls for grit chamber
number one. Then complete the project location, date, Team Leader name, and work area.
3. Work Items
Enter a brief step-by-step description of the task to be performed, using a new block for
each step of the task.
4. Equipment / Tools / Materials

List all tools, materials, and equipment to be used during the performance of each task.
5. Potential Hazards
List any potential hazards or injuries that might occur during the performance of each task.
6. Steps to Prevent Hazards / Accidents / Injuries

List what methods you would take for each step to prevent hazards, accidents, and injuries
for each task.
7. Work Area Hazards

Complete thoroughly addressing hazards that are out of crew’s control, (weather,
subcontractors, conditions, etc.)
8. Presentation
Once you have completed the Daily Work Plan, discuss each step with the crew performing
the work in a safety meeting before the work begins. Ask for and answer any questions,
comments and input from the crew members. Once all questions have been resolved have
each member signs the bottom of the Daily Work Plan.
9. When you have completed and have presented the Daily Work Plan, post it in your work
area.
10. Turn in Daily Work Plan book at the end of the week for review by Project Manager and
Safety Manager.
By performing each step of the Daily Work Plan and planning safety into your work we can and will
decrease the potential for accidents and injuries on all Bridges to Prosperity job sites.
Daily Work Plan Project: Date:
Weather : Circle One Jobsite Conditions: Discussion Leader:
Clear Overcast Rain Snow Work Area:
Temperature:
Description of Work:
Hold Points:
Work Items Equipment / Tools / Materials Potential Hazards Steps to Prevent Hazards / Accidents
SIGNATURES:
WORK AREA HAZARDS AND END OF DAY REVIEW MUST BE COMPLETELY FILLED OUT
Daily Site Inspection
Crew Date
Team Leader Time
Conditions Saf e At Risk N/A Behaviors Saf e At Risk N/A

Daily Work Plan Accessible Proper Lifting Techniques
PPE (proper selection) Proper Body Position
Excavation Inspected Avoiding Pinch Points
Fall Protection Inspected Staying Out of the Line of Fire
Fall Hazards Eyes on Work/Path
Tool/Equipment Condition Proper Ascending/Descending
Electrical Hazards Eye/Face Protection
Scaff olds (inspected, setup) Hand Protection
Ladders (setup & tied off) Fall Protection
Rigging Hearing Protection
MSDS (review ed & understood) Respiratory Protection
Rebar Protection Body Protection
Housekeeping Clothing & Boots
Access/Egress Tool/Equipment Selection
Fire Prevention & Protection Communication
Barricading Hoses/Cords/Leads
Fire Extinguisher Ladders (use & selection)
Proper Storing of Materials
Cleaning As They Go
Hazards to be corrected: Date corrected: Corrected by:
Inspection perf ormed by:

DAILY EXCAVATION INSPECTION

Location:
Visual Inspection:
atmospheric hazard?
Comments:
Inspector’s name:

Location:
Visual Inspection:
atmospheric hazard?
Comments:
Inspector’s name:

Location:
Visual Inspection:
atmospheric hazard?
Comments:
Inspector’s name:
FALL PROTECTION INSPECTION FORM

Area: ____________________________________ Date: ______________________________
Acceptable
No. Service
Yes No Yes No
Full Body Harness
Connectors:
Double Legged
Lanyard
Rebar Hook
Retractable
Anchor Point NA
Initials:
Area: ____________________________________ Date: ______________________________

No. Acceptable
Service
Yes No Yes No
Full Body Harness
Connectors:
Rebar Hook
Retractable
Anchor Point NA
Initials:
Area: ____________________________________ Date: ______________________________

No. Acceptable
Service
Yes No Yes No
Full Body Harness
Connectors:
Rebar Hook
Retractable
Anchor Point NA
Initials:
WORK AREA HAZARDS
Potential Hazards Steps to Prevent Accidents-Injuries
What is the worst that can happen today? ____________________________________________________________________________________
What is the most likely cause of injury today? _________________________________________________________________________________
What will you do to prevent both of the above from happening? __________________________________________________________________
 Am I carrying the tools and materials needed for  Are all ladders secured top and bottom?  Can I come into contact with electrical energy?
the job?  Are ladders placed at the proper pitch?  Can I come into contact with excessive heat?
 Do my tools have all guards and handles in  Are step ladders set up on solid, level ground?  Is a fire extinguisher needed for today’s work?
place?  Is fall protection worn for work from ladders?  Can I come into contact with a toxic or corrosive
 Are all cords protected by a GFCI?  Can I suffer a strain by bending, lifting, pulling, chemical?
 Am I carrying all of the PPE needed for the job? pushing, twisting, or reaching?  Have I reviewed the MSDS for all chemicals I will
 Can I be caught in, by, or in between objects?  Is there a potential for a hazardous be using?
 Is there a potential to slip, trip, or fall? environment? (e.g. toxic gases, vapors, mists,  Have all inspections been completed –
 Are people working above me? dusts, fumes, heat, cold, pressure, etc?) Excavation, Scaffold, Fall Protection, Ladder,
 Are people working below me?  Has atmospheric testing been done? Hand and Power Tool, etc?
 Are my tools, materials, and equipment secure  Can I come into contact with moving parts of  Are others creating a hazard to my work area?
from falling? equipment or machines?
END OF DAY REVIEW

Please review today’s Daily Work Plan and ask yourself the following questions. You may add any comment you may have to today’s work or future
work in the space below. Work together with your crew and or coworkers so you may see every angle of potential hazards.
 Did I or anyone around me get injured in any way during the course of today’s activities?
 Were all potential hazards identified in today’s Daily Work Plan?
 Were there any near hits or close calls today?
 Is there anything we should look at in tomorrow’s Daily Work Plan to do differently either in regards to Safe Production, Potential Hazards or
Conditions?
 Did we leave our work area in a CLEAN and SAFE order including any associated Excavations, Safety Barriers, Hole Covers, Ladders,
Scaffolding, etc.? Is there anything we missed or left out that could be a potential hazard to me or someone else in the morning?
If ALL crew members agree to comments, please sign below. Thank you for another safe and successful day on the Job.
Incident Report
Incident date: Incident time: Project: Reported by
Description (What, Where, When, Who, How)
What acts or conditions directly caused the incident?
What other factors contributed to the incident?
What steps have/ will be taken to prevent a similar incident.
Action Item Person Responsible Completion Date
Project Manager: Safety and Health Rep.:
Signature: Signature:
Chapter 4
Maintenance & Inspection
Section 1 - Bridge Committee Annual Inspection | Page 213

Section 2 - Technical Inspection | Page 214
Section 3 - Maintenance | Page 216
Introduction
NOTE: a copy of this section of the manual should be left with each partnering community in the local language and a
second copy with the sponsoring institution upon the completion of a bridge project.
Maintenance is essential for the safety of all bridge projects. As should be outlined in project agreements, the community, local
government, and bridge committee leaders are responsible for monitoring the bridge to ensure safety and for performing basic annual
maintenance. B2P technical inspection requirements are not covered herein, but please contact B2P staff for further information as
required.
Bridge maintenance includes both bridge upkeep and scheduled inspections, typically required twice in the first five years after
the bridge opening. The community is responsible for general bridge upkeep and the local sponsoring institution (typically the
government body) is responsible for returning to the site for technical inspections. The Bridge Committee (reference Volume 1:
Project Development) must designate a person or team of people from the community to inspect the structure after every rainy
season and the sponsoring institution shall designate the engineer to complete inspections.
If Bridges to Prosperity is directly involved in the construction of the bridge, B2P will work with the agency to designate responsibility
and support when required.
For concerns of safety concern or impending bridge failure, contact Bridges to Prosperity immediately (contact at info@
BridgestoProsperity.org), irrespective of our involvement.
In order to keep the bridge in optimum condition, continual upkeep is required. An annual inspection is essential to
maintenance. Following the end of the rainy season, one or more representatives of the Bridge Committee must visit the
bridge site and complete the inspection outlined below. Once the inspection is complete, corresponding maintenance must
be arranged and carried out if required (see Section 3: Maintenance).
1.1 Annual Inspection Checklist
• Remove any excess mud and debris from the bridge deck
• Ensure weeds and plants growing beneath the bridge do not obstruct the bridge
• Ensure all bolts, screws and nails are in place and tightened
• Ensure all clamps for cables terminating at anchor block are present and secure
• Replace deteriorating timber decking planks
• Replace deteriorating timber nailers
• Ensure that fencing is secure; should any wires be loose or fencing missing, repair or replace to original condition
• Check that suspenders are vertical and attached to the restraint cable
• Check for erosion; should erosion or scour occur, causing the water to reroute toward the anchor or approach,
contact the local supporting agency and request assistance with a drainage structure
• Evaluate the condition of all stone masonry walls; check for cracks in mortar joints, bulging or rotating walls, and
separation between the pedestals and approach ramp
• Approximate the tower cant; if the tower has shifted into a vertical position or is leaning towards the river when the
bridge is unloaded, contact the local supporting agency immediately and if possible, Bridges to Prosperity (contact
at www.BridgestoProsperity.org)

Following the completion of the bridge, a follow-up technical inspection should be completed a minimum of two times during
the first five years of the bridge service life. If the pedestrian bridge continues to be used beyond 10 years, a technical
inspection should be completed every 5 years. Beyond 30 years, the bridge must be reviewed by an engineer to ensure
safety of cables, structure and decking.
Upon completion, please keep one copy of the completed report and send a copy to Bridges to Prosperity.
2.1 Materials Required

• Digital camera
• Torque wrench with appropriate sockets for cable clamps
• Ladder
• Pen & paper
• Copy of Technical Inspection Form
2.2 Technical Inspection Considerations
GENERAL BRIDGE DATA

All relevant information regarding the location, construction completion date and previous inspection date for bridges built
by Bridges to Prosperity is available. It is best to have all of this information on hand, including a copy of the original bridge
drawings, before heading into the field. This will allow the inspector to note any significant changes in sag, span length, or
easily identify repairs that have been performed since the last Technical Inspection was carried out.
CABLE CONDITION
Inspect the cable at all points where accessible with a focus around the anchor pipe. Look for frayed, stretched, or worn
cable along its entire length and look for corrosion of the cable in the vicinity of the clamps.
Reference the tower cant from the as-built drawings. If the tower has rotated forward into a vertical position or is leaning
towards the river, the cable may be slipping over the tower saddle or excessively stretching. Please contact B2P immediately
(info@bridgestoprosperity.org).
CABLE CLAMPS
Inspect all accessible camps. Using a torque wrench, document existing torque on each clamp. For torque standards, first
measure the diameter of the cable and reference the corresponding minimum torque from the torque requirements on the
following page.
If the measured torque is less than 80% torque required, re-tighten all above-ground clamps to specified torque. If actual is
less than 60% of specified required torque, notify implementing agency immediately to discuss need to rip out approach or
return to add additional clamps.
If a torque wrench is not available, the inspection should check to make sure the nuts are tight using a minimum 3-foot long
wrench. If the nuts can be easily turned, they should be re-tightened. Discuss the issue with the community to ensure that
no one is loosening the nuts.
<Insert clamp torque table>

DECKING
A survey noting condition of the decking along the span length must be completed. Missing planks or crossbeams, recent
repairs, fastener type(s), suspender size, suspender material (smooth or deformed rebar), fencing material, etc. will all be
noted.
Inspection of the deck will require access to the underside of the bridge. As such, it is best to arrange for inspections to be
completed in the dry season.
APPROACH WALLS & RAMP

Inspect the condition of the approach walls and ramp. Evaluate and document extent of cracking on concrete approach
ramp. Typical source of crack propagation is settlement within the approach. Note opinion on source of cracks. If cracks
between rock walls exist, look into the approach to evaluate if excessive settlement has occurred inside. Note if any usage
issues occur. This may include water pooling, excessive cracks or bumps in the approach or connection to ground, etc.
ANCHORS
Inspect the area surrounding the anchors. Take special note if erosion has occurred and what the drainage path of run-off
water appears to take. If the erosion has caused scour, undercutting the anchor block, reference the maintenance section.
Check for concrete cracking around the anchor pipe and remove any debris that has collected in the blockout.
RIVER BANK EROSION AND SITE EVALUATION

Inspect the area surrounding the bridge, on both abutments. Take special note if erosion has occurred and what the drainage
path of run-off water appears to take. If the erosion has caused scour, undercutting footing, reference the maintenance
section.
FOOTING AND PEDESTAL

Inspect the footing and pedestals beneath each tower. Note the masonry condition and check if one is able to pick out
aggregate with hands only.
On either side, verify the footing is level. Note if the foundation (footing and pedestal together) structure appears to be
dipping towards the water or slipping, or if the pedestals appear to be rotating away from the approach ramp. If the structure
has settled in either manner creating change of elevation of line greater than 30 centimeters, contact agency responsible
for bridge.
TOWERS
Inspect the steel towers, including hinge pipes and angle bracing. Check that all bolts and nuts are present and tight. Look
for cracks in welds at all joint locations. If there any signs of corrosion where paint may be scratched or chipped, reference
the maintenance section.
Access to tall towers may require a ladder and fall protection.
2.3 Technical Inspection Form
At the time of print, the B2P Inspection protocol is undergoing significant updates. As such, the Technical Inspection Form
is not included herein but can be requested via info@bridgestoprosperity.org.

This section includes mandatory upkeep items to be completed during every annual inspection, as well as solutions to repair
bridge components should maintenance be warranted.
3.1 Overall Site Condition
If either the Annual Community or Technical Inspection shows erosion and scour are undermining the tower foundation,
a drainage structure or slope protection measure may allow the water to reroute, thus saving the structure from further
damage.
Slope protection and drainage systems are required at sites when excess run-off may influence the slope stability. It is
recommended to avoid sites where any instability is prevalent. If unavoidable, it is necessary to drain out the runoff and
seepage to ensure the stability of the slope and to avoid under-scour of structures. Water should be collected as closely
as possible to its origin and navigated away from the bridge structures. This may require a surface catch drain on a slope,
drainage around the structure or both.
In the event either bank in front of the abutment foundation has eroded and the setback has reduced from the original as-
built drawings or previous inspection report, slope protection such as rip-rap or gabion walls may need to be constructed in
order to prevent further erosion.
Examples of subsurface and surface drainage systems are shown below. For further details, reference Volume 3, Chapter
1: Suspension Bridge Design.
3.2 Cables & Clamps
If the cable is found to be corroding or fraying, estimate the percentage of the cable cross-section that has been damaged.
If greater than 10% of the cable diameter is fraying, evaluate the extent of the damage. If localized in one point, consider a
splice. Reference cable-manufacturing materials for details.
If the clamps are found to have less than 80% of required torque, each clamp must be re-tightened. The picture to the top
right depicts the cross-sectional reduction that is required when the clamps are fully torqued (assuming drop-forged, not
malleable. For more information, see Volume 3, Chapter 3: Suspension Bridge Construction). Bottom right shows the proper
length of the breaker bar or torque wrench required to apply the adequate amount of torque. If nuts are to be re-tightened,
“peen the threads” using a hammer and flat-nosed screw driver to flatten the threads will ensure future loosening does not
occur.
If the clamps are found to have less than 60% of the required torque, additional clamps must be added.
3.3 Decking
If any decking planks are rotting through or missing entirely, they must be replaced. The standard thickness of a decking
board is five centimeters, but verify with those on site before purchasing. Reference Volume 2, Chapter 2 Construction
Drawings, specifically the walkway drawings for complete details. Note that the pattern of laying the decking boards requires
a stagger, as shown in the picture to the right.
If any crossbeams are in need of replacement, they should be replaced one at a time.

If replacement is chosen, start by removing the deck panels directly above the crossbeam in question. Unwrap the fencing
in the direct location; cutting may be required. Remove the clamps at the base of the suspender allowing the crossbeam
to be lifting out. Take new crossbeam with nailer attached and fit into place. Reference Volume 2, Chapter 3: Suspension
Bridge Construction for details. Complete the process by screwing and nailing the decking boards back into place. Replace
and repair any damaged fencing before documenting the completed maintenance project.
3.4 Approach Walls & Ramp
If the inspection finds that the approach structure is degrading, use a cement mortar to patch the areas. If severe degradation,
consider patching with wedge stones.
If the ramp is cracking from settlement (not just localized cracking around the insertion points of the cable), rip out the 10
centimeter thick concrete ramp topping, backfill the approach with additional well-graded large aggregate and stone and
recover with a fresh layer of concrete, 10 centimeters thick.
3.5 Anchors
If the inspection notes that erosion and scour are undermining the anchor, a drainage structure may allow the water to
reroute, thus saving the structure from further damage. Reference Volume 2, Chapter 1: Suspension Bridge Design for
further details on drainage structures.
3.6 Footing and Pedestals
If the inspection finds that the masonry structure is degrading, use a cement mortar to patch the areas. If severe degradation,
consider replacing when possible.
If the structure is found to be slipping (either slipping downhill, or tipping forward or sideways), consult a local engineer to
evaluate the stability of the slope. If considered unsafe, close the bridge.
3.7 Towers
If the inspection notes that bolts or nuts are missing from the hinge plates or angle cross-bracing, purchase new materials
and replace. If nuts are to be re-tightened, “peen the threads” using a hammer and flat-nosed screw driver to flatten the
threads will ensure future loosening does not occur.
If the inspection indicates locations where paint has been worn, scratched, or chipped, clean the area with a wire brush and
re-paint the surface with an anti-corrosive paint to prevent corrosion.

B2P

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

B2P

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Volume 1

Bridge Builder Manual | 5th Edition

Before ground can be broken on a bridge, there is an essential

Paso Real, Nicaragua

Pignon, Haiti Chaqui Cocha, Bolivia

Introduction to Local Government

Planning and Commitment

Community Logistics and Social and

Meeting of Technical Survey Financial

Section 5 Project Evaluation and Selection

Finalize Finalize and Final Design

Ready to Begin Construction Phase

The major objectives of prospecting are to locate sites; to

The first steps of prospecting are to identify local govern-

Introduction to Local Government

2.2 Key Stakeholders

Planning and Commitment

2.3 Cultural Competence

Community Logistics and Social and

Meeting of Technical Survey Financial

Section 5 Project Evaluation and Selection

Figure 2.1 – Project Prospecting Phases and Tasks

2.2 Cross-Cultural Competence

In the context of a construction project, it is not uncommon

Cross-Cultural Competence Defined Jocote Arriba, Nicaragua

Cultural Resources for Participants

On the Project Site

Making the Most of Cultural Experiences

Cultural versus Personal

2.3 Key Stakeholders

Engaging all stakeholders and building constructive rela-

Community and Bridge Committee

Table 2.1 – Key Stakeholder Roles, Responsibilities, and Contributions

2.4 Site Identification

Introduction to Local Government

Outline for Local Government Engagement

Benefits of Engaging Government Early

Concerns Regarding Political Motivations

2.5 Stakeholder Interest Study

Government Planning, Prioritizing, and Commitment

Outline for Stakeholder Interest Survey

Preliminary Site Visit

Initial Contact with Landowners

Basic Feasibility Assessment

Initial Contact with Community Leaders

2.6 Project Study

Initial Community Meeting of Key Stakeholders

The following parties should be invited to attend the meeting:

Social and Financial Survey

Logistics and Technical Survey

2.7 Outcomes and Next Steps

Section 3 – Social Survey

The social survey collects both qualitative and quantitative in-

Local Local Health

about the communities that it serves (see 3.4 Documentation).

3.3 Quality of Information

Surveyor’s Experience as a Check

Social Survey Form

3.5 Form Considerations

Total Direct and Indirect Beneficiaries

Example Population Count

Primary crops grown

Primary products sold

Primary products purchased